Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre … · 2012. 5. 18. · Section #07 46 13 - Preformed Metal Siding Section #07 52 00 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre

College of the North Atlantic Prince Philip Drive Campus

Project No: 2012-01 May 2012

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive

Index Page 1 of 3

Instructions to Bidders Supplementary Instructions to Bidders Tender Form Agreement Between Owner and Contractor General Conditions Supplementary General Conditions Certificate of Insurance List of Drawings Professional Seals Sheet DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section #01 11 00 - Summary of Work Section #01 14 00 - Work Restrictions Section #01 21 00 - Allowances Section #01 29 83 - Payment Procedures for Testing Laboratory Services Section #01 31 00 - Project Management and Coordination Section #01 32 00 - Construction Progress Documentation Section #01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures Section #01 35 29.06 - Health and Safety Requirements Section #01 35 43 - Environmental Procedures Section #01 35 99 - Dust Control Procedures Section #01 41 00 - Regulatory Requirements Section #01 42 00 - References Section #01 45 00 - Quality Control Section #01 51 00 - Temporary Utilities Section #01 52 00 - Construction Facilities Section #01 56 00 - Temporary Barriers and Enclosures Section #01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements Section #01 71 00 - Examination and Preparation Section #01 73 00 - Execution Section #01 74 11 - Cleaning Section #01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal Section #01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures Section #01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals Section #01 91 13 - Commissioning (Cx) Requirements Section #01 91 33 - Commissioning (Cx) Forms Section #01 91 41 - Commissioning (Cx) Training DIVISION 2 - EXISTING CONDITIONS Section #02 41 13 - Selective Site Demolition Section #02 41 16 - Structure Demolition Section #02 82 00 - Asbestos Abatement


Index Page 2 of 3

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE Section #03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories Section #03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing Section #03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete Section #03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing Section #03 35 05 - Concrete Floor Hardeners DIVISION 4 - MASONRY Section #04 05 00 - Common Work Results for Masonry Section #04 05 12 - Masonry Mortar and Grout Section #04 05 19 - Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing Section #04 05 23 - Masonry Accessories Section #04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry DIVISION 5 - METALS Section #05 12 23 - Structural Steel for Buildings Section #05 31 00 - Steel Decking Section #05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications Section #05 51 29 - Metal Stairs and Ladders DIVISION 6 - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES Section #06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section #07 21 13 - Board Insulation Section #07 21 16 - Blanket Insulation Section #07 21 20 - Low Expanding Foam Sealant Section #07 26 00 - Vapour Retarders Section #07 27 00.01 - Air Barriers – Descriptive or Proprietary Section #07 46 13 - Preformed Metal Siding Section #07 52 00 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing Section #07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Section #07 62 10 - Eavestrough and Downspouts Section #07 84 00 - Firestopping Section #07 92 00 - Joint Sealants DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS Section #08 11 00 - Metal Doors and Frames Section #08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows Section #08 71 00 - Door Hardware Section #08 80 50 - Glazing


Index Page 3 of 3

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES Section #09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies Section #09 22 16 - Non-Structural Metal Framing Section #09 51 13 - Acoustical Panel Ceilings Section #09 53 00.01 - Acoustical Suspension Section #09 65 16 - Resilient Sheet Flooring Section #09 91 13 – Exterior Painting Section #09 91 23 - Interior Painting Section #09 96 56 – Epoxy Coatings DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK Section #31 00 00.01 - Earthwork and Related Work Section #31 23 33.01 - Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Section #32 11 16.01 - Granular Sub Base Section #32 11 23 - Aggregate Base Courses Section #32 12 16.02 - Asphalt Paving for Building Sites APPENDIX “A” Asbestos Report by Pinchin LeBlanc dated December 2007.


List of Drawings Page 1 of 1

Architectural A0 Cover Page A1 General Notes and Masonry Notes A2 Demolition/New/Reflected Ceiling Layouts – Level 1 A3 Demolition/New/Reflected Ceiling Layouts – Level 2 A4 Equipment Layouts and Furniture Layouts Levels 1 and 2 A5 Partial South Demolition Elevation and Partial New South Elevation A6 Stair Sections and Partial Elevations A7 Schedules, Door and Frame Elevations, Door Frame Types A8 Miscellaneous Details A9 Details Structural S1 Stair Foundation Plan and Details S2 Framing Plan Column and Pier Footing Plan and Details Mechanical M-1 Levels 1 & 2 Plumbing & HVAC Plans M-2 Mechanical Details M-3 Mechanical Details & Roof Plan M-4 Mechanical Specifications ME-1 Mechanical Controls Electrical E1 Electrical Demolition Layouts E2 Electrical Power Distribution Main Feeder Routing E3 Electrical Shop Lighting Layout E4 Electrical Shop Power Layout E5 Electrical Classroom/Lab Lighting Layout E6 Electrical Classroom/Lab Power Layouts E7 Electrical Power Distribution Single Line Diagram E8 Electrical Door Access/Security Conduit Layout E9 Electrical Panel Schedules E10 Electrical Specification Sheet 1 E11 Electrical Specification Sheet 2

Re-Issued August 2006 1itb_stp.doc - 1 -

STIPULATED PRICE CONTRACT INDEX

INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS

1. Tenders 2. Tender Documents 3. Tender Surety and Bonding 4. Completion of Tender Form 5. Unacceptable Tenders 6. Amendments to Tender 7. Withdrawal of Tender 8. Substitution of Materials 9. Use of Bid Depository 10. Acceptance of Tender 11. Provincial Preference Policy


INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS 1. TENDERS (a) Envelopes containing the Tender are to be clearly marked:--- Tender for: Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic Prince Phillip Drive Campus

Addressed to: College of the North Atlantic

Purchasing Department 35 Carolina Drive

Stephenville, NL A2N 3P8

The name and address of the Bidder and the closing time must be shown on the envelope.

(b) Tenders must be received at the above address on or before the exact

closing time and date indicated in the advertisement. TENDERS RECEIVED AFTER THAT TIME WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED.

(c) The Form of Agreement is included in the Contract Documents at the time

of tendering for the purpose of information to Bidders and shall not be completed at the Time of Tendering.

(d) Before submitting a Tender, tenderers shall carefully examine the Contract

Documents and the site of the proposed work and fully inform themselves of the existing conditions and limitations. No subsequent allowance under the Contract Documents will be considered for any Bidder who had failed to become familiar with all aspects of the work.

(e) The Owner will not defray any expenses incurred by the tenderers in the

preparation and submission of their tenders. 2. TENDER DOCUMENTS (a) The Tender Documents consist of the Instructions to Bidders, Tender

Form, Agreement, Drawings, Specifications, and any Amendments to the Contract Documents issued during the tender period.

(b) Every interpretation of or addition to the Contract Documents to be

considered a valid part of the Contract Documents will be issued in the


form of a written addendum. (c) No addendums will be issued less than seven (7) days prior to the closing

date of the Tender. 3. TENDER SURETY AND BONDING (a) Bidding Security Every tenderer shall submit with his Tender a bid bond issued by an

approved Surety Company licensed to do business in the Province of Newfoundland and made out in favour of the College of the North Atlantic.

The bid bond shall be at least ten percent (10%) of the tendered amount. No bidding security will be required for a tendered amount of less than $25,000 unless specifically called for elsewhere in the tender document. An approved certified cheque may be substituted in lieu of the bid bond. The bidding security will be returned upon receipt of the Performance and Labour and Materials Bonds.

The terms of the bid security will be invoked and the amount retained by

the Owner if the Bidder fails to enter into an agreement when notified of the award of the work within the tender validity period; or fails to provide the Performance and Labour and Materials Bonds in the amount and within the period specified.

(b) Performance Bond

A Performance Bond will be required in the amount of fifty percent (50%) of the contract price. The Performance Security is to be received not later than two (2) weeks after the award of the contract by the letter of intent and prior to the formal execution of the agreement. No work is to be undertaken until the Performance Security has been received. Performance Security will not be required for a contract value of less than $25,000.

In lieu of the Performance Bond, the Owner may accept at his sole discretion an approved certified cheque for ten percent (10%) of the tendered amount. The cheque will be retained until satisfactory completion of the work including the guarantee period, after which this amount will be returned to the Contractor together with the accrued interest thereon at the current bank rate.


(c) Labour and Materials Payment Bond

A Labour and Materials Payment Bond will be required in the amount of fifty percent (50%) of the contract price. The Labour and Materials Payment Bond is to be received not later than two (2) weeks after the award of the contract by the letter of intent and prior to the execution of the formal agreement. No work is to be undertaken until the Labour and Materials security has been received. Labour and Materials security will not be required for a contract valued at less than $25,000.

In lieu of the Labour and Materials Bond, the Minister may accept at his sole discretion an approved certified cheque of ten percent (10%) of the tendered amount. The cheque will be retained until substantial completion of the work as defined by the Mechanics Lien Act and upon receipt of a completed and approved Statutory Declaration Form. This security, if in the form of a cheque, will be returned to the Contractor together with the accrued interest thereon at the current bank rate.

4. COMPLETION OF TENDER FORM (a) The Tender Form is to be completed in its entirety and submitted in the

envelopes provided and the name of the Tenderer entered in the "Name of Bidder" space on the tender envelope. The Tenderer should retain a copy of the tender for his records.

(b) Type or legibly print the information required on the Tender Form. (c) Type or legibly print the Tenderer's full business name and address in the

spaces provided on the Tender Form. (d) Sign the Tender Form in the space provided as indicated: In the case of a Sole Proprietorship, signature of Sole Proprietor will sign

where indicated in the presence of a witness who will sign where indicated. Insert the words "Sole Proprietor" next to the signature.

In the case of a Partnership, signature of all partners will sign where indicated in the presence of a witness who will sign where indicated. Insert the word "Partner" next to signatures.

In the case of a Limited Company, signatures of authorized signing officers in the presence of a witness who will sign where indicated, and the corporate seal will be affixed. Indicate next to signature the corporate title of each signer.


(e) Spaces or Appendices will be provided with the Tender Form if required for a list of subcontractors, use of bid depository, contractor's experience, list of equipment. All such spaces and appendices must be completed in their entirety legibly by typewriter or by printing in ink.

(f) If it becomes necessary to correct an error made on the Tender Form, such

correction must be initialed and dated by the person or persons signing the Tender Form.

5. UNACCEPTABLE TENDERS (a) Tenders not submitted on the Tender Form provided will not be

considered. (b) Telegraphic or telex tenders will not be accepted. (c) Tenders received after the Tender Closing time will not be considered. (d) Incomplete Tenders will be rejected. (e) Tenders not accompanied by an approved security in the correct amount

will be rejected. (f) Tenders containing qualification or additional clauses to the Tender Form

will be rejected. (g) Incorrectly prepared tenders may be rejected. 6. AMENDMENTS TO TENDER

Properly documented amendments to the Tender will be permitted up to the Tender closing time. Amendments documented by telegram or telex will be acceptable.

7. WITHDRAWAL OF TENDERS

Bids may be withdrawn without penalty by written telegraphic or telex request if received prior to the time fixed for the opening.


8. SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS (a) Tenders shall be based upon using the materials or products as specified

without substitution. Where two or more brand names are specified the choice shall be left to the contractor. Where only one brand name is stated there shall be no substitution.

(b) Where the Specifications include the "or approved equal" clause,

substitutions may be proposed provided that: 1. the request for a substitution is made in writing at least fourteen

(14) days prior to the bid date; 2. the request shall clearly define and describe the product for which

the substitution is requested; 3. the substituted article is equivalent to the specified article with

regards to design, function, appearance, durability, operation and quality.

Approval of the substitution by the Engineer/Architect shall be in the form of an addendum to the Specifications issued at least seven (7) days prior to the Tender closing date to all of those contractors listed as having received a copy of the Contract Documents.

9. USE OF BID DEPOSITORY

Not Applicable. 10. ACCEPTANCE OF TENDER (a) The Owner will not necessarily accept the lowest or any tender. (b) Upon written acceptance of the tender within the tender validity period,

the Tender Form becomes part of the Contract Documents and the successful tenderer becomes the Contractor. The Contractor will be required to execute a formal agreement with the Owner within thirty (30) days of the date of the letter of intent.

(c) The Contractor shall, within 14 days of receipt of the letter of intent,

submit to the Owner a breakdown of the bid to the satisfaction of the Owner.


11. PROVINCIAL PREFERENCE POLICY (a) Tender evaluation and award of contract for this project will be done in

accordance with the procedures outlined in the latest Guidelines and Instructions for the Implementation of the Provincial Preference Policy and in accordance with the Public Tender Act, 1984, the Provincial Preference Act, and associated Regulations.

(b) Firms which do not have Provincial Overhead Allowance (POA)

percentages assigned are urged to contact the Government Purchasing Agency, Tendering & Contracts, Tel. 729-2017, for application information. In order to obtain the POA benefit contractors or sub-contractors must have POA percentages assigned not later than five clear days after tender closing date. Those who do not have POA percentages assigned in the prescribed time will receive no Provincial Overhead Allowance benefit in the tender evaluation.

(c) The Provincial Materials and Equipment List contained in the tender

documents identifies (not necessarily all inclusively) items in the tender call which are Provincially manufactured, fabricated, processed or supplied.

SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

- 1 - 2SUPPINS.doc

1 TENDER SURETY AND BONDlNG

(a) Bidding Security

Please delete sentence

"No bidding security will be required for a tendered amount of less than $25,000.00 unless specifically called for elsewhere in the tender documents"

and replace with:

"All tenders, regardless of monetary value require a Bid Security of at least ten percent (10%) of the total tendered amount, with a minimum security of five hundred dollars ($500.00)." Bid Securities shall be in the form of a Bid Bond or Certified Cheque in favour of the College of the North Atlantic.

Add the following:

For tenders less than $25,000.00, the terms of the Bid Security will be invoked and the amount retained by the Owner, if the Bidder fails to provide the required insurances and commence work within 30 days of being notified of the award of the work within the tender validity period.

The Tender Security of the unsuccessful bidders numbers 2 & 3 will be returned to them upon award of the contract, Tender Securities of bidders higher than 3 will be returned after the tender opening. The Tender Security of the successful bidder will be retained until the first progress payment.

Bidders are reminded that the failure to submit a bid security in accordance with this requirement will result in rejection of bid submitted.

THE OWNER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO WAIVE THESE REQUIREMENTS IN PART OR IN WHOLE FOR ANY PROJECT, BY FURTHER SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS.

2 PROVINCIAL PREFERENCE POLICY

Delete Section 11 in its entirety.

SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

- 2 - 2SUPPINS.doc

3 TENDER SURETY AND BONDING

Bidders are advised that both the 50% Performance Bond referenced in 3(b) and the 50% Labour & Materials Payment Bond referenced in 3(c) will be based on the Contract Price which will either be the Sub-Total of Tender Prices or the Total Estimated Tender Items, not including the Harmonized Sales Tax (HST).

4 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, ISSUANCE OF ADDENDUM

Reference is made to Section 2. (c) - Tender Documents regarding the time frame permitted for the issuance of addendum prior to the tender closing date. Change seven (7) days to read five (5) days.

Reference is also made to Section 8. - Substitution of Materials. Change seven (7) days to read five (5) days.

5 CONTRACTOR’S PERFORMANCE EVALUATION SYSTEM

Contractors are advised that effective July 1, 2000 a Contractor Performance Evaluation System will be introduced. Upon completion of each contract, the contractor’s performance will be evaluated according to prescribed criteria.

In accordance with the Public Tender Act Regulations 1998, NFLD Reg. 103/98, Section 3(4), contractors may be required to maintain a certain performance rating to bid. Contractors whose performance on previous contracts falls below the required minimum may have their bids disqualified.

Complete details of the Performance Evaluation System are available upon request.

6 TENDER FORM, APPENDIX ‘A’ AND APPENDIX ‘B’

Notwithstanding Article 7 of the Tender Form, Bidders are not required to complete or submit Appendix “A” or Appendix “B” at time of tender. Bidders may be required to complete these appendices after tender close, if requested by the Owner, and in such instance the appendices shall be submitted by Bidders within seventy-two (72) hours of request.

- 1 - 3tfm-stp.doc

COLLEGE OF THE NORTH ATLANTIC TENDER FOR

STIPULATED PRICE CONTRACT Tender for. Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre

College of the North Atlantic Prince Phillip Drive Campus

To: College of the North Atlantic Purchasing Department 35 Carolina Drive

Stephenville, NL A2N 3P8 Gentlemen, 1. Having carefully examined the site of the proposed work and all

conditions affecting such, as well as the Contract Documents including the Specifications, all Drawings listed in the Specifications, (if drawings are not listed in the specifications such a list appears as Appendix "B") all Addenda, and the Instructions to Bidders for this project,

WE, THE UNDERSIGNED, hereby offer to furnish all necessary Labour, materials, superintendence, plant, tools and equipment, and everything else required to perform expeditiously and complete in a satisfactory manner the work for the sum of

__________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________

($ ) in lawful money of Canada which includes all prime costs, allowances and Government sales or excise taxes, including HST, in force at this date, except as otherwise provided in the tender documents.

2 The Work will be substantially performed by October 31, 2012 from the

date of notification of award of contract. 3. WE ENCLOSE HEREWITH if required by the Instructions to Bidders

(a) A Bid Bond in an acceptable form and correct amount issued by a company licenced to carry on such a business in the Province of

- 2 - 3tfm-stp.doc

Newfoundland or (b) A certified cheque in the correct amount.

In the event of this tender being accepted within the time stated in Section 4 below and our failure to enter into a contract in the form hereinafter mentioned for the amount of our tender the said security may at the option of the Owner be forfeited. The forfeiting of the security does not limit the right of action of the Owner against us for our failure or refusal to enter into a contract.

4. IF NOTIFIED IN WRITING BY THE OWNER OF THE ACCEPTANCE

OF THIS TENDER WITHIN 30 DAYS OF THE TENDER CLOSING DATE SUBJECT TO SUCH OTHER PERIOD AS MAY BE SPECIFIED IN THE TENDERING DOCUMENTS, WE WILL:--

(a) execute the Standard Form of Construction Contract; (b) if specified, furnish the security for the proper completion of the

work, the said security, if in the form of bonds, to be issued on an acceptable form;

(c) complete substantially all the work included in the contract within

the time and under conditions specified. 5. WE understand that Performance Bond, Labour and Materials Bond and

Insurance as required by the Contract Documents must be provided and in force prior to the commencement of any work and satisfactory proof of such be provided to the Owner.

6. WE confirm that the sums herein tendered include all sales taxes,

royalties, custom duties, foreign exchange charges, transportation, travelling costs, all overhead and profit, all co-ordination fees, insurance premiums, and all other charges.

7. WE understand and agree to list the names of sub-contractors and

suppliers whose bids have been used in the preparation of this tender price in Appendix "A". The list will be subject to the approval of the Owner. "By own forces" will be considered valid and satisfactory only if the tenderer is recognized by the Newfoundland and Labrador Construction Association or by the Road Builders Association as being a "bona fide" contractor or supplier of that particular trade or item.

WE agree to authorize the Owner to release the names of subcontractors used in our tender where such information is requested from the Owner.

WE reserve to us the right to substitute other sub-contractors for any trades in the event of any sub-contractor becoming bankrupt after the date hereof. Any such substitution shall be subject to the approval of the Owner and contingent upon satisfactory evidence of bankruptcy.

8 WE understand and agree that the Owner may order changes to the work

in the form of additions or deletions in accordance with the General

- 3 - 3tfm-stp.doc

Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and the intent of the Contract Documents.

9. WE hereby acknowledge receipt of the following addenda: Addendum No. Addendum No. 10. In order for a Tender to be valid, it must be signed by duly authorized

officials as indicated in the Instructions to Bidders. SIGNATURE OF TENDERER Firm Name: ______________________________________________________ Address: _________________________________________________________ Postal Code: ____________________ E-Mail _______________________ Ph # ___________________________ Fax # _________________________ ______________________________ Signing Officer ______________________________ Signing Officer Corporate Seal ______________________________ Witnessed by

- 4 - 3tfm-stp.doc

APPENDIX "A" Herewith is the list of Sub-contractors referred to in Section 7 of the tender submitted by ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ to ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ dated __________________________________and which is an integral part of the above noted tender. IF NOT USED, BAR AND INITIAL THE SPACE BELOW.

Division/Work Names and Addresses of Sub-Contractors and Suppliers included in our Tender Price

| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

- 5 - 3tfm-stp.doc

APPENDIX "B" Hereunder is the list of description of drawings referred to in Section I of the tender submitted by ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ to ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ dated ______________________________ and which is an integral part of the above noted tender. IF NOT USED, BAR AND INITIAL THE SPACE BELOW

- 6 - 3tfm-stp.doc

APPENDIX "C" TENDER PRICE TABLE

Sections Description Amount ($)

C1 Base Tender

C2 Separate Prices 1 Epoxy flooring for entire shop floor

2 Subtotal Separate Prices

C3 Unit Prices Quantity Unit Price ($)

1 (no unit prices applicable to this tender) 2 3 4 5

Subtotal Unit Prices

C4 Cash Allowances

1 Testing $2,000.00 2

Subtotal Cash Allowances $2,000.00

C5 SubTotal Tender Prices (Sum of Sections C1-C4)

C6 Harmonized Sales Tax (HST) (Multiply Section C5 by 13%)

C7

TOTAL TENDER AMOUNT (Add Sections C5 + C6 and transfer this amount to Section 1 on page 1 of the Tender Form)

Notes: 1. For the purposes of the Public Tender Act and the evaluation of tenders received, the bid shall be the

Total Tender Amount. 2. Work associated with the Separate Prices may be deleted at the sole discretion of the Owner at the time

of contract award and a deduction(s) will be made to the Total Tender Amount equal to the amount(s) in C2 of the Tender Price Table.

- 1 - 4AGR-STP.doc

AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR for use when a stipulated price forms the basis of payment and to be used only with the General Conditions of the Contract.

THIS AGREEMENT made in duplicate the day of

in the year Two thousand and

BY AND BETWEEN

hereinafter called the "Owner"

AND

hereinafter called the "Contractor"

WITNESSETH: that the Owner and Contractor undertake and agree as follows:

ARTICLE A-1 THE WORK

The Contractor shall:

(a) perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents for

(insert here the

title of the Work and the Project) which have been signed in duplicate by both the parties.

(b) do and fulfill everything indicated by this Agreement, and

(c) commence the Work by the day of 20

and substantially perform the Work of this Contract as certified by the Engineer/Architect

by the day of 20

(d) The "Engineer/Architect" is the person designated as such from time to time by the Owner.

- 2 - 4AGR-STP.doc

ARTICLE A-2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

The following is an exact list of the Contract Documents referred to in Article A-1:

Insert here, attaching additional pages if required, a list identifying all Contract Documents including: Drawings, giving drawing number, title, date, revision date or mark, and Specifications, giving a list of contents with section numbers and titles, number of pages, and date or revision marks if any. Clearly identify any modifications to the Contract Documents.

- 3 - 4AGR-STP.doc

ARTICLE A-3 CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price is

Dollars;

($

) in Canadian funds, which price shall be subject to

adjustments as may be required in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract. ARTICLE A-4 PAYMENT

(a) Subject to applicable legislation and, in accordance with prescribed regulations and in

accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the Contract, the owner shall:

(1) make monthly payments to the Contractor on account of the Contract Price. The

amounts of such payments shall be as certified by the Engineer/Architect; and

(2) upon Substantial Performance of the work as certified by the Engineer/Architect pay to the Contractor any unpaid balance of holdback monies then due; and

(3) upon Total Performance of the Work as certified by the Engineer/Architect pay

to the Contractor any unpaid balance of the Contract Price then due. (b) If the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as they become due under the

terms of this Contract or in any award by a court, interest at the rate and in the manner specified in GC 21-Certificates and Payments, shall become due and payable until payment. Such interest shall be calculated and added to any unpaid amounts monthly.

ARTICLE A-5 ADDRESSES FOR NOTICES All communications in writing between the parties or between them and the Engineer/Architect shall be deemed to have been received by the addressee if delivered to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the Corporation for whom they are intended or if sent by post or by telegram addressed as follows:

The Owner at

street and number and postal box number if applicable

post office or district, province, postal code The Contractor at


post office or district, province, postal code The Engineer/Architect at


Post office or district, province, postal code

- 4 - 4AGR-STP.doc

ARTICLE A-6 SUCCESSION

The General Conditions of the Contract hereto annexed, and all other aforesaid Contract Documents, are all to be read into and form part of this Agreement and the whole shall constitute the Contract between the parties and subject to law and the provisions of the Contract Documents shall enure to the benefit of and be binding upon the parties hereto, their respective heirs, legal representatives, successors and assigns.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto have executed this Agreement under their respective corporate seals and by the hands of their proper officers thereunto duly authorized.

SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED in the presence of:

OWNER CONTRACTOR

name name

signed signed

name and title name and title

signed signed

name and title name and title

N.B. Where any legal jurisdiction, local practice or client requirement calls for proof of authority to execute this document, proof of such authority in the form of a certified copy of a resolution naming the person or persons in question as authorized to sign the Agreement for and on behalf of the Corporation or Partnership, should be attached.

GENERAL CONDITIONS

OF

STIPULATED PRICE CONTRACT

ii 5GCON-STP.doc

INDEX

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

SECTION

1

PAGE

1

Definitions

2

3

Documents

3

3

Additional Instructions and Schedule of Work

4

4

Documents Provided

5

4

Documents on the Site

6

4

Ownership of Documents and Models

7

4

Engineers/Architect's Decisions

8

5

Delay

9

5

Owner's Right to do Work

10

6

Owner's Right to stop Work or Terminate Contract

11

8

Contractor's Right to Stop Work or Terminate Contract

12

8

Other Contractors

13

9

Assignment

14

9

Subcontractors

15

10

Emergencies

16

10

Settlement of Disputes and Claims

17

11

Indemnification

18

11

Changes in the Work

3 5GCON-STP.doc

INDEX

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

SECTION PAGE

19 11 Valuation and Certification of Changes in the Work

20 13 Application for Payment

21 13 Certificates and Payments

22 17 Taxes and Duties

23 17 Laws, Notices, Permits and Fees

24 18 Patent Fees

25 18 Workplace Health, Safety and Compensation Commission

26 18 Liability Insurance

27 20 Property Insurance

28 22 Protection of Work and Property

29 23 Damages and Mutual Responsibility

30 23 Bonds

31 24 Warranty

32 24 Contractor's Responsibilities and

Control of the Work

33 25 Superintendence

34 25 Labour and Products

35 25 Subsurface Conditions

36 26 Use of Premises

37 26 Cleanup and Final Cleaning of Work

4 5GCON-STP.doc

INDEX GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

SECTION PAGE

38 27 Cutting and Remedial Work

39 27 Inspection of Work

40 28 Rejected Work

41 28 Shop Drawings

42 29 Samples

43 29 Tests and Mix Designs

44 30 Materials and Substitutions

45 30 Labour

46 31 Provincial Preference Policy

47 31 Time of Essence

- 1 - 5GCON-STP.doc

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT GC1 DEFINITIONS

1.1 Contract Documents

The Contract Documents consist of the Instruction to Bidders, executed Agreement, General Conditions of Contract, Supplementary General Conditions of Contract, Specifications, Drawings and such other documents as are listed in Article A-2 of the Agreement, including all amendments thereto incorporated before their execution and subsequent amendments thereto made pursuant to the provisions of the contract or agreed upon between the parties. The Successful Bidder's tender, and any addenda to the Specification issued during the bidding period shall also form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 Owner, Engineer/Architect, Contractor

The Owner, Engineer/Architect and Contractor are the persons, firms or corporation identified as such in the Agreement and referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine in gender. The Term Owner, Engineer/Architect and Contractor means the Owner, Engineer/Architect or Contractor or their authorized representatives as designated by each party in writing.

1.3 Subcontractor

A Subcontractor is a person, firm or corporation having a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a part or parts of the Work included in the Contract, or to supply products worked to a special design according to the Contract Documents, but does not include one who merely supplies products not so worked.

1.4 The Project

The Project is the total construction of which the work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part.

1.5 Products

The term Products means all material, machinery, equipment and fixtures forming the completed work as required by the Contract Documents but does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work and normally referred to as construction machinery and equipment.

1.6 The Work

- 2 - 5GCON-STP.doc

Work includes the whole of the works, materials, matters and things required to be done, furnished and performed by the Contractor under the Contract.

1.7 Materials and Equipment

The term Materials and Equipment means all materials, machinery, equipment and fixtures forming the completed work as required by the Contract Documents but does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the work and normally referred to as construction machinery and equipment.

1.8 Other Contractor

The term Other Contractor means any person, firm or corporation employed by or having a separate contract directly or indirectly with the Owner for work other than that required by the Contract Documents.

1.9 Time

a) The Contract Time is the time stated in Article A-1(c) of the Agreement for

Substantial Performance of the Work.

b) The date of Substantial Performance of the Work is the date certified by the Engineer/Architect.

c) The term day, as used in the Contract Documents, shall mean the calendar

day.

d) The term working day means any day observed by the construction industry in the area of the place of building.

1.10 Substantial Performance

A Contract shall be deemed to be substantially performed

a) when the work or a substantial part thereof is ready for use or is being used

for the purpose intended; and

b) when the work to be done under the contract is capable of completion or correction at a cost of not more than:

(i) three per centum of the first two hundred and fifty thousand dollars

($250,000) of the contract price,

(ii) two per centum of the next two hundred and fifty thousand dollars ($250,000) of the contract price, and

- 3 - 5GCON-STP.doc

(iii) one per centum of the balance of the contract price.

1.11 Total Performance

Total Performance shall mean when the entire work has been performed to the requirements of the Contract Documents and is so certified by the Engineer/Architect.

GC 2 DOCUMENTS

2.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed in duplicate by the Owner and the

Contractor. 2.2 Words which have well known technical or trade meanings are used in the Contract

Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. 2.3 In the event of conflicts between Contract Documents the following shall apply:

a) Documents of later date shall govern. b) Figured dimensions shown on the Drawings shall govern even though they

may differ from scaled dimensions. c) Drawings of larger scale shall govern over those of smaller scale of the same

date. d) Specifications shall govern over Drawings. e) The General Conditions of Contract shall govern over Specifications. f) Supplementary General Conditions shall govern over the General Conditions

of the Contract. g) The Agreement shall govern over all documents.

GC 3 ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS AND SCHEDULE OF WORK

3.1 During the progress of the Work the Engineer/Architect shall furnish to the

Contractor such additional instructions as may be necessary to supplement the Contract Documents. All such instructions shall be consistent with the intent of the Contract documents.

3.2 Additional instructions may include minor changes to the Work which affect neither

Contract Price nor the Contract Time. 3.3 Additional instructions may be in the form of drawings, samples, models or written

instructions. 3.4 Additional instructions will be issued by the Engineer/Architect with reasonable

- 4 - 5GCON-STP.doc

promptness and in accordance with any schedule agreed upon. 3.5 The contractor shall, within thirty (30) days of the signing of this contract provide

the Owner with a schedule of work. GC 4 DOCUMENTS PROVIDED

4.1 The Contractor will be provided, without charge, a reasonable number of Contract

Documents or parts thereof as are reasonably necessary for the performance of the Work.

GC 5 DOCUMENTS ON THE SITE

5.1 The Contractor shall keep one copy of all current Contract Documents and shop

drawings on the site, in good order and available to the Engineer/Architect and/or his representatives. This requirement shall not be deemed to include the executed Contract Documents.

GC6 OWNERSHIP OF DOCUMENTS AND MODELS

6.1 All Contract documents and copies thereof, and all models are and shall remain the

property of the owner and are not to be used on other work. 6.2 Such documents are not to be copied or revised in any manner without the written

authorization of the owner. 6.3 Models furnished by the Contractor or the Owner are the property of the owner.

GC 7 ENGINEER/ARCHITECT'S DECISIONS

7.1 The Engineer/Architect, in the first instance, shall decide on questions arising under

Contract Documents and interpret the requirements therein. Such decisions shall be given in writing.

7.2 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer/Architect in writing within five (5) days of

receipt of a decision of the Engineer/Architect referred to in 7.1 should he hold that a decision by the Engineer/Architect is in error and/or at variance with the contract Documents. Unless the Contractor fulfills this requirement subsequent claims by him for extra compensation, arising out of the decision, will not be accepted.

7.3 If the question of error and/or variance is not resolved immediately, and the

Engineer/Architect decides that the disputed work shall be carried out, the Contractor shall act according to the Engineer/Architect's written decision.

- 5 - 5GCON-STP.doc

Any question of change in Contract Price and/or extension of Contract Time due to such error and/ or variance shall be decided as provided in GC 16 - Settlement of Disputes.

GC 8 DELAY

8.1 If it can be clearly shown that the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the

work by any act or fault of the Owner or other Contractor, then the contract time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Engineer/Architect may decide in consultation with the Contractor. The Contractor shall be reimbursed for any costs incurred by him as a result of such a delay occasioned by the act or fault, provided that it can be clearly shown that the Contractor's forces cannot work efficiently elsewhere on the project and that the incurred cost is limited to that which could not reasonably have been avoided.

8.2 If the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the Work by a Stop Work Order

issued by any court or other public authority, and providing that such order was not issued as the result of any act or fault of the Contractor or of any one employed by him directly or indirectly, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Engineer/Architect may decide, in consultation with the Contractor, and the Contractor shall be reimbursed for any on-site costs incurred by him as the result of such delay.

8.3 If the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the Work by civil disorders, labour

disputes, strikes, lock-outs (including lock-outs decreed or recommended for its members by a recognized Contractor's Association, of which the Contractor is a member) fire, unusual delay by common carriers or unavoidable casualties or, without limit to any of the foregoing, by any cause of any kind whatsoever beyond the Contractor's control, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as may be decided by the Engineer/Architect in consultation with the Owner and the Contractor, but in no case shall the extension of time be less than the time lost as the result of the event causing the delay, unless such shorter extension of time be agreed to by the Contractor.

8.4 No extension shall be made for delay unless written notice of claim is given to the

Engineer/Architect within fourteen (14) days of its commencement, providing that in the case of a continuing cause of delay only one notice shall be necessary.

GC 9 OWNER'S RIGHT TO DO WORK

9.1 If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the Work properly or fail to perform

any provisions of the Contract, the Owner may notify the Contractor in writing that he is

- 6 - 5GCON-STP.doc

in default of his contractual obligations and instruct him to correct the default within five (5) working days of receiving the notice.

9.2 If the correction of the default cannot be completed within the five (5) working days

specified, the Contractor shall be considered to be in compliance with the Owner's instructions if he:

a) commences the correction of the default within the specified time, and

b) provides the Owner with an acceptable schedule for such correction, and

c) completes the correction in accordance with such schedule.

9.3 If the Contractor fails to comply with the provisions 9.1 and 9.2 the Owner may,

without prejudice to any other right or remedy he may have, correct such default and may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor.

GC 10 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE CONTRACT

10.1 If the Contractor should be adjudged bankrupt, or makes a general assignment for the

benefit of creditors or if a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy he may have, by giving the Contractor written notice, terminate the Contract.

10.2 The Owner may notify the Contractor in writing that he is in default of his

contractual obligations, if the Contractor.

a) fails to proceed regularly and diligently with the work; or

b) without reasonable cause wholly suspends the carrying out of the work before the completion thereof, or

c) refuses or fails to supply sufficient properly skilled workmen or proper

workmanship, products or construction machinery and equipment for the scheduled performance of the work within five (5) working days of receiving written notice from the Engineer/Architect, except in those cases provided in GC 8 - Delay; or

d) fails to make payments due to his Subcontractors, his suppliers or his

workmen; or

e) persistently disregards laws or ordinances, or the Engineer/Architect's instructions; or

- 7 - 5GCON-STP.doc

f) otherwise violates the provisions of the Contract to a substantial degree.

Such written notice by the Owner shall instruct the Contractor to correct the default within five (5) working days from the receipt of the written notice.

10.3 If the correction of the default cannot be completed within the five (5) working days

specified, the Contractor shall be considered to be in compliance with the Owner's instructions if he:

a) commences the correction of the default within the specified time,

b) provides the Owner with an acceptance schedule for such correction, and

c) completes the correction in accordance with such schedule.

10.4 If the Contractor fails to correct the default within the time specified or subsequently agreed upon, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy he may have, stop the work or terminate the Contract.

10.5 If the Owner terminates the Contract under the conditions set out above, he is entitled

to: a) take possession of the premises and products and utilize the temporary

buildings, plants, tools, construction machinery and equipment, goods, materials, intended for, delivered to and placed on or adjacent to the work and may complete the work by whatever method he may deem expedient but without undue delay or expense;

b) withhold any further payments to the Contractor until the work is finished.

c) upon total performance of the work, charge the Contractor the amount by which the full cost of finishing the work including compensation to the Engineer/Architect for his additional services and a reasonable allowance to cover the cost of any corrections required by GC 31 - Warranty, exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contract Price; or if such cost of finishing the work is less than the unpaid balance of the Contract Price, pay the Contractor the difference.

d) on expiry of the warranty period, charge the Contractor the amount by which

the cost of corrections under GC 31 - Warranty exceeds the allowance provided for such corrections, or if the cost of such corrections is less than the allowance, pay the Contractor the difference.

GC 11 CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE CONTRACT

11.1 If the Owner should be adjudged bankrupt, or makes a general assignment for the

- 8 - 5GCON-STP.doc

benefit of creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency, the Contractor may, without prejudices to any other right or remedy he may have, by giving the Owner written notice, terminate the Contract.

11.2 If the work should be stopped or otherwise delayed for a period of thirty days or

more under an order of any court, or other public authority, and providing that such order was not issued as the result of any act or fault of the Contractor or of any one directly or indirectly employed by him, the Contractor may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy he may have, by giving the Owner fifteen (15) days written notice, terminate the Contract.

11.3 The Contractor may notify the Owner in writing that the Owner is in default of his

contractual obligations if:

a) The Engineer/Architect fails to issue a certificate in accordance with GC 21 -- Certificates and Payments;

b) The Owner fails to pay to the Contractor when due any amount certified by

the Engineer/Architect and verified by the audit of the Owner.

Such written notice shall advise the Owner that if such default is not corrected within fifteen (15) days from the receipt of the written notice the Contractor may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy he may have, stop the work and/ or terminate the contract.

11.4 If the Contractor terminates the Contract under the conditions set out above, he shall

be entitled to be paid for all work performed and for any loss sustained upon products and plant supplied with reasonable overhead, profit and damages.

GC 12 OTHER CONTRACTORS

12.1 The Owner reserves the right to let separate contracts in connection with the project

of which the Work is part. 12.2 The Owner shall co-ordinate the work and insurance coverages of Other Contractors

as it affects the Work of this Contract. 12.3 The Contractor shall coordinate his work with that of Other Contractors and connect

as specified or shown in the Contract Documents. Any change in the costs incurred by the Contractor in the planning and performance of such work which was not shown or included in the Contract documents as of the date of signing the Contract, shall be evaluated as provided under GC 19 - Valuation and Certification of Changes in the Work.

- 9 - 5GCON-STP.doc

12.4 The Contractor shall report to the Engineer/Architect any apparent deficiencies in other Contractor's work which would affect the Work of this Contract immediately when they come to his attention and shall confirm such report in writing. Failure by the Contractor to so report shall invalidate any claims against the Owner by reason of the deficiencies of Other Contractor's work except as to those of which he was not reasonably aware.

GC 13 ASSIGNMENT

13.1 The Contractor shall not assign the contract or any part thereof or any benefit or

interest therein or thereunder with/out the written consent of the Owner. GC 14 SUBCONTRACTORS

14.1 The Contractor agrees to preserve and protect the rights of the Owner under the

Contract with respect to any work to be performed under subcontract. The Contractor shall:

a) require his Subcontractors to perform their work in accordance with and

subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, and

b) be fully responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of his Subcontractors and of persons directly or indirectly employed by them as for acts and omissions of persons directly employed by him.

The Contractor therefore agrees that he will incorporate all the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents into all Subcontract Agreements he enters into with his Subcontractors.

14.2 The Contractor shall employ those Subcontractors proposed by him in writing and

accepted by the Owner prior to the signing of the Contract for such portions of the work as may be designated in the bidding requirements.

14.3 The Owner may, for reasonable cause, object to the use of a proposed Subcontractor

and require the Contractor to employ one of the other Subcontractor Bidders. 14.4 In the event that the Owner requires a change from any proposed Subcontractor the

Contract Price shall be adjusted by the difference in cost occasioned by such required change.

14.5 The Contractor shall not be required to employ as a Subcontractor any person or firm

to whom he may reasonably object. 14.6 The Engineer /Architect may, upon reasonable request and at his discretion, provide

- 10 - 5GCON-STP.doc

to a Subcontractor information as to the percentage of the Subcontractor's work which has been certified for payment.

14.7 Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual

relationship between any Subcontractor and the Owner. GC 15 EMERGENCIES

15.1 The Engineer/Architect has authority in an emergency to stop the progress of the

work whenever in his opinion such stoppage maybe necessary to ensure the safety of life, or the work, or neighbouring property. This includes authority to make changes in the work, and to order, assess and award the cost of such work, extra to the Contract or otherwise, as may in his opinion be necessary. The Engineer/Architect shall, within two (2) working days, confirm in writing any such instructions. In such a case if work has been performed under direct order of the Engineer/Architect, the Contractor shall keep his right to claim the value of such work.

15.2 Should the work be stopped by civil pickets, or other disorder, neither the Owner nor

the Contractor shall have claim for change in the price of the Contract. GC 16 SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES AND CLAIMS

16.1 In the case of any dispute or claim arising between the Owner and the Contractor as

to their respective rights and obligations under the Contract, either party hereto may give the other written notification of such dispute or claim. The notification of dispute or claim shall be made within fourteen (14) days of the dispute or cause of action arising. If the dispute or claim cannot be resolved to the satisfaction of both parties, either party may refer the matter to such judicial tribunal as the circumstances require.

16.2 Legal proceedings shall not take place until after the performance or the substantial

performance of the disputed work except:

a) when the dispute concerns a certificate for payment.

b) where either party can show that the matter in dispute requires immediate consideration while evidence is available.

c) in the case of legal proceedings, where the action may become prescribed by

reason of delay. GC 17 INDEMNIFICATION


17.1 Except as provided in 17.2, the Contractor shall be liable for, and shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Engineer/Architect, their agents and employees from and against all claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits or proceedings, whatsoever arising under any statute or Common Law:

a) in respect of personal injury to or the death of any person whomsoever

arising out of or in the course of or caused by the carrying out of the work; and

b) in respect of any injury or damage whatsoever to any property, real or

personal or any chattel real, insofar as such injury or damage arises out of or in the course of or by reason of the carrying out of the work.

17.2 The Contractor shall not be liable under 17.1 if the injury, death, loss or damage is

due to any act or neglect of the Owner or Engineer/Architect, their agents or employees.

GC 18 CHANGES IN THE WORK

18.1 The Owner may make changes by altering, adding to, or deducting from the Work,

with the Contract Price and the Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. 18.2 Except as provided in GC 15 - Emergencies, no change shall be made without a

written order from the Engineer/Architect and no claim for an addition or deduction to the Contract Price or change in the Contract Time shall be valid unless so ordered and at the same time valued or agreed to be valued as provided in GC 19 - Valuation and Certification of Changes in the Work.

GC 19 VALUATION AND CERTIFICATION OF CHANGES IN THE WORK

19.1 The value of any change shall be determined in one or more of the following

methods:

a) by estimate and acceptance in a lump sum

b) by unit prices subsequently agreed upon

c) by cost and a fixed or percentage fee.

In the case of changes in the work valued as outlined in 19.l(a), the Contractor shall submit an itemized estimate for all materials and labour to complete the extra work. In the case of changes in the work valued as outlined in 19.1(c), the Contractor shall submit detailed invoices, vouchers and time sheets for all materials and labour to complete the extra work.


Subject to the provisions of 19.2, when work is performed by the Contractor's own forces his markup for overhead shall be ten (10) percent and his profit ten (10) percent of the agreed or actual cost of the change. When work is performed by one of his Subcontractors the Subcontractor's markup for overhead shall be ten (10) percent of the agreed or actual cost of the change plus five (5) percent for profit. The Contractor's markup for overhead and profit shall be ten (10) percent of the Subcontractor's total price.

19.2 Notwithstanding the provisions of 19.1, in case of changes in the work, the amount

charged for equipment rentals shall be that provided in the Contract and no additional amount shall be paid as markup for overhead or profit for the Contractor or Subcontractor.

19.3 When a change in the work is proposed or required the Contractor shall present to the

Engineer/Architect for approval his claim for any change in the Contract Price and/or change in the Contract Time. The Engineer/Architect shall satisfy himself as to the correctness of such claim and, when approved shall issue a written order to the Contractor to proceed with the change. The value of work performed in the change shall be included for payment with the regular certificate for payment.

19.4 In the case of changes in the Work to be paid for under methods (b) and (c) of 19. 1,

the form of presentation of costs and methods of measurement shall he agreed to by the Engineer/Architect and Contractor before proceeding with the change. The Contractor shall keep accurate records, as agreed upon, of quantities or costs and present an account of the cost of the change in the Work, together with vouchers where applicable.

19.5 If the method of valuation, measurement and the change in Contract Price and/or

change in Contract Time cannot be promptly agreed upon, and the change is required to be proceeded with then the Engineer/Architect shall determine the method of valuation, measurement and the change in Contract Price and/or Contract Time subject to final determination in the manner set out in GC 16 - Settlement of disputes. In this case the Engineer/Architect shall issue a written authorization for the change setting out the method of valuation and if by lump sum his valuation of the change in Contract Price and/or Contract Time.

19.6 In the case of a dispute in the valuation of a change authorized in the Work pending

final determination of such value, the Engineer/Architect shall certify the value of work performed and include the amount with the regular certificates for payment.

19.7 It is intended in all matters referred to above that both the Engineer/Architect and

Contractor shall act promptly. 19.8 Credits will be based on the net cost of material and labour or the net difference in

unit price quantities.


GC 20 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

20.1 Applications for payment on account as provided for in Article A-4 may be made

monthly as the Work progresses. 20.2 Application for payment shall be made monthly on a date to be agreed between the

Owner and the Contractor and the amount claimed shall be for the value, proportionate to the amount of the Contract, of work performed and products delivered to the site at that date.

20.3 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer/Architect, before the first application for

payment, a schedule of values of the various parts of the Work, aggregating the total amount of the Contract Price and divided so as to facilitate evaluation of applications for payment.

20.4 This schedule shall be made out in such form, and supported by such evidence as to

its correctness, as the Engineer/Architect may reasonably direct, and when approved by the Engineer/Architect shall be used as the basis for application for payment.

20.5 When making application for payment, the Contractor shall submit a statement based

upon this schedule. Claims for products delivered to the site but not yet incorporated into the Work shall be supported by such evidence as the Engineer/Architect may reasonably require to establish the value and delivery of the products.

20.6 Applications for release of holdback monies following the substantial Performance

of the Work and the application for final payment shall be made at the time and in the manner set forth in GC 21 Certificates and Payments.

GC 21 CERTIFICATES AND PAYMENTS

21.1 The Engineer/Architect shall, within ten (10) days of receipt of an application for

payment from the Contractor submitted in accordance with GC 20 - Application for Payment, issue a certificate for payment in the amount applied for or such other amount as he shall determine to be properly due. If the Engineer/Architect amends the application he shall promptly notify the Contractor in writing, giving his reasons for the amendment.

21.2 The Owner shall within twenty-one (21) days of the issuance of a certificate for

payment by the Engineer/Architect, make payment to the Contractor on account, in accordance with the provisions of the Agreement.

21.3 If payment is not made within sixty (60) days of issuance of a certificate for payment

by the Engineer/Architect the Owner will be liable for interest on the amount owing


at the rate of 9% per annum from the sixty-first (61st) day to the date of payment. 21.4 Notwithstanding any other provisions of this Contract:

a) If on account of climatic or other conditions reasonably beyond the control

of the Contractor there are items of work that cannot be performed, the payment in full for that which has been performed as certified by the Engineer/Architect shall not be withheld or delayed by the Owner on account thereof, but the Owner may withhold from the Contract Price until the remaining work is finished an amount sufficient to cover the cost to the Owner of performing such remaining work and to adequately protect the Owner from claims.

b) Where legislation permits and where, upon application by the Contractor, the

Engineer/Architect has certified that a Subcontract has been totally performed to his satisfaction prior to the Substantial Performance of this Contract, the Owner shall pay the Contractor the holdback retained for such Subcontractor on the day following the expiration of the Statutory Limitations Period stipulated in the Mechanics' Lien Act applicable to the place of building.

The holdbacks will be released on the following conditions:

i) a copy of the contract between the Subcontractor and the Contractor, or some

other suitable Document satisfactory to the Owner, must be presented to the Owner,

ii) the Subcontract is completed without deficiencies;

iii) the warranty for the Subcontract will not start until Substantial Performance

of the General Contract;

iv) the Contractor provides an approved statutory declaration that all monies have been paid to the Subcontractors;

v) the Owner will, at that time, release the total amount specified on the

Sub-contractor's Contract. 21.5 Notwithstanding the provisions of 21.4 (b) and notwithstanding the wording of such

certificate the Contractor shall ensure that such work is protected pending the Total Performance of the Contract and be responsible for the correction of any defects in it regardless of whether or not they were apparent when such certificates were issued.

21.6 The Engineer/Architect shall, within ten (10) days of receipt of an application from

the Contractor for a Certificate of Substantial Performance, make an inspection and assessment of the work to verify the validity of the application. The


Engineer/Architect shall within seven (7) days of his inspection notify the Contractor of his approval or disapproval of the application. When the Engineer/Architect finds the Work to be Substantially Performed he shall issue such a certificate. The date of this certificate shall be the date of Substantial Performance of the Contract. Immediately following the issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Performance, the Engineer/Architect, in consultation with the Contractor shall establish a reasonable date for the Total Performance of the Contract.

21.7 Following the issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Performance and upon

receipt from the Contractor of all documentation called for in the Contract Documents the Engineer/Architect shall issue a certificate for payment of holdback monies. The release of holdback monies authorized by this certificate shall become due and payable on the day following the expiration of the Statutory Limitation Period stipulated in the Mechanics' Lien Act applicable to the place of building, providing that no lien or privilege claims against the Work exist and the Contractor has submitted to the Owner a sworn statement that all accounts for labour, subcontracts, products, construction machinery and equipment and any other indebtedness which may have been incurred by the Contractor in the Substantial Performance of the Work and for which the Owner might in any way be held responsible have been paid in full except holdback monies properly retained.

21.8 The Engineer/Architect shall, within ten (10) days of receipt of an application from

the Contractor for payment upon Total Performance of the Contract, make an inspection and assessment of the work to verify the validity of the application. The Engineer/Architect shall within seven (7) days of his inspection notify the Contractor of his approval or disapproval of the application. When the Engineer/Architect finds the Work to be totally performed to his satisfaction he shall issue a Certificate of Total Performance and certify for payment the remaining monies due to the Contractor under the Contract less any holdback monies which are required to be retained. The date of this certificate shall be the date of Total Performance of the Contract. The Owner shall, within thirty (30) days of issuance of such certificate, make payment to the Contractor in accordance with the provisions of Article A-4 of the Agreement.

21.9 The release of any remaining holdback monies shall become due and payable on the

day following the expiration of the Statutory Limitation Period stipulated in the Mechanics' Lien Act applicable to the place of building or where such legislation does not exist or apply in accordance with such other legislation, regulations governing privileges, industry practice or such other provisions which may he agreed to between the parties, provided that no claims against the Work exist and the Contractor has submitted to the Owner a sworn statement that all accounts for labour, subcontracts, products, construction machinery and equipment and any other indebtedness which may have been incurred by the Contractor in the Total Performance of the Work and for which the Owner might in any way be held responsible, have been paid in full except holdback monies properly retained.


21.10 No certificate for payment, or any payment made thereunder, nor any partial or entire use of occupancy of the Work by the Owner shall constitute an acceptance of any work or products not in accordance with the Contract Documents.

21.11 The issuance of the Certificate of Total Performance shall constitute a waiver of all

claims by the Owner against the Contractor except those previously made in writing and still unsettled, if any, and those arising from the provisions of GC 31 - Warranty, or those arising from negligence on the part of the Contractor.

The acceptance of the Certificate of Total Performance or of the payment due thereunder shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Contractor against the Owner except those made in writing prior to his application for payment upon Total Performance of the Contract and still unsettled, if any.

21.12 The holdback to be used by the Engineer/Architect when issuing certificate of

payment will be ten (10) percent of the value of the work completed at the date of the Contractor's claim.

21.13 Notwithstanding the provisions of 21.3 or any other provision of this Contract, the

Owner may:

a) in the event of a claim by the owner against the Contractor for damages arising out of the performance or non-performance of the Contract, withhold payment of any amount equal to the alleged damages until the liability for damages is established and no amount of interest will be paid on amounts held under this clause;

b) set-off amounts owing by the Contractor to the Owner,

c) following the issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Performance, withhold

payment of an amount equal to twice the cost, as estimated by the Engineer/Architect, of remedying deficiencies until the issuance of a Certificate of Total Performance and no amount of interest will be paid on amounts held under this clause.

GC 22 TAXES AND DUTIES

22.1 Unless otherwise stated in Supplementary General Conditions the Contractor shall

pay all government sales taxes, customs duties and excise taxes with respect to the Contract.

22.2 Any increase or decrease in costs to the Contractor due to changes in such taxes and

duties after the date of the Agreement and up to the agreed date of completion shall increase or decrease the Contract Price accordingly. If the owner so desires the Contractor is to co-operate with the Engineer/Architect and Owner and permit access


to books and records in order to establish the amount of such taxes involved. 22.3 The Contractor shall maintain full records of his estimates of and actual cost to him

of the work together with all proper tender calls, quotations, contracts, correspondence, invoices, receipts and vouchers relating thereto, shall make them available to audit and inspection by the Owner, the Auditor General for Newfoundland or by persons acting on their behalf, shall allow them to make copies thereof and to take extracts therefrom, and shall furnish them with any information which they may require from time to time in connection with such records.

GC 23 LAWS, NOTICES, PERMITS AND FEES

23.1 The laws of the place of building shall govern the work.

23.2 The Contractor shall obtain all permits, licenses and certificates and pay all fees

required for the performance of the Work which are in force at the date of tender submission (but this shall not include the obtaining of permanent easements or rights of servitude ).

23.3 The Contractor shall give all required notices and comply with all laws, ordinances,

rules, regulations, codes and order of all authorities having jurisdiction relating to the Work, to the preservation of the public health and construction safety which are or become in force during the performance of the Work.

23.4 The Contractor shall not be responsible for verifying that the Contract Documents

are in compliance with the applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and codes relating to the Work. If the Contract Documents are at variance therewith, or changes which require modification to the Contract Documents are made to any of the laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and codes by the authorities having jurisdiction subsequent to the date of tender submission, any resulting change in the cost shall constitute a corresponding change in the Contract Price. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer/Architect in writing requesting direction immediately any such variance or change is observed by him.

23.5 If the Contractor fails to notify the Engineer/Architect in writing and obtain his

direction as required in GC 23.4 and performs any work knowing it to be contrary to any laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, codes and orders of any authority having jurisdiction, he shall be responsible for and shall correct any violations thereof and shall bear all costs, expense and damages, attributable to his failure to comply with the Provisions of such laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, codes and orders.

GC 24 PATENT FEES

24.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and patent licence fees required for the


performance of the contract and such royalties or fees shall be deemed to have been included in the contract price. He shall hold the Owner harmless from and against all claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits or proceedings arising out of the Contractor's performance of the Contract which are attributable to an infringement or an alleged infringement of any patent or invention by the Contractor or anyone for whose acts he may be liable.

24.2 The Owner shall hold the Contractor harmless against all claims, demands, losses,

costs, damages, actions, suits, or proceedings arising out of the Contractor's performance of the Contract which are attributable to an infringement or an alleged infringement of any patent or invention in executing anything for the purpose of the Contract, the model, plan or design of which was supplied to the Contractor by the Owner.

GC 25 WORKPLACE HEALTH, SAFETY AND COMPENSATION COMMISSION

25.1 Prior to commencing the Work and prior to receiving payment on Substantial and

Total Performance of the Work, the Contractor shall provide evidence of compliance with all requirements of the Province of the place of building with respect to workmen's compensation including payments due thereunder.

25.2 At anytime during the term of Contract, when requested by the Engineer/Architect,

the Contractor shall provide such evidence of compliance by himself and any or all of his Subcontractors.

GC 26 LIABILITY INSURANCE

26.1 Comprehensive General Liability Insurance

a) Without restricting the generality of GC 17 - Indemnification, the Contractor

shall provide and maintain, either by way of a separate policy or by an endorsement to his existing policy, Comprehensive General Liability insurance acceptable to the Owner and subject to limits set out in detail in the Supplementary General Conditions inclusive per occurrence for bodily injury, death, and damage to property including loss of use thereof.

b) The insurance shall be in the joint names of the Contractor and the Owner,

shall also cover as Unnamed Insureds all Subcontractors and anyone employed directly or indirectly by the Contractor or his Subcontractors to perform a part or parts of the Work but excluding suppliers whose only function is to supply and or transport products to the project site.

c) The insurance shall also include as Unnamed Insureds the architectural and

engineering consultants of the Owner and Engineer/Architect.


d) The insurance shall preclude subrogation claims by the Insurer against

anyone insured thereunder.

e) The Comprehensive General Liability Insurance will not be limited to, but shall include coverage for: 1) premises and operations liability 2) products or completed operations liability 3) blanket contractual liability 4) cross liability 5) elevator and hoist liability 6) contingent employer's liability 7) personal injury liability arising out of false arrest, detention or

imprisonment or malicious prosecution, libel, slander or defamation of character, invasion of privacy, wrongful eviction or wrongful entry.

8) shoring, blasting, excavating, underpinning, demolition, pile driving and caisson work, work below ground surface, tunnelling and grading as applicable.

9) liability with respect to non-owned licenced vehicles. 26.2 Automobile Liability Insurance

The Contractor shall provide and maintain liability insurance in respect of owned licenced vehicles subject to limits set out in detail in the Supplementary General Conditions inclusive.

26.3 Aircraft and or Watercraft Liability Insurance

The Contractor shall provide and maintain liability insurance with respect to owned and non-owned aircraft and watercraft, as may be applicable, subject to limits set out in detail in the Supplementary General Conditions inclusive. Such insurance shall be in the joint names of the Contractor, the Owner, the Engineer/Architect and those parties defined in 26.1(b) (c) where they have an interest in the use and operation of such aircraft or watercraft. The insurance shall preclude subrogation claims by the Insurer against anyone insured thereunder.

26.4 All liability insurance shall be maintained continuously until twelve (12) months

after the date the Engineer/Architect issues a certificate of Substantial Performance. 26.5 The Contractor shall provide the Owner with evidence of all liability insurance prior

to the commencement of the work and shall promptly provide the Owner with a certified true copy of each insurance policy.

26.6 All liability insurance policies shall contain an endorsement to provide all Named


Insureds with prior notice of changes and cancellations. Such endorsements shall be in the following form:

"It is understood and agreed that the coverage provided by this policy will not be changed or amended in any way nor cancelled until thirty (30) days after written notice of such change or cancellation shall have been given to all Named Insureds".

GC 27 PROPERTY INSURANCE

27.1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain property insurance, acceptable to the

Owner, insuring the full value of the Work in the amount of the Contract Price and the full value as stated of products for incorporation into the Work. The insurance shall be in the joint names of the Contractor, the Owner, the Subcontractors and all others having an insurable interest in the Work. The policies shall include all Subcontractors as Unnamed Insureds or, if they specifically request, as Named Insureds. The Policies shall preclude subrogation claims by the Insurer against anyone insured thereunder.

27.2 Such coverage shall be provided for by EITHER an ALL Risks Builder's Risk Policy

OR by a combination of a standard Builders' Risk Fire Policy including Extended Coverage and Malicious Damage Endorsements and a Builders' Risk Difference in Conditions Policy providing equivalent coverage, of Piers, Wharves & Docks Government Structures Policy.

27.3 The policies shall insure against all risks of direct loss or damage subject to the

exclusion specified in the Supplementary General Conditions. Such coverage shall apply to:

a) all products, labour and supplies of any nature whatsoever, the property of

the Insureds or of others for which the Insureds may have assumed responsibility, to be used in or pertaining to the site preparations, demolition of existing structures, erections and/ or fabrication and/ or reconstruction and/ or repair of the insured project, while on the site or in transit, subject to the exclusion of the property specified.

b) the installation, testing and any Subsequent use of machinery and equipment

including boilers, pressure vessels or vessels under vacuum.

c) damage to the Work caused by an accident to and/or the explosion of any boiler(s) or pressure vessel(s) forming part of the work.

Such coverage shall exclude construction machinery, equipment, temporary structural and other temporary facilities, tools, and supplies used in the construction of the work and which are not expendable under the Contract.


27.4 The Contractor shall provide the Owner with evidence of all insurance prior to commencement of the Work and shall promptly provide the Owner with a certified true copy of each insurance policy.

Policies provided shall contain an endorsement to provide all Named Insureds with prior notice of changes and cancellations. Such endorsements shall be in the following form: "It is understood and agreed that the coverage provided by this policy will not be changed or amended in any way or cancelled until thirty 30 days after written notice of such change or cancellation shall have been given to all Named Insureds".

27.5 All such insurance shall be maintained continuously until ten (10) days after the date

the Engineer/Architect issues a certificate to Total Performance. All such insurance shall provide for the Owner to take occupancy of the work or any part thereof during the terms of this insurance. Any increase in the cost of this insurance arising out of such occupancy shall be at the Owner's expense.

27.6 The policies shall provide that, in the event of a loss, payment for damage to the

Work, shall be made to the Owner and the Contractor as their respective interests may appear. The Contractor shall act on behalf of the Owner and himself for the purpose of adjusting the amount of such loss with the Insurers. On the determination of the extent of the loss, the Contractor shall immediately proceed to restore the Work and shall be entitled to receive from the Owner (in addition to any sum due under the Contract) the amount at which the Owner's interest in the restoration work has been appraised, such amount to be paid as the work of the restoration proceeds and in accordance with the Engineer/Architect's certificates for payment. Damage shall not affect the rights and obligations of either party under the Contract except that the Contractor shall be entitled to such reasonable extension of time for Substantial and Total Performance of the Work as the Engineer/Architect may decide.

27.7 The Contractor and/ or his Subcontractors as may be applicable shall be responsible

for any deductible amounts under the policies and for providing such additional insurance as may be required to protect the insureds against loss on items excluded from the policies.

GC 28 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY

28.1 The Contractor shall protect the property adjacent to the Project site from damage as

the result of his operations under the Contract. 28.2 The Contractor shall protect the Work and the Owner's property from damage and

shall be responsible for any damage which may arise as the result of his operations under the Contract except damage which occurs as the result of :


a) errors in the Contract Documents, and/or

b) acts or omissions by the Owner, his agents, employees or Other Contractors. 28.3 Should any damage occur to the Work and/or Owner's property for which the

Contractor is responsible he shall make good such damage at his own expense or pay all costs incurred by others in making good such damage.

28.4 Should any damage occur to the Work and/or Owner's property for which the

Contractor is not responsible as provided in GC 17 he shall make good such damage to the Work, and, if the Owner so directs to the Owner's property, and the Contract Price and Contract Time shall be adjusted in accordance with GC 18 - Changes in the Work.

28.5 The Contractor shall be completely responsible for the safety of the work as it

applies to protection of the public and property and the construction of the work.

The Codes that must be followed and enforced for safety are:

a) The National Building Code, Construction Safety Measures (Latest Edition);

b) The Workplace Health, Safety and Compensation Commission Accident Prevention Regulations (Latest Edition);

c) Canadian Code for Construction Safety (Latest Edition) as issued by the

Associate Committee of the National Building Code. 28.6 Any person not following the stipulated safety regulations shall be dismissed.

GC 29 DAMAGES AND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY

29.1 If either party to this Contract should suffer damage in any manner because of any

wrongful act or neglect of the other party or anyone employed by him then he shall be reimbursed by the other party for such damages. The party reimbursing the other party shall be subrogated to the rights of the other party in respect of such wrongful act or neglect if it be that of a third party.

29.2 Claims under this GC shall be made in writing to the party liable within reasonable

time after the first observance of such damage and not later than the time limits stipulated in GC 21 - Certificates and Payments, and may be adjusted by agreement or in the manner set out in GC 16 - Settlement of Disputes and Claims.

29.3 If the Contractor has caused damage to any Other Contractor on the work, the

Contractor agrees upon due notice to settle with such Other Contractor by agreement or arbitration, if he will so settle. If such Other Contractor sues the Owner on


account of any damage alleged to have been so sustained, the Owner shall notify the Contractor and may require the Contractor to defend the action at the Contractor's expense. If any final order or judgment against the Owner arises therefrom the Contractor shall pay or satisfy it and pay all costs incurred by the Owner.

29.4 If the Contractor becomes liable to pay or satisfy any final order, judgment or award

against the Owner then the Contractor, upon undertaking to indemnify the Owner against any and all liability for costs, shall have the right to appeal in the name of the Owner such final order or judgment to any and all courts of competent jurisdiction.

GC 30 BONDS

30.1 The Owner shall have the right during the period stated in the tender documents for

acceptance of the tender to require the Contractor to provide and maintain in good standing until the fulfillment of the Contract, bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract including the requirements of the Warranty provided for in GC 31 Warranty, and the payment of all obligations arising under the Contract.

30.2 All such bonds shall be issued by a duly incorporated surety company approved by

the Owner and authorized to transact a business or surety-ship in the Province of Newfoundland.

30.3 If bonds are called for in the tender documents or supplementary general conditions

or instructions to bidders, the costs attributable to providing such bonds shall be included in the tender price.

30.4 Should the Owner require the provision of a bond or bonds by the Contractor other

than those provided for under 30.3, the Contract Price shall be increased by all costs attributable to providing such bonds.

30.5 The Contractor shall promptly provide the Owner with any bonds that are required.

GC 31 WARRANTY

31.1 Without restricting any warranty or guarantee implied or stipulated by law the

Contractor shall at his own expense rectify and make good any defect or fault however caused appearing within a period of one year from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work provided that the Contractor shall not be responsible for any defect or fault resulting from the design of the work.

31.2 The Contractor shall correct and/or pay for any damage to other work resulting from

any corrections required under the conditions of 31.1. 31.3 Neither the Engineer/Architect's final certificate nor payment thereunder shall relieve


the Contractor from his responsibility hereunder. 31.4 The Owner and/or the Engineer/Architect shall give the Contractor written notice of

observed defects promptly. GC 32 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES AND CONTROL OF THE WORK

32.1 The Contractor shall have complete control of the Work except as provided in GC 15

-Emergencies. He shall effectively direct and supervise the Work using his best skill and attention. He shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all parts of the Work under the Contract.

32.2 The Contractor shall have the sole responsibility for the design, erection, operation,

maintenance and removal of temporary structural and other temporary facilities and the design and execution of construction methods required in their use. The Contractor shall engage and pay for registered professional engineering personnel skilled in the appropriate discipline to perform these functions where required by law or by the Contract Documents and in all cases where such temporary facilities and their method of construction are of such a nature that professional engineering skill is required to produce safe and satisfactory results.

32.3 Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraphs 32.1 and 32.2 above, or any provisions

to the contrary elsewhere in the Contract Documents where such Contract Documents include designs for temporary structural and other temporary facilities and methods shall be deemed to comprise part of the overall design of the Work and the Contractor shall not be held responsible for that part of the design or the specified method of construction. The Contractor shall, however, be responsible for the execution of such design or specified method of construction in the same manner that he is responsible for the execution of the Work.

32.4 The Contractor shall carefully examine the Contract Documents and shall promptly

report to the Engineer/Architect any error, inconsistency or omission he may discover. The Contractor shall not be held liable for any damage resulting from any such errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents.

GC 33 SUPERINTENDENCE

33.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants

who shall be in attendance at the Work site at all times while work is being performed.

33.2 The superintendent shall be satisfactory to the Engineer/Architect and shall not be


changed except for good reason and only then after consultation with and agreement by the Engineer/Architect.

33.3 The superintendent shall represent the Contractor at the Work site and directions

given to him by the Engineer/Architect shall be held to have been given to the Contractor. Important directions shall be confirmed to the Contractor in writing, other directions will be so confirmed if requested.

GC 34 LABOUR AND PRODUCTS

34.1 Unless otherwise stipulated elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor

shall provide and pay for all labour products, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, light, power, transportation and other facilities and services necessary for the proper performance of the Work.

34.2 All products provided shall be new unless otherwise specified in the Contract

Documents. Any products which are not specified shall be of a quality best suited to the purpose required and their use subject to the approval of the Engineer/Architect.

34.3 The Contractor shall at all times maintain good order and discipline among his

employees engaged on the Work and shall not employ on the Work any unfit person nor anyone not skilled in the task assigned to him.

GC 35 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

35.1 The Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer/Architect in writing if, in his

opinion, the subsurface conditions at the Project site differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or as may have been represented to him by the Owner or Engineer/Architect before the time of tender submission.

35.2 After prompt investigation, should the Engineer/Architect determine that conditions

do differ materially, he shall issue appropriate instructions for changes in the Work as provided for in GC 18 - Changes in the Work.

GC 36 USE OF PREMISES

36.1 The Contractor shall confine his apparatus, the storage of products and the operations

of his workmen to limits indicated by laws, ordinances, permits or by directions of the Engineer/Architect and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with his products.

36.2 The Contractor shall not load or permit to be loaded any part of the Work with a

mass that will endanger its safety.


36.3 The Contractor shall enforce the Engineer/Architect's instructions regarding signs,

advertisements, fires and smoking. 36.4 Unless otherwise provided the Contractor shall, at his own expense, and without

extra cost to the Owner, make suitable provision to accommodate all traffic either pedestrian or vehicular, over or around, the project upon which work is being performed, in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer/Architect.

36.5 The Contractor shall provide and maintain at his own expense such fences, barriers,

signs, lights and watchmen as may be necessary to prevent avoidable accidents to residents or to the public generally.

GC 37 CLEANUP AND FINAL CLEANING OF WORK

37.1 The Contractor shall maintain the work in a tidy condition and free from the

accumulation of waste products and debris, other than that caused by the Owner, other Contractors or their employees.

37.2 When the Work is Substantially Performed the Contractor shall remove all of his

surplus products, tools, construction machinery and equipment not required for the performance of the remaining work. He shall also remove any waste products and debris and leave the Work clean and suitable for occupancy by the Owner unless otherwise specified.

37.3 When the Work is totally Performed, the Contractor shall remove all of his surplus

products, tools, construction machinery and equipment. He shall also remove any waste products and debris, other than that caused by the Owner, other Contractors or their employees.

GC 38 CUTTING AND REMEDIAL WORK

38.1 The Contractor shall do all cutting and remedial work that may be required to make

the several parts of the Work come together properly. 38.2 The Contractor shall co-ordinate the schedule for the Work to ensure that this

requirement is kept to a minimum. 38.3 Should the Owner or anyone employed by him be responsible for ill-timed work

necessitating cutting and/or remedial work shall be valued as provided in GC 19 Valuation and Certification of Changes in the work and added to the Contract Price.

38.4 Cutting and remedial work shall be performed by specialists familiar with the

materials affected and shall be performed in a manner to neither damage nor


endanger any Work. GC 39 INSPECTION OF WORK

39.1 The Owner and his authorized representatives shall have access to the Work for

inspection wherever it is in preparation or progress. The Contractor shall co-operate to provide reasonable facilities for such access.

39.2 If special tests, inspections or approvals are required by the Contract Documents, the

Engineer/ Architect's instructions or the laws or ordinances of the place of building the Contractor shall give the Engineer/Architect timely notice requesting inspection. Inspection by the Engineer/ Architect shall be made promptly. The Contractor shall arrange inspection by other authorities and shall notify the Engineer/Architect of the date and time.

39.3 If the Contractor covers or permits to be covered any of the Work that is subject to

inspection or before any special tests and approvals are completed without the approval of the Engineer/Architect, the Contractor shall uncover the Work, have the inspection satisfactorily completed and make good the Work at his own expense.

39.4 Examination of any questioned work maybe ordered by the Engineer/Architect. If

such work be found in accordance with the Contract the Owner shall pay the cost of examination and replacement, together with the cost of subsequent verification testing. If such Work be found not in accordance with the Contract through the fault of the Contractor, the Contractor shall pay such cost.

39.5 The Contractor shall furnish promptly to the Engineer/Architect two (2) copies of all

certificates and inspection reports relating to the Work. GC 40 REJECTED WORK

40.1 Defective Work, whether the result of poor workmanship, use of defective products

or damage through carelessness or other act or omission of the Contractor, and whether incorporated in the Work or not, which has been rejected by the Engineer/Architect as failing to conform to the Contract Documents shall be removed promptly from the premises by the Contractor and placed and/or reexecuted promptly in accordance with the Contract Documents at the Contractor's expense.

40.2 Other Contractor's work destroyed or damaged by such removals or replacements

shall be made good promptly at the Contractor's expense. 40.3 If in the opinion of the Engineer/Architect it is not expedient to correct defective

work not done in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may deduct from the Contract Price the difference in value between the Work as done and that


called for by the Contract, the amount of which shall be determined in the first instance by the Engineer/Architect.

GC 41 SHOP DRAWINGS

41.1 The term "shop drawings" means drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules,

performance charts, brochures, and other data which are to be provided by the Contractor to illustrate details of a portion of the Work.

41.2 The Contractor shall arrange for the preparation of clearly identified shop drawings

as called for by the Contract Documents or as the Engineer/Architect may reasonably request.

41.3 Prior to Submission to the Engineer/Architect the Contractor shall review all shop

drawings. By this review the Contractor represents that he has determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalogue numbers and similar data or will do so and that he has checked and co-ordinated each shop drawing with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. The Contractor's review of each shop drawing shall be indicated by stamp, date and signature of a responsible person.

41.4 The Contractor shall submit shop drawings to the Engineer/Architect for his review

with reasonable promptness and in orderly sequence so as to cause no delay in the Work or in the Work of Other Contractors. If either the Contractor or the Engineer/Architect so requests they shall jointly prepare a schedule fixing the dates for submission and return of shop drawings. Shop drawings shall be submitted in the form of a responsible transparency or prints as the Engineer/Architect may direct. At the time of submission the Contractor shall notify the Engineer/Architect in writing of any deviations in the shop drawings from the requirements of the Contract Documents.

41.5 The Engineer/Architect will review and return shop drawings in accordance with any

schedule agreed upon, or otherwise with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay. The Engineer/Architect's review shall be for conformity to the design concept and for general arrangement only and such review shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents unless a deviation on the shop drawings has been approved in writing by the Engineer/Architect.

41.6 The Contractor shall make any changes in shop drawings which the

Engineer/Architect may require consistent with the Contract Documents and resubmit unless otherwise directed by the Engineer/Architect. When resubmitting the Contractor shall notify the Engineer/ Architect in writing of any revisions other than those requested by the Engineer/Architect.


GC 42 SAMPLES

42.1 The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer/Architect's approval such standard

manufacturers' samples as the Engineer/Architect may reasonably require. Samples shall be labelled as to origin and intended use in the Work and shall conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents.

42.2 The Contractor shall provide samples of special products, assemblies, or components

when so specified. The cost of such samples not specified shall be authorized as an addition to the Contract Price as provided in GC 18 - Changes in the Work.

GC 43 TESTS AND MIX DESIGNS

43.1 The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer/Architect test results and mix designs as

may be requested. The testing company must first be approved by the Engineer/Architect.

43.2 The cost of tests and mix designs beyond those called for in the Contract Documents

or beyond those required by laws, ordinances, rules and regulations relating to the work and the preservation of public health, shall be authorized as an addition to the Contract Price as provided in GC 18 - Changes in the Work.

GC 44 MATERIALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

44.1 Materials, described and named in the specifications with "or approved equal" clause

after the Manufacturer's name, or so described as to establish quality only and substitutions of a similar material may be made after award of the contract provided the Engineer/Architect's approval is obtained.

44.2 Requests for substitutions must be accompanied by sufficient information in the form

of shop drawings, manufacturer's literature, samples and other data to permit proper investigation of the substitutes proposed. Also, indicate the increase or decrease in price.

44.3 Whenever a substitute is proposed for approval the Contractor shall guarantee that

such proposed substitute will not adversely affect the space requirements allocated on the drawings for the material specified, and he shall agree to bear any additional expense incurred due to his use of the proposed substitute.

44.4 The Engineer/Architect may accept or reject any or all of the proposed substitutions

as he sees fit, and his decision on a question of equality shall be final.


GC 45 LABOUR 45.1 In carrying out his duties under this contract, the Contractor should comply with all

Provincial and Federal legislation respecting labour and the employment of labour, where applicable, including the labour standards code and shall not operate in conflict with the Human Rights legislation. In the employment of labour, preference should be given to persons normally resident in Newfoundland and Labrador.

45.2 The Contractor and Subcontractors shall maintain and keep available for inspection

by the Owner, a record of the names and addresses of all men employed on the project.

45.3 All work shall be done by workmen skilled in their various trades.

45.4 There shall be no discrimination in the selection of workers for employment on the

project in respect of race, religious views or political affiliation, and the office of the Canada Manpower will be used in the recruitment of workers wherever practicable.

45.5 The Contractor shall pay fair wages and shall pay rates of wages and allowances to

the various classes of labour not less favourable than those prevailing in the area where the work is being performed.

GC 46 PROVINCIAL PREFERENCE POLICY

46.1 Preference will be given to Newfoundland and Labrador Contractors and

Subcontractors and to products manufactured, processed or supplied in Newfoundland and Labrador, in accordance with the Provincial Preference Act, associated regulations and guidelines.

GC 47 TIME OF ESSENCE

47.1 Time is of the essence of the Contract.

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS

- 1 - 6SGC.doc

1. GC17 INDEMNIFICATION

(a) Except as provided in (b) the Contractor shall be liable for, and shall

indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against all claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits or proceedings, whatsoever arising under any statute or Common Law:

(i) in respect of personal injury to or the death of any person

whomsoever arising out of, or in the course of, or caused by the carrying out of the work; and

(ii) in respect of any injury or damage whatsoever to any property, real

or personal or any chattel real, insofar as such injury or damage arises out of, or in the course of, or by reason of the carrying out of the work.

(b) The Contractor shall not be liable under (a) if the injury, death, loss or

damage is due to any act or neglect of the Owner.

2. GC22 TAXES AND DUTIES

Add to Clause 22.1, the following:

CONTRACTORS ARE ADVISED THAT COLLEGE OF THE NORTH ATLANTIC IS NOT EXEMPT FROM THE HARMONIZED SALES TAX (H.S.T.). THE LUMP SUM PRICE QUOTED BY THE CONTRACTOR ON THE TENDER FORM SHOULD INCLUDE THE HST. THE COLLEGE OF THE NORTH ATLANTIC, WILL PAY THE HST TO THE CONTRACTOR WITH EACH REGULAR PROGRESS BILLING.

3. GC 25 WORKPLACE HEALTH, SAFETY AND COMPENSATION COMMISSION

25.3 Non incorporated companies I. e. partnerships, sole proprietorships, and

independent operators must provide coverage for any employees and personal coverage for the principal(s).


- 2 - 6SGC.doc

4. INSURANCE

Contractors are advised that General Conditions #26 LIABILITY INSURANCE and #27 PROPERTY INSURANCE are revised as follows:

GC 26 LIABILITY INSURANCE

26.1 Commercial General Liability Insurance

(a) Without restricting the generality of GC 17 - Indemnification, the

Contractor shall provide and maintain, either by way of a separate policy or by an endorsement to his existing policy, Commercial Liability Insurance acceptable to the Owner and subject to limits set out in detail in the Supplementary General Conditions inclusive per occurrence for bodily injury, death, and damage to property including loss of use thereof.

(b) This insurance shall include as an additional insured College of the North

Atlantic and the Occupant/Operator of the property. The Contractor shall not commence any work until he obtains, at his expense, all required insurances as specified in the General Conditions and the Supplementary General Conditions. Such insurance must have the approval of the Engineer/Architect and be to the limits, form and amounts specified. The Contractor will not permit any Subcontractor to commence work on this project until the same insurance requirements have been compiled with by the Subcontractor.

(c) The insurance shall also include as Unnamed Insureds the architectural

and engineering consultants of the Owner with respect to work performed by the Contractor, but excluding professional liabilities associated with such architectural and engineering consultants.

(d) The Commercial General Liability Insurance will not be limited to, but

shall include coverage for:

1) premises and operations liability 2) products or completed operations liability 3) blanket contractual liability 4) broad form property damage 5) cross liability 6) elevator and hoist liability 7) contingent employer's liability

8) personal injury liability 9) liability with respect to non-owned licensed vehicles 10)shoring, blasting, excavating, underpinning, demolition, pile driving and caisson work, work below ground service, tunnelling and grading, as applicable only.


- 3 - 6SGC.doc

26.2 Automobile Liability Insurance

The Contractor shall provide and maintain liability insurance in respect of (i) owned licensed vehicles and (ii) leased vehicles, subject to limits set out in the Supplementary General Conditions inclusive.

26.3 Aircraft and Watercraft Liability Insurance

The Contractor shall provide and maintain liability insurance with respect to owned and non-owned aircraft and watercraft, as may be applicable, subject to limits set out in the Supplementary General Conditions inclusive. Such insurance shall be in the names of the Contractor, Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Newfoundland, the Owner and the Engineer/Architect as defined in 26.1(b) and (c) where they have an insurable interest in the use and operation of such aircraft and watercraft.

26.4 Completed operations shall be maintained continuously until twelve (12)

months after the date the Engineer/Architect issues a Certificate of Substantial Performance.

26.5 All insurance policies shall contain an endorsement requiring notification

of the College of the North Atlantic and the Named Insured, in writing, thirty (30) days prior to cancellation of any policy or material change, except in the event of non-payment where policy conditions dealing with termination will apply.

GC 27 PROPERTY INSURANCE

27.1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain property insurance, acceptable

to the College of the North Atlantic, insuring the full value of the work in the amount of the contract price and the full value as stated of products for incorporation into the work. The insurance shall include as additional insured the College of the North Atlantic. This insurance requirement shall not apply to public schools.

27.2 Such coverage shall be provided for by either Broad Form Builders'

Risks Policy or an Installation Floater or Piers, Wharves, and Docks Rider.

27.3 The policies shall insure on a Broad Form basis direct loss or damage

subject to any exclusions specified in the Supplementary General Condition. Such coverage shall apply to:

(a) all products, labour, and supplies of any nature whatsoever, the property

of the Insureds or of others for which the Insureds may have assumed


- 4 - 6SGC.doc

responsibility, to be used in or pertaining to the site preparations, demolitions of existing structures, erections and/or fabrication and/or reconstruction and/or repair of the insured project, while on the site or in transit, subject to the exclusion of the property specified.

(b) the installation, testing and any subsequent use of machinery and

equipment including boilers, pressure vessels or vessels under vacuum.

(c) damage to the Work caused by an accident to and/or the explosion of any boiler(s) or pressure vessel(s) forming part of the work.

Such coverage shall exclude construction machinery, equipment, temporary structural and other temporary facilities, tools, and supplies used in the construction of the work and which are not expendable under the Contract.

27.4 Policies provided shall contain an endorsement requiring notification of

the College of the North Atlantic and the Named Insured, in writing, thirty (30) days prior to cancellation of any policy or material change of coverage except in the event of non-payment where policy conditions dealing with termination will apply.

27.5 All such insurance shall be maintained continuously until the date the

Engineer/Architect issues a Certificate of Substantial Performance. All such insurance shall provide for the Owner to take occupancy of the work or any part thereof during the term of the insurance. Any increase in the cost of this insurance arising out of such occupancy shall be at the Owner's expense.

27.6 The policies shall provide that in the event of a loss, payment for damage

to the Work shall be made to the Owner and the Contractor as their respective interests may appear. The Contractor shall act on behalf of the Owner and himself for the purpose of adjusting the amount of such loss with the Insurers. On the determination of the extent of the loss, the Contractor shall immediately proceed to restore the Work and shall be entitled to receive from the Owner (in addition to any sum due under the Contract) the amount at which the Owner's interest in the restoration work has been appraised, such amount to be paid as the work of restoration proceeds and in accordance with the Engineer/Architect’s certificates for payment. Damage shall not affect the rights and obligations of either party under the Contract except that the Contractor shall be entitled to such reasonable extension of time for Substantial and Total Performance of the work as the Engineer/Architect may decide.

27.7 The Contractor shall be responsible for any deductible amounts under the

policies and for providing such additional insurance as may be required to


- 5 - 6SGC.doc

protect the insureds against loss on items excluded from the policies. Contractors are also advised that tender documents contain a certificate of insurance indicating type and limit of liability insurance required for this project. The successful bidder will be required prior to commencement of work, to have the Certificate of Insurance completed by his insurance company and delivered to the College of the North Atlantic not later than 30 days after the award of the contract.

5. GC 44 MATERIALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

Delete GC 44 in its entirety refer to Section 01 61 00 – Common Product Requirements.

6. GC 46 PROVINCIAL PREFERENCE POLICY

Delete GC 46 in its entirety.

7. GC 48 ASSESSMENT AND DAMAGES FOR LATE COMPLETION

Add Article GC 48 - Assessments and Damages for Late Completion to read as follows:

.1 For purposes of this General Condition

(a) The work shall be deemed to be completed on the date that a

Certificate of Substantial Performance referred to in GC21.6 is issued, and

(b) "Period of delay" means the number of days commencing on the day fixed by the Articles of Agreement for completion of the work and ending on the day immediately preceding the day on which the work is completed but does not include any day in which, in the opinion of the Engineer/Architect, completion of the work was delayed for reasons beyond the control of the contractor.

.2 If the contractor does not complete the work by the day fixed for its

completion by the Articles of Agreement but completes it thereafter, the contractor shall pay Her Majesty an amount equal to the aggregate of

(a) all salaries, wages and travelling expenses incurred by the College

of the North Atlantic in respect of persons overseeing the performance of the work during the period of delay, and

(b) all other expenses and damages incurred or sustained by the

College of the North Atlantic during the period of delay as a result of the work not being completed by the day fixed for its completion.


- 6 - 6SGC.doc

8. GC49 CERTIFICATE OF RECOGNITION FOR CONTRACTS

49.1 The contractor shall within 14 days of award of the contract, and prior to

commencement of the work, provide a Letter of Good Standing under the Certificate of Recognition Program from the Newfoundland and Labrador Construction Safety Association.

49.2 At anytime during the term of the Contract, when requested by the Owner,

the Contractor shall provide such evidence of compliance by any or all of his or her Subcontractors.

9. ENGINEER/ARCHITECT

The Engineer/Architect for the purposes of administrating this construction contract shall be the designated representative of the College of the North Atlantic.

Minimum

CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DESCRIPTION & LOCATION OF WORK:

PROJECT NO: AWARD DATE: VALUE $ :

INSURER:

ADDRESS:

BROKER:

ADDRESS:

INSURED NAME OF CONTRACTOR:

ADDRESS:

ADDITIONAL INSURED (Excluding Automobile Liability Policy)

o The OWNER: o The Occupant/Operator of the Property: o Project Consultants of the OWNER (excluding professional liabilities)

This document certifies that the following policies of insurance and indicated coverage are at present in force subject to the terms, conditions and exclusions as contained therein covering the operations of the insured in connection with the above noted contract made between the named insured and the Owner.

POLICY TYPE NUMBER INCEPTION

DATE

EXPIRY DATE

Y/M/D

LIMITS OF LIABILITY

1.1 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY or

1.2 WRAP-UP LIABILITY (Including where

indicated)

A. BLASTING

B. PILE DRIVING OR CAISSON WORK

C. REMOVAL OR WEAKENING OF SUPPORT

$5,000,000 Minimum

2A. BUILDERS' RISK "BROAD FORM" or

2B. INSTALLATION FLOATER "BROAD FORM" or

2C. PIERS, WHARVES, & DOCKS RIDER

100% Contract

Value if Exceeds $25,000

3. AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE $2,000,000

4. AIRCRAFT and/or WATER CRAFT LIABILITY

INSURANCE Not

required

5. ENVIRONMENTAL IMPAIRMENT LIABILITY Not required

6. SHIPBUILDER’S or SHIP REPAIRER’S

LIABILITY INSURANCE Not

required

7. HULL & MACHINERY INSURANCE, and

PROTECTION & INDEMNITY Insurance including 4/4th COLLISION LIABILITY

Not

required

The Insurer agrees to notify the Owner, as defined above, in writing, thirty (30) days prior to cancellation, termination or material change of any policy. NAME OF INSURER'S OFFICER or AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE :

SIGNATURE: Date:

Tele.:

Email:

Issuance of this certificate shall not limit or restrict the right of the Owner to request at any time duplicate certified copies of said insurance policies.

Insurance Certificate. 1 of 1


Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Works Page 1 of 2

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

.1 Title and description of Work.

.2 Contractor use of premises.

.3 Owner occupancy.

1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

.1 Work of this Contract comprises general construction renovation of and addition to Manufacturing Technology Centre, located at the College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive, St. John’s, NL.

.2 This project will be carried out under two separate contracts, one at a time. These specifications and drawings encompass the work of both contracts (Phases I and II). This tender shall be based on Phase I only. Phase II will be tendered separately in the future. Refer to drawings for the general scope of the work of Phase I. Refer also to the general description as follows:

.1 Work on Phase I on site shall take place between June 25 and October 31, 2012. Work of Phase I consists of all work associated with the Level I Shop Modernization, including new electrical and mechanical systems for this area.

.2 Work also includes the new exit door and stair, resized tool room, combined materials and metrology shops and the fire separations between the Shop Level I and Level II above.

.3 Refer to architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical drawings for full scope of work.

.3 Provide services to locations for future owner equipment.

.4 Existing equipment to be temporarily relocated and reinstalled complete with and mechanical and electrical services.

1.3 WORK NOT INCLUDED IN CONTRACT

.1 Hook-up of future owner supplied equipment.

.2 Work identified as Phase II.

1.4 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES

.1 Contractor has unrestricted use of work areas.

.2 Coordinate use of premises under direction of Owner’s Representative.


Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Works Page 2 of 2

.3 Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations under this Contract.

.4 Remove or alter existing work to prevent injury or damage to portions of existing work which remain.

.5 Repair or replace portions of existing work which have been altered during construction operations to match existing or adjoining work, as directed by Owner’s Representative.

1.5 ON-SITE DOCUMENTS

.1 Maintain at job site documents as indicated in Section 01 31 00 – Project Management and Coordination.

1.6 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

.1 Legends and schedules in the Issued for Tender Drawings take precedence over the Technical Specifications with respect to products and materials identified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)

END OF SECTION


Section – 01 14 00 Work Restrictions Page 1 of 1

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Connecting to existing services.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 01 32 00 – Construct Progress Documentation.

.2 Section 01 56 00 - Temporary Barriers and Enclosures.

1.3 EXISTING SERVICES

.1 Notify Owner’s Representative and utility companies of intended interruption of services and obtain required permission.

.2 Where Work involves breaking into or connecting to existing services, give Owner’s Representative 72 hours of notice for necessary interruption of mechanical or electrical service throughout course of work. Keep duration of interruptions minimum. Carry out interruptions after normal working hours of occupants, preferably on weekends.

.3 Provide for pedestrian and vehicular traffic.



END OF SECTION


Section 01 21 00 – Allowances Page 1 of 2

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 CASH ALLOWANCES

.1 Include in Contract Price, cash allowances as stated herein:

- Cash allowance to cover costs for testing.

.2 Expend each allowance as directed by Owner’s Representative.

.3 Cash allowances, unless otherwise specified, cover net cost to Contractor of services, products, construction machinery and equipment, freight, handling, unloading, storage installation and other authorized expenses incurred in performing Work.

.4 Each cash allowance will be adjusted to actual cost as defined hereunder and contract price will be amended accordingly by written order.

.5 Contract Price will be adjusted by written order to provide for an excess or deficit to each cash allowance.

.6 Progress payments for work and material authorized under cash allowances will be made in accordance with contract terms of payment.

.7 The Contract Price and not cash allowance, includes contractor’s overhead and profit in connection with such cash allowance.

.8 Progress payments on accounts of work authorized under cash allowances shall be included in monthly certificate for payment.

.9 Schedule shall be prepared jointly by Owner’s Representative and Contractor to show when items called for under cash allowances must be authorized by Owner’s Representative for ordering purposes so that progress of work will not be delayed.

1.2 TESTING CASH ALLOWANCE

.1 Include $ 2,000.00 for testing.

.2 Material and Installation cash allowances shall include and provide payment for:

.1 Net cost of material

.2 Applicable duties and taxes

.3 Delivery to site

.4 Handling at site, including unloading, uncrating, storage and hoisting.

.5 Protection from damage by elements or otherwise

.6 Labour installation and finishing

.7 Other expenses required to complete installation


Section 01 21 00 – Allowances Page 2 of 2



END OF SECTION


Section 01 29 83 – Payment Procedures: Testing Laboratory Services Page 1 of 2

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Inspecting and testing by inspecting firms or testing laboratories designated by Owner’s Representative

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

.1 Particular requirements for inspection and testing to be carried out by testing laboratory designated by Owner’s Representative are specified under various sections.

1.3 APPOINTMENT AND PAYMENT

.1 Owner’s Representative will appoint and pay for services of testing laboratory except as follows:

.1 Inspection and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities.

.2 Inspection and testing performed exclusively for Contractor's convenience.

.3 Testing, adjustment and balancing of conveying systems, mechanical and electrical equipment and systems.

.4 Mill tests and certificates of compliance.

.5 Tests specified to be carried out by Contractor under the supervision of Owner’s Representative.

.6 Additional tests specified in the following paragraph.

.2 Where tests or inspections by designated testing laboratory reveal Work not in accordance with contract requirements, pay costs for additional tests or inspections as required by Owner’s Representative to verify acceptability of corrected work.

1.4 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

.1 Provide labour, equipment and facilities to:

.1 Provide access to Work to be inspected and tested.

.2 Facilitate inspections and tests.

.3 Make good Work disturbed by inspection and test.

.4 Provide storage on site for laboratory's exclusive use to store equipment and cure test samples.

.2 Notify Owner’s Representative sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for assignment of laboratory personnel and scheduling of test.

.3 Where materials are specified to be tested, deliver representative samples in required quantity to testing laboratory.


Section 01 29 83 – Payment Procedures: Testing Laboratory Services Page 2 of 2

.4 Pay costs for uncovering and making good Work that is covered before required inspection or testing is completed and approved by Owner’s Representative.



END OF SECTION


College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 01 31 00 - Project Management and Coordination Page 1 of 4

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Coordination work with other contractors and subcontractors under administration of Owner’s Representative.

.2 Scheduled project meetings.


.1 Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work.

1.3 DESCRIPTION

.1 Coordination of progress schedules, submittals, use of site, temporary utilities, construction facilities, and construction Work, with progress of Work of other contractors and subcontractors under instructions of Owner’s Representative.

1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS

.1 Project meetings to be held at times and locations as determined by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Owner’s Representative will arrange project meetings and record and distribute minutes.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION ORGANIZATION AND START-UP

.1 Within 10 days after award of Contract, request a meeting of parties in contract to discuss and resolve administrative procedures and responsibilities.

.2 Establish time and location of meetings and notify parties concerned minimum 5 days before meeting.

.3 Agenda to include following:

.1 Appointment of official representative of participants in Work.

.2 Schedule of Work, progress scheduling in accordance with Section 01 32 00 - Construction Progress Documentation.

.3 Schedule of submission of shop drawings, samples, colour chips in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.4 Requirements for temporary facilities, storage sheds, utilities, fences in accordance with Section 01 51 00 - Temporary Utilities.

.5 Delivery schedule of specified equipment in accordance with Section 01 32 00 - Construction Progress Documentation.

.6 Site security in accordance with Section 01 52 00 - Construction Facilities.



.7 Proposed changes, change orders, procedures, approvals required, mark-up percentages permitted, time extensions, overtime, and administrative requirements.

.8 Record drawings in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.9 Maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.10 Take-over procedures, acceptance, and warranties in accordance with Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures and 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.11 Monthly progress claims, administrative procedures, photographs, and holdbacks.

.12 Appointment of inspection and testing agencies or firms in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.

.13 Insurances and transcript of policies.

.4 Comply with Owner’s Representative's allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices and sheds, for access, traffic, and parking facilities.

.5 During construction coordinate use of site and facilities through Owner’s Representative's procedures for intra-project communications: Submittals, reports and records, schedules, coordination of drawings, recommendations, and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts.

.6 Comply with instructions of Owner’s Representative for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities.

1.6 ON-SITE DOCUMENTS

.1 Maintain at job site, one copy each of the following:

.1 Contract drawings.

.2 Specifications.

.3 Addenda.

.4 Reviewed shop drawings.

.5 List of outstanding shop drawings.

.6 Change orders.

.7 Other modifications to Contract.

.8 Field test reports.

.9 Copy of approved Work schedule.

.10 Health and Safety Plan and other Safety related documents.

.11 Manufacturers' installation and application instructions.

.12 Labour conditions and wage schedules.

.13 Other documents as specified.

1.7 SCHEDULES

.1 Submit preliminary construction progress schedule in accordance with Section 01 32 00 - Construction Progress Documents which reflects the two phases and the stated completion date to Owner’s Representative coordinated with Owner’s Representative's project schedule. Schedule to show anticipated progress stages and final completion of work within time period required by contract documents.



.2 After review, revise and resubmit schedule to comply with project schedule requirements.

.3 During progress of Work revise and resubmit at project progress meetings or as directed by Owner’s Representative.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

.1 Make submittal to Owner’s Representative for review.

.2 Submit preliminary shop drawings, product data and samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures for review for compliance with Contract Documents; for field dimensions and clearances, for relation to available space, and for relation to Work of other contracts. After review, revise and resubmit for transmittal to Owner’s Representative.

.3 Submit requests for payment for review to Owner’s Representative.

.4 Submit requests for interpretation of Contract Documents, and obtain instructions through Owner’s Representative.

.5 Process change orders through Owner’s Representative.

.6 Deliver closeout submittals for review by Owner’s Representative.

1.9 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

.1 Provide information required by Owner’s Representative for preparation of coordination drawings.

.2 Review and approve revised drawings for submittal to Owner’s Representative.

.3 Owner’s Representative may furnish additional drawings for clarification. These additional drawings have same meaning and intent as if they were included with plans referred to in contract documents.

1.10 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

.1 Notify Owner’s Representative when Work is considered ready for Substantial Performance.

.2 Accompany Owner’s Representative on preliminary inspection to determine items listed for completion or correction.

.3 Comply with Owner’s Representative's instructions for correction of items of Work listed in executed certificate of Substantial Performance and for access to Owner-occupied areas.

.4 Notify Owner’s Representative of instructions of items of Work determined in Owner’s Representative's final inspection.


College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 01 31 00 - Project Management and Coordination Page 4 of 4 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)


END OF SECTION


Section 01 32 00 - Construction Progress Documentation Page 1 of 2

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures.

1.2 SCHEDULES REQUIRED

.1 Submit schedules as follows:

.1 Construction Progress Schedule.

.2 Submittal Schedule for Shop Drawings and Product Data.

.3 Submittal Schedule for Samples.

.4 Product Delivery Schedule.

.5 Shutdown or closure activity.

1.3 FORMAT

.1 Prepare schedule in form of a horizontal bar chart reflecting the June 25, 2012 on site start date and October 31, 2012 project completion date.

.2 Provide a separate bar for each major item of work, trade or operation.

.3 Split horizontally for projected and actual performance.

.4 Provide horizontal time scale identifying first work day of each week.

.5 Format for listings: chronological order of start of each item of work.

.6 Identification of listings: By Systems description.

1.4 SUBMISSION

.1 Submit initial format of schedules within 15 working days after award of Contract.

.2 Submit schedules in electronic format, forward on disc as PDF files.

.3 Submit one opaque reproduction, plus 2 copies to be retained by Owner’s Representative.

.4 Owner’s Representative will review schedule and return review copy within 10 days after receipt.

.5 Resubmit finalized schedule within 7 days after return of review copy.

.6 Submit revised progress schedule with each application for payment.

.7 Distribute copies of revised schedule to:

.1 Job site office.

.2 Subcontractors.

.3 Owner


Section 01 32 00 - Construction Progress Documentation Page 2 of 2

.4 Architect/Engineer

.5 Other concerned parties.

.8 Instruct recipients to report to Contractor within 10 days, any problems anticipated by timetable shown in schedule.

1.5 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE

.1 Include schedule for submitting shop drawings, product data, and samples.

.2 Indicate dates for submitting, review time, resubmission time, last date for meeting fabrication schedule.



END OF SECTION


Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures Page 1 of 4

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTIONS INCLUDE

.1 Shop drawings and product data.

.2 Samples.

.3 Certificates and transcripts.


.1 Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Documentation.

.2 Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control

.3 Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE

.1 This section specifies general requirements and procedures for contractor’s submissions of shop drawings, product data, samples and mock-ups to Owner’s Representative for review. Submit promptly and in orderly sequence to not cause delay in Work. Failure to submit in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for an extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.

.2 Do not proceed with work until relevant submissions are reviewed by Owner’s Representative.

.3 Present shop drawings, product data, samples and mock-ups in SI Metric units.

.4 Where items or information is not produced in SI Metric units converted values are acceptable.

.5 Review submittals prior to submission to Owner’s Representative. This review represents that necessary requirements have been determined and verified, or will be, and that each submittal has been checked and co-ordinated with requirements of Work and Contract Documents. Submittals not stamped, signed, dated and identified as to specific project will be returned without being examined and shall be considered rejected.

.6 Notify Owner’s Representative, in writing at time of submission, identifying deviations from requirements of Contract Documents stating reasons for deviations.

.7 Verify field measurements and affected adjacent Work are coordinated.

.8 Contractor’s responsibility for errors and omissions in submission is not relieved by Owner’s Representative’s review of submittals.



.9 Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submission from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Owner’s Representative review of submission, unless Owner’s Representative gives written acceptance of specific deviations.

.10 Make any changes in submissions which Owner’s Representative may require consistent with Contract Documents and resubmit as directed by Owner’s Representative. When resubmitting, notify Owner’s Representative in writing of revisions other than those requested.

.11 Notify Owner’s Representative, in writing, when resubmitting, of any revisions other than those requested by Owner’s Representative.

.12 Keep one reviewed copy of each submission on site.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 The term "shop drawings" means drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures and other data which are to be provided by Contractor to illustrate details of a portion of Work.

.2 Coordinate each submission with requirements of work and Contract Documents. Individual submissions will not be reviewed until all related information is available.

.3 Indicate materials, methods of construction and attachment or anchorage, erection diagrams, connections, explanatory notes and other information necessary for completion of Work. Where articles or equipment attach or connect to other articles or equipment, indicate that such items have been coordinated, regardless of Section under which adjacent items will be supplied and installed. Indicate cross references to design drawings and specifications.

.4 Allow 10 days for Owner’s Representative review of each submission.

.5 Adjustments made on shop drawings by Owner’s Representative are not intended to change contract price. If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to Owner’s Representative immediately after receipt of approval of shop drawings. If value of work is to change a change order must be issued prior to proceeding with work.

.6 Accompany submissions with transmittal letter, containing:

.1 Date.

.2 Project title and number.

.3 Contractor's name and address.

.4 Identification and quantity of each shop drawing, product data and sample.

.5 Other pertinent data.

.7 Submissions shall include:

.1 Date and revision dates.

.2 Project title and number.



.3 Name and address of: .1 Subcontractor. .2 Supplier. .3 Manufacturer.

.4 Contractor's stamp, signed by Contractor’s authorized representative certifying approval of submissions, verification of field measurements and compliance with Contract Documents.

.5 Details of appropriate portions of Work as applicable: .1 Fabrication. .2 Layout, showing dimensions, including identified field dimensions, and

clearances. .3 Setting or erection details. .4 Capacities. .5 Performance characteristics. .6 Standards. .7 Operating weight. .8 Wiring diagrams. .9 Single line and schematic diagrams. .10 Relationship to adjacent work.

.8 After Owner’s Representative review, distribute copies.

.9 Submit 3 prints plus one electronic copy in PDF format of shop drawings for each requirement requested in specification Sections and as Owner’s Representative may reasonably request.

.10 Submit electronic copy in PDF format of product data sheets or brochures for requirements requested in Specification Sections and as requested by Owner’s Representative where shop drawings will not be prepared due to standardized manufacture of product.

.11 Delete information not applicable to project.

.12 Supplement standard information to provide details applicable to project.

.13 Cross-reference product data information to applicable portions of Contract Documents.

.14 If upon review by Owner’s Representative, no errors or omissions are discovered or if only minor corrections are made, copies will be returned and fabrication and installation of work may proceed. If shop drawings are rejected, noted copy will be returned and resubmission of corrected shop drawings, through same procedure indicated above, must be performed before fabrication and installation of work may proceed.

.15 Samples: examples of materials, equipment, quality, finishes, workmanship. Label samples with origin and intended use.



.16 Notify Owner’s Representative in writing, at time of submission of deviations in samples from requirements of contract documents.

.17 Where colour, pattern or texture is criterion, submit full range of samples.

.18 Adjustments made on samples by Owner’s Representative are not intended to change Contract Price. If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to Owner’s Representative prior to proceeding with Work.

.19 Make changes in samples, which Owner’s Representative may require, consistent with Contract Documents.

.20 Reviewed and accepted samples will become standard of workmanship and material against which installed Work will be verified.

1.5 MOCK-UPS

.1 Erect mock-ups in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.

1.6 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS

.1 Progress photograph to be electronically formatted and labelled as to location and view.

1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS REVIEW

.1 The review of shop drawings by Owner’s Representative is for the sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with the general concept. This review shall not mean that Owner’s Representative approves the detail design inherent in the shop drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with the Contractor submitting same, and such review shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting all requirements of the construction and contract documents. Without restricting the generality of the foregoing, the Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site, for information that pertains to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation and for co-ordination of the work of all sub-trades.



END OF SECTION


Section 01 35 29.06 – Health and Safety Requirements Page 1 of 11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA)

.1 CSA S269.1 Falsework for Construction Purposes.

.2 CAN/CSA-Z259.1 Safety Belts and Lanyards.

.3 CAN/CSA-Z259.10 Full body Harnesses.

.4 CAN/CSA-Z259.11 Shock Absorbers for Personal Fall Arrest Systems.

.5 CAN/CSA-Z259.2, Fall Arresting Devices, Personnel Lowering Devices and Lifelines.

.6 FCC No. 301 Standard for Construction Operations.

.2 FCC No. 302 Standard for Welding and Cutting.

.3 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act Regulations.

.4 Newfoundland Occupational Health and Safety Act, Amended

.5 Consolidated Newfoundland and Regulations 1149 WMIS Regulations Under the Occupational Health and Safety Act

.6 Consolidated Newfoundland and Regulations 1165 Occupational Health and Safety Regulations under the Occupational Health and Safety Act.

.7 Canada Labour Code, Part 2, Canada Occupational Safety and Health Regulations.

.8 National Building Code of Canada.


.1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures

.2 Section 01 35 43 - Environmental Procedures

.3 Section 01 41 00 - Regulatory Requirements

.4 Section 02 82 00 – Asbestos Abatement

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 At least 10 (ten) working days prior to commencing any site work: submit to Owner’s Representative copies of:

.1 A complete Health and Safety Risk Assessment and Management Plan.

.2 If work entails confined space, submit copies of confined space entry training certificates.



.2 Acceptance of the Project Health and Safety Risk Assessment and Management Plan and other submitted documents by the Owner’s Representative shall only be viewed as acknowledgement that the contractor has submitted the required documentation under this specification section.

.3 Owner’s Representative makes no representation and provides no warranty for the accuracy, completeness and legislative compliance of the Project Health and Safety Risk Management Plan and other submitted documents by this acceptance.

.4 Responsibility for errors and omissions in the Project Health and Safety risk Assessment and Management Plan and other submitted documents is not relieved by acceptance by Owner’s Representative.

1.4 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY (PROJECT HEALTH AND SAFETY RISK ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT PLANS)

.1 Conduct operations in accordance with latest edition of the Newfoundland Occupational Health and Safety (OH&S) Act and Regulations.

.2 Prepare a detailed Project Health and Safety Risk Assessment and Management Plan for the Owner. Assessment shall identify, evaluate and control job specific hazards and the necessary control measures to be implemented for managing hazards.

.3 Provide a copy of the Project Health and Safety Risk Assessment and Management Plan upon request to Occupational Health and Safety Branch, Department of Labour, Province of Newfoundland and Labrador and the Owner.

.4 The written Health and Safety Risk Assessment and Management Plan shall incorporate the following:

.1 A site-specific health and safety plan, refer to clause 1.5 Site-Specific Health and Safety Risk Assessment and Management Plan of this section for requirements.

.2 An organizational structure which shall establish the specific chain of command and specify the overall responsibilities of contractors employees at the work site.

.3 A comprehensive workplan which shall: .1 define work tasks and objectives of site activities/operations and the

logistics and resources required to reach these tasks and objectives .2 establish personnel requirements for implementing the plan, and .3 establish site specific training and notification requirements and

schedules. .4 A personal protected equipment (PPE) Program which shall detail PPE:

.1 Selection criteria based on site hazards.

.2 Use, maintenance, inspection and storage requirements and procedures.

.3 Decontamination and disposal procedures.

.4 Inspection procedures prior to during and after use, and other appropriate medical considerations.



.5 Limitations during temperature extremes, heat stress and other appropriate medical consideration.

.5 An emergency response procedure, refer to Clause 1.6 Supervision and Emergency Response Procedure of this section fro requirements.

.6 A hazard communication program for informing workers, visitors and individuals outside of the work area as required.

.7 A health and safety training program.

.8 General safety rules.

.5 Periodically review and modify as required each component of the Project Health and Safety Risk Assessment and Management Plan when a new hazard is identified during completion of work and when an error or omission is identified in any part of the Project Health and Safety Risk Assessment and Management Plan.

.6 Implement all requirements of the Project Health and Safety Risk Assessment and Management Plan.

.1 Ensure that every person entering the project site is informed of requirements under the Project Health and Safety Risk Assessment and Management Plan.

.2 Take all necessary measures to immediately implement any engineering controls, administrative contacts, personal protective equipment required or termination of work procedures to ensure compliance with the Project Health and Safety Risk Assessment and Management Plan.

1.5 SITE SPECIFIC HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN

.1 Prepare a detailed site Specific Project Health and Safety Plan which shall:

.1 Contain certain hazard assessment results.

.2 Identify engineering and administrative demonstrative controls (work-practices and procedures) to be implemented for managing identified and potential hazards, and comply with applicable federal and provincial legislation and more stringent requirements that have been specified in these specifications.

.2 Review for completeness the hazard assessment results immediately prior to commencing work, when a new hazard is identified during completion of work and when an error or omission is identified.

.1 Be solely responsible for investigating, evaluation and managing any report of actual or potential hazards.

.2 Retain copies of all completed hazard assessments at the project site and make available to the Owner’s Representative immediately upon request.

1.6 SUPERVISION AND EMERGENCY RESCUE PROCEDURE

.1 Carry out work under the direct supervision of competent persons responsible for safety by ensuring the work complies with the appropriate section of OH&S Act and Regulations

.2 Assign a sufficient number of supervisory personnel to the work site.



.3 Provide a suitable means of communications for workers required to work alone.

.4 Develop an emergency rescue plan for the job site and ensure that supervisors and workers are trained in the emergency rescue plan.

.5 The emergency response plan shall address, as a minimum:

.1 Pre-emergency planning.

.2 Personnel roles, lines of authority and communication.

.3 Emergency recognition and prevention.

.4 Safe distances and places of refuge.

.5 Site security and control

.6 Evacuation routes and procedures

.7 Decontamination procedures which are not covered by the site specific safety and health plan.

.8 Emergency medical treatment and first aid.

.9 Emergency alarm, notification and response procedures including procedures for reporting incidents to local, provincial and federal government departments.

.10 PPE and emergency equipment.

.11 Procedures for handling emergency incidents.

.12 Site specific emergency response training requirements and schedules.

.6 The emergency response procedures shall be rehearsed regularly as part of the overall training program.

.7 Provide adequate first aid facilities for the jobsite and ensure that a minimum number of workers are trained in first aid in accordance with the First Aid Regulations.

1.7 CONTRACTORS SAFETY OFFICER

.1 The contractor shall employ a Safety Officer who will be solely responsible for the implementation and monitoring of the Project Health and Safety Risk Assessment and Management Plan, and will have the authority to implement health and safety changes as directed by the Owner’s Representative. The Safety Officer shall have as a minimum:

.1 Completed training in hazardous occurrence management and response/protocols.

.2 Completed training in the use, maintenance of fall protection systems.

.3 Completed training in the design and construction of scaffolding.

.4 Completed training in confined space entry protocols and techniques.

.5 Completed training in First Aid.

.6 Have working knowledge of occupational safety and health regulations.

.7 Be responsible for completing Contractor's Health and Safety Training Sessions and ensuring that personnel not successfully completing required training are not permitted to enter site to perform Work.



.8 Be responsible for implementing, enforcing daily and monitoring site-specific Contractor's Health and Safety Plan.

.9 Prior to mobilization on-site, the Contractor’s Safety Officer shall hold an orientation meeting (in conjunction with Owner’s Representative) with the construction team to review project occupational health and safety. Include a review of:

.1 Health and Safety Risk Assessment and Management Plan.

.2 Construction Safety Measures.

.3 Supervision and Emergency Rescue Procedures. .10 Report directly to and be under direction of site supervisor.

1.8 HEALTH AND SAFETY COMMITTEE

.1 Establish an Occupational Health and Safety Committee where ten or more workers are employed on the job site as per the OH&S Act and Regulations.

.3 Be responsible for health and safety of persons on site, safety of property on site and for protection of persons adjacent to site and environment to extent that they may be affected by conduct of Work.

.4 Comply with and enforce compliance by employees with safety requirements of Contract Documents, applicable federal, provincial, territorial and local statutes, regulations, and ordinances, and with site-specific Health and Safety Plan.

1.9 RESPONSIBILITY

.1 Be responsible for health and safety of persons on site, safety of property on site and for protection of persons adjacent to site and environment to extent that they may be affected by conduct of Work.

.2 Comply with and enforce compliance by employees with safety requirements of Contract Documents, applicable federal, provincial, territorial and local statutes, regulations, and ordinances, and with site-specific Health and Safety Plan.

1.10 UNFORSEEN HAZARDS

.1 Should any unforeseen or peculiar safety-related factor, hazard, or condition become evident during performance of Work, follow procedures in place for Employee's Right to Refuse Work in accordance with Acts and Regulations of Province having jurisdiction. Advise Owner’s Representative verbally and in writing.

1.11 INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING

.1 Workers shall not participate in or supervise any activity on the work site until they have been trained to a level required by this job function and responsibility. Training shall as a minimum thoroughly cover the following:



.1 Federal and Provincial Health and Safety Legislation requirements including roles and responsibilities of workers and person(s) responsible for implementing, monitoring and enforcing health and safety requirements.

.2 Safety and health hazards associated with working on a contaminated site including recognition of symptoms and signs which might indicate over exposure to hazards.

.3 Limitations, use, maintenance and disinfection-decontamination of personal protective equipment associated with completing work.

.4 Limitations, use, maintenance and care of engineering controls and equipment.

.5 Limitations and use of emergency notifications and response equipment including emergency response protocol.

.6 Work practices and procedures to minimize the risk of an accident and hazardous occurrence from exposure to a hazard.

.2 Provide and maintain training of workers, as required, by Federal and Provincial legislation.

.3 Provide copies of all training certificates to Owner’s Representative for review, before a worker is to enter the work site.

.4 Authorized visitors shall not access the work site until they have been:

.1 Notified of the names of persons responsible for implementing, monitoring and enforcing the health and Safety Risk Assessment and Management Plan.

.2 Briefed on safety and health hazards present on the site.

.3 Instructed in the proper use and limitations of personal protective equipment.

.4 Briefed as the emergency response protocol including notification and evacuation process.

.5 Informed of practices and procedures to minimize risks from hazards and applicable to activities performed by visitors.

1.12 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY MEASURES

.1 Observe construction safety measures of National Building Code, latest edition, Provincial Government, OH&S Act and Regulations, Workplace Health and Safety and Compensation Commission and Municipal Authority provided that in any case of conflict or discrepancy more stringent requirements shall apply.

.2 Administer the project in a manner that will ensure, at all times, full compliance with Federal and Provincial Acts, regulations and applicable safety codes and the site Health and Safety Risk Assessment and Management Plan.

.3 Provide Owner’s Representative with copies of all orders, directions and any other documentation, issued by the Provincial Department of Government Services, Occupational Health and Safety branch immediately after receipt.


Section 01 35 29.06 – Health and Safety Requirements Page 7 of 11 1.13 POSTING OF DOCUMENTS

.1 Ensure applicable items, articles, notices and orders are posted in conspicuous location on site in accordance with Acts and Regulations of Province and authority having jurisdiction, and in consultation with Owner’s Representative.

1.14 HEALTH AND SAFETY MONITORING

.1 Periodic inspections of the contractor’s work may be carried out by the Owner’s Representative to maintain compliance with the Health and Safety Program. Inspections will include visual inspections as well as testing and sampling as required.

.2 The contractor shall be responsible for any and all costs associated with delays as a result of contractor’s failure to comply with the requirements outlined in this section.

1.15 NOTIFICATION

.1 For projects exceeding thirty (30) days or more, the contractor shall, prior to the commencement of work, notify in writing the Work Place Health and Safety Division, Department of Labour with the following information:

.1 Name and location of construction site.

.2 Company name and mailing address of contractor doing the work.

.3 The number of workers to be employed. .4 A copy of the Health and Safety Risk Assessment and Management Plan if

requested.

1.16 CORRECTION OF NON-COMPLIANCE

.1 Immediately address health and safety non-compliance issues identified by authority having jurisdiction or by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Provide Owner’s Representative with written report of action taken to correct non-compliance of health and safety issues identified.

.3 Owner’s Representative may stop work if non-compliance of health and safety regulations is not corrected.

1.17 WHMIS

.1 Ensure that all controlled products are in accordance with the Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) Regulations and Chemical Substances of the OH&S Act and Regulations regarding use, handling, labelling, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials.

.2 Deliver copies of relevant Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) to job site and the Owner’s Representative. The MSDS must be acceptable to Labour Canada and Health and Welfare Canada for all controlled products that will be used in the performance of this work.



.3 Train workers required to use or work in close proximity to controlled products as per OH&S Act and Regulations.

.4 Label controlled products at jobsite as per OH&S and Regulations.

.5 Provide appropriate emergency facilities as specified in the MSDS where workers might be exposed to contact with chemicals, e.g. eye-wash facilities, emergency shower.

.1 Workers to be trained in use of such emergency equipment.

.6 Contractor shall provide appropriate personal protective equipment as specified in the MSDS where workers are required to use controlled products.

.1 Properly fit workers for personal protective equipment

.2 Train workers in care, use and maintenance of personal protective equipment.

.7 No controlled products are to be brought on-site without prior approved MSDS.

.8 The MSDS are to remain on site at all times.

1.18 OVERLOADING

.1 Ensure no part of work or associated equipment is subjected to loading that will endanger its safety or will cause permanent deformation.

1.19 FALSEWORK

.1 Design and construct falsework in accordance with CSA S269.1.

1.20 SCAFFOLDING

.1 Design, erect and maintain scaffolding in accordance with CSA S269.2 and Sections 91-97 of the OH&S Act and Regulations.

.2 Ensure that fall-restraint or fall-arrest devices are used by all workers working at elevations greater than 3.05 metres above grade or floor level in accordance with CSA Z259.

1.21 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

.1 Ensure workers on the jobsite use personal protective equipment appropriate to the hazards identified in the Risk Assessment and Management Plan and those workers are trained in the proper care, use, and maintenance of such equipment.

.2 PPE selections shall be based on an evaluation of the performance characteristics of the PPE relative to the requirements and limitations of the site, task-specific conditions, duration and hazards and potential hazards identified on site.

.3 Provide workers and visitors to the site with proper respiratory protection equipment.



.1 No work shall be performed in an area where an airborne contaminant exceeds one half (½) the IDLH concentration.

.2 Respiratory protection shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of the Occupational Health and Safety Branch, Department of Labour of the Province of Newfoundland and Labrador and these specifications.

.3 Establish, implement and maintain a respirator inspection and maintenance program.

.4 Copies of all respirator owners’ maintenance manuals, shall be kept at all times at the contractor’s site office.

.4 Provide and maintain a supply of dermal protection equipment to allow visitors and all workers proper dermal protection.

.1 Dermal protection shall be sufficient to act as a protective barrier between the skin and an airborne contaminant or hazardous material. Dermal protection shall also be provided for all physical hazards.

.2 Dermal protection equipment shall not be used after exceeding 75% of the break through time. The break through time shall be based on the contaminant which requires the least amount of time to break through the protective equipment

.3 Copies of all dermal protection user specifications, owners and maintenance manuals shall be kept at all times at the contractor’s site office.

.4 Establish, implement and maintain air inspection program to ensure proper dermal protection in accordance with CSA, NIOSH, U.S. EPA and manufacturer’s requirements.

.5 Provide all workers and up to five (5) visitors to the site with proper hearing protection. Workers and visitors shall not be exposed to noise levels greater than 85 dB (A) over an eight hour shift without proper hearing protection.

.6 Provide all workers and up to five (5) visitors to the site with CSA approved eye protection sufficient to act as a protective barrier between the eye and airborne contaminants, hazardous materials and physical hazard.

.7 Provide workers and up to five (5) visitors to the site with CSA approved hard hats.

1.22 TRAFFIC CONTROL

.1 Provide traffic control measures when working on, or adjacent to, roadways in accordance with the “Traffic Control Manual for Roadwork Operations”, Department of Transportation and Works.

1.23 EXCAVATION SAFETY

.1 Protect excavations more than 1.25 metres deep against cave-ins or wall collapse by side wall sloping to the appropriate angle of repose, an engineered shoring/sheathing system or an approved trench box.

.1 Provide a ladder which can extend from the bottom of the excavation to at least 0.91 metres above the top of the excavation.



.2 Ensure that all excavations less than 1.25 metres deep are effectively protected when hazardous ground movement may be expected.

.3 Design trench boxes, certified by a registered Professional Engineer, and fabricated by a reputable manufacturer. Provide the manufacturer’s Depth Certificate Statement permanently affixed. Use trench boxes in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and depth certification data.

.4 Ensure that the superintendent and every crew chief, foreperson and lead hand engaged in trenching operations or working in trenches have in his/her possession a copy of the Department of Labour’s “Trench Excavation Safety Guide”.

1.24 CONFINED SPACE WORK

.1 Comply with requirements of Canada Occupational Safety and Health Regulations, Part XI and Consolidated Regulations Newfoundland and Labrador (CRNL) OH&S 1165/96.

.2 Provide approved air monitoring equipment where workers are working in confined spaces and ensure any test equipment to be used is calibrated, in good working order and used by trained persons.

.3 Develop a confined space entry program specific to the nature of work performed and in accordance with OH&S Act and Regulations and ensure supervisors and workers are trained in the confined space entry program.

.1 Ensure that personal protective equipment and emergency rescue equipment appropriate to the nature of the work being performed is provided and used.

.4 Provide and maintain training of workers, as required by the Federal and Provincial Legislation.

.5 Provide Owner’s Representative with a copy of an “Entry Permit” for each entry into the confined space to ensure compliance with Federal and Provincial Legislation.

1.25 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

.1 Asbestos containing material will be encountered during the execution of work. Remove all such material and replace with new.

.2 Unless otherwise noted, for hazardous materials abatement and repair, employ the services of a recognized Environmental Consultant to provide all air monitoring and testing services for regulatory requirements, include costs in the tender price.

1.26 HEAVY EQUIPMENT

.1 Ensure mobile equipment used on jobsite is of the type specified in OH&S Act and Regulations fitted with a Roll Over Protective (ROP) Structure.

.2 Provide certificate of training in Power Line Hazards for operators of heavy equipment.



.3 Obtain written clearance from the power utility where equipment is used in close proximity to (within 5.5 metres) overhead or underground power lines.

.4 Equip cranes with:

.1 A mechanism which will effectively prevent the hook assembly from running into the top boom pulley.

.2 A legible load chart.

.3 A maintenance log book.

1.27 WORK STOPPAGE

.1 Give precedence to safety and health of public and site personnel and protection of environment over cost and schedule considerations of Work.

PART 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3 PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE

END OF SECTION


Section 01 35 43 – Environmental Procedures Page 1 of 2

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 FIRES

.1 Fires and burning of rubbish on site not permitted.

1.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTES

.1 Do not bury rubbish and waste materials on site.

.2 Do not dispose of waste or volatile materials, such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner into waterways, storm or sanitary sewers.

1.3 DRAINAGE

.1 Provide temporary drainage and pumping as necessary to keep excavations and site free from water.

.2 Do not pump water containing suspended materials into waterways, sewer or drainage systems.

.3 Control disposal or runoff of water containing suspended materials or other harmful substances in accordance with local authority requirements.

1.4 POLLUTION CONTROL

.1 Maintain temporary erosion and pollution control features during this contract.

.2 Control emissions from equipment and plant to local authorities emission requirements.

.3 Prevent sandblasting and other extraneous materials from contaminating air beyond application area, by providing temporary enclosures.

.4 Cover or wet down dry materials and rubbish to prevent blowing dust and debris. Provide dust control for temporary roads.

1.5 NOTIFICATION

.1 Owner’s Representative will notify Contractor in writing of observed non-compliance with Federal, Provincial or Municipal environmental laws or regulations, permits, and other elements of environmental protection. Contractor: after receipt of such notice, inform Owner’s Representative of proposed corrective action and take such action as approved by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Owner’s Representative may issue stop order of work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken.

.3 No time extensions will be granted or equitable adjustments allowed to Contractor for such suspensions.


Section 01 35 43 – Environmental Procedures Page 2 of 2

1.6 WORK AREA ISOLATION

.1 Provide dust and gases barriers to seal work areas from occupied areas during the work.

.2 Block ventilation systems during the work so construction dust and dirt does not escape the work area.



END OF SECTION


Section 01 35 99 – Dust Control Procedures Page 1 of 5

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Where building related projects involve work that could potentially disturb asbestos or lead based paints, disturbances must be carefully controlled by registered abatement contractors in accordance with the Occupational Health and Safety Regulations (OHS) and other applicable Sections in this Contract. The purpose of this procedure is to ensure that nuisance dust, not containing asbestos or lead, is controlled in an effective manner. Dust control procedures are also intended to seal work areas to ensure construction gases, dust and dirt do not migrate outside work areas.

.2 Section includes:

.1 Ensuring any maintenance, repair, construction or renovation activity that impacts building materials or creates dust is performed in such a way as to eliminate, minimize, contain and clean up any and all dust generated by the activity. This applies to work preparation, work activities and post-work activities.

.2 This applies to, but is not limited to, the following types of dust generating activities: .1 Disturbing gypsum board, plaster or other surfacing materials. .2 Disturbing concrete or wood containing materials. .3 Handing or disturbing fibrous building insulation. .4 Generating welding fumes: in addition to the requirements of this

procedure, a hot work permit is also required to be completed by the contractor and submitted to the Owner’s Representative for review if hot work is required in an occupied building.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Division 1 – General Requirements.

.2 Section 02 82 00 - Asbestos Abatement.

.3 Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)

.1 CAN/CGSB-1.205, Sealer for Application to Asbestos-Fibre-Releasing Materials.


Section 01 35 99 – Dust Control Procedures Page 2 of 5 PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Non-combustible sheet.

.1 Metal studs and taped and spackled drywall for stand-alone barriers in accordance with Sections 09 21 16 and 09 22 16.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PRE-WORK ACTIVITIES

.1 The contractor shall ensure the following prior to commencing work:

.1 Specific dust generating activities and associated controls shall be addressed in the Site Specific Health and Safety Plan.

.2 Workforce, including sub-contractors, must be made aware of the site dust control requirements.

.3 Check the various work zones within the building and adjacent areas to confirm the area are clean.

.4 Access to all active work areas shall be restricted to authorized contractors.

.5 For occupied buildings, dust generating activities shall be performed after normal hours of operations, unless prior permission if received from the Owner’s Representative.

.6 Seal, tape, caulk dust barriers to seal work area. Provide dust tight doors.

3.2 WORK ACTIVITIES

.1 Dust producing projects shall be classified as small scale, medium scale or large scale projects, as detailed in paragraph 3.3.

.2 For all dust generating activities, Contractor is required to have Site Safety Officer present to ensure dust control procedures are properly followed.

.3 Any dust related complaints brought to the Contractors attention, must be immediately reported to Owner’s Representative, and an incident investigation must be initiated to prevent reoccurrence.

.4 Where practical, dust generation should be eliminated or minimized through the use of proper engineering controls (i.e. containment at source such as drilling wall surface through a wet sponge, wet suppression, use of HEPA vacuum equipped tools, etc).

.5 Dust generating power tools shall be equipped with HEPA filtered dust collectors where practical. Power tools capable of generating dust without dust collection shall only be used in conjunction with suitable work area containment and with Owner’s Representative approval.



.6 Walk-off mats shall be employed for medium and large scale dust generating projects at all worker entrances/exits. Purpose of these mats is to trap dust from equipment and shoes of personnel leaving the dust contaminated work zone. Mats shall be vacuumed daily, or more frequently as necessary, using HEPA filtered vacuums. Mats shall be of sufficient size to place both feet on mat at once.

3.3 PROJECT CLASSIFICATION

.1 Class A - Small Scale Project: (Dust producing activities disturbing less than one (1) linear meter or one (1) square meter of material. These are small scale, short duration jobs generating minimal dust.

.1 Some examples include: .1 Installing wires or cables, sanding/repairing small section of wall,

cutting out gypsum board to install receptacles. .2 Carry out Work as follows:

.1 Remove all furniture, fixtures and belongings from the work area to a minimum of 1.5 m in all directions.

.2 Restrict access to immediate work area. Keep all doors closed where practical. Post “Dust Hazard Area – Do Not Enter” signs at all entrances to work area. In common areas use barrier tape to establish the regulated area.

.3 Place a drop cloth of polyethylene sheeting immediately underneath the work area extending a minimum of 1.5 m in each direction (unless flooring is easily cleanable).

.4 Cover all air return or exhaust vents if within 1.5 m of the work area with polyethylene sheeting and duct tape.

.5 Complete the task, minimizing dust production, as prescribed in paragraph 3.2 - Work Activities.

.6 When the work is completed, wet-wipe polyethylene sheeting and flooring and if necessary, other areas close by with a damp rag.

.7 Visually inspect the area for any remaining dust and wet wipe as necessary.

.8 If installed, remove polyethylene sheeting from air return and exhaust vents.

.9 Where practical, transport debris after hours using least congested and most direct routes. If any debris is spilled outside the work area, immediately wet-wipe debris.

.10 Clean all tools and equipment before removal from the work area.

.2 .Class B - Medium Scale Project (Dust producing activities disturbing greater than one (1) square meter and less than 30 square meters of material) with anticipated moderate dust levels that are typically one shift or more in duration.

.1 Examples include: .1 Sanding several sheets of gypsum board.



.2 Electrical work above ceiling tiles where general debris is known above the ceiling.

.3 Removing numerous ceiling tiles in an area.

.4 New wall construction. .2 Carry out the Work as follows:

.1 Determine the most effective way of isolating the work area from occupants (i.e. using non-combustible sheet on metal stud and drywall barriers or by sealing off doors).

.2 Complete all items specified under small scale projects.

.3 While performing the work, limit the dust generated by removing the materials in sections, lightly misting the material as necessary. Debris shall be bagged immediately for disposal. In addition to wet wiping, HEPA filtered vacuum systems shall be employed where practical to limit airborne dust.

.4 When the task is completed, HEPA vacuum and/or wet wipe the polyethylene sheeting.

.5 Prior to removing any temporary wall partitions from floor to ceiling or sheet barriers, a final inspection shall be preformed by the Site Safety Officer or designate to ensure proper clean up has been completed. This inspection shall be documented by the Contractor and made available at the request of the Owner’s Representative.

.6 Establishment of containment may result in the accumulation of dust within the enclosure. As such, the need for respiratory protection and decontamination would be greater than for small scale projects (i.e. N95 half face respirator with tyvek body covering).

.3 Class C - Large Scale Projects (Dust Producing Activities disturbing greater than 30 meters of material with anticipated high dust levels and typically involves multiple work shifts.

.1 Examples include: .1 Major demolition or construction. .2 Extensive renovations to wall or ceiling surfaces. .3 Generating significant amounts of concrete dust.

.2 Carry out the Work as follows: .1 Complete all items as prescribed under the Medium Scale Projects

section. .2 If the work produces dust that cannot be limited by removal in sections

or misting and the work area configuration allows, use HEPA filtered negative air units with the intake directly across from the dust generating activity. Exhaust the HEPA unit outside the building.

.3 If using a disposal cart or container to transport debris within the building, ensure the lid is tightly secured and the wheels are clean prior to exiting the work area.



.4 If local source capture is employed (i.e. HEPA filtered power tool) and no significant debris anticipated then treat as a medium scale project.

.5 Negative air units shall be left operating at the completion of cleanup, for the duration stipulated in Table 4, CAN/CSA Z317.13-F07.

.6 Windows, doors, exhaust vents and supply intakes shall be sealed off in dust generating areas. Upper seals must be employed where necessary to prevent the spread of dust into adjacent areas.

.7 The contractor must be able to show that the work zone is negatively pressurized in relation to adjacent occupied areas.

END OF SECTION

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 01 41 00 – Regulatory Requirements Page 1 of 2

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Section 02 82 00 – Asbestos Abatement

1.2 REFERENCES AND CODES

.1 Perform Work in accordance with National Building Code of Canada (NBC) including all amendments up to tender closing date and other codes of provincial or local application provided that in case of conflict or discrepancy, more stringent requirements apply.

.2 Meet or exceed requirements of:

.1 Contract documents.

.2 Specified standards, codes and referenced documents.

1.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL DISCOVERY

.1 Asbestos: material containing asbestos will be encountered during the execution of the work. Abate and remove all asbestos containing materials, replace with new. Do not proceed until written instructions have been received from Owner’s Representative. Perform asbestos abatement and repair in accordance with Newfoundland and Labrador Asbestos Abatement Regulations, Latest Edition.

.2 Mould: stop work immediately should material resembling mould be encountered during the execution of work and notify Owner’s Representative. Do not proceed until written instructions have been received from Owner’s Representative.

1.4 BUILDING SMOKING ENVIRONMENT

.1 Comply with smoking restrictions.

1.5 RELICS AND ANTIQUITIES

.1 Protect relics, antiquities, items of historical or scientific interest such as cornerstones and contents, commemorative plaques, inscribed tablets, and similar objects found during course of work.

.2 Give immediate notice to Owner’s Representative and await Owner’s Representative’s written instructions before proceeding with work in this area.

.3 Relics, antiquities and items of historical or scientific interest remain College of the North Atlantic’s property.

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 01 41 00 – Regulatory Requirements Page 2 of 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)


END OF SECTION


Section 01 42 00 – References Page 1 of 4

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

.1 Drawings and general provisions of this contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

.1 Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made part of the Contract Documents by reference.

.2 All construction industry standards referenced in this specification to meet the edition of the standard referenced by the National Building Code of Canada (NBC). If the construction industry standard in not referenced in the National Building Code of Canada (NBC), the latest edition of the standard shall apply.

.3 Each entity engaged in construction on this Project must be familiar with construction industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Construction Documents.

.1 Where copies of construction industry standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source and make them availably upon request.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS FOR INDUSTRY ORGANIZATIONS

.1 Where abbreviations and acronyms are used, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

.2 Industry Organizations:

.1 Air Conditioning and Mechanical Contractors Association (AMCA).

.2 Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI).

.3 Americans with Disability Act (ADA).

.4 Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA).

.5 The Aluminum Association, Inc. (AA).

.6 American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA).

.7 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).

.8 American Association of Textile Chemists and Colourists (AATCC).

.9 American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA).

.10 American Boiler Manufacturer's Association (ABMA).



.11 American Concrete Institute (ACI).

.12 American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA).

.13 American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).

.14 American Iron & Steel Institute (AISI).

.15 American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

.16 American Petroleum Institute (API).

.17 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).

.18 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).

.19 American Society of Sanitary Engineer’s (ASSE).

.20 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

.21 American Water Works Association (AWWA).

.22 American Welding Society (AWS).

.23 American Wood-Preservers' Association (AWPA).

.24 Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI).

.25 Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC).

.26 Asphalt Institute (AI).

.27 Associated Air Balance Council (AABC).

.28 Association of the Wall and Ceilings Industries International (AWEI).

.29 Atomic Energy Control Board Regulations.

.30 Brick Industry Association (BIA).

.31 Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI).

.32 Canada Green Building Council (CaGCB).

.33 Canada Labour Code.

.34 Canadian Council of Ministers of the Environment (CCME).

.35 Canadian Code for Preferred Packaging.

.36 Canadian Construction Materials Centre (CCMC).

.37 Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA).

.38 Canadian Gas Association (CGA).

.39 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB).

.40 Canadian Institute of Steel Construction (CISC).

.41 Canadian Nursery Landscape Association (CNLA).

.42 Canadian Paint Manufacturer’s Association (CPMA).

.43 Canadian Roofing Contractors' Association (CRCA).

.44 Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute (CSSBI).

.45 Canadian Standards Association (CSA).

.46 Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers' Association (CSDFMA).

.47 Canadian Urethane Foam Contractors' Association Inc. (CUFCA).

.48 Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI).



.49 Ceramic Tile Institute (CTI).

.50 Consumer Electronics Association (CEA).

.51 Cooling Technology Institute (CTI).

.52 Department of Justice Canada (Jus).

.53 Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers' Association of Canada (EEMAC).

.54 Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA).

.55 Environment Canada (EC).

.56 The Environmental Choice Program.

.57 Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).

.58 Environmental Protection Services (EPS).

.59 ETL Listing Laboratories (ETL).

.60 Factory Mutual (FM).

.61 Federal Communications Commission (FCC).

.62 Flat Glass Manufacturers Association (FGMA).

.63 Green Seal Environmental Standards.

.64 Health Canada - Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS).

.65 Hydraulics Institute (HI).

.66 Hydronic Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers (IBR).

.67 Industry Canada - Terminal Attachment Program.

.68 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).

.69 Institute for Research in Construction (IRC).

.70 Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA).

.71 International ElectroTechnical Commission (IEC).

.72 International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC).

.73 International Standards Organization (ISO).

.74 Laminators Safety Glass Association (LSGA).

.75 Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS).

.76 Master Painters Institute (MPI).

.77 Model National Energy Code of Canada for Buildings (MNECB).

.78 National Association of Architectural Metal Manufactures (NAAMM).

.79 National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE).

.80 National Building Code of Canada (NBC).

.81 National Bureau of Standards/Products Standard (NBS/PS).

.82 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

.83 National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB).

.84 National Fire Code of Canada (NFC).

.85 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

.86 National Floor Covering Association (NFCA).



.87 National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA).

.88 National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA).

.89 National Plumbing Code of Canada (NPC).

.90 National Research Council Canada (NRC).

.91 National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA).

.92 National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).

.93 Newfoundland Occupational Health and Safety Act.

.94 Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI).

.95 Province of Newfoundland and Labrador Building Accessibility Regulations.

.96 Provincial Boiler, Pressure Vessel and Compressed Gas Regulations.

.97 Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (SEFA).

.98 Sealant and Waterproofer’s Institute.

.99 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association (SMACNA).

.100 Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE).

.101 The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC).

.102 South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD).

.103 Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM).

.104 Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA).

.105 Terrazzo Tile and Marble Association of Canada (TTMAC).

.106 Thermal Insulation Association of Canada (TIAC).

.107 Transport Canada (TC).

.108 Transport Canada - Marine Safety (TCMS).

.109 Treasury Board of Canada (TB).

.110 Treasury Board Information Technology Standard (TBITS).

.111 Truss Plate Institute of Canada (TPIC).

.112 Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. (UL).

.113 Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC).

.114 United States Federal Trade Commission (US Federal Trade Commission).

.115 U.S. Coast Guard Equipment List (USCG).

.116 U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT).



END OF SECTION


Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTIONS INCLUDE

.1 Inspection and testing, administrative and enforcement requirements.

.2 Tests and mix designs.

.3 Mock-ups.

.4 Mill tests.

.5 Equipment and system adjust and balance.


.1 Section 01 21 00 – Allowances.

.2 Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures

.3 Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals

1.3 INSPECTION

.1 Allow Owner’s Representative access to Work. If part of Work is in preparation at locations other than Place of Work, allow access to such Work whenever it is in progress.

.2 Give timely notice requesting inspection if Work is designated for special tests, inspections or approvals by Owner’s Representative instructions.

.3 If Contractor covers or permits to be covered Work that has been designated for special tests, inspections or approvals before such is made, uncover such Work, have inspections or tests satisfactorily completed and make good such Work.

.4 Owner’s Representative may order any part of Work to be examined if Work is suspected to be not in accordance with Contract Documents. If, upon examination such work is found not in accordance with Contract Documents, correct such Work and pay cost of examination and correction. If such Work is found in accordance with Contract Documents, Owner’s Representative shall pay cost of examination and replacement.

1.4 INDEPENDENT INSPECTION AGENCIES

.1 Independent Inspection/Testing Agencies may be engaged by Owner’s Representative for purpose of inspecting and/or testing portions of Work.

.2 Allocated costs: to Section 01 21 00 – Allowances and Section 01 29 83 – Payment Procedures: Testing Laboratory Services.



.3 Provide equipment required for executing inspection and testing by appointed agencies.

.4 Employment of inspection/testing agencies does not relax responsibility to perform Work in accordance with Contract Documents.

.5 If defects are revealed during inspection and/or testing, appointed agency will request additional inspection and/or testing to ascertain full degree of defect. Correct defect and irregularities as advised by Owner’s Representative at no cost to Owner’s Representative. Pay costs for retesting and reinspection.

1.5 ACCESS TO WORK

.1 Allow inspection/testing agencies access to Work, off site manufacturing and fabrication plants.

.2 Co-operate to provide reasonable facilities for such access.

1.6 PROCEDURES

.1 Notify appropriate agency and Owner’s Representative in advance of requirement for tests, in order that attendance arrangements can be made.

.2 Submit samples and/or materials required for testing, as specifically requested in specifications. Submit with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence so as not to cause delay in Work.

.3 Provide labour and facilities to obtain and handle samples and materials on site. Provide sufficient space to store and cure test samples.

1.7 REJECTED WORK

.1 Remove defective Work, whether result of poor workmanship, use of defective products or damage and whether incorporated in Work or not, which has been rejected by Owner’s Representative as failing to conform to Contract Documents. Replace or re-execute in accordance with Contract Documents.

.2 Make good other Contractor's work damaged by such removals or replacements promptly.

.3 If in opinion of Owner’s Representative it is not expedient to correct defective Work or Work not performed in accordance with Contract Documents, Owner may deduct from Contract Price difference in value between Work performed and that called for by Contract Documents, amount of which shall be determined by Owner’s Representative.

1.8 REPORTS

.1 Submit 3 copies of inspection and test reports to Owner’s Representative, plus electronic copies in PDF format.



.2 Provide copy to Subcontractor of work being inspected or tested, manufacturer or fabricator of material being inspected or tested.

.3 Include copy of all inspection and test reports in Commissioning Manuals.

1.9 MOCK-UPS

.1 Prepare mock-ups for Work specifically requested in specifications. Include for Work of all Sections required to provide mock-ups.

.2 Construct in all locations acceptable to Owner’s Representative as specified in specific Section.

.3 Prepare mock-ups for Owner’s Representative review with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence, so as not to cause any delay in Work.

.4 Failure to prepare mock-ups in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for an extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.

.5 Remove mock-up at conclusion of Work or when acceptable to Owner’s Representative

.6 Specification section identifies whether mock-up may remain as part of Work or if it is to be removed and when.

.7 Reviewed and accepted mock-ups will become standards of workmanship and material against which installed work will be verified.

.8 Mock-ups may remain as part of Work.

1.10 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

.1 Submit adjustment and balancing reports for mechanical, electrical and building equipment systems.

.2 Mechanical – coordinate with mechanical division.

.3 Electrical – Coordinate with electrical division.



END OF SECTION

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 01 51 00 – Temporary Utilities Page 1 of 4

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Section 01 52 00 - Construction Facilities.


1.2 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

.1 Provide temporary utilities controls in order to execute work expeditiously.

.2 Remove from site all such work after use.

1.3 DEWATERING

.1 Provide temporary drainage and pumping facilities to keep excavations and site free from standing water.

1.4 WATER SUPPLY

.1 Existing water supply may be available.

1.5 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATION

.1 Existing heating may be available. Pay for costs of temporary ventilation used during construction, including costs of installation, fuel operation, maintenance and removal of equipment. Use of direct, fired heaters discharging waste products into work areas will not be permitted unless prior approval is given by Owner’s Representative. Isolate and shut down existing ventilation systems during the work. Reconnect after the work.

.2 Construction heaters used inside building must be vented to outside or be non-flameless type. Solid fuel salamanders are not permitted.

.3 Provide temporary heat and ventilation in enclosed areas as required to:

.1 Facilitate progress of Work.

.2 Protect Work and products against dampness and cold.

.3 Prevent moisture condensation on surfaces.

.4 Provide ambient temperatures and humidity levels for storage, installation and curing of materials.

.5 Provide adequate ventilation to meet health regulations for safe working environment.

.4 Maintain temperatures of minimum 10˚C and relative humidity less than 60% in areas where construction is in progress.


.1 Maintain minimum temperature of 10˚C or higher where specified as soon as finished work is commenced. Maintain until acceptance of structure by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Maintain ambient temperature and humidity levels as required for comfort of office personnel.

.5 Ventilating:

.1 Prevent accumulations of dust, fumes, mists, vapours or gases in areas occupied during construction.

.2 Provide local exhaust ventilation to prevent harmful accumulation of hazardous substances into atmosphere of occupied areas.

.3 Dispose of exhaust materials in manner that will not result in harmful exposure to persons.

.4 Ventilate storage spaces containing hazardous or volatile materials.

.5 Ventilate temporary sanitary facilities.

.6 Continue operation of ventilation and exhaust system for time after cessation of work process to assure removal of harmful contaminants.

.6 Maintain strict supervision of operation of temporary heating and ventilating equipment to:

.1 Conform with applicable codes and standards.

.2 Enforce safe practices.

.3 Prevent abuse of services.

.4 Prevent damage to finishes.

.5 Do not use direct-fired combustion units.

.7 Be responsible for damage to Work due to failure in providing adequate heat, humidity and protection during construction.

.8 Use of new or existing systems for temporary heating, ventilating or air conditioning will not be permitted.

1.6 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHT

.1 Existing power may be available. Provide temporary construction lighting and power systems.

.2 Temporary power for electric cranes and other equipment requiring in excess of above is responsibility of Contractor.

.3 Provide and maintain temporary lighting throughout project. Ensure level of illumination on all floors and stairs is not less than 162 lx. Temporary lighting to consist of wiring, pig tail sockets and 75 watt shatterproof incandescent lamps to provide a minimum light level of 162 lux.


.4 Electrical power and lighting systems installed under this contract may be used for construction requirements only with prior approval of Owner’s Representative provided that guarantees are not affected. Make good damage to electrical system caused by use under this contract. Replace lamps which have been used for more than 3 months.

.5 General contractor responsible for payment of all electrical energy charges associated with temporary power up to date of substantial completion.

1.7 FIRE AND EMERGENCY PROTECTION

.1 Provide and maintain temporary fire protection equipment and emergency systems during performance of Work required by insurance companies having jurisdiction and governing codes, regulations and bylaws. Maintain existing fire protection.

.2 Burning rubbish and construction waste materials is not permitted on site.

.3 Maintain emergency exits, provide temporary facilities as required.

1.8 SANITARY FACILITIES

.1 Provide sanitary facilities for work force in accordance with governing regulations and ordinances.

.2 Post notices and take precautions as required by local health authorities. Keep area and premises in sanitary condition.

.3 When permanent water and drain connections are completed, provide temporary water closets and urinals complete with temporary enclosures, inside building. Permanent facilities may be used on approval of Owner’s Representative.

1.9 TEMPORARY COMMUNICATION FACILITIES

.1 Provide and pay for cellular telephone, and portable email necessary for own use.

1.10 SITE SIGN AND NOTICES

.1 Provide all required safety and directional signage.

1.11 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES

.1 Remove temporary facilities from site when directed by Owner’s Representative.

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 01 51 00 – Temporary Utilities Page 4 of 4 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)


END OF SECTION


Section 01 52 00 – Construction Facilities Page 1 of 2

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Construction aids.

.2 Sheds.

.3 Parking.


.1 Section 01 35 29.06 – Health and Safety Requirements

.2 Section 01 51 00 - Temporary Utilities.



.1 Provide construction facilities in order to execute work expeditiously.


1.4 SCAFFOLDING

.1 Provide and maintain scaffolding in rigid, secure and safe manner.

.2 Erect scaffolding independent of walls. Remove promptly when no longer required. Refer to Section 01 35 29.06 – Health and Safety Requirements.

1.5 HOISTING

.1 Provide, operate and maintain hoists cranes required for moving of workers, materials and equipment. Make financial arrangements with Subcontractors for use thereof.

.2 Hoists cranes shall be operated by certified operator.

1.6 SITE STORAGE/LOADING

.1 Confine work and operations of employees by Contract Documents. Do not unreasonably encumber premises with products.

.2 Do not load or permit to load any part of Work with a weight or force that will endanger the Work.


Section 01 52 00 – Construction Facilities Page 2 of 2

1.7 CONSTRUCTION PARKING

.1 Parking will be permitted on site provided it does not disrupt performance of work.

.2 Provide and maintain adequate access to project site.

.3 If authorized to use existing roads for access to project site, maintain such roads for duration of Contract and make good damage resulting from Contractor’s use of roads.

1.8 EQUIPMENT, TOOL AND MATERIALS STORAGE

.1 Provide and maintain, in a clean and orderly condition, lockable weatherproof sheds for storage of tools, equipment and materials.

.2 Locate materials not required to be stored in weatherproof sheds on site in a manner to cause least interference with work activities.

1.9 SANITARY FACILITIES

.1 Provide sanitary facilities for work force in accordance with governing regulations and ordinances.

.2 Post notices and take precautions as required by local health authorities. Keep area and premises in sanitary condition.

1.10 CLEAN-UP

.1 Remove construction debris, waste materials, packaging material from work site daily.

.2 Clean dirt or mud tracked onto paved or surfaced roadways.

.3 Store materials resulting from demolition activities that are salvageable.



END OF SECTION


Section 01 56 00 Temporary Barriers and Enclosures Page 1 of 2

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Barriers.

.2 Environmental Controls.

.3 Traffic Controls.

.4 Fire Routes.


.1 Section 01 51 00 – Temporary Utilities.

.2 Section 01 52 00 – Construction Facilities.


.1 Provide temporary controls in order to execute Work expeditiously.


1.4 GUARD RAILS AND BARRICADES

.1 Provide secure, rigid guard rails and barricades around deep excavations, open shafts, open stair wells, open edges of floors.

.2 Provide as required by governing authorities.

1.5 WEATHER ENCLOSURES

.1 Provide weather tight closures to unfinished door and window openings, tops of shafts and other openings in floors.

.2 Close off floor areas where walls are not finished; seal off other openings; enclose building interior work for temporary heat.

.3 Erect enclosures to allow access for installation of materials and working inside enclosure.

.4 Design enclosures to withstand wind pressure and snow loading.

1.6 DUST TIGHT SCREENS

.1 Provide non-combustible dust tight screens or insulated partitions to localize dust generating activities, and for protection of workers, finished areas of Work and public.


Section 01 56 00 Temporary Barriers and Enclosures Page 2 of 2

.2 Maintain and relocate protection until such work is complete.

1.7 ACCESS TO SITE

.1 Provide and maintain access roads, sidewalk crossings, ramps and construction runways as may be required for access to Work.

.2 If authorized to use existing roads for access to project site, maintain such roads for duration of Contract and make good damage resulting from Contractor’s use of roads.

1.8 PUBLIC TRAFFIC FLOW

.1 Provide and maintain competent signal flag operators, traffic signals, barricades and flares, lights, or lanterns as required to perform Work and protect the public.

1.9 FIRE ROUTES

.1 Maintain access to property including overhead clearances for use by emergency response vehicles.

1.10 PROTECTION FOR OFF-SITE AND PUBLIC PROPERTY

.1 Protect surrounding private and public property from damage during performance of Work.

.2 Be responsible for damage incurred.

1.11 PROTECTION OF BUILDING FINISHES

.1 Provide protection for finished and partially finished building finishes and equipment during performance of Work.

.2 Provide necessary screens, covers, and hoardings.

.3 Confirm with Owner’s Representative locations and installation schedule 3 days prior to installation.

.4 Be responsible for damage incurred due to lack of or improper protection.



END OF SECTION


Section 01 61 00 – Common Product Requirements Page 1 of 6

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Product quality, availability, storage, handling, protection, and transportation.

.2 Manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Quality of Work, coordination and fastenings.


.1 Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control.

.2 Section 01 73 00 – Execution.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Within text of each specifications section, reference may be made to reference standards. Conform to these reference standards, in whole or in part as specifically requested in specifications.

.2 Conform to latest date of issue of referenced standards in effect on date of submission of Tenders, except where specific date or issue is specifically noted.

1.4 QUALITY

.1 Products, materials, equipment and articles (referred to as products throughout specifications) incorporated in Work shall be new, not damaged or defective, and of best quality (compatible with specifications) for purpose intended. If requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of products provided.

.2 Defective products, whenever identified prior to completion of Work, will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Inspection does not relieve responsibility, but is precaution against oversight or error. Remove and replace defective products at own expense and be responsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection.

.3 Should any dispute arise as to quality or fitness of products, decision rests strictly with Owner’s Representative based upon requirements of Contract Documents.

.4 Within 7 (seven) days of written request by Owner’s Representative, submit following information for material and equipment proposed for supply:

.1 Name and address of manufacturer.

.2 trade name, model and catalogue number,

.3 performance, descriptive and test data,

.4 manufacturer’s installation or application instructions,



.5 evidence of arrangements to procure.

.5 Use products of one manufacturer for material and equipment of same type or classification unless otherwise specified.

.6 Permanent labels, trademarks and nameplates on products are not acceptable in prominent locations, except where required for operating instructions, or when located in mechanical or electrical rooms.

1.5 AVAILABILITY

.1 Immediately upon signing Contract, review product delivery requirements and anticipate foreseeable supply delays for any items. If delays in supply of products are foreseeable, notify Owner’s Representative of such, in order that substitutions or other remedial action may be authorized in ample time to prevent delay in performance of work.

.2 In event of failure to notify Owner’s Representative at commencement of Work and should it subsequently appear that Work may be delayed for such reason, Owner’s Representative reserves right to substitute more readily available products of similar character, at no increase in Contract Price or Contract Time.

1.6 STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION

.1 Handle and store products in manner to prevent damage, adulteration, deterioration and soiling and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions when applicable.

.2 Store packaged or bundled products in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer's seal and labels intact. Do not remove from packaging or bundling until required in Work.

.3 Store products subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.

.4 Store cementitious products clear of earth or concrete floors, and away from walls.

.5 Keep sand, when used for grout or mortar materials, clean and dry. Store sand on wooden platforms and cover with waterproof tarpaulins during inclement weather.

.6 Store sheet materials, lumber on flat, solid supports and keep clear of ground. Slope to shed moisture.

.7 Store and mix paints in heated and ventilated room. Remove oily rags and other combustible debris from site daily. Take every precaution necessary to prevent spontaneous combustion.

.8 Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and to satisfaction of Owner’s Representative.

.9 Touch-up damaged factory finished surfaces to Owner’s Representative satisfaction. Use touch-up materials to match original. Do not paint over name plates.


Section 01 61 00 – Common Product Requirements Page 3 of 6 1.7 TRANSPORTATION

.1 Pay costs of transportation of products required in performance of Work.

1.8 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, install or erect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not rely on labels or enclosures provided with products. Obtain written instructions directly from manufacturers.

.2 Notify Owner’s Representative in writing, of conflicts between specifications and manufacturer's instructions, so that Owner’s Representative may establish course of action.

.3 Improper installation or erection of products, due to failure in complying with these requirements, authorizes Owner’s Representative to require removal and re-installation at no increase in Contract Price or Contract Time.

1.9 QUALITY OF WORK

.1 Ensure Quality of Work is of highest standard, executed by workers experienced and skilled in respective duties for which they are employed. Immediately notify Owner’s Representative if required Work is such as to make it impractical to produce required results.

.2 Do not employ anyone unskilled in their required duties. Owner’s Representative reserves right to require dismissal from site, workers deemed incompetent or careless.

.3 Decisions as to standard or fitness of Quality of Work in cases of dispute rest solely with Owner’s Representative, whose decision is final.

1.10 CO-ORDINATION

.1 Ensure cooperation of workers in laying out Work. Maintain efficient and continuous supervision.

.2 Be responsible for coordination and placement of openings, sleeves and accessories.

1.11 CONCEALMENT

.1 In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floors, walls and ceilings, except where indicated otherwise.

.2 Before installation, inform Owner’s Representative if there is interference. Install as directed by Owner’s Representative.

1.12 REMEDIAL WORK

.1 Perform remedial work required to repair or replace parts or portions of Work identified as defective or unacceptable. Coordinate adjacent affected Work as required.



.2 Perform remedial work by specialists familiar with materials affected. Perform in a manner to neither damage nor put at risk any portion of Work.

1.13 LOCATION OF FIXTURES

.1 Consider location of fixtures, outlets, and mechanical and electrical items indicated as approximate.

.2 Locate equipment, fixtures and distribution systems to provide minimum interference and maximum usable space and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations for safety, access and maintenance.

.3 Inform Owner’s Representative of conflicting installation. Install as directed.

.4 Submit field drawings to indicate relative position of various services and equipment when required by Owner’s Representative.

1.14 FASTENINGS GENERAL

.1 Provide metal fastenings and accessories in same texture, colour and finish as base metal in which they occur. Prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals. Use non-corrosive fasteners, anchors and spacers for securing exterior work, unless stainless steel or other material is specifically requested in affected specification section.

.2 Space anchors within individual load limit or shear capacity and ensure they provide positive permanent anchorage. Wood plugs are not acceptable.

.3 Conceal fasteners where indicated. Space evenly and lay out neatly.

.4 Fastenings which cause Spalding or cracking are not acceptable.

.5 Obtain Owner’s Representative’s approval before using explosive actuated fastening devices. If approval is obtained comply with CSA Z166.

1.15 FASTENINGS - EQUIPMENT

.1 Use fastenings of standard commercial sizes and patterns with material and finish suitable for service.

.2 Use heavy hexagon heads, semi-finished unless otherwise specified. Use No. 304 stainless steel for exterior areas.

.3 Bolts may not project more than one diameter beyond nuts.

.4 Use plain type washers on equipment, sheet metal and soft gasket lock type washers where vibrations occur. Use resilient washers with stainless steel.


Section 01 61 00 – Common Product Requirements Page 5 of 6 1.16 PROTECTION OF WORK IN PROGRESS

.1 Prevent overloading of any part of building. Do not cut, drill or sleeve any load bearing structural member, unless specifically indicated without written approval of Owner’s Representative.

1.17 EXISTING UTILITIES

.1 When breaking into or connecting to existing services or utilities, execute work at times directed by local governing authorities, with minimum of disturbance to work.

.2 Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services. When services are encountered, cap off in manner approved by authority having jurisdiction. Stake and record location of capped service.

.3 Submit schedule to and obtain approval from Owner’s Representative for any shut-down or closure of active services or facility. Adhere to approved schedule and provide notice to affected parties.

.4 Where unknown services are encountered, immediately advise Owner’s Representative and confirm findings in writing.

.5 Remove abandoned services lines within 2m of structures. Cap or otherwise seal lines at cut-off points as directed by Owner’s Representative.

1.18 SELECTION OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

.1 Material and equipment will be specified in the tender documents, and selected by Contractor, by one or more of the following methods:

.1 Specification by reference to a relevant Standard, such as CSA, ASTM, ULC, etc., select any material or equipment that meets or exceeds the specified.

.2 Specification by reference to an accepted product evaluation publication, such as the CGSB “Qualified Products List”, or CCMC Registry of Product Evaluations”, - select any manufacturer’s product so listed.

.3 Specification by Prescriptive or Performance specification – select any material or equipment meeting or exceeding specification.

.4 Specification by identification of one or more Manufacturer’s specific product(s) as an “Acceptable Product”, along with a listing of other manufacturers who may offer equivalent products – select any product so named, or select from equivalent product(s) of other listed manufacturers.

.2 “Acceptable Product” is deemed to be a complete and working commodity as described by a manufacturer’s name, catalogue number, trade name, or any combination thereof, and will constitute the minimum standard of acceptance.

.3 Owner’s Representative will determine acceptability of Contractor’s selection of material and equipment at time of Shop Drawing review.



.4 When material or equipment is specified by a Standard, Prescriptive or Performance specification, upon request of the Owner’s Representative, obtain from manufacturer an independent laboratory reporting, showing that material or equipment meets or exceeds the specified requirements.

1.19 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

.1 Prior to Tender closing bidders may propose addition of other manufacturer’s names to those listed in the tender documents providing requests are made in writing at least 7 days prior to tender closing date or bid depository where bid depository is used. Owner’s Representative will inform all prospective bidders of decision by addendum, issued at least 5 days prior to the tender closing date.

Where no manufacturer’s names are listed, the onus is on contractor to provide material and equipment to meet performance specification.

.2 After Contract award substitutions of material or equipment, other than as selected by Contractor from those specified, will be considered by Owner’s Representative only if:

.1 material or equipment selected from those specified are not available

.2 delivery date of material or equipment selected from those specified would unduly delay completion of the Contract; or

.3 alternative material or equipment to those specified, provided they are determined by the Owner’s Representative to be equivalent to or better that those specified, will result in a credit to the Contract amount.

.3 Requests for substitutions after Contract award must be accompanied by sufficient information in the form of shop drawings, manufacturer’s literature, samples or other data to permit proper investigation of the substitutes used. Requests must also include statements of respective costs of material or equipment originally specified and the proposed substitution.

.4 Should a proposed substitution be accepted after Contract award either in part or in whole, assume full responsibility and costs when substitution affects other work on Project. Contractor to pay for design or drawing changes required as a result of the substitution.

.5 Amounts of all credits arising from approval of substitutions after Contract award will be determined by Owner’s Representative and the Contract amount will be reduced accordingly.



END OF SECTION


Section 01 71 00 – Examination and Preparation Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Survey services to establish and confirm inverts for Work.

.2 Recording of subsurface conditions found.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF SURVEYOR

.1 Qualified registered land surveyor, licensed to practise in the Province of Newfoundland and Labrador.

1.3 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS

.1 Existing base horizontal and vertical control points are designated on drawings.

.2 Locate, confirm and protect control points prior to starting site work. Preserve permanent reference points during construction.

.3 Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice to Owner’s Representative.

.4 Report to Owner’s Representative when reference point is lost or destroyed, or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations.

.5 Require surveyor to replace control points in accordance with original survey control.

1.4 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Establish permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established bench marks by survey control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data in Project Record Documents.

.2 Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out, by instrumentation.

.3 Establish pipe invert elevations.

.4 Establish foundation column locations and floor elevations.

.5 Establish lines and levels for mechanical and electrical work.

1.5 EXISTING SERVICES

.1 Where work involves breaking into or connecting to existing services, carry out work at times directed by authorities having jurisdiction, with minimum of disturbance to pedestrian and vehicular traffic.

.2 Before commencing work, establish location and extent of service lines in area of Work and notify Owner’s Representative of findings.


Section 01 71 00 – Examination and Preparation Page 2 of 3 .3 Remove abandoned service lines within 2 m of structures. Cap or otherwise seal lines at

cut-off points as directed by Owner’s Representative.

1.6 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES

.1 Location of equipment, fixtures and outlets indicated or specified are to be considered as approximate.

.2 Locate equipment, fixtures and distribution systems to provide minimum interference and maximum usable space and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for safety, access and maintenance.

.3 Inform Owner’s Representative of impending installation and obtain approval for actual location.

.4 Submit field drawings to indicate relative position of various services and equipment when required by Owner’s Representative.

1.7 RECORDS

.1 Maintain a complete, accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.

.2 Record locations of maintained, re-routed and abandoned service lines.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit name and address of Surveyor to Owner’s Representative.

.2 On request of Owner’s Representative, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work.

.3 Submit certificate signed by surveyor certifying and noting those elevations and locations of completed Work that conform and do not conform with Contract Documents.

1.9 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

.1 Promptly notify Consultant in writing if subsurface conditions at Place of Work differ materially from those indicated in Contract Documents, or a reasonable assumption of probable conditions based thereon.

.2 After prompt investigation, should Owner’s Representative determine that conditions do differ materially, instructions will be issued for changes in Work.


Section 01 71 00 – Examination and Preparation Page 3 of 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)


END OF SECTION

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 01 73 00 – Execution Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching the Work.


.1 Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work.

.2 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:

.1 Structural integrity of any element of Project.

.2 Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.

.3 Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.

.4 Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.

.5 Work of Owner or separate contractor.

.2 Include in request:

.1 Identification of Project.

.2 Location and description of affected Work.

.3 Statement on necessity for cutting or alteration.

.4 Description of proposed Work, and products to be used.

.5 Alternatives to cutting and patching.

.6 Effect on Work of Owner or separate contractor.

.7 Written permission of affected separate contractor.

.8 Date and time work will be executed.

1.4 PREPARATION

.1 Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching.

.2 After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of Work.

.3 Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

.4 Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings; provide devices and methods to protect other portions of project from damage.

.5 Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work; maintain excavations free of water.

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 01 73 00 – Execution Page 2 of 3

.6 Obtain Owner’s Representative’s approval before cutting, boring or sleeving load-bearing members.

1.5 EXECUTION

.1 Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work.

.2 Fit several parts together, to integrate with other Work.

.3 Uncover Work to install ill-timed Work.

.4 Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work.

.5 Provide openings in non-structural elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work.

.6 Execute Work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

.7 Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for weather-exposed and moisture-resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces.

.8 Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic or impact tools not allowed on masonry work without prior approval.

.9 Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

.10 Fit Work to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

.11 At penetration of fire rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with firestopping material in accordance with Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping, full thickness of the construction element.

.12 Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes: For continuous surfaces refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit.

.13 Conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floor, wall and ceiling construction of finished areas except where indicated otherwise.

.14 Make cuts with clean, true, smooth edges.

.15 Where new work connects with existing, and where existing work is altered, cut, patch and make good to match existing work.

1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 Separate waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 – Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 01 73 00 – Execution Page 3 of 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)


END OF SECTION

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 01 74 11 – Cleaning Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

.1 Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws.

.2 Store volatile waste in covered metal containers and remove from premises at end of each working day.

.3 Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. Use for building ventilation systems is not permitted for this purpose.

1.2 RELATED SECTION


1.3 PROJECT CLEANLINESS

.1 Maintain Work in tidy condition, free from accumulation of waste products and debris, other than that caused by Owner or other Contractors.

.2 Remove waste materials and debris from site at the end of each working day. Do not burn waste materials on site.

.3 Clear snow and ice from access to building.

.4 Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for disposal of waste and debris.

.5 Provide on-site covered, locked steel dumpster containers for collection of waste materials and debris.

.6 Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations.

.7 Seal work area to prevent construction dust and dirt and gases from migrating to occupied areas.

.8 Store volatile waste in covered, locked metal containers, and remove from premises at end of each working day.

.9 Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. Use of building ventilation systems is not permitted for this purpose.

.10 Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned, and as recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.


.11 Schedule cleaning operations so that resulting dust, debris and other contaminants will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces nor contaminate building systems.

1.4 FINAL CLEANING

.1 Refer to General Conditions.

.2 When Work is Substantially Performed, remove surplus products, tools, construction machinery and equipment not required for performance of remaining Work.

.3 Remove waste products and debris other than that caused by others, and leave Work clean and suitable for occupancy.

.4 When the Work is Totally Performed, remove surplus products, tools, construction machinery and equipment. Remove waste products and debris other than that caused by the Owner or other Contractors.

.5 Remove waste materials from the site at regularly scheduled times or dispose of as directed by the Owner’s Representative. Do not burn waste materials on site.

.6 Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for disposal of waste and debris.

.7 Leave the work broom clean before the inspection process commences.

.8 Clean and polish glass, mirrors, hardware, wall tile, stainless steel, chrome, porcelain enamel, baked enamel, plastic laminate, and mechanical and electrical fixtures. Replace broken, scratched or disfigured glass.

.9 Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorative work, electrical and mechanical fixtures, furniture fitments, walls, floors and ceilings.

.10 Clean lighting reflectors, lenses, and other lighting surfaces.

.11 Vacuum clean and dust building interiors, behind grilles, louvres and screens.

.12 Wax, seal, shampoo or prepare floor finishes, as recommended by manufacturer.

.13 Inspect finishes, fitments and equipment and ensure specified workmanship and operation.

.14 Broom clean and wash exterior walks, steps and surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds.

.15 Remove dirt and other disfiguration from exterior surfaces.

.16 Clean and sweep roofs.

.17 Sweep and wash clean paved areas.


.18 Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition; clean or replace filters of mechanical equipment.

.19 Remove snow and ice from access to building.


.1 Separate waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.



END OF SECTION

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 01 74 21 – Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Text, schedules and procedures for systematic Waste Management Program for construction, deconstruction, demolition, and renovation projects, including:

.1 Diversion of Materials.

.2 Waste Audit (WA) - Schedule A.

.3 Waste Reduction Workplan (WRW) - Schedule B.

.4 Demolition Waste Audit (DWA) - Schedule C.

.5 Materials Source Separation Program (MSSP).

.6 Canadian Governmental Responsibility for the Environment Resources - Schedule E.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

.1 Demolition Waste Audit (DWA): Relates to actual waste generated from project.

.2 Materials Source Separation Program (MSSP): Consists of series of ongoing activities to separate reusable and recyclable waste material into material categories from other types of waste at point of generation.

.3 Recyclable: Ability of product or material to be recovered at end of its life cycle and re-manufactured into new product for reuse by others.

.4 Recycle: Process by which waste and recyclable materials are transformed or collected for purpose of being transferred into new products.

.5 Recycling: Process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials for purpose of using in altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste.

.6 Reuse: Repeated use of product in same form but not necessarily for same purpose. Reuse includes:

.1 Salvaging reusable materials from re-modelling projects, before demolition stage, for resale, reuse on current project or for storage for use on future projects.

.2 Returning reusable items including pallets or unused products to vendors.

.7 Salvage: Removal of structural and non-structural materials from deconstruction/disassembly projects for purpose of reuse or recycling.

.8 Separate Condition: Refers to waste sorted into individual types.

.9 Source Separation: Acts of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from first time they became waste.


1.3 MATERIALS SOURCE SEPARATION PROGRAM (MSSP)

.1 Prepare MSSP and have ready for use prior to project start-up.

.2 Implement MSSP for waste generated on project in compliance with approved methods and as reviewed by authorities having jurisdiction.

.3 Provide on-site facilities for collection, handling, and storage of anticipated quantities of reusable and recyclable materials.

.4 Provide containers to deposit reusable and recyclable materials.

.5 Locate containers in locations, to facilitate deposit of materials without hindering daily operations.

.6 Locate separated materials in areas which minimize material damage.

.7 Collect, handle, store on-site, and transport off-site, salvaged materials in separate condition.

.1 Transport to recycling facility.


.1 Unless specified otherwise, materials for removal become Contractor's property.

.2 Protect, stockpile, store and catalogue salvaged items.

.3 Separate non-salvageable materials from salvaged items. Transport and deliver non-salvageable items to approved local facility.

.4 Protect structural components not removed for demolition from movement or damage.

.5 Support affected structures. If safety of building is endangered, cease operations and immediately notify Department having jurisdiction.

.6 Protect surface drainage, mechanical and electrical from damage and blockage.

.7 Separate and store materials produced during dismantling of structures in designated areas.

.8 Prevent contamination of materials to be salvaged and recycled and handle materials in accordance with requirements for acceptance by designated facilities.

.1 On-site source separation is recommended.

1.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTES

.1 Do not bury rubbish or waste materials.

.2 Do not dispose of any waste into waterways, storm, or sanitary sewers.


.3 Remove materials from deconstruction as deconstruction/disassembly Work progresses.

.4 Prepare project summary to verify destination and quantities on a material-by-material basis as identified in pre-demolition material audit.

1.6 USE OF SITE AND FACILITIES

.1 Execute work with least possible interference or disturbance to normal use of premises.

.2 Provide security measures approved by Owner’s Representative.

1.7 SCHEDULING

.1 Coordinate Work with other activities at site to ensure timely and orderly progress of Work.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

.1 Handle waste materials not reused, salvaged, or recycled in accordance with appropriate regulations and codes.

3.2 CLEANING

.1 Remove tools and waste materials on completion of Work, and leave work area in clean and orderly condition.

.2 Clean-up work area as work progresses.

.3 Source separate materials to be reused/recycled into specified sort areas off site.

3.3 DIVERSION OF MATERIALS

.1 From following list, separate materials from general waste stream and stockpile in separate piles or containers off site.

.1 Mark containers or stockpile areas.

.2 Provide instruction on disposal practices.

.2 On-site sale or distribution of salvaged materials to third parties is not permitted. END OF SECTION

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures Page 1 of 2

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.

.2 Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.3 Section 01 91 13 – General Commissioning (Cx) Requirements.

1.2 FINAL INSPECTION AND DECLARATION PROCEDURES

.1 Contractor's Inspection: The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall conduct an inspection of Work, identify deficiencies and defects; repair as required. Notify the Owner’s Representative in writing of satisfactory completion of the Contractor's Inspection and that corrections have been made. Request an Owner’s Representative’s Consultant's Inspection.

.2 Owner’s Representative’s Inspection: Owner’s Representative and the Contractor will perform an inspection of the Work to identify obvious defects or deficiencies. The contractor shall correct Work accordingly.

.3 Completion: submit written certificate that the following have been performed:

.1 Work has been completed and inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.

.2 Defects have been corrected and deficiencies have been completed.

.3 Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced and are fully operational.

.4 Certificates required by Fire Commissioner, Utility companies have been submitted.

.5 Operation of systems have been demonstrated to Owner's personnel.

.6 Work is complete and ready for Final Inspection.

.4 Final Inspection: When items noted above are completed, request final inspection of Work by the Owner’s Representative, and the Contractor. If Work is deemed incomplete by the Owner’s Representative, complete outstanding items and request a reinspection.

.5 Declaration of Substantial Performance: When the Owner’s Representative considers deficiencies and defects have been corrected and it appears requirements of Contract have been substantially performed, make application for Certificate of Substantial Performance. Refer to General Conditions for specifics to application.

.6 Commencement of Lien and Warranty Periods: The date of DTW acceptance of the submitted declaration of Substantial Performance shall be the date for commencement for the warranty period and commencement of the lien period.

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures Page 2 of 2

.7 Declaration of Total Performance: When the Owner’s Representative considers final deficiencies and defects have been corrected and it appears requirements of the Contract have been totally performed, make application for certificate of Total Performance. Refer to General Conditions for specifics to application. If Work is deemed incomplete by the Consultant, complete the outstanding items and request a reinspection.

1.3 REINSPECTION

.1 Should status of work require reinspection by Owner’s Representative due to failure of work to comply with Contractor’s claims for inspection, Owner will deduct amount of compensation for reinspection services from payment to Contractor.



END OF SECTION


Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals Page 1 of 8

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 As-built, samples, and specifications.

.2 Equipment and systems.

.3 Product data, materials and finishes, and related information.

.4 Operation and maintenance data.

.5 Spare parts, special tools and maintenance materials.

.6 Warranties and bonds.


.1 Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

.2 Section 01 45 00- Quality Control.

.3 Section 01 71 00 – Examination and Preparation.


.5 Section 01 91 13 – General Commissioning (Cx) Requirements.

1.3 SUBMISSION

.1 Prepare instructions and data using personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products.

.2 Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection.

.3 Copy will be returned after final inspection, with Owner’s Representative’s comments.

.4 Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal.

.5 Two weeks prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, submit to the Owner’s Representative, two final copies of operating and maintenance manuals.

.6 Ensure spare parts, maintenance materials and special tools provided are new, undamaged or defective, and of same quality and manufacture as products provided in Work.

.7 If requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of products provided.


Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals Page 2 of 8 .8 Defective products will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Replace products

at own expense.

.9 Pay costs of transportation.

1.4 FORMAT

.1 Organize data in the form of an instructional manual.

.2 Binders: vinyl, hard covered, 3 'D' ring, loose leaf 219 x 279 mm with spine and face pockets.

.3 When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. Identify contents of each binder on spine.

.4 Cover: Identify each binder with type or printed title 'Project Record Documents'; list title of project and identify subject matter of contents.

.5 Arrange content under Section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents.

.6 Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment.

.7 Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data.

.8 Drawings: provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages.

.9 Provide CAD files in DWG format on CD. Also provide electronic files in PDF format.

1.5 CONTENTS - EACH VOLUME

.1 Table of Contents: provide title of project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Consultant and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of volume.

.2 For each product or system:

.1 List names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.

.3 Product Data: mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation; delete inapplicable information.

.4 Drawings: supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams.

.5 Typewritten Text: as required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions specified in Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.


Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals Page 3 of 8 .6 Training: Refer to Section 01 91 13 – General Commissioning (Cx) Requirements.

1.6 AS-BUILTS AND SAMPLES

.1 In addition to requirements in General Conditions, maintain at the site for Owner’s Representative one record copy of:

.1 Contract Drawings.

.2 Specifications.

.3 Addenda.

.4 Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.

.5 Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.

.6 Field test records.

.7 Inspection certificates.

.8 Manufacturer's certificates.

.2 Store record documents and samples in field office apart from documents used for construction. Provide files, racks, and secure storage.

.3 Label record documents and file in accordance with Section number listings in List of Contents of this Project Manual. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters.

.4 Maintain record documents in clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use record documents for construction purposes.

.5 Keep record documents and samples available for inspection by Owner’s Representative.

1.7 RECORDING ACTUAL SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Record information on set of blue line opaque drawings, provided by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining red color pens for recording information.

.3 Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal Work until required information is recorded.

.4 Contract Drawings and shop drawings: legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including:

.1 Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum.

.2 Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.

.3 Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction.

.4 Field changes of dimension and detail.

.5 Changes made by change orders.


Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals Page 4 of 8 .6 Details not on original Contract Drawings. .7 References to related shop drawings and modifications.

.5 Specifications: legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including:

.1 Manufacturer, trade name, and catalogue number of each product actually installed, particularly optional items and substitute items.

.2 Changes made by Addenda and change orders.

.6 Other Documents: submit manufacturer's certifications, inspection certifications, field test records, required by individual specifications sections.

.7 At completion of project provide all recorded information on print drawings or alternatively transfer to CAD files in DWG format. Submit DWG files, also with electronic files in PDF format as part of the Closeout Submittals..

1.8 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

.1 Each Item of Equipment and Each System: include description of unit or system, and component parts. Give function, normal operation characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.

.2 Panel board circuit directories: provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications.

.3 Include installed colour coded wiring diagrams.

.4 Operating Procedures: include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.

.5 Maintenance Requirements: include routine procedures and guide for trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.

.6 Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.

.7 Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.

.8 Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.

.9 Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance.

.10 Provide installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.

.11 Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with installed colour coded piping diagrams.

.12 Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams.


Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals Page 5 of 8 .13 Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended

quantities to be maintained in storage.

.14 Include test and balancing reports

.15 Additional requirements: As specified in individual specification sections.

1.9 MATERIALS AND FINISHES

.1 Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: include product data, with catalogue number, size, composition, and colour and texture designations. Provide information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.

.2 Instructions for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

.3 Moisture-protection and Weather-exposed Products: include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

.4 Additional Requirements: as specified in individual specifications sections.

1.10 SPARE PARTS

.1 Provide spare parts, in quantities specified in individual specification sections.

.2 Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work.

.3 Deliver to site location as directed; place and store.

.4 Receive and catalogue all items. Submit inventory listing to Owner’s Representative. Include approved listings in Maintenance Manual.

.5 Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to final payment.

1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

.1 Provide maintenance and extra materials, in quantities specified in individual specification sections.

.2 Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work.

.3 Deliver to site location as directed; place and store.


.5 Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to final payment.


Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals Page 6 of 8 1.12 SPECIAL TOOLS

.1 Provide special tools, in quantities specified in individual specification section.

.2 Provide items with tags identifying their associated function and equipment.

.3 Deliver to project site place and store.



.1 Store spare parts, maintenance materials, and special tools in manner to prevent damage or deterioration.

.2 Store in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer's seal and labels intact.

.3 Store components subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.

.4 Store paints and freezable materials in a heated and ventilated room.

.5 Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and to satisfaction of Owner’s Representative.

1.14 WARRANTIES AND BONDS

.1 Develop warranty management plan to contain information relevant to Warranties.

.2 Submit warranty management plan to Owner’s Representative’s approval.

.3 Warranty management plan to include required actions and documents to assure that Owner receives warranties to which it is entitled.

.4 Provide plan in narrative form and contain sufficient detail to make it suitable for use by future maintenance and repair personnel.

.5 Assemble approved information in binder and submit upon acceptance of work. Organize binder as follows:

.1 Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to Table of Contents listing.

.2 List subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.

.3 Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work.

.4 Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial Performance is determined.


Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals Page 7 of 8 .5 Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are

notarized. .6 Co-execute submittals when required. .7 Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.

.6 Include information contained in warranty management plan as follows:

.1 Roles and responsibilities of personnel associated with warranty process, including points of contact and telephone numbers within the organizations of Contractors, subcontractors, manufacturers or suppliers involved.

.2 Listing and status of delivery of Certificates of Warranty for extended warranty items, to include roofs, HVAC balancing, pumps, motors, transformers, and commissioned systems such as fire protection, alarm systems, sprinkler systems, lightning protection systems.

.3 Provide list for each warranted equipment, item, feature of construction or system indicating: .1 Name of item. .2 Model and serial numbers. .3 Location where installed. .4 Name and phone numbers of manufacturers or suppliers. .5 Names, addresses and telephone numbers of sources of spare parts. .6 Warranties and terms of warranty: include one-year overall warranty of

construction. Indicate items that have extended warranties and show separate warranty expiration dates.

.7 Cross-reference to warranty certificates as applicable.

.8 Starting point and duration of warranty period.

.9 Summary of maintenance procedures required to continue warranty in force.

.10 Cross-Reference to specific pertinent Operation and Maintenance manuals.

.11 Organization, names and phone numbers of persons to call for warranty service.

.12 Typical response time and repair time expected for various warranted equipment.

.4 Procedure and status of tagging of equipment covered by extended warranties.

.5 Post copies of instructions near selected pieces of equipment where operation is critical for warranty and/or safety reasons.

.7 Respond in a timely manner to oral or written notification of required construction warranty repair work.

.8 Written verification will follow oral instructions. Failure to respond will be cause for the Owner’s Representative to proceed with action against Contractor.


Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals Page 8 of 8 1.15 PRE-WARRANTY CONFERENCE

.1 Meet with Owner’s Representative to develop understanding of requirements of this section. Schedule meeting prior to contract completion, and at time designated by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Owner’s Representative will establish communication procedures for:

.1 Notification of construction warranty defects.

.2 Determine priorities for type of defect.

.3 Determine reasonable time for response.

1.16 WARRANTY TAGS

.1 Tag, at time of installation, each warranted item. Provide durable, oil and water resistant tag approved by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Leave date of acceptance until project is accepted for occupancy.

.3 Indicate following information on tag:

.1 Type of product/material.

.2 Model number.

.3 Serial number.

.4 Contract number.

.5 Warranty period.

.6 Inspector's signature.

.7 Construction Contractor.



END OF SECTION

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 01 91 13 – Commissioning (Cx) Requirements Page 1 of 21

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 COMMISSIONING INTENT

.1 Undertake commissioning to bring the facility to a fully operational state and free of deficiencies in the most effective and timely manner available.

.2 Commissioning incorporates inspection and quality assurance activities as construction progresses, including start up and demonstration, performance verification, fine tuning, and operator training.

.3 Bear all costs associated with the required personnel and test equipment as outlined in specification sections and all costs with organizing and managing the activities of the applicable subtrades as identified in this section.

.4 Fully document all tests and inspections performed during the construction, at start up, and during performance verification and fine tuning. Incorporate into final commissioning documentation.

.5 Provide direct training to designated staff responsible for the operation and maintenance of the building equipment and systems.


.1 Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.




.5 Section 01 91 33 - Commissioning (Cx) Forms.

.6 Section 01 91 41 - Commissioning (Cx) Training.

.7 Divisions 2-14

.8 Division 21 - Fire Suppression.

.9 Division 22 - Plumbing.

.10 Division 23 - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC).

.11 Division 25 - Integrated Automation.

.12 Division 26 - Electrical.

.13 Division 27 - Communications.


.14 Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Security.

.15 Division 33 - Utilities.

1.3 COMMISSIONING OVERVIEW

.1 Cx activities supplement field quality and testing procedures described in relevant technical sections.

.2 Cx is conducted in concert with activities performed during stage of project delivery. Cx identifies issues in Planning and Design stages which are addressed during Construction and Cx stages to ensure the built facility is constructed and proven to operate satisfactorily under weather, environmental and occupancy conditions to meet functional and operational requirements. Cx activities include transfer of critical knowledge to facility operational personnel.

.3 Complete inspection and verification activities as required by the specifications as construction progresses. This includes those activities that are necessary to ensure that the project is substantially complete to permit the execution of the commissioning process for the project.

.4 Take responsibility to:

.1 Review the documentation manuals with the commissioning team.

.2 Complete all items as identified in these manuals. This includes work by subcontractors, test agencies, equipment representatives and manufacturer agents.

.3 Review Contract Documents and inspect the Work to ensure completeness of the Work and compliance with the Contract Documents.

.4 Correct contract deficiencies and execute change orders as directed by the Owner’s Representative.

.5 Test, adjust and balance equipment and systems identified in Divisions 2-16.

.6 Submit the completed manuals and project record documents as specified.

.7 Update the documentation manuals prior to each project meeting.

.5 The Substantial Completion Certificate will not be issued until the commissioning process is completed and the final reports and commissioning documentation are received.

1.4 COMMISSIONING TEAM

.1 The commissioning team shall consist of:

.1 Commissioning Coordinator (Consultant Team Leader)

.2 Owner Representative(s)

.3 User Representatives/Owner.

.4 General Contractor

.5 Contractor’s Commissioning Coordinator

.6 Mechanical Contractor

.7 Fire Protection Contractor


.8 Controls Contractor

.9 Electrical Contractor

.10 Fire Alarm Contractor

.11 Security Systems Contractor

.12 Communications Systems Contractor

.13 Manufacturer’s Technicians.

.14 Testing Agencies.

1.5 NON-CONFORMANCE TO PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

.1 Should equipment, system components, and associated controls be incorrectly installed or malfunction during Cx, correct deficiencies, re-verify equipment and components within the unfunctional system, including related systems as deemed required by Owner’s Representative, to ensure effective performance.

.2 Costs for corrective work, additional tests, inspections, to determine acceptability and proper performance of such items to be borne by Contractor.

1.6 PRE-CX REVIEW

.1 Before Construction:

.1 Review contract documents, confirm in writing to Owner’s Representative. .1 Adequacy of provisions for Cx. .2 Aspects of design and installation pertinent to success of Cx.

.2 During Construction:

.1 Co-ordinate provision, location and installation of provisions for Cx.

.3 Before start of Cx:

.1 Have completed Cx Plan up-to-date.

.2 Ensure installation of related components, equipment, sub-systems, systems is complete.

.3 Fully understand Cx requirements and procedures.

.4 Have Cx documentation ready.

.5 Understand completely design criteria and intent and special features.

.6 Submit complete start-up documentation to Owner’s Representative.

.7 Have Cx schedules up-to-date.

.8 Ensure systems have been cleaned thoroughly.

.9 Complete testing, adjusting and balancing procedures on systems, submit testing, adjusting and balancing reports to Owner’s Representative for review and approval.

.10 Ensure "As-Built" system schematics are available.

.4 Inform Owner’s Representative in writing of discrepancies and deficiencies on finished works.


1.7 CONFLICTS

.1 Report conflicts between requirements of this section and other sections to Commissioning Coordinator before start-up and obtain clarification.

.2 Failure to report conflict and obtain clarification will result in application of most stringent requirement.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit no later than 4 weeks after award of Contract:

.1 Name of Contractor's Cx agent.

.2 Preliminary Cx schedule.

.2 Ensure certified trades persons, certified testing agencies and/or factory authorized personnel participate in commissioning tasks.

.3 Submit the names of all personnel for approval by the Commissioning Coordinator. Designate who has managerial responsibilities for coordination of entire testing, adjusting and balancing.

.4 Submit documentation to confirm personnel compliance with quality assurance provision.

.5 Fifteen days prior to application for Substantial Completion, submit 3 copies of final commissioning manuals on applicable forms.

.6 Submit reports of testing, adjusting and balancing postponed due to seasonal, climatic, occupancy, or other reasons beyond the Contractor’s control, promptly after execution of those services.

.7 Ensure each form bears signature of recorder and that of the Supervisor of the reporting organization.

1.9 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION

.1 Commissioning Coordinator to review and approve Cx documentation.

.2 Provide completed and approved Cx documentation to Commissioning Coordinator.

.3 Final Commissioning documents to be submitted in electronic form.

1.10 COMMISSIONING SCHEDULE

.1 Provide adequate time for Cx activities prescribed in technical sections and commissioning sections including:

.1 Approval of Cx reports.

.2 Verification of reported results.

.3 Repairs, retesting, re-commissioning, re-verification.

.4 Training.


1.11 COMMISSIONING MEETINGS

.1 Convene Cx meetings following project meetings and as specified herein.

.2 Purpose: to resolve issues, monitor progress, identify deficiencies, relating to Cx.

.3 Continue Cx meetings on regular basis until commissioning deliverables have been addressed.

.4 At 60% construction completion stage Commissioning Coordinator to call a separate Cx scope meeting to review progress, discuss schedule of equipment start-up activities and prepare for Cx. Issues at meeting to include:

.1 Review duties and responsibilities of Contractor and subcontractors, addressing delays and potential problems.

.2 Determine the degree of involvement of trades and manufacturer's representatives in the commissioning process.

.5 Thereafter Cx meetings to be held until project completion and as required during equipment start-up and functional testing period.

.6 Meeting will be chaired by Commissioning Coordinator. Contractor will record minutes and submit to Departmental Representative for review and approval. Approved minutes will be returned for approval.

.7 Ensure subcontractors and relevant manufacturer representatives are present at 60% and subsequent Cx meetings and as required.

1.12 STARTING AND TESTING

.1 Contractor assumes liabilities and costs for inspections, including disassembly and re-assembly after approval, starting, testing and adjusting, and supply of testing equipment.

1.13 WITNESSING OF STARTING AND TESTING

.1 Provide 21 days notice prior to commencement.

.2 Architect/Engineer and Commissioning Coordinator to witness start-up and testing.

.3 Contractor's Cx Agent to be present at tests performed and documented by sub-trades, suppliers and equipment manufacturers.

1.14 MANUFACTURER'S INVOLVEMENT

.1 Obtain manufacturers installation, start-up and operations instructions prior to start-up of components, equipment and systems and review with Architect/Engineer and Owner’s Representative

.1 Compare completed installation with manufacturer's published data, record discrepancies, and review with manufacturer.


.2 Modify procedures detrimental to equipment performance and review same with manufacturer before start-up.

.2 Integrity of warranties:

.1 Use manufacturer's trained start-up personnel where specified elsewhere in other divisions or required to maintain integrity of warranty.

.2 Verify with manufacturer that testing as specified will not void warranties.

.3 Qualifications of manufacturer's personnel:

.1 Experienced in design, installation and operation of equipment and systems.

.2 Ability to interpret test results accurately.

.3 To report results in clear, concise, logical manner.

1.15 PROCEDURES

.1 Verify that equipment and systems are complete, clean, and operating in normal and safe manner prior to conducting start-up, testing and Cx.

.2 Conduct start-up and testing in following distinct phases:

.1 Included in delivery and installation: .1 Verification of conformity to specification, approved shop drawings

and completion of product information report forms. .2 Visual inspection of quality of installation.

.2 Start-up: follow accepted start-up procedures.

.3 Operational testing: document equipment performance.

.4 System Performance Verification: include repetition of tests after correcting deficiencies.

.5 Post-substantial performance verification: to include fine-tuning.

.3 Correct deficiencies and obtain approval from Commissioning Coordinator after distinct phases have been completed and before commencing next phase.

.4 Document required tests on approved performance verification forms.

.5 Failure to follow accepted start-up procedures will result in re-evaluation of equipment by an independent testing agency selected by Commissioning Coordinator. If results reveal that equipment start-up was not in accordance with requirements, and resulted in damage to equipment, implement following:

.1 Minor equipment/systems: implement corrective measures approved by Commissioning Coordinator.

.2 Major equipment/systems: if evaluation report concludes that damage is minor, implement corrective measures approved by Commissioning Coordinator.

.3 If evaluation report concludes that major damage has occurred, Commissioning Coordinator shall reject equipment. .1 Rejected equipment to be removed from site and replaced with new.

.4 Subject new equipment/systems to specified start-up procedures.


1.16 START-UP DOCUMENTATION

.1 Assemble start-up documentation and submit to Commissioning Coordinator for approval before commencement of commissioning.

.2 Start-up documentation to include:

.1 Factory and on-site test certificates for specified equipment.

.2 Pre-start-up inspection reports.

.3 Signed installation/start-up check lists.

.4 Start-up reports,

.5 Step-by-step description of complete start-up procedures, to permit Commissioning Coordinator to repeat start-up at any time.

1.17 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

.1 After start-up, operate and maintain equipment and systems as directed by equipment/system manufacturer.

.2 With assistance of manufacturer develop written maintenance program and submit to Commissioning Coordinator for approval before implementation.

.3 Operate and maintain systems for minimum 21 days for commissioning to be completed.

.4 After completion of commissioning, operate and maintain systems until issuance of Substantial Completion

1.18 TEST RESULTS

.1 If start-up, testing and/or performance verification produce unacceptable results, repair, replace or repeat specified starting and/or performance verification procedures until acceptable results are achieved.

.2 Provide personnel, resources and materials, assume all costs for re-commissioning.

1.19 START OF COMMISSIONING

.1 Notify Commissioning Coordinator at least 21 days prior to start of Cx.

.2 Start Cx after elements of building affecting start-up and performance verification of systems have been completed.

1.20 INSTRUMENTS / EQUIPMENT

.1 Submit to Commissioning Coordinator for review and approval:

.1 Complete list of instruments proposed to be used.

.2 Listed data including, serial number, current calibration certificate, calibration date, calibration expiry date and calibration accuracy.

.2 Provide all required equipment to complete commissioning.


1.21 COMMISSIONING PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

.1 Conduct commissioning once identified pre-requisite activities are completed for a system and approved by the Commissioning Coordinator.

.2 Commissioning Coordinator to issue a commissioning plan based on the complexity of building systems. Contractor to develop and implement a detailed schedule of commissioning related activities.

.3 Test all building systems including architectural, structural, civil, mechanical and electrical components and operating procedures by challenging these systems to realistic operating conditions and train operational staff.

.4 Notwithstanding all-inclusive requirements specified in this section, additional separate commissioning may be required at a later date for equipment and systems whose full operation is dependent on seasonal conditions. Job conditions for Peak Performance Verification are as follows: (1) Summer sequence commissioning to take place between June 1 and September 15 when outside ambient temperatures are at least 22°C; (2) Winter sequence commissioning to take place between November 1 and March 31 when outside ambient temperature is no greater than minus 10°C.

.5 Carry out Cx:

.1 Under actual operating conditions, over entire operating range, in all modes.

.2 On independent systems and interacting systems.

.6 Cx procedures to be repeatable and reported results are to be verifiable.

.7 Follow equipment manufacturer's operating instructions.

.8 EMCS trending to be available as supporting documentation for performance verification.

.9 At completion of commissioning, scan completed manuals to electronic format on CD(s) in PDF format as required and submit to Commissioning Coordinator.

1.22 WITNESSING COMMISSIONING .1 Commissioning Coordinator along with designated representatives to witness

activities and verify results.

1.23 AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION

.1 Where specified start-up, testing or commissioning procedures duplicate verification requirements of authority having jurisdiction, arrange for authority to witness procedures so as to avoid duplication of tests and to facilitate expedient acceptance of facility.

.2 Obtain certificates of approval, acceptance and compliance with rules and regulation of authority having jurisdiction.

.3 Provide copies to Commissioning Coordinator and Owner’s Representative within 5 days of test and with Cx report.


1.24 REPEAT VERIFICATIONS

.1 Assume costs incurred by Owner’s Commissioning representative for third and subsequent verifications where:

.1 Verification of reported results fail to receive Commissioning Coordinator 's approval.

.2 Repetition of second verification again fails to receive approval.

.3 Commissioning Coordinator deems Contractor's request for second verification was premature.

1.25 DEFICIENCIES, FAULTS, DEFECTS

.1 Correct deficiencies found during start-up and Cx to satisfaction of Commissioning Coordinator.

.2 Report problems, faults or defects affecting Cx to Commissioning Coordinator in writing. Stop Cx until problems are rectified. Proceed with written approval from Commissioning Coordinator.

1.26 COMPLETION OF COMMISSIONING

.1 Upon completion of Cx leave systems in normal operating mode.

.2 Except for warranty and seasonal verification activities specified in Cx specifications, complete Cx prior to application for Substantial Completion.

.3 Cx to be considered complete when contract Cx deliverables have been submitted and accepted by Commissioning Coordinator.

1.27 ACTIVITIES UPON COMPLETION OF COMMISSIONING

.1 When changes are made to baseline components or system settings established during Cx process, provide updated Cx form for affected item.

1.28 TRAINING

.1 In accordance with Section 01 91 41 - Commissioning (Cx) – Training.

1.29 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS, SPARE PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS

.1 Supply, deliver, and document maintenance materials, spare parts, and special tools as specified in contract.

1.30 OCCUPANCY

.1 Cooperate fully with Commissioning Coordinator during stages of acceptance and occupancy of facility.

1.31 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION TOLERANCES

.1 Application tolerances:


.1 Specified range of acceptable deviations of measured values from specified values or specified design criteria. Except for special areas, to be within +/- 5 % of specified values.

.2 Instrument accuracy tolerances:

.1 To be of higher order of magnitude than equipment or system being tested.

.3 Measurement tolerances during verification:

.1 Unless otherwise specified actual values to be within +/- 2 % of recorded values.

1.32 OWNER'S PERFORMANCE TESTING

.1 Performance testing of equipment or system by Commissioning Coordinator will not relieve Contractor from compliance with specified start-up and testing procedures.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE

.1 Provide a detailed schedule for on-site verification activity by the commissioning team based on the commissioning plan provided by the Owner’s Representative. Be responsible for resource allocation respecting the exact number and duration for personnel required to perform the tasks required.

3.2 COMMISSIONING TASKS

.1 The following section summarizes the tasks to be conducted for the commissioning process with further specifics being provided within applicable specification sections and installations checks, verification activities and performance checks given within the manuals provided by the Owner’s Representative.

3.3 DISCIPLINE: STRUCTURAL Systems to be Commissioned

.1 Foundations

.1 Confirm footings, concrete piers and walls have required reinforcement installed.

.2 Confirm proper placement and construction of concrete/ piers and walls.

.3 Confirm concrete meets quality requirements and incorporate test results.

.2 Structural Steel Frame

.1 Provide copy of erector’s certification before construction begins.

.2 Confirm base plates are shimmed, level, grouted, and anchor bolts are correctly aligned.

.3 Confirm steel is properly primed and painted


.4 Confirm structural steel is properly welded to meet contract requirements.

.5 Confirm structural bracing is in place in accordance with erection drawings.

.6 Confirm all welds are primed and painted.

.7 Confirm metal deck is correctly welded.

.8 Confirm structural third party inspection has been completed satisfactorily.

.9 Record all on site test results and project record information prior to structural steel being covered by other trades.

.10 Provide certification of quality compliance from fabricator.

.3 Concrete Slabs on Grade

.1 Confirm concrete meets quality requirements and incorporate test results.

.2 Confirm location and installation of thickened slabs meet contract requirements.

.3 Confirm location and installation of control joints.

.4 Confirm concrete floor curing (and sealer) applied as per manufacturer’s instructions and compatible with finish flooring materials.

.5 Confirm reinforcement is correctly placed in slab.

.6 Provide records of curing conditions for the first 14 days of the initial placement.

.7 Provide survey of finished floor elevations to confirm compliance with required “Level” tolerance.

3.4 DISCIPLINE: ARCHITECTURAL Systems to be Commissioned

.1 Thermal and Moisture Protection

.1 Provide records of compliance regarding moisture content of building materials.

.2 Confirm insulation types and values meet contract requirements.

.3 Confirm rigid insulation is adhered as per manufacturer’s instructions.

.4 Ensure mechanical protection is provided for exposed insulation.

.5 Certify continuity of air barriers and vapour retarders.

.6 Provide records of independent leakage testing for air barrier assembly.

.7 Provide certificate of product quality compliance for insulation, air barriers, vapor retarders, etc.

.2 Roof Assembly

.1 Confirm integrity of roof installation.

.2 Verify slopes of roof provide positive water flow to roof drains. Ensure no ponding of water on roof.

.3 Confirm all flashing is in place and sealing is complete.

.4 Ensure the installation of all roofing accessories.

.5 Include inspection reports from manufacturer representative as specified indicating all warranties are in place.

.3 Exterior Wall Assemblies


.1 Verify continuity of air/vapour retarders.

.2 Ensure weep and vent holes are open and clear of debris.

.3 Verify insect blocks are installed.

.4 Exterior Cladding

.5 Doors and Windows

.1 Doors: .1 Confirm operation of all mechanical door hardware. .2 Confirm operation of all electrical/electronic door hardware including

safety features. .3 Ensure tightness and continuity of smoke/sound stripping and

accessories. .4 Ensure keying in place and properly recorded. .5 Confirm sign over to Client for use. .6 Provide training and warranties.

.2 Windows: .1 Check all window glazing seals. .2 Confirm all sealant in place around frames. .3 Check operation of operable sections (if applicable). .4 Check operation of window latches (if applicable). .5 Check for water and air leakage. .6 Check performances of acoustically rated windows. .7 Provide training and warranties. .8 Door Operators .9 Confirm correct door operators installed. .10 Check for smooth operation, time for operator to act, hold open time

and closure time. .11 Check switch integrity. Observe how switch operates. .12 Ensure proper operation of safety edges and of the safety features. .13 Provide training and warranties.

.3 Entrances and Exits .1 Confirm correct operation of all doors. .2 Confirm lock assembly operates as required. .3 Verify door closers operate correctly. Provide verification from

manufacturer of proper operation of electronic closure. .4 Confirm if doors are/can be affected by wind conditions. .5 Confirm all weatherstripping in place and properly secured. .6 Confirm accessibility compliance for wheelchair users. .7 Demonstrate maintenance required. .8 Provide warranties.

.4 Room Fit-up & Finishes


.1 Confirm all ceiling systems installed as per manufacturer’s requirements.

.2 Confirm ceiling integrity.

.3 Verify spare products provided and signed off by operating staff.

.4 Confirm wall finishes. Include paint type, number and colour chip each location.

.5 Confirm flooring used. Provide information on type of flooring, location, colour.

.6 Provide and review all cleaning processes for ceiling, walls, flooring. Verify application processes of sealants, waxes, etc. as applicable.

.7 Demonstrate maintenance required.

.8 Provide Technical Support Inspector’s inspection report verifying finishes have met contract requirements.

.5 Occupant Safety and Accessibility .1 Fire Separations

.1 Verify fire stopping and smoke seals in place.

.2 Verify sleeves in hollow walls around piping.

.3 Verify installation of angle iron around duct work installed as specified.

.4 Verify fire dampers electrically wired into the F.A. P. installed as specified

.5 Verify continuity and ratings of fire separations.

.6 Verify proper fire separations at firewalls, including parapets.

.7 Confirm fire ratings for door assemblies complies with door schedule.

.8 Confirm door closures, smoke sweeps, hardware complies with hardware schedule.

.9 Ensure positive pressure test to insure no infiltration to area of safe refuge.

.10 Confirm power to area of safe refuge to be dedicated only to this area for 2 hours.

.2 Escape Routes Within Facility .1 Confirm Fire walls as per fire ratings and plan location. .2 Verify length of travel meets design requirements. .3 Verify panic hardware installed as per section/specification. .4 Confirm fire rated doors/closures meet design requirement. .5 Confirm visual markers for visually impaired. .6 Test emergency lighting.

.3 Doors in Fire Separations .1 Verify smoke sweeps/seals installed properly. .2 Verify door closures/hardware hinges installed properly and

operating. .3 Verify door closure installed properly and operating


.4 Verify hinges as per specification installed properly.

.5 Verify doors closures meet Code requirements.

.6 Verify ULC labels attached to door and frame. .6 Millwork

.1 Ensure all dimensions and materials meet contract requirements.

.2 Confirm installation and proper operation of all hardware.

.3 Verify all systems installed level, plumb, and square.

.4 Ensure proper fasteners are used to attach mill work to walls, floors, and ceilings.

.5 Confirm proper types of glazing used for trophy cases.

.6 Ensure all hinges have proper number of screws.

.7 Ensure all bumpers are installed.

.8 Ensure shelf supports and clips for shelves are installed.

.9 Ensure all locks are keyed the same.

.10 Ensure all toe kicks are finished

.11 Ensure counter tops meet contract requirements, back splash caulked, and matched end caps.

.12 Provide instruction to operating staff as required.

3.1 DISCIPLINE: MECHANICAL Systems to be Commissioned

.1 Plumbing Fixtures

.1 Confirm emergency shower installed matches contract documents.

.2 Verify fixture trim operation.

.3 Record flow rate for 20 minutes.

.4 Verify fixtures properly accessible and meet requirements for handicapped accessibility.

.5 Demonstrate maintenance operations for all fixtures and trim types.

.6 Verify cleaning methods for all fixtures. Demonstrate correct methods as required.

.7 Provide Certificate of Compliance for Accessibility.

.2 Domestic Water System

.1 Verify and record water temperature at each plumbing fixture.

.2 Verify and record setpoints of domestic hot water supply.

.3 Confirm and record setpoints of tempered water devices. Measure and record outlet temperatures.

.4 Provide copy of water test results

.5 Sterilize complete system prior to use.

.6 Instruct owner on the operation of shut-off valves

.7 Demonstrate maintenance required.


.3 Air Handling Systems (Applicable for each system)

.1 Confirm interface of all devices with BAS.

.2 Verify balancing report

.3 Check filter status. Install clean filters.

.4 Confirm damper operation. Ensure dampers operate freely and sufficient damper motors are provided.

.5 Verify dampers seal tight when closed.

.6 Ensure units are clean and washed down prior to final acceptance.

.7 Verify fan systems capacity control. Measure static pressures at various flow settings of fan. Confirm system is stable when operating.

.8 Confirm heating and cooling coil operation. Measure inlet/outlet temperatures.

.9 Verify humidifier control operation.

.10 Confirm suitable drain traps provided. Verify trap height and system static pressures.

.11 Confirm fire alarm devices in place and fully functional.

.12 Confirm operation of all interior lights for the unit.

.13 Measure for belt tension and confirm it is within manufacturer’s recommendation.

.14 Verify fan balance and confirm within tolerance.

.15 Verify bearing lubrication works correctly. Record bearing lubrication activities from start up to final turn over to Owner.

.16 Verify filters fit tight with minimal air leakage.

.17 Verify ease of accessibility for maintenance.

.18 Confirm capacity control for fan operation.

.19 Demonstrate maintenance required and training

.4 Fans

.1 Confirm correct installation as per manufacturer’s instructions.

.2 Confirm correct rotation.

.3 Measure and record motor amperage.

.4 Verify (if applicable) belt tension.

.5 Verify bearings are lubricated. Record lubrication from start-up to final turn over to Owner.

.6 Verify no vibration exists.

.7 Confirm balancing completed. Verify results.

.5 Reheat Coils

.1 Confirm correct heating coil installed.

.2 Confirm CV number on coil control valve.

.3 Confirm and record discharge temperature.

.6 Space Pressure


.1 Confirm systems have been checked by manufacturer’s representative. Provide inspection certificates.

.2 Demonstrate positive/negative/neutral operation. Record operations and verify space pressurization achieved.

.3 Verify alarm operation.

.4 Verify interface with BAS.

.5 Confirm operation during emergency power situation.

.6 Review maintenance procedures with manufacturer’s representative and provide training.

.7 Provide Technical Services Inspector’s Report on construction of room to verify installation meets contractual requirements.

.7 DDC Controls

.1 Confirm all DDC points are connected and operating.

.2 Confirm all equipment controlled by the DDC system is functioning properly.

.3 Confirm all sensors are calibrated and installed correctly.

.4 Verify all building automation sequences. (Provide all necessary additional programming required to achieve a fully functional system)

.5 Verify all DDC alarms.

.6 Verify all graphical representations.

.7 Confirm all DDC systems and components are fully BACNET compatible.

.8 Confirm software is installed and operational on owner and DTW sites as directed. Confirm validity of password information for access to system.

.9 Confirm wiring method conforms to wire size and type, and is installed in accordance with specification.

.10 Review maintenance procedures with manufacturer’s representative and provide training.

3.2 DISCIPLINE: ELECTRICAL Systems to be Commissioned

.1 Conductors:

.1 Confirm installation in cable tray.

.2 Confirm cables are undamaged.

.3 Megger all conductors.

.2 Interior Feeders

.1 Confirm wire gauge, type & quantity.

.2 Install strap and box connectors.

.3 Confirm routing and support.

.4 Confirm bonding conductor.


.3 Dry Type Transformers Indoors.


.1 Megger all cables.

.2 Confirm cables not damaged.

.3 Measure and record amperage and voltage on primary and secondary of transformer under normal load.

.4 Confirm proper grounding.

.5 Confirm flexible connections to transformer.

.6 Confirm transformer housing not damaged.

.7 Confirm installation of sprinkler guards

.8 Confirm installation of identification.

.4 Service Entrance Equipment.

.1 Megger all cables.

.2 Measure and record voltage and amperage on all conductors under normal load.

.3 Confirm grounding and bonding.

.4 Confirm all connections properly torqued.

.5 Confirm identification installed.

.6 Confirm final cleaning.

.7 Confirm rating of OCP devices and adjustments as per specifications.

.5 Distribution and Lighting Panelboards.

.1 Megger all feeder conductors.

.2 Measure and record voltage and amperage on all feeder conductors under normal load.



.5 Confirm panel identification installed.


.7 Confirm panel directory correct.

.6 Disconnect/Safety Switches.


.2 Measure and record voltage and amperage on all conductors under normal load.





.7 Confirm proper rating of overcurrent devices installed.

.7 Equipment Enclosures, Splitters, Junction Boxes.

.1 Confirm all conduit and cable connections seated properly in enclosure.

.2 Confirm locknuts and bushings on all conduit connections. Double locknuts on RGS.

.3 Confirm proper grounding and bonding.


.4 Confirm proper support.


.8 Wiring Devices.

.1 Confirm devices installed in proper location.

.2 Confirm switches installed on latch side of doors.

.3 Confirm proper voltage/amperage rating.

.4 Confirm proper polarity.

.5 Confirm cover plate installed flush on wall.

.6 Confirm identification completed.

.9 Circuit Breakers.

.1 Confirm breaker size as specified.

.2 Confirm breaker properly torqued to panel bus.

.3 Confirm load conductors properly torqued to breakers.

.4 Confirm GFCI breakers operate properly.

.5 Confirm AFCI breakers operate properly.

.6 Confirm voltage and amperage load on all circuit breakers. Record results.

.10 Electric Heating.

.1 Confirm heater wattage and voltage are correct.

.2 Confirm heater connected to circuit indicated.

.3 Confirm heater controls operate properly.

.4 Confirm heater fastened securely to building.

.5 Confirm radiant heating panel electrical connections as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

.6 Confirm in-floor radiant heating sets installed and connected as per manufacturers recommendations.

.7 Measure voltage and amperage at heaters. Record results.

.11 Heating Control Panels.

.1 Confirm relays proper voltage and ampacity as specified.

.2 Confirm spare relays installed where indicated.

.3 Confirm relay enclosure ventilated.

.4 Confirm voltage and load on each relay. Record results.

.5 Confirm all electrical connections properly torqued.

.6 Commissioning to be conducted by factory trained technician.

.7 Confirm identification is installed.

.12 Conduits.

.1 Confirm all conduits proper size and type.

.2 Confirm all conduits properly supported.

.3 Confirm conduit fill not exceeded.


.4 Confirm all in slab conduits noted on as-builts.

.5 Confirm pull ropes installed in all spare conduits.

.6 Confirm bonding conductor installed in all conduits.

.13 Motor Starters

.1 Confirm motor starters securely mounted.

.2 Verify all field power and control connections properly torqued...

.3 Confirm overload heaters installed.

.4 Verify operation of all units.

.5 Verify lubrication of all moving parts.

.6 Operate starters in sequence to confirm satisfactory performance.

.7 Perform start/stop functions and verify sequencing actions.

.8 Provide manufacturer’s representative for commissioning.

.9 Demonstrate maintenance procedures and training.

.10 Provide certification from manufacturer of installation.

.14 Grounding

.1 Confirm all grounding system installed and connections made are secure. (Primary and secondary grounds.)

.2 Verify connections and conductors protected from mechanical injury.

.3 Ensure compliance with the specification.

.4 Confirm bonding wire used in all conduit systems.

.5 Confirm all grounding buses installed correctly.

.6 Perform continuity and resistance tests.

.7 Demonstrate normal maintenance requirements for grounding system.

.8 Check main systems ground.

.9 Check data system ground.

.10 Check telephone system ground.

.15 Contactors

.1 Verify installation of contactors and components.

.2 Verify installation of secondary control devices.

.3 Confirm operation of all devices.

.4 Demonstrate maintenance requirements.

.16 Lighting

.1 Confirm all lighting systems are properly supported

.2 Confirm all fixture alignments.

.3 Confirm operation of all fixtures.

.4 Demonstrate maintenance procedures.

.5 Confirm spare parts are provided as specified.

.6 Verify outside lighting foundations are true and plumb.

.7 Verify operation of all exterior lighting.


.8 Provide copy of test results.

.9 Provide copy of warranties.

.17 Fire Alarm

.1 Verify that system components have been located and installed in accordance with the contract documents.

.2 Verify all wiring connections completed.

.3 Verify operation of all devices.

.4 Test alarm operations for all areas and devices.

.5 Check and verify communication panels operate correctly.

.6 System verified

.7 Confirm interconnections to mechanical systems operable

.8 Confirm interconnections to door closures operable


.18 Telephone Systems


.2 Confirm all testing as required completed and documented.

.3 Verify receipt of final certification documentation.

.4 Confirm handicap accessibility requirements are met.


.6 Provide copy of warranty.

.19 Data Cable Systems


.2 Confirm all testing as required completed and documented.

.3 Verify receipt of final certification documentation.


.5 Provide copies of data cable test results.

.6 Provide copy of warranty.

.20 Exit Lighting Systems


.2 Verify all exit lights installed correctly and are operational.

.3 Confirm breaker for exit lights locked in on position.

.4 Confirm operation of integral batteries.

.5 Confirm integral emergency lighting heads are aimed properly.



.21 Emergency Lighting Systems



.2 Verify all emergency lighting units installed correctly and are operational.

.3 Confirm breaker for emergency lighting units locked in on position.

.4 Confirm batteries are fully charged.

.5 Confirm remote heads operational.

.6 Confirm conductor size to remote heads.



.22 Control Wiring

.1 Confirm conductor size and type in accordance with specification.

.2 Confirm cable shields grounded at source end only.

.3 Confirm wiring installed in accordance with specification.

END OF SECTION


Section 01 9 1 33 – Commissioning (Cx) Forms Page 1 of 2

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Commissioning forms to be completed for equipment, system and integrated system.


.1 Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.

.2 Section 01 91 13 – Commissioning (Cx) Requirements.

.3 Section 01 91 41 – Commissioning (Cx) Training.

1.3 INSTALLATION/START-UP CHECK LISTS

.1 Include the following data:

.1 Product manufacturer's installation instructions and recommended checks.

.2 Special procedures as specified in relevant technical sections.

.3 Items considered good installation and engineering industry practices deemed appropriate for proper and efficient operation.

.2 Equipment manufacturer's installation/start-up check lists are acceptable for use.

.3 Use check lists for equipment installation. Document check list verifying checks have been made, indicate deficiencies and corrective action taken.

.4 Installer to sign check lists upon completion, certifying stated checks and inspections have been performed. Return completed check lists to Owner’s Representative for inclusion in Commissioning Manual at completion of project.

.5 Use of check lists will be considered part of commissioning process.

1.4 COMMISSIONING FORMS

.1 Architect/Engineer may develop and provide to Contractor required project-specific Commissioning plan/check list/forms.

.2 Completed Commissioning forms to be submitted to Architect/Engineer for review and approval.

.3 Use Commissioning forms to verify installation and record performance when starting equipment and systems.

.4 Strategy for Use:

.1 Contractor will provide required shop drawings information and verify correct installation and operation of items indicated on these forms.

.2 Confirm operation as per design criteria and intent.

.3 Identify variances between design and operation and reasons for variances.


Section 01 9 1 33 – Commissioning (Cx) Forms Page 2 of 2 .4 Verify operation in specified normal and emergency modes and under specified

load conditions. .5 Record analytical and substantiating data. .6 Verify reported results. .7 Form to bear signatures of recording technician and reviewed and signed off by

Owner’s Representative. .8 Reported results in true measured SI unit values. .9 Maintain copy on site during start-up, testing and commissioning period. .10 Forms to be both hard copy and electronic format.



END OF SECTION


Section 01 91 41 - Commissioning (Cx) Training Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:

.1 This Section specifies roles and responsibilities of Commissioning Training.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:


.2 Section 01 91 13 – Commissioning (Cx) Requirements.

1.3 TRAINEES

.1 Trainees: personnel selected for operating and maintaining this facility. Includes Facility Manager, building operators, maintenance staff, security staff, and technical specialists as required.

.2 Trainees may be available for training during any stages of construction for purposes of familiarization with systems.

1.4 INSTRUCTORS

.1 Architect/Engineer will arrange to provide:

.1 Descriptions of systems.

.2 Instruction on design philosophy, design criteria, and design intent.

.2 Contractor and certified factory-trained manufacturers' personnel: to provide instruction on the following:

.1 Start-Up, operation, shut-down of equipment, components and systems.

.2 Control features, reasons for, results of, implications on associated systems of, adjustment of set points of control and safety devices.

.3 Instructions on servicing, maintenance and adjustment of systems, equipment and components.

.3 Contractor and equipment manufacturer to provide instruction on:

.1 Start-up, operation, maintenance and shut-down of equipment they have certified installation, started up and carried out performance verification tests.

1.5 TRAINING OBJECTIVES

.1 Training to be detailed and duration to ensure:

.1 Safe, reliable, cost-effective, energy-efficient operation of systems in normal and emergency modes under all conditions.

.2 Effective on-going inspection, measurements of system performance.

.3 Proper preventive maintenance, diagnosis and trouble-shooting.

.4 Ability to update documentation.

.5 Ability to operate equipment and systems under emergency conditions until appropriate qualified assistance arrives.


Section 01 91 41 - Commissioning (Cx) Training Page 2 of 3 1.6 TRAINING MATERIALS

.1 Instructors to be responsible for content and quality.

.2 Training materials to include:

.1 "As-Built" Contract Documents.

.2 Operating Manual.

.3 Maintenance Manual.

.4 Testing, adjusting and balancing and performance verification Reports.

.3 Owner’s Representative will review training manuals.

.4 Training materials to be in a format that permits future training procedures to same degree of detail.

1.7 SCHEDULING

.1 Include in Commissioning Schedule time for training.

.2 Deliver training during regular working hours, training sessions to be determined in Commissioning meetings.

.3 Training to be completed prior to acceptance of facility.

1.8 RESPONSIBILITIES

.1 Be responsible for:

.1 Implementation of training activities,

.2 Coordination among instructors,

.3 Quality of training, training materials,

.2 Owner’s Representative will evaluate training and materials.

.3 Upon completion of training, provide written report, signed by Instructors, witnessed by Owner’s Representative.

1.9 TRAINING CONTENT

.1 Training to include demonstrations by Instructors using the installed equipment and systems.

.2 Content includes:

.1 Review of facility and occupancy profile.

.2 Functional requirements.

.3 System philosophy, limitations of systems and emergency procedures.

.4 Review of system layout, equipment, components and controls.

.5 Equipment and system start-up, operation, monitoring, servicing, maintenance and shut-down procedures.


Section 01 91 41 - Commissioning (Cx) Training Page 3 of 3 .6 System operating sequences, including step-by-step directions for starting up,

shut-down, operation of valves, dampers, switches, adjustment of control settings and emergency procedures.

.7 Maintenance and servicing.

.8 Trouble-shooting diagnosis.

.9 Inter-Action among systems during integrated operation.

.10 Review of O&M documentation.

.3 Provide specialized training as specified in relevant Technical Sections of the construction specifications.



END OF SECTION


Section 02 41 13 - Selective Site Demolition Page 1 of 4

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTIONS INCLUDES

.1 Methods and procedures for demolishing, salvaging, recycling and removing sitework items designated to be removed in whole or in part, and for backfilling resulting trenches and excavations.



.2 Section 01 35 29.06 - Health and Safety Requirements


.4 Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control

.5 Section 01 74 19 – Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

.6 Section 31 23 33.01 – Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Shop drawings

.1 Submit for approval drawings, diagrams or details showing sequence of demolition work and supporting structures and underpinning, where required by authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 Submit drawings stamped and signed by qualified professional engineer licensed in Province of Newfoundland and Labrador, Canada.

.2 Hazardous Materials: provide description of Hazardous Materials and Notification of Filing with proper authorities prior to beginning of Work as required.

.3 Submit plan indicating:

.1 Descriptions of and anticipated quantities of materials to be salvaged, reused, recycled and landfilled.

.2 Schedule of selective demolition.

.3 Number and location of dumpsters.

.4 Anticipated frequency of tippage.

.4 Submit copies of certified weigh bills, bills of landing from authorized disposal sites and reuse and recycling facilities for material removed from upon request from Owner’s Representative.



1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Convene pre-installation meeting one week prior to beginning work of this section to:

.1 Verify project requirements.

.2 Review installation and substrate conditions.

.3 Co-ordination with building subtrades.

.2 Arrange for site visit with Owner’s Representative to examine existing site conditions adjacent to demolition work, prior to start of Work.

.3 Hold project meetings every month.

.1 Ensure key personnel, site supervisor, project manager, subcontractor representatives attend.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Protect existing items designated to remain and items designated for salvage. In event of damage to such items, immediately replace or make repairs to approval of Owner’s Representative and at no cost to Owner’s Representative.

.2 Remove and store materials to be salvaged, in manner to prevent damage.

.3 Store and protect in accordance with requirements for maximum preservation of material.

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 In all circumstances ensure that demolition work does not adversely affect adjacent water courses groundwater and wildlife, or contribute to excess air and noise pollution.

.2 Do not dispose, of waste or volatile materials such as mineral spirits, oil, petroleum based lubricants, or toxic cleaning solutions into watercourses, storm or sanitary sewers. Ensure proper disposal procedures are maintained throughout project.

.3 Do not pump water containing suspended materials into watercourses, storm or sanitary sewers, or onto adjacent properties.

.4 Control disposal or runoff of water containing suspended materials or other harmful substances in accordance with local authorities.

.5 Protect trees, plants and foliage on site and adjacent properties where indicated.

1.7 EXISTING CONDITIONS

.1 Prior to start of any demolition work remove contaminated or hazardous materials as defined by authorities having jurisdiction from site and dispose of at designated disposal facilities



1.8 SCHEDULING

.1 Employ necessary means to meet project time lines without compromising specified minimum rates of material diversion.

.2 Notify Owner’s Representative in writing when unforeseen delays occur.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Inspect site with Owner’s Representative and verify extent and location of items designated for removal, disposal, alternative disposal, recycling, salvage and items to remain.

.2 Locate and protect utilities. Preserve active utilities traversing site in operating condition.

.3 Notify and obtain approval of utility companies before starting demolition.

3.2 REMOVAL OPERATIONS

.1 Remove items as indicated.

.2 Do not disturb items designated to remain in place.

.3 Removal of Pavements, Curbs and Gutters

.1 Square up adjacent surfaces to remain in place by saw cutting or other method approved by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Protect adjacent joints and load transfer devices.

.3 Protect underlying and adjacent granular material.

.4 When removing asphalt pavement for subsequent incorporation into hot mix asphalt concrete paving, prevent contamination with base course aggregates.

.5 When removing pipes under existing or future pavement area, excavate at least 300mm below pipe invert.

.6 Removal from site

.1 Interim removal of stockpiled material will be required by Owner’s Representative, if it is deemed to interfere with operations of Owner’s Representative, Owner or other contractors.

.7 Sealing

.1 Seal pipe ends and walls of manholes or catch basins as indicated. Securely plug to form watertight seal.



.8 Backfill

.1 Backfill in areas as indicated

3.3 RESTORATION

.1 Restore areas and existing works outside areas of demolition to match conditions of adjacent, undisturbed areas.

.2 Use soil treatments and procedures which are not harmful to health, are not injurious to plants, and do not endanger wildlife, adjacent water courses or ground water.

3.4 CLEAN UP

.1 Upon completion of work, remove debris, trim surfaces and leave work site clean.

.2 Use cleaning solutions and procedures which are not harmful to health, are not injurious to plants, and do not endanger wildlife, adjacent water courses or ground water.

END OF SECTION


Section 02 41 16 - Structure Demolition Page 1 of 5

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Methods and procedures for demolition of structures, parts of structures, basements and foundation walls and includes abandonment and removal of septic tanks and tanks containing petroleum products.


.1 Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Work

.2 Section 01 35 29.06 - Health and Safety Requirements


.4 Section 01 52 00 – Construction Facilities

.5 Section 01 56 00 - Temporary Barriers and Enclosures

.6 Section 01 74 21 – Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal

1.3 REFERENCES


.1 CSA S350, Code of Practice for Safety in Demolition of Structures


.1 Prior to start of Work arrange for site visit with Owner’s Representative to examine existing site conditions adjacent to demolition work

.2 Hold project meetings every month.

.3 Ensure key personnel, site supervisor, project manager, subcontractor representatives, attend.


.1 Separate waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 – Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.


.1 Material containing asbestos will be encountered in course of demolition, abate and remove all such materials, provide new.



.2 Structures to be demolished to be partially based on their condition on date that tender is accepted.

1.7 DEMOLITION DRAWINGS

.1 Where required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit for approval drawings, diagrams or details showing sequence of demolition work and supporting structures and underpinning.

.2 Submit drawings stamped and signed by qualified professional engineer licensed in Province of Newfoundland and Labrador, Canada.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

.1 Ensure work is done in accordance with Section 01 35 43 – Environmental Procedures.

.2 Prevent movement, settlement or damage of adjacent structures, services, walks, paving, trees, landscaping, adjacent grades parts of existing building to remain.

.3 Support affected structures and, if safety of structure being demolished or adjacent structures or services appears to be endangered cease operations and notify Owner’s Representative.

.4 Prevent debris from blocking surface drainage system, elevators, mechanical and electrical systems which must remain in operation.

.5 Ensure that demolition work does not adversely affect adjacent watercourses, groundwater and wildlife, or contribute to excess air and noise pollution.

.6 Fires and burning of waste or materials is not permitted on site.

.7 Do not bury waste or materials on site.

.8 Do not dispose of waste or volatile materials such as mineral spirits, oil, petroleum based lubricants, or toxic cleaning solutions into watercourses, storm or sanitary sewers. Ensure proper disposal procedures are maintained throughout project.

.9 Do not pump water containing suspended materials into watercourses, storm or sanitary sewers, or onto adjacent properties.

.10 Control disposal or runoff of water containing suspended materials or other harmful substances in accordance with local authorities’ requirements.

.11 Prevent extraneous materials from contaminating air beyond application area, by providing temporary enclosures during demolition work.

.12 Cover or wet down dry materials and waste to prevent blowing dust and debris. Control dust on all temporary roads.


Section 02 41 16 - Structure Demolition Page 3 of 5 1.9 SCHEDULING

.1 Ensure project time lines are met without compromising specified minimum rates of material diversion. Notify Owner’s Representative in writing of delays.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Do work in accordance with 01 35 29.06 – Health and Safety Requirements.

.2 Disconnect electrical and telephone service lines entering the work area to be demolished. Post warning signs on electrical lines and equipment which must remain energized to serve other properties during period of demolition.

.3 Disconnect and cap designated mechanical services in the work area.

.1 Sewer and water lines: remove to property line.

.2 Other underground services: remove and dispose of as directed by Owner’s Representative.

.4 Do not disrupt active or energized utilities designated to remain undisturbed.

.5 Remove rodent and vermin as required by Owner’s Representative.

3.2 SAFETY CODE

.1 Do demolition work in accordance with Section 01 56 00 – Temporary Barriers and Enclosures.

.2 Blasting operations not permitted during demolition.

3.3 DEMOLITION

.1 Demolish foundation walls to minimum of 300mm below finished grade.

.2 Demolish foundation walls and footings, and concrete floors below or on grade.

.3 Break 100mm holes per 10m² area in concrete slabs which are not to be removed, to prevent accumulation of water. Keep floor drains open if permanent drainage still connected.

.4 Pieces of concrete and masonry not larger that 200 mm broken from demolition work may be used as backfill in open basements on excavations provided voids are filled. Keep demolition fill 300 mm below finished grade level. Do not backfill basement areas until inspected by Owner’s Representative.



.5 Remove existing equipment, services, and obstacles where required for refinishing or making good of existing surfaces, and replace as work progresses.

.6 At end of each day's work, leave Work in safe and stable condition. Protect interiors of parts not to be demolished from exterior elements at all times.

.7 Demolish to minimize dusting. Keep materials wetted as directed by Owner’s Representative.

.8 Remove structural framing.

.9 Contain all fibrous materials (e.g. Insulation) to minimize release of airborne fiber while being transported to waste disposal site or alternative disposal location.

.10 Only dispose of material specified by selected alternative disposal option as directed by Owner’s Representative.

.11 Ensure that these materials will not be disposed of in landfill or waste stream destined for landfill.

.12 Remove and dispose of demolished materials except where noted otherwise and in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction.

.13 Environmental:

.1 Remove contaminated or dangerous materials as defined by authorities having jurisdiction, relating to environmental protection, from site and dispose of in safe manner to minimized danger at site or during disposal.

.14 Prior to the start of any demolition work remove contaminated or hazardous materials as defined by authorities having jurisdiction, from site and dispose of at designated disposal facilities.

.15 Use natural lighting to work by wherever possible. Shut off all lighting except those required for security purposes at the end of each day.

3.4 STOCKPILING

.1 Stockpile materials off site.

.2 Separate from general waste stream off site each of the following materials. Stockpile materials in neat and orderly fashion in location and as directed by Owner’s Representative for alternate disposal. Stockpile materials in accordance with applicable fire regulations.

.1 Ceiling tiles.

.2 Power source poles deemed unfit for reuse by Owner’s Representative.

.3 Wiring and conduit.

.4 Outlets/Switches



.5 Floor receptacles.

.6 Metal duct work, baffles, HVAC equipment.

.7 Insulation batts.

.8 Miscellaneous metals.

.3 Supply separate, clearly-marked disposal bins for all categories of waste material. Do not remove bins from site until inspected and approved by Owner’s Representative.

.4 Provide collection areas for collection of miscellaneous metals in the area of demolition.

3.5 REMOVAL FROM SITE

.1 Dispose of materials off site.

.2 Transport material designated for alternate disposal in accordance with applicable regulations.

.3 Dispose of materials not designated for alternate disposal in accordance with applicable regulations.

3.6 REPORTING

.1 Record off-site removal of debris and materials and provide following information regarding removed materials to Owner’s Representative within 24 hours.

.1 Time and date of Removal

.2 Description of Material

.3 Weight and Quantity of Materials.

.4 Breakdown of reuse, recycling and landfill quantities.

.5 End Demolition of Materials.

3.7 COORDINATION

.1 Coordinate alternative disposal activities with Owner’s Representative’s on site waste diversion representative.

END OF SECTION


Section 02 82 00 - Asbestos Abatement Page 1 of 13

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

.1 Division 1 - General Requirements.

.2 Comply with Asbestos Abatement Regulations, Latest Edition.


.1 Removal as specified of all spray or trowel-applied asbestos-containing material located in the work area locations as indicated in Appendix “A”.

.2 Encapsulation as specified of all spray or trowel-applied asbestos-containing material located as indicated.

.3 Encapsulation of areas where asphaltic adhesive coating under spray or trowel-applied asbestos-containing material prevents complete removal of spray or trowel-applied asbestos-containing material.

.4 Enclosure as specified of all spray or trowel-applied asbestos-containing material located as indicated.

.5 Removal (other than defined minor amounts) of friable materials containing asbestos.

.6 Use of power tools that are fitted with dust collectors equipped with a HEPA filter to cut, shape, grind, drill, scrape, or abrade manufactured products containing asbestos.

.7 Cleaning, maintaining, or removal of air-handling equipment in buildings where sprayed fireproofing materials containing asbestos have been applied.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Codes and standards referenced in this section refer to the latest edition thereof.


.1 CAN/CGSB-1.205, Sealer for Application to Asbestos-Fibre-Releasing Materials.

.2 Appendix “A” – Asbestos Report by Pinchin LeBlanc dated December 2007.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

.1 HEPA vacuum: High Efficiency Particulate Air filtered vacuum equipment with a filter system capable of collecting and retaining fibres greater than 0.3 microns in any direction at 99.97% efficiency.

.2 Amended Water: Water with a non-ionic surfactant wetting agent added to reduce water tension to allow wetting of fibres.



.3 Asbestos-Containing Materials (ACMs): Materials identified under Existing Conditions (Article 1.7), including fallen materials and settled dust.

.4 Asbestos Work Area: Area where actual removal, sealing and enclosure of spray or trowel-applied asbestos-containing materials takes place.

.5 Authorized Visitors: Building Owner, Asbestos Abatement Consultant or designated representative , and persons representing regulatory agencies.

.6 Friable Material: Material that when dry can be crumbled, pulverized or powdered by hand pressure and includes such material that is crumbled, pulverized or powdered.

.7 Occupied Area: Any area of the building or work site that is outside the Asbestos Work Area.

.8 Polyethylene sheeting sealed with tape: Polyethylene sheeting of type and thickness specified sealed with tape along all edges, around penetrating objects, over cuts and tears, and elsewhere as required to provide a continuous polyethylene membrane to protect underlying surfaces from water damage or damage by sealants, and to prevent escape of asbestos fibres through the sheeting into a clean area.

.9 Glove Bag: Prefabricated glove bag as follows:

.1 Minimum thickness 0.25 mm (10 mil) polyvinyl-chloride bag.

.2 Integral 0.25 mm (10 mil) thick polyvinyl-chloride gloves and elastic ports.

.3 Equipped with reversible double-pull double throw zipper on top.

.4 Straps for sealing ends around pipe.

.5 Must incorporate internal closure strip if it is to be moved or used in more than one specific location.

.10 DOP Test: A testing method used to determine the integrity of the Negative Pressure unit using dioctyl phthalate (DOP) HEPA-filter leak test.

.11 Sprayer: Garden reservoir type sprayer or airless spray equipment capable of producing a mist or fine spray. Must be appropriate capacity for scope of work.

.12 Negative pressure: A system that extracts air directly from work area, filters such extracted air through a High Efficiency Particulate Air filtering system, and discharges this air directly outside work area to exterior of building. This system shall maintain a minimum pressure differential of 5 Pa relative to adjacent areas outside of work areas, be equipped with an alarm to warn of system breakdown, and be equipped with an instrument to continuously monitor and automatically record pressure differences.

.13 Airlock: A system for permitting ingress or egress without permitting air movement between a contaminated area and an uncontaminated area, typically consisting of two curtained doorways at least 2 m apart.

.14 Curtained doorway: An arrangement of closures to allow ingress and egress from one room to another while permitting minimal air movement between rooms, typically



constructed as follows: Place two overlapping sheets of polyethylene over an existing or temporarily framed doorway, secure each along the top of the doorway, secure the vertical edge of one sheet along one vertical side of the doorway, and secure the vertical edge of the other sheet along the opposite vertical side of the doorway. Reinforce free edges of polyethylene with duct tape and weight the bottom edge to ensure proper closing. Each polyethylene sheet shall overlap openings not less than 1.5 m on each side.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

.1 Before commencing work:

.1 Obtain from the appropriate agency and submit to Architect/Engineer all necessary permits for transportation and disposal of asbestos waste. Ensure that dump operator is fully aware of hazardous nature of material being dumped and proper methods of disposal. Submit proof satisfactory to Architect/Engineer that suitable arrangements have been made to receive and properly dispose of asbestos waste.

.2 Submit proof satisfactory to Architect/Engineer that all employees have had instruction on the hazards of asbestos exposure, respirator use, dress, use of showers, entry and exit from work areas, and all aspects of work procedures and protective measures. Supervisory personnel shall have attended an asbestos abatement course, of not less than two days duration, approved by the Owner’s Representative. Submit proof of attendance in the form of a certificate. Minimum of one Supervisor for every five workers.

.3 Submit layout of proposed enclosures and decontamination facilities to Architect/Engineer for review.

.4 Submit documentation including test results for sealer proposed for use.

.5 Submit Provincial and/or local requirements for Notice of Project Form.

.6 Submit proof of Contractor’s Asbestos Liability Insurance.

.7 Submit proof satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer that all employees have respirator fitting and testing. Workers must be fit-tested with the respirator that is personally issued.

.8 Submit Workplace Health, Safety and Compensation Commission status and transcription of insurance.

.9 Submit documentation including test results, fire and flammability data, and Material Safety Data Sheets for chemicals or materials including but not limited to the following: .1 encapsulants; .2 amended water; .3 slow-drying sealer.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Comply with Federal, Provincial, and local requirements pertaining to asbestos, provided that in case of conflict among those requirements or with these specifications the more stringent requirement applies. Comply with regulations in effect at the time the work is performed.



.2 Follow Newfoundland Regulation of the Occupation Health and Safety Act, Asbestos Abatement Regulations, Latest Edition. All work as defined under this section must be completed by a “Qualified Asbestos Abatement Contractor” (registered with the Government of Newfoundland and Labrador)

.3 Follow regulations for the transport of asbestos waste, specifically the Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, latest edition.

.4 Follow regulations for the disposal of asbestos waste, specifically Waste Management Regulations and Waste Material Disposal Areas Regulations.


Prior to commencing of work, verify with Architect/Engineer and review whether an asbestos audit and/or Asbestos Management Plan are in place for the building.

.1 Information contained in audits and plans are for general information only and are not necessarily representative of all asbestos containing materials covered within the scope of this project.

.2 Notify Architect/Engineer of materials believed to contain asbestos encountered during the execution of work that is not contained in the audits and plans. Do not disturb such materials until instructed by Architect/Engineer.

1.8 INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING

.1 Before commencing work, provide to the Owner’s Representative satisfactory proof that every worker has had instruction and training in the hazards of asbestos exposure, in personal hygiene including dress and showers, in entry and exit from the Asbestos Work Area, in all aspects of work procedures including glove bag procedures, and in the use, cleaning, and disposal of respirators and protective clothing.

.2 Instruction and training related to respirators includes, at a minimum:

.1 Proper fitting of the equipment.

.2 Inspection and maintenance of the equipment.

.3 Disinfecting of the equipment.

.4 Limitations of the equipment.

.3 Instruction and training must be provided by a competent, qualified person.

.4 Supervisory personnel to complete required training.

1.9 WORKER PROTECTION

.1 Protective equipment and clothing to be worn by workers while in the Asbestos Work Area includes:

.1 Respirator equipped with HEPA filter cartridges, personally issued to the worker and marked as to efficiency and purpose, and acceptable to the Provincial



Authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the type of asbestos and the level of asbestos exposure in the Asbestos Work Area. If disposable type filters are used, provide sufficient filters so that workers can install new filters following disposal of used filters and before re-entering contaminated areas.

.2 Disposable-type protective clothing that does not readily retain or permit penetration of asbestos fibres, consisting of full-body covering including head covering with snug-fitting cuffs at wrists, ankles, and neck.

.2 Each worker shall:

.1 Remove street clothes in clean change room and put on respirator with new filters or reusable filters that have been tested as satisfactory, clean coveralls and head covers before entering Equipment and Access Rooms or Asbestos Work Area . All street clothes, uncontaminated footwear, towels, and similar uncontaminated articles shall be stored in clean change room.

.2 Remove gross contamination from clothing before leaving work area then proceed to Equipment and Access Room. Place contaminated worksuits in receptacles for disposal with other asbestos - contaminated materials Clean outside of respirator with soap and water. Remove respirator; remove filters and wet them and dispose of filters in the container provided for the purpose; and wash and rinse the inside of the respirator. When not in use in the work area, store work footwear in Equipment and Access Room. Upon completion of asbestos abatement, dispose of footwear as contaminated waste or clean thoroughly inside and out using soap and water before removing from work area or from Equipment and Access Room.

.3 Provide facilities for washing and/or showering when leaving Asbestos Work Area, which shall be used by every worker. Hot and cold water supply is to be provided in such a manner to allow workers to adjust water temperature during decontamination.

.4 Enter the unloading room from outside dressed in clean coveralls to remove waste containers and equipment from the Holding Room of the Container and Equipment Decontamination Enclosure system. No worker shall use this system as a means to leave or enter the work area.

.3 Workers shall not eat, drink, smoke or chew gum or tobacco at the work site except in established clean room.

.4 Workers shall be fully protected with respirators and protective clothing during preparation of system of enclosures prior to commencing actual asbestos abatement.

.5 Provide and post in Clean Change Room and in Equipment and Access Room the procedures described in 1.9 of this section, in both official languages.

.6 Ensure that no person required to enter an Asbestos Work Area has facial hair that affects the seal between the respirator and the face.

1.10 VISITOR PROTECTION

.1 Provide protective clothing and approved respirators to Authorized Visitors to work areas.



.2 Instruct Authorized Visitors in the use of protective clothing and respirators.

.3 Instruct Authorized Visitors in proper procedures to be followed in entering into and exiting from work areas.

1.11 NOTIFICATION

.1 Not later than ten (10) days before commencing work on this project notify the Occupational Health and Safety Division in writing as per Regulation 194/91, Section 34 Sub-Section (7). Provide telephone notification immediately prior to start of work.

.2 Notify Sanitary Landfill site.

.3 Inform all sub-trades of the presence of friable asbestos-containing materials identified in the Existing Conditions.

.4 Submit to the Owner’s Representative a copy of all notifications prior to the start of work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 All materials and equipment brought to work site must be in good condition and free of asbestos, asbestos debris, and fibrous materials. Disposable items must be of new materials only.

.2 Polyethylene: Minimum 0.15 mm thick unless otherwise specified; in sheet size to minimize joints.

.3 Tape: Fibreglass reinforced duct tape suitable for sealing polyethylene under both dry conditions and wet conditions using amended water.

.4 Wetting agent: 50% polyoxyethylene ester and 50% polyoxyethylene ether, or other material approved by Owner’s Representative, mixed with water in a concentration to provide adequate penetration and wetting of asbestos-containing material.

.5 Asbestos waste containers: Metal or fibre - type acceptable to dump operator with tightly fitting covers and 0.15 mm minimum thickness sealable polyethylene liners. Labelling requirements: Affix a pre-printed cautionary asbestos warning, in both official languages, that is clearly visible when ready for removal to disposal site.

.6 Encapsulants : Type 2 surface film forming type Class A water based conforming to CAN/CGSB-1.205, ULC listed.

.7 Glove bag: Acceptable materials include safe-T-strip products in configuration suitable for work, or alternative material approved by addendum during the tendering period in accordance with the Instructions to Tenderers. Glove bags intended for use in more than



one location must be equipped with a reversible, double-pull, double-throw zipper on the top and at approximately the mid-section of the bag.

.8 Slow drying sealer: non-staining, clear, water - dispersible type that remains tacky on surface for at least 8 hours and designed for the purpose of trapping residual asbestos fibres. Sealer shall have flame spread and smoke developed rating less than 50

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Work Areas:

.1 Shut off and isolate air handling and ventilation systems to prevent fibre dispersal to other areas of the building during work phase. Conduct smoke tests to ensure that duct work is airtight. Active return air ducts within the Asbestos Work Area shall have all joints and seams rigid seal and caulked.

.2 Clean proposed work area using, where practicable, HEPA vacuum cleaning equipment. If not practicable, use a wet cleaning method. Do not use methods that raise dust, such as dry sweeping, or vacuuming using other than HEPA vacuum equipment.

.3 Put negative pressure system in operation and operate continuously from the time the first polyethylene is installed to seal openings until final completion of the work including final cleanup. Provide continuous monitoring of pressure difference using an automatic recording instrument.

.4 Seal off all openings such as corridors, doorways, windows, skylights, ducts, grilles, and diffusers, with polyethylene sheeting sealed with tape.

.5 Cover floor and wall surfaces with polyethylene sheeting sealed with tape. Cover floors first so that polyethylene extends at least 300 mm up walls then cover walls to overlap floor sheeting.

.6 Build airlocks at all entrances to and exits from work area so that work area is always closed off by one curtained doorway when workers enter or exit.

.7 At each access to work areas install warning signs in both official languages in upper case "Helvetica Medium" letters reading as follows where the number in parentheses indicates the font size to be used: "CAUTION ASBESTOS HAZARD AREA (25 mm) NO UNAUTHORIZED ENTRY (19 mm) WEAR ASSIGNED PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (19 mm) BREATHING ASBESTOS DUST MAY CAUSE SERIOUS BODILY HARM (7 mm)".

.8 After work area isolation, remove heating, ventilating, and air conditioning filters, pack in sealed plastic bags 0.15 mm minimum thick and treat as contaminated asbestos waste. Remove ceiling - mounted objects such as lights, partitions, other fixtures not previously sealed off, and other objects that interfere with asbestos removal, as directed by Owner’s Representative. Use localized water spraying during fixture removal to reduce fibre dispersal.

.9 Maintain emergency and fire exits from work area, or establish alternative exits satisfactory to Provincial Fire Commissioner.



.10 Where application of water is required for wetting asbestos-containing materials, shut off electrical power, provide 24 volt safety lighting and ground fault interrupter circuits on power source for electrical tools, in accordance with applicable CSA Standard. Ensure safe installation of electrical lines and equipment.

.11 After preparation of work area and Decontamination Enclosure Systems remove plaster ceilings, including lath, furring, channels, hangers, wires, clips, and dispose of as contaminated waste in specified containers. Spray ceiling debris and immediate work area with amended water (see definition in Section 1.4.2) to reduce dust, as work progresses.

.2 Worker Decontamination Enclosure System:

.1 Worker Decontamination Enclosure System shall comprise an Equipment and Access Room, a Wash Area Room, and a Clean Room, as follows: .1 Equipment and Access Room: Build an Equipment and Access Room

between Wash Area Room and work area, with two curtained doorways, one to the Wash Area Room and one to work area . Install portable toilet, waste receptor, and storage facilities for workers' shoes and any protective clothing to be reworn in work area. The Equipment and Access Room shall be large enough to accommodate specified facilities, any other equipment needed, and at least one worker allowing him /her sufficient space to undress comfortably.

.2 Wash Area Room: Build a Wash Area Room between the Clean Room and Equipment and Access Room, with two curtained doorways, one to the Clean Room and one to Equipment and Access Room. Provide a constant supply of hot and cold or warm water. Provide piping and connect to water sources and drains. Pump waste water through a 5 micrometre filter system acceptable to Owner’s Representative before directing into drains. Provide soap, clean towels , and appropriate containers for disposal of used respirator filters.

.3 Clean Room: Build a Clean Room between the Wash Area Room and clean areas outside of enclosures, with two curtained doorways, one to outside of enclosures and one to Wash Area Room. Provide lockers or hangers and hooks for workers‘ street clothes and personal belongings. Provide storage for clean protective clothing and respiratory equipment. Install a mirror to permit workers to fit respiratory equipment properly.

.3 Container and Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System:

.1 Container and Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System consists of a Staging Area within the work area, a Holding Room, and an Unloading Room. The purpose of this system is to provide a means to decontaminate waste containers, scaffolding, waste and material containers, vacuum and spray equipment, and other tools and equipment for which the Worker Decontamination Enclosure System is not suitable. .1 Staging Area: Designate a Staging Area in the work area for gross

removal of dust and debris from waste containers and equipment, labelling and sealing of waste containers, and temporary storage pending



removal to Washroom. Staging Area shall have a curtained doorway to the Washroom.

.2 Holding Room: shall be of sufficient size to accommodate at least two waste containers and the largest item of equipment used.

.3 Unloading Room: Build an Unloading Room between the Holding Room and outside, with two curtained doorways, one to the Holding Room and one to outside.

.4 Construction of Decontamination Enclosures:

.1 Build suitable framing for enclosures or use existing rooms where convenient, and line with polyethylene sheeting sealed with tape.

.2 Build curtained doorways between enclosures so that when people move through or when waste containers and equipment are moved through a doorway, one of the two closures comprising the doorway always remains closed.

.5 Separation of Work Areas from Occupied Areas:

.1 Separate parts of the building required to remain in use from parts of the building used for asbestos abatement by means of an airtight barrier system constructed as follows: .1 Build suitable floor to ceiling lumber or metal stud framing, cover with

polyethylene sheeting sealed with tape, and apply 9 mm minimum thick plywood. Seal all joints between plywood sheets and between plywood and adjacent materials with surface film forming type sealer, to create an airtight barrier.

.2 Cover plywood barrier with polyethylene sealed with tape, as specified for work areas.

.6 Maintenance of Enclosures:

.1 Maintain enclosures in tidy condition.

.2 Ensure that barriers and polyethyene linings are effectively sealed and taped. Repair damaged barriers and remedy defects immediately upon discovery.

.3 Visually inspect enclosures at the beginning of each working period.

.4 Use smoke methods to test effectiveness of barriers when directed by Owner’s Representative.

.7 Asbestos Abatement work shall not commence until:

.1 Arrangements have been made for disposal of waste.

.2 For wet stripping techniques, arrangements have been made for containing, filtering, and disposal of waste water.

.3 Work area and decontamination enclosures and parts of the building required to remain in use are effectively segregated.

.4 Tools, equipment , and materials waste containers are on hand.

.5 Arrangements have been made for building security.

.6 Warning signs specified in PART 3 are displayed where access to contaminated areas is possible.



.7 All notifications have been completed and other preparatory steps have been taken.

3.2 SUPERVISION

.1 A minimum of one Supervisor for every five workers is required. Refer to Asbestos Abatement Regulations for definition and training of supervisor.

.2 An approved Supervisor must remain within the Asbestos Work Area at all times during the disturbance, removal, or other handling of asbestos-containing materials.

3.3 ASBESTOS REMOVAL

.1 Before removing asbestos:

.1 Prepare site.

.2 Spray asbestos material with water containing the specified wetting agent, using airless spray equipment capable of providing a "mist" application to prevent release of fibres. Saturate the asbestos material sufficiently to wet it to the substrate without causing excess dripping. Spray the asbestos material repeatedly during work process to maintain saturation and to minimize asbestos fibre dispersion.

.2 Remove the saturated asbestos material in small sections. Do not allow saturated asbestos to dry out. As it is being removed pack the material in sealable plastic bags 0.15 mm minimum thick and place in labelled containers for transport.

.3 Seal filled containers. Clean external surfaces thoroughly by wet sponging. Remove from immediate working area to Staging Area. Clean external surfaces thoroughly again by wet sponging before moving containers to decontamination Washroom. Wash containers thoroughly in decontamination Washroom, and store in Holding Room pending removal to Unloading Room and outside. Ensure that containers are removed from the Holding Room by workers who have entered from uncontaminated areas dressed in clean coveralls.

.4 After completion of stripping work, all surfaces from which asbestos has been removed shall be wire brushed and wet-sponged to remove all visible material. During this work keep the surfaces wet.

.5 Where Owner’s Representative decides complete removal of asbestos-containing material is impossible due to obstructions such as structural members or major service elements, and provides a written direction, encapsulate the material as follows:

.1 Apply surface film forming type sealer to provide 0.635 mm minimum dry film thickness over sprayed asbestos surfaces. Apply using airless spray equipment to avoid blowing off fibres.

.6 After wire brushing and wet sponging to remove visible asbestos, and after encapsulating asbestos-containing material impossible to remove, wet clean the entire work area including the Equipment and Access Room, and equipment used in the process. After a



24 hour period to allow for dust settling, wet clean these areas and objects again. During this settling period no entry, activity, or ventilation will be permitted.

3.4 PIPE INSULATION REMOVAL USING GLOVE BAG

.1 Place tools necessary to remove insulation in tool pouch. Wrap the bag around pipe and close zippers. Seal bag to pipe with cloth straps.

.2 Place hands in gloves and use necessary tools to remove insulation. Arrange insulation in bag to obtain full capacity of bag.

.3 Insert nozzle of a garden reservoir type sprayer into bag through valve and wash down pipe and interior of bag thoroughly. Wet surface of insulation in lower section of bag.

.4 When glove bags are intended for use at more than one location: After wash-down and application of sealer, seal off waste in lower section of bag using zipper at mid-section of bag. Remove air from top section of bag through the elasticized valve using a HEPA vacuum. Remove bag from pipe, reinstall in new location, and reseal to pipe prior to opening the lower section of the bag. Repeat stripping operation.

.5 If bag is to be moved along pipe, first remove air from top section through the elasticized valve using a HEPA vacuum. Next loosen straps, move bag, re-seal to pipe using double-pull zipper to pass hangers. Repeat stripping operation.

.6 To remove bag after completion of stripping, wash top section and tools thoroughly. Remove air from top section through the elasticized valve using a HEPA vacuum. Pull polyethylene waste container over glove bag before removing from pipe. Release one strap and remove freshly washed tools. Place tools in water. Remove second strap and zipper. Fold over into waste container and seal.

.7 After removal of bag ensure that pipe is free of all residue. Remove all residue using HEPA vacuum or wet cloths. Ensure that surfaces are free of sludge which after drying could release asbestos dust into atmosphere. Seal exposed surfaces of pipe and ends of insulation with slow-drying sealer to seal in any residual fibres.

.8 Upon completion of work shift, cover exposed ends of remaining pipe insulation with polyethelene taped in place.

3.5 FINAL CLEANUP

.1 Remove polyethylene sheet by rolling it away from walls to centre of work area. Vacuum all visible asbestos-containing particles observed during cleanup, immediately, using HEPA vacuum equipment.

.2 Place polyethylene seals, tape, cleaning material, clothing, and other contaminated waste in plastic bags and sealed labelled waste containers for transport.

.3 Work areas, Equipment and Access Room, Wash Area Room, and other enclosures that may be contaminated shall be included in the clean-up.



.4 Sealed waste containers and all equipment used in the work shall be included in the cleanup and shall be removed from work areas, via the Container and Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System, at an appropriate time in the cleaning sequence.

.5 A final check shall be carried out to ensure that no dust or debris remains on surfaces as a result of dismantling operations and air-monitoring shall be carried out again to ensure that asbestos levels in the building do not exceed 0.10 fibres/cc. Repeat cleaning using HEPA vacuum equipment, or wet cleaning methods where feasible, in conjunction with sampling until levels meet this criteria.

.6 As work progresses, and to prevent exceeding available storage capacity on site, remove sealed and labelled containers containing asbestos waste and dispose of to authorized disposal area in accordance with requirements of disposal authority. Ensure that each shipment of containers transported to dump is accompanied by Contractor's representative who shall ensure that dumping is done in accordance with governing regulations.

3.6 AIR MONITORING

.1 Contractor to arrange and pay for air monitoring air sampling and testing, daily throughout the work and at the end of the work.

.2 From commencement of work until completion of cleaning operations, pay for and take air samples on a daily basis both inside and outside of work area enclosure in accordance with Asbestos Abatement Regulations (personal, perimeter and clearance) and conforming to applicable NIOSH sampling protocol. (ie: NIOSH 7400)

.3 Results of air monitoring inside the work area will be used to establish the type of respirators to be used. Workers may be required to wear sample pumps for up to full-shift periods. If fibre levels are above the safety factor of the respirators in use, the abatement will be stopped, means of dust suppression will be applied, and a higher safety factor in respiratory protection will be used by all persons inside the enclosure. If air monitoring shows that areas outside work area enclosures are contaminated, these areas shall be enclosed, maintained and cleaned, in the same manner as that applicable to work areas.

.4 During the course of the work, fibre content of the air will be measured by a PCM test. If PCM measurements exceed 0.10 f/cc work will be stopped until procedures are corrected.

.5 Conduct final air monitoring as follows: After the Asbestos Work Area has passed a visual inspection, an acceptable coat of lock-down agent has been applied to all surfaces of the enclosure, and an appropriate setting period has passed, perform air monitoring within the Asbestos Work Area. Final air monitoring results must show fibre levels of less than 0.10 f/cc. If air monitoring results show fibre levels in excess of 0.10 f/cc, re-clean the work area and apply another acceptable coat of lock-down agent to all surfaces. Repeat as necessary until fibre levels are less than 0.10 f/cc.

3.7 INSPECTION

.1 Inspection of the Asbestos Work Area will be performed to confirm compliance with the requirements of the specifications and governing authorities. Deviation from the Asbestos



Abatement Regulations is not accepted without prior approval of the governing authority. Any deviation from these requirements that have not been approved in writing by the Architect/Engineer and the governing authority may result in a stoppage of work, at no cost to the Owner.

.2 The Architect/Engineer is empowered to inspect adherence to specific procedures and materials, and to inspect for final cleanliness and completion. Additional labour or materials expended by the Contractor to provide performance to the level specified shall be at no additional cost.

.3 The Architect/Engineer is empowered to order a shutdown of work when a leakage of asbestos from the Asbestos Work Area has occurred or is likely to occur. Additional labour or materials expended by the Contractor to provide performance to the level specified shall be at no additional cost.

END OF SECTION


Section 03 10 00 – Concrete Forming and Accessories Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL



.2 Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.

.3 Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-place Concrete.

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 CAN/CSA-A23.1/A23.2, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Methods of Test and Standard Practices for Concrete.

.2 CSA-O86S1, Supplement No. 1 to CAN/CSA-O86-01, Engineering Design in Wood.

.3 CSA O121, Douglas Fir Plywood.

.4 CSA O151, Canadian Softwood Plywood.

.5 CSA S269.1, Falsework for Construction Purposes.

.6 CAN/CSA-S269.3, Concrete Formwork.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Indicate method and schedule of construction, shoring, stripping and re-shoring procedures, materials, arrangement of joints, special architectural exposed finishes, ties, liners, and locations of temporary embedded parts. Comply with CSA S269.1, for falsework drawings. Comply with CAN/CSA-S269.3, for formwork drawings.

.2 Indicate formwork design data, such as permissible rate of concrete placement, and temperature of concrete, in forms.

.3 Indicate sequence of erection and removal of formwork/falsework as directed by Owner’s Representative.

.4 Each shop drawing submission shall bear stamp and signature of qualified professional engineer licensed in Province of Newfoundland and Labrador, Canada.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Formwork materials:

.1 For concrete without special architectural features, use wood and wood product formwork materials to CSA-O121.



.2 For concrete with special architectural features, use formwork materials to CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.2 Form ties:

.1 For concrete not designated 'Architectural', use removable or snap-off metal ties, fixed or adjustable length, free of devices leaving holes larger than 25 mm dia. in concrete surface.

.2 For Architectural concrete, use snap ties complete with plastic cones and light grey concrete plugs.

.3 Form release agent: chemically active release agents containing compounds that react with free lime in concrete resulting in water insoluble soaps, non-toxic, biodegradable.

.4 Falsework materials: to CSA-S269.1.

.5 Sealant: to Section 07 92 10 - Joint Sealing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FABRICATION AND ERECTION

.1 Verify lines, levels and centres before proceeding with formwork/falsework and ensure dimensions agree with drawings.

.2 Fabricate and erect falsework in accordance with CSA S269.1.

.3 Refer to architectural drawings for concrete members requiring architectural exposed finishes.

.4 Fabricate and erect formwork in accordance with CAN/CSA-S269.3, to produce finished concrete conforming to shape, dimensions, locations and levels indicated within tolerances required by CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.5 Align form joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to minimum.

.6 Use 25 mm chamfer strips on external corners and/or 25 mm fillets at interior corners, joints, unless specified otherwise.

.7 Form chases, slots, openings, drips, recesses, expansion and control joints as indicated.

.8 Construct forms for architectural concrete, and place ties as indicated and/or as directed. Joint pattern not necessarily based on using standard size panels or maximum permissible spacing of ties.

.9 Build in anchors, sleeves, and other inserts required to accommodate Work specified in other sections. Ensure that all anchors and inserts will not protrude beyond surfaces designated to receive applied finishes, including painting.



.10 Clean formwork in accordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2, before placing concrete.

3.2 REMOVAL AND RESHORING

.1 Leave formwork in place for following minimum periods of time after placing concrete.

.1 3 days for walls and sides of beams.

.2 5 days for columns.

.3 1 day for footings and abutments.

.2 Provide all necessary reshoring of members where early removal of forms may be required or where members may be subjected to additional loads during construction as required.

.3 Space reshoring in each principal direction at not more than 3000 mm apart.

.4 Re-use formwork and falsework subject to requirements of CSA-A23.1A23.2.

END OF SECTION


Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL



.2 Section 03 10 00 – Concrete Forming and Accessories.

.3 Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Concrete Institute (ACI)

.1 ANSI/ACI 315, Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.

.2 ACI 315R, Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for Reinforced Concrete Structure.

.2 American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)

.1 ASTM A185/A185M, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete.

.2 ASTM A497/A497M, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete.


.1 CSA-A23.1/A23.2, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Methods of test and Standard Practices for Concrete.

.2 CSA-A23.3, Design of Concrete Structures.

.3 CAN/CSA-G30.18, Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, A National Standard of Canada.

.4 CSA-G40.20/G40.21, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel /Structural Quality Steel.

.5 CAN/CSA-G164, Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles.

.6 CSA W186, Welding of Reinforcing Bars in Reinforced Concrete Construction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Indicate on shop drawings, bar bending details, lists, quantities of reinforcement, sizes, spacings, locations of reinforcement and mechanical splices if approved by Owner’s Representative, with identifying code marks to permit correct placement without reference to structural drawings. Indicate sizes, spacings and locations of chairs, spacers and hangers. Prepare reinforcement drawings in accordance with Reinforcing Steel Manual of Standard Practice - by Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada . ANSI/ACI 315 and ACI 315R, Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for Reinforced Concrete Structure.


Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing Page 2 of 3

.2 Detail lap lengths and bar development lengths to CSA-A23.3, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Substitute different size bars only if permitted in writing by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Reinforcing steel: billet steel, grade 400, deformed bars to CAN/CSA-G30.18, unless indicated otherwise.

.3 Cold-drawn annealed steel wire ties: to ASTM A497/A497M.

.4 Welded steel wire fabric: to ASTM A185/A185M. Provide in flat sheets only.

.5 Chairs, bolsters, bar supports, spacers: to CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.6 Mechanical splices: subject to approval of Owner’s Representative.

.7 Plain round bars: to CSA-G40.20/G40.21.

2.2 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate reinforcing steel in accordance with CSA-A23.1A23.2, ACI 315, and Reinforcing Steel Manual of Standard Practice by the Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada.

.2 Obtain Owner’s Representative’s approval for locations of reinforcement splices other than those shown on placing drawings.

.3 Upon approval of Owner’s Representative, weld reinforcement in accordance with CSA W186.

.4 Ship bundles of bar reinforcement, clearly identified in accordance with bar bending details and lists.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Upon request, provide Owner’s Representative with certified copy of mill test report of reinforcing steel, showing physical and chemical analysis, minimum 4 weeks prior to commencing reinforcing work.

.2 Upon request inform Owner’s Representative of proposed source of material to be supplied.


Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing Page 3 of 3 PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FIELD BENDING

.1 Do not field bend or field weld reinforcement except where indicated or authorized by Owner’s Representative.

.2 When field bending is authorized, bend without heat, applying a slow and steady pressure.

.3 Replace bars which develop cracks or splits.

3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

.1 Place reinforcing steel as indicated on reviewed placing drawings and in accordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.2 Use plain round bars as slip dowels in concrete. Paint portion of dowel intended to move within hardened concrete with one coat of asphalt paint. When paint is dry, apply a thick even film of mineral lubricating grease.

.3 Prior to placing concrete, obtain Owner’s Representative approval of reinforcing material and placement.

.4 Ensure cover to reinforcement is maintained during concrete pour.

END OF SECTION

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 03 30 00 – Cast in Place Concrete Page 1 of 7

PART 1 GENERAL



.2 Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories.

.3 Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.

.4 Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing.

.5 Section 03 35 05 - Concrete Floor Hardeners.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

.1 ASTM C260, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.

.2 ASTM C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.

.3 ASTM C494/C494M, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

.4 ASTM D412, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension.

.5 ASTM D624, Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomer.

.6 ASTM D1751, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).


.1 CAN/CGSB-51.34, Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building Construction.


.1 CSA-A23.1/A23.2, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Methods of Test and Standard Practices for Concrete.

.2 CAN/CSA-A23.2, Methods of Test for Concrete.

.3 CAN3-A266.4, Guidelines for the Use of Admixtures in concrete.

.4 CAN/CSA-A3000, Cementitious Materials Compendium (Consists of A3001, A3002, A3003, A3004 and A3005).

.5 CSA-A3001, Cementitious Materials for Use in Concrete.

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 03 30 00 – Cast in Place Concrete Page 2 of 7 1.3 ACRONYMS AND TYPES

.1 Cement: hydraulic cement or blended hydraulic cement (XXb - where b denotes blended).

.1 Type GU or GUb - General use cement.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 At least 4 weeks prior to commencing work, inform Owner’s Representative of proposed source of aggregates and provide access for sampling.

.2 Submit testing results and reports for review by Owner’s Representative and do not proceed without written approval when deviations from mix design or parameters are found.

.3 Certificates:

.1 Minimum 4 weeks prior to starting concrete work submit to Owner’s Representative manufacturer's test data and certification by qualified independent inspection and testing laboratory that following materials will meet specified requirements:

.1 Portland cement.

.2 Blended hydraulic cement.

.3 Supplementary cementing materials.

.4 Grout.

.5 Admixtures.

.6 Aggregates.

.7 Water.

.8 Waterstops.

.9 Waterstop joints.

.10 Joint filler. .2 Provide certification that mix proportions selected will produce concrete of

quality, yield and strength as specified in concrete mixes, and will comply with CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.3 Provide certification that plant, equipment, and materials to be used in concrete comply with requirements of CSA-A23.1/A23.2.


.1 Have all concrete produced and delivered by a ready-mix plant that is a member of the Atlantic Provinces Ready Mixed Concrete Association (APRMCA) and holds a current “Certificate of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities” issued by the Association. Submit a copy of this certificate to the Owner’s Representative for approval.

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 03 30 00 – Cast in Place Concrete Page 3 of 7 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Minimum 4 weeks prior to starting concrete work, submit proposed quality control procedures in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control for Owner’s Representative approval for following items:

.1 Falsework erection.

.2 Hot weather concrete.

.3 Cold weather concrete.

.4 Curing.

.5 Finishes.

.6 Formwork removal.

.7 Joints.


.1 Concrete hauling time: maximum allowable time for concrete to be delivered to site of Work and discharged not to exceed 120 minutes after batching.

.1 Modifications to maximum time limit must be agreed to Owner’s Representative and concrete producer as described in CSA A23.1/A23.2.

.2 Deviations to be submitted for review by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Concrete delivery: ensure continuous concrete delivery from plant meets CSA A23.1/A23.2.

.3 Waste Management and Disposal:

.1 Divert unused concrete materials from landfill to local facility approved by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Provide an appropriate area on the job site where concrete trucks can be safely washed.

.3 Divert unused admixtures and additive materials (pigments, fibres) from landfill to official hazardous material collections site as approved by the Owner’s Representative.

.4 Unused admixtures and additive materials must not be disposed of into sewer systems, into lakes, streams, onto ground or in other location where it will pose health or environmental hazard.

.5 Prevent admixtures and additive materials from entering drinking water supplies or streams. Using appropriate safety precautions, collect liquid or solidify liquid with inert, noncombustible material and remove for disposal. Dispose of waste in accordance with applicable local, Provincial and National regulations.

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 03 30 00 – Cast in Place Concrete Page 4 of 7 PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Portland cement: to CAN/CSA-A3001, Type GU.

.2 Water: to CAN/CSA-A23.1.

.3 Aggregates: to CSA-A23.1.

.4 Coarse aggregates to be normal density to CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.5 Admixtures:

.1 Air entraining admixture: to ASTM C260.

.2 Chemical admixtures: to ASTM C494, Owner’s Representative to approve accelerating or set retarding admixtures during cold and hot weather placing.

.6 Non premixed dry pack grout: composition of non metallic aggregate Portland cement with sufficient water for the mixture to retain its shape when made into a ball by hand and capable of developing compressive strength of 50 MPa at 28 days.

.7 Premoulded joint fillers:

.1 Bituminous impregnated fiber board: to ASTM D1751.

.8 Polyethylene film: minimum mm thickness to ASTM C171.

.9 Bonding adhesive: as approved by Owner’s Representative.

2.2 MIXES

.1 Proportion normal density concrete in accordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2, Alternative 1 to give following quality and yield for all concrete.

.1 Cement: .1 Type GU Portland cement.

.2 Minimum compressive strength at 28 days: 25MPa.

.3 Minimum cement content: 300 kg/m3 of concrete.

.4 Class of exposure: N.

.5 Nominal size of coarse aggregate: 20 mm.

.6 Slump at time and point of discharge: 75 to 100 mm.

.7 Air content: 5 to 8 %.

.8 Chemical admixtures: admixtures in accordance with ASTM C494.

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 03 30 00 – Cast in Place Concrete Page 5 of 7 PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Obtain Owner’s Representative approval before placing concrete. Provide 24 h notice prior to placing of concrete.

.2 Place concrete reinforcing in accordance with Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.

.3 During concreting operations:

.1 Development of cold joints not allowed.

.2 Ensure concrete delivery and handling facilitates placing with minimum of re-handling, and without damage to existing structure or Work.

.4 Pumping of concrete is permitted only after approval of equipment and mix.

.5 Ensure reinforcement and inserts are not disturbed during concrete placement.

.6 Prior to placing of concrete obtain Owner’s Representative approval of proposed method for protection of concrete during placing and curing in adverse weather.

.7 Protect previous Work from staining.

.8 Clean and remove stains prior to application for concrete finishes.

.9 Maintain accurate records of poured concrete items to indicate date, location of pour, quality, air temperature and test samples taken.

.10 Do not place load upon new concrete until authorized by Owner’s Representative.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION

.1 Do cast-in-place concrete work in accordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.2 Sleeves and inserts.

.1 No sleeves, ducts, pipes or other openings shall pass through joists, beams, column capitals or columns, except where indicated or approved by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Where approved by Owner’s Representative, set sleeves, ties, pipe hangers and other inserts and openings as indicated or specified elsewhere. Sleeves and openings greater than 100 x 100 mm not indicated, must be approved by Owner’s Representative.

.3 Do not eliminate or displace reinforcement to accommodate hardware. If inserts cannot be located as specified, obtain approval of modifications from Owner’s Representative before placing of concrete.

.4 Check locations and sizes of sleeves and openings shown on drawings.


.5 Set special inserts for strength testing as indicated and as required by non-destructive method of testing concrete.

.3 Anchor bolts.

.1 Set anchor bolts to templates under supervision of appropriate trade prior to placing concrete.

.4 Grout under base plates using procedures in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations which result in 100 % contact over grouted area.

.5 Finishing.

.1 Finish concrete in accordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.2 Use procedures acceptable to Owner’s Representative or those noted in CSA-A23.1/A23.2, to remove excess bleed water. Ensure surface is not damaged.

.3 Wet cure using polyethylene sheets placed over sufficiently hardened concrete to prevent damage. Overlap adjacent edges 150 mm and tightly seal with sand on wood planks. Weigh sheets down to maintain close contact with concrete during the entire curing period.

.4 Where burlap is used for moist curing, place two prewetted layers on concrete surface and keep continuously wet during curing period.

.5 Finish concrete floor to meet requirements of CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.6 Concrete floor to have finish hardness equal or greater than Mohs hardness in accordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.7 Provide swirl-trowelled finish for exterior walks, ramps, pads.

.8 Provide float finish for interior floor slabs.

.9 Rub exposed sharp edges of concrete with carborundum to produce 3 mm radius edges unless otherwise indicated.

.6 Joint fillers.

.1 Furnish filler for each joint in single piece for depth and width required for joint, unless otherwise authorized by Owner’s Representative.

.2 When more than one piece is required for a joint, fasten abutting ends and hold securely to shape by stapling or other positive fastening.

.3 Locate and form, isolation, construction and expansion joints as indicated. Install joint filler.

.4 Use 12 mm thick joint filler to separate slabs-on-grade from vertical surfaces and extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 12 mm of finished slab surface unless indicated otherwise.

.7 Dampproof membrane.

.1 Install dampproof membrane under concrete slabs-on-grade inside building.

.2 Lap dampproof membrane minimum 150 mm at joints and seal.


.3 Seal punctures in dampproof membrane before placing concrete. Use patching material at least 150 mm larger than puncture and seal.

3.3 SITE TOLERANCE

.1 Concrete slab tolerances in accordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2, F-number Method, FF =25, FL = 20.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Inspection and testing of concrete and concrete materials will be carried out by a Testing Laboratory designated by Owner’s Representative in accordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2, and Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.

.2 Owner’s Representative will pay for costs of tests as specified in Section 01 29 83 - Payment Procedures for Testing Laboratory Services. Costs of retesting due to deficient work will be paid for by contractor, by credit change order.

.3 Owner’s Representative will take additional test cylinders during cold weather concreting. Cure cylinders on job site under same conditions as concrete which they represent.

.4 Non-destructive Methods for Testing Concrete shall be in accordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.5 Provide Certificate of Field Quality Inspection and Testing to Owner’s Representative for inclusion in Commissioning Manual.

.6 Inspection or testing by Owner’s Representative will not augment or replace Contractor quality control nor relieve the Contractor of his contractual responsibility.

END OF SECTION

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 03 35 00 – Concrete Finishing Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL



.2 Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete .

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 CAN/CGSB-25.20, Surface Sealer for Floors.



1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Product quality and quality of work in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements.

.2 Submit written declaration that components used are compatible and will not adversely affect finished flooring products and their installation adhesives.

1.4 PRODUCT DATA

.1 Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. WHMIS MSDS acceptable to Labour Canada and Health and Welfare Canada for concrete floor treatment materials. Indicate VOC content.

.2 Include application instructions for concrete floor treatment.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Temporary lighting:

.1 Minimum 1200 W light source, placed 2.5 m above floor surface, for each 40 sq m of floor being treated.

.2 Electrical power:

.1 Provide sufficient electrical power to operate equipment normally used during construction.

.3 Work area:

.1 Make the work area water tight protected against rain and detrimental weather conditions.

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 03 35 00 – Concrete Finishing Page 2 of 3

.4 Temperature:

.1 Maintain ambient temperature of not less than 10°C from 7 days before installation to at least 48 hours after completion of work and maintain relative humidity not higher than 40% during same period.

.5 Moisture:

.1 Ensure concrete substrate is within moisture limits prescribed by flooring manufacturer.

.6 Safety:

.1 Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials.

.7 Ventilation:

.1 Ventilate area of work as directed by Owner’s Representative by use of approved portable supply and exhaust fans.

.2 Ventilate enclosed spaces in accordance with Section 01510 - Temporary Utilities.

.3 Provide continuous ventilation during and after coating application.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CHEMICAL HARDENERS

.1 Type 1- Sodium silicate.

.2 Water: potable.

2.2 SEALING COMPOUNDS

.1 Surface sealer: to CAN/CGSB-25.20, Type 2 - water based.

.2 Surface sealers may not be manufactured or formulated with aromatic solvents formaldehyde halogenated solvents mercury lead cadmium hexavelant chromium and their compounds.

2.3 WET CURE

.1 Clear polyethylene film to ASTM C171, minimum thickness 0.15 mm.

2.4 MIXES

.1 Mixing, ratios and application in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 03 35 00 – Concrete Finishing Page 3 of 3 2.5 JOINT SEALANT

.1 Joint sealants to Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verify that slab surfaces are ready to receive work and elevations are as indicated on drawings by manufacturer.

3.2 PREPARATION OF EXISTING SLAB

.1 Rub exposed sharp edges of concrete with carborundum to produce 3 mm radiused edges unless otherwise indicated.

.2 Saw cut control joints to CSA-A23.1/A23.2, 24 hours maximum after placing of concrete.

.3 Use protective clothing, eye protection, respiratory equipment during stripping of chlorinated rubber or existing surface coatings.

3.3 APPLICATION

.1 After floor treatment is dry, seal control joints and joints at junction with vertical surfaces with sealant.

.2 Apply floor treatment in accordance with Sealer manufacturer's written instructions to new slab-on-grade areas and 2nd level.

.3 Clean overspray. Clean sealant from adjacent surfaces.

3.4 PROTECTION

.1 Protect finished installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 03 35 05 – Concrete Floor Hardeners Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Materials and installation for concrete floor hardeners, slip resistant coatings, and sheet curing materials.





.4 Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Health Canada - Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS):

.1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Include application instructions for concrete hardener, curing compound and slip resistant coating.

.2 Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets.

.1 WHMIS MSDS acceptable to Human Resources Development Canada-Labour and Health Canada for concrete floor hardeners.

.2 Indicate VOC content.


.1 Temporary lighting:

.1 Minimum 1200 W light source, placed 2.5 m above floor surface, for each 40 m2 of floor being finished.

.2 Electrical power:

.1 Sufficient electrical power to operate equipment normally used during construction.

.3 Work area

.1 Water tight protection against rain and detrimental weather conditions.

.4 Temperature:

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 03 35 05 – Concrete Floor Hardeners Page 2 of 3

.1 Maintain ambient temperature of not less than 10˚C from 7 days before installation to at least 48 hours after completion of Work and maintain relative humidity not higher than 40% during same period.

.2 Maintain substrate temperature at 10˚C minimum.

.5 Moisture:

.1 Ensure concrete substrate is within moisture limits prescribed by flooring manufacturer.

.6 Safety:


.7 Ventilation:

.1 Ventilate area of work as directed by Owner’s Representative by use of approved portable supply and exhaust fans.

.2 Ventilate enclosed spaces in accordance with Section 01 51 00 - Temporary Utilities.

.3 Provide continuous ventilation during and after coating application.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FLOOR HARDENER

.1 Non-metallic hardener: premixed, aggregate type, dry shake surface hardener, cement to hardener ratio 2 to 1, cement colour.

2.2 COLOURING AGENT

.1 Non-metallic type cement colouring agent, colour selected by Owner’s Representative.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verify that slab substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.

3.2 HARDENING

.1 Apply floor hardener aggregate at rate in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to new slab-on-grade areas and suspended slab 2nd level.

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 03 35 05 – Concrete Floor Hardeners Page 3 of 3 3.3 PROTECTION

.1 Protect finished installation until floor treatment has completely cured.

END OF SECTION


Section 04 05 00 – Common Work Results for Masonry Page 1 of 6

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Section 01 29 83 - Payment Procedures for Testing Laboratory Services.



.4 Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements.



.7 Section 04 05 12 - Masonry Mortar and Grout.

.8 Section 04 05 19 - Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing.

.9 Section 04 05 23 - Masonry Accessories.

.10 Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry.

.11 Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications.

.12 Section 07 21 13 - Board Insulation.

.13 Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).

.1 CSA-A165 Series, Standards on Concrete Masonry Units.

.2 CSA A179, Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry.

.3 CSA-A371, Masonry Construction for Buildings.

.2 International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC).

.1 Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Hot and Cold Weather Masonry Construction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Product Data.

.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data, including product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations and colors.



.2 Submit two copies of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) - Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

.3 Samples.

.1 Submit samples: .1 Two of each type of masonry unit specified including special shapes. .2 One of each cured and coloured samples of mortar and grout, illustrating

mortar colour and colour range. .3 One of each type of masonry accessory specified. .4 One of each type of masonry reinforcement, tie and connector proposed

for use. .2 Submit samples tested to laboratories employing technicians certified/trained in

procedures for testing masonry units. .3 Samples used for testing, when accepted, become standard for material used.

.4 Manufacturer's Instructions.

.1 Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.


.1 Submit laboratory test reports certifying compliance of masonry units and mortar ingredients with specification requirements.

.2 Submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.

.3 Qualifications:

.1 Manufacturer: minimum five (5) years experience in manufacturing components similar to or exceeding requirements of project.

.2 Installer: experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project.

.3 Masons: company or person specializing in masonry installations with minimum five (5) years documented experience with masonry work similar to this project. .1 Masons employed on this project must demonstrate ability to reproduce

mock-up standards.

1.5 JOB MOCK-UPS.

.1 Construct mock-ups in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.

.2 Construct mock-up panel of exterior masonry wall construction 1200 x 1800 mm showing masonry colours and textures, use of reinforcement, ties, through-wall flashing, weep holes, jointing, coursing, mortar and workmanship.

.3 Mock-up will be used to judge workmanship, substrate preparation, operation of equipment and material application.



.4 Construct mock-up where directed.

.5 Provide written notice of mock-up completion and allow 48 hrs after completion of mock-up for Owner’s Representative review. Commence work only upon receipt of approval of mock-up by Owner’s Representative.

.6 When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard for this work. Mock-up may remain as part of finished work.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

.1 Deliver, store, handle and protect materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements.

.2 Deliver materials to job site in dry condition.

.3 Keep materials dry until use except where wetting of bricks is specified

.4 Store under waterproof cover on pallets or plank platforms held off ground by means of plank or timber skids.

1.7 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Cold weather requirements.

.1 In accordance with CSA-A371 and as outlined below. .1 Maintain temperature of mortar between 5˚C and 50˚C until batch is

used or becomes stable. .2 Maintain ambient temperature of masonry work and it’s constituent

materials between 5°C and 50°C and protect site from exposure to wind.

.2 Hot weather requirements.

.1 In accordance with CSA-A371 and as outlined below. .1 Protect freshly laid masonry from drying too rapidly, by means of

waterproof, non-staining coverings. .2 Keep masonry dry using waterproof, non-staining coverings that extend

over walls and down sides sufficient to protect walls from wind driven rain, until masonry work is completed and protected by flashings or other permanent construction.

.3 Protect masonry and other work from marking and other damage. Protect completed work from mortar droppings. Use non-staining coverings.

.4 Provide temporary bracing of masonry work during and after erection until permanent lateral support is in place.


Section 04 05 00 – Common Work Results for Masonry Page 4 of 6 PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Masonry materials are specified in related Sections indicated in 1.1.

PART 3 EXECUTION


.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, and data sheets.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Provide temporary bracing and support of masonry work during and after erection until permanent lateral support is in place.

.2 Bracing approved by Owner’s Representative.

.3 Protect adjacent materials from damage and disfiguration.

3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Do masonry work in accordance with CSA-A371, except where specified otherwise.

.2 Build masonry plumb, level, and true to line, with vertical joints in alignment.

.3 Layout coursing and bond to achieve correct coursing heights, and continuity of bond above and below openings, with minimum of cutting.

3.4 CONSTRUCTION

.1 Exposed masonry:

.1 Remove chipped, cracked, and otherwise damaged units, in accordance with CSA A-165, Clause 82.1, in exposed masonry and replace with undamaged units.

.2 Jointing:

.1 Allow joints to set just enough to remove excess water, then tool with round jointer to provide smooth, joints true to line, compressed, uniformly concave joints.

.2 Strike flush joints concealed in walls and joints in walls to receive plaster, tile, insulation, or other applied material except paint or similar thin finish coating.

.3 Cutting:



.1 Cut out for electrical switches, outlet boxes, and other recessed or built-in objects.

.2 Make cuts straight, clean, and free from uneven edges.

.4 Building-In:

.1 Build in items required to be built into masonry.

.2 Prevent displacement of built-in items during construction. Check plumb, location and alignment frequently, as work progresses.

.3 Brace door jambs to maintain plumb. Fill spaces between jambs and masonry with mortar.

.5 Support of loads:

.1 Use 30 MPa concrete to Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete, where concrete fill is used in lieu of solid units.

.2 Use grout to CSA A179, where grout is used in lieu of solid units.

.3 Install building paper below voids to be filled with grout; keep paper 25 mm back from faces of units.

.6 Provision for movement:

.1 Leave 3 mm space below shelf angles.

.2 Leave 6 mm space between top of non-load bearing walls and partitions and structural elements. Do not use wedges.

.3 Built masonry to tie in with stabilizers, with provision for vertical movement.

.7 Loose steel lintels:

.1 Install loose steel lintels. Centre over opening width.

.8 Control joints:

.1 Construct continuous control joints where indicated or detailed.

3.5 SITE TOLERANCES

.1 Tolerances in notes to CSA-A371 apply.


.1 Inspection and testing will be carried out by Testing Laboratory designated by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Owner’s Representative will pay costs for testing, as specified in Section 01 29 83 – Payment Procedures for Testing Laboratory Services.

.3 Cost of testing will be paid from cash allowance specified in Section 01 21 00 - Allowances. Re-testing as a result of deficient work will be paid for by contractor, credit change order.



.4 Provide Certificate of Field Quality Inspection and testing to Owner’s Representative for inclusion in Commissioning Manual.

3.7 CLEANING

.1 Perform cleaning after installation to remove construction and accumulated environmental dirt.

.2 Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.

3.8 PROTECTION

.1 Temporary Bracing and Supports:

.1 Provide temporary bracing and supports of masonry work during and after erection until permanent lateral support is in place.

.2 Provide confirmation to Owner’s Representative that temporary bracing and support has been designed by professional engineer.

.3 Brace masonry walls as necessary to resist wind pressure and lateral forces during construction.

.2 Moisture Protection:

.1 Keep masonry dry using waterproof, nonstaining coverings that extend over walls and down sides sufficient to protect walls from wind driven rain, until completed and protected by flashing or other permanent construction.

.2 Cover completed and partially completed work not enclosed or sheltered with waterproof covering at end of each work day. Anchor securely in position.

.3 Air Temperature Protection: protect completed masonry as per Part 1 article Site Conditions.

END OF SECTION

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 04 05 12 – Masonry Mortar and Grout Page 1 of 5

PART 1 GENERAL




.3 Section 04 05 00 - Common Work Results for Masonry.

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 CAN/CSA-A23.1/A23.2, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Methods of Test and Standard Practices for Concrete.

.2 CSA A179, Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry.

.3 CAN/CSA A371, Masonry Construction for Buildings.

.4 CAN/CSA-A3000, Cementitious Materials Compendium; CAN/CSA-A3002, Masonry and Mortar Cement.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet including product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations.

.2 Submit copy of WHMIS MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets. Indicate VOC's mortar, grout, parging, colour additives and admixtures, expressed as grams per litre (g/L).

.2 Samples:

.1 Submit two samples of mortar coloured mortar.

.3 Manufacturer's Instructions:



.1 Submit test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.


.1 Deliver, store and handles masonry mortar and grout materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements, supplemented as follows:


.1 Deliver prepackaged, dry-blended mortar mix to project site in labelled plastic-lined bags each bearing name and address of manufacturer, production codes or batch numbers, and color or formula numbers.

.2 Maintain mortar, grout and packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, traffic and contamination by foreign materials.

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Ambient Conditions: maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to:

.1 Minimum 5 degrees C prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

.2 Maximum 32 degrees C prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Use same brands of materials and source of aggregate for entire project.

.2 Cement:

.1 Portland Cement: to CAN/CSA-A3000. Use VOC products to limits listed in Section 01 35 21 - LEED® Requirements.

.2 Masonry Cement: to CAN/CSA-A3002 and CAN/CSA A179.

.3 Mortar Cement: to CAN/CSA-A3002 and CAN/CSA A179.

.4 Packaged Dry Combined Materials for mortar: to CAN/CSA A179, using gray color cement.

.3 Aggregate: supplied by one supplier.

.1 Fine Aggregate: to CAN/CSA A179, natural sand.

.2 Course Aggregate: to CAN/CSA A179.

.4 Water: clean and potable.

2.2 COLOR ADDITIVES

.1 Use coloring admixture not exceeding 10% of cement content by mass, or integrally colored masonry cement, to produce colored mortar to match approved sample. Admixtures to be approved prior to use. Use in accordance with the specific manufacturer's recommendations. Mortar color sample as selected from manufacturer’s standard color range.

.2 White mortar: use white masonry cement to produce mortar type specified.

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 04 05 12 – Masonry Mortar and Grout Page 3 of 5 2.3 MORTAR MIXES

.1 Mortar for exterior masonry above grade:

.1 Loadbearing: Type S based on proportion specifications.

.2 Non-Loadbearing: Type N based on proportion specifications.

.2 Mortar for interior masonry:

.1 Loadbearing: Type S based on proportion specifications.

.2 Non-Loadbearing: Type O based on proportion specifications.

.3 Mortar for Parapet walls, chimneys, unprotected walls: Type S based on proportion specifications.

.4 Mortar for foundation walls, manholes, sewers, pavements, walks, patios and other exterior masonry at or below grade: Type M based on proportion specifications.

.5 Following applies regardless of mortar types and uses specified above:

.1 Mortar for stonework: Type N based on proportion specifications.

.2 Mortar for grouted reinforced masonry: Type S based on proportion specifications.

2.4 MORTAR MIXING

.1 Add mortar color in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration.

.2 Use a batch type mixer in accordance with CAN/CSA A179.

.3 Re-temper mortar only within two hours of mixing, when water is lost by evaporation.

.4 Use mortar within 2 hours after mixing at temperatures of 32 degrees C, or 2-1/2 hours at temperatures under 5 degrees C.

2.5 GROUT MIXES

.1 Bond Beams: minimum grout mix 10 to 12.5 MPa strength at 28 days or as otherwise indicated on drawings; 200-250 mm slump; mixed in accordance with CAN/CSA A179.

.2 Lintels: minimum grout mix 10 to 12.5 MPa strength at 28 days or as otherwise indicated on drawings; 200-250 mm slump; mixed in accordance with CAN/CSA A179.

.3 Grout: minimum compressive strength of 12.5 MPa at 28 days or as otherwise indicated on drawings. Maximum aggregate size and grout slump: CAN/CSA A179.

2.6 GROUT MIXING

.1 Mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with CAN/CSA A179.


.2 Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.

.3 Do not use calcium chloride or chloride based admixtures.

PART 3 EXECUTION



3.2 CONSTRUCTION

.1 Do masonry mortar and grout work in accordance with CSA A179, except where specified otherwise.

.2 Apply parging in uniform coating of thickness indicated.

3.3 MIXING

.1 All pointing mortar can be mixed using a regular paddle mixer. Only electric motor mixers are permissible. Mixers run on hydrocarbons are not permitted, due to fumes. Mixing by hand must be pre-approved by the Architect/Engineer.

.2 Clean all mixing boards and mechanical mixing machine between batches.

.3 Mortar must be weaker than the units it is binding.

.4 Contractor to appoint one individual to mix mortar, for duration of project. In the event that this individual must be changed, mortar mixing must cease until the new individual is trained, and mortar mix is tested.

3.4 MORTAR PLACEMENT

.1 Install mortar to manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Install mortar to requirements of CAN/CSA A179.

.3 Remove excess mortar from grout spaces.

3.5 GROUT PLACEMENT

.1 Install grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Install grout in accordance with CAN/CSA A179.

.3 Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids.


.4 Do not install grout in lifts greater than 400 mm, without consolidating grout by rodding.

.5 Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout.

3.6 CLEANING


.2 Remove droppings and splashings using clean sponge and water.

.3 Clean masonry with low pressure clean water and soft natural bristle brush.

END OF SECTION


Section 04 05 19 – Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing Page 1 of 4

PART 1 GENERAL




.3 Section 04 05 00 - Common Work Results for Masonry.

.4 Section 04 05 12 – Masonry Mortar and Grout.

.5 Section 04 05 23 – Masonry Accessories.

.6 Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Unit Masonry.

1.2 REFERENCES



.2 CSA-A370, Connectors for Masonry.


.4 CAN/CSA G30.18, Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

.5 CSA-S304.1, Masonry Design for Buildings.

.6 CSA A179, Mortar and Grout For Unit Masonry.

.7 CSA W186, Welding of Reinforcing Bars in Reinforced Concrete Construction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet .

.2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. Indicate VOC's for epoxy coatings and galvanized protective coatings and touch-up products illustrating products to be incorporated into project for specified products .

.2 Shop Drawings:

.1 Shop drawings consist of bar bending details, lists and placing drawings. Provide shop drawings detailing bar bending details, anchorage details, lists and placing drawings.

.2 On placing drawings, indicate sizes, spacing, location and quantities of reinforcement and connectors.



.3 Indicate on shop drawings, bar bending details, lists, quantities of reinforcement, sizes, spacings, locations of reinforcement and mechanical splices if approved by Owner’s Representative, with identifying code marks to permit correct placement without reference to structural drawings. Indicate sizes, spacings and locations of chairs, spacers and hangers. Prepare reinforcement drawings in accordance with Reinforcing Steel Manual of Standard Practice - by Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada . ANSI/ACI 315 and ACI 315R, Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for Reinforced Concrete Structure.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Bar reinforcement: to CSA-A371, and CAN/CSA G30.18, Grade 400.

.2 Wire reinforcement: to CSA-A371, and CSA G30.14, two wire ladder or truss type, galvanized.

.3 Ties:

.1 For metal stud or wood stud and masonry construction: to CSA-A370 and CSA-S304, 1.6 mm thick side mounting, stainless steel flat plate, c/w 5.8 mm ø holes for veneer tire wire attachment, 4.76 mm ø veneer ties with polyethylene insulation supports. Total length of flat plate to suit stud width, sheathing, air space and insulation.

.2 For cast-in-place concrete and masonry construction: to CSA-A370 and CSA-S304, 1.6 mm thick stainless steel L-Plate, c/w 5.8 mm ø holes for veneer tire wire attachment, 4.76 mm ø veneer ties with polyethylene insulation supports.

.3 For concrete block and masonry construction: to CSA-A370 and CSA-S304, 1.6 mm thick stainless steel connector plate, c/w 5.8 mm ø holes for veneer tire wire attachment, 4.76 mm ø veneer ties with polyethylene insulation supports. Total length of connector plate to suit block width, air space and insulation.

.4 Corrosion protection for wire reinforcement: to CSA-S304, galvanized to CSA-S304 and CSA-A370.

2.2 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate reinforcing in accordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.2 Fabricate connectors in accordance with CSA-A370.

.3 Obtain Owner’s Representative’s approval for locations of reinforcement splices other than shown on placing drawings.



.4 Upon approval of Owner’s Representative, weld reinforcement in accordance with CSA W186.

.5 Ship reinforcement and connectors, clearly identified in accordance with drawings.


.1 Upon request, provide Owner’s Representative with certified copy of mill test report of reinforcement steel and connectors, showing physical and chemical analysis, minimum 5 weeks prior to commencing reinforcement work.

.2 Upon request inform Owner’s Representative of proposed source of material to be supplied.

PART 3 EXECUTION



3.2 GENERAL

.1 Supply and install masonry connectors and reinforcement in accordance with CSA-A370, CSA-A371, CSA-A23.1/A23.2, and CSA-S304.1, unless indicated otherwise.

.2 Prior to placing concrete, mortar, obtain Owner’s Representative’s approval of placement of reinforcement and connectors.

.3 Supply and install additional reinforcement to masonry as indicated.

3.3 BONDING AND TYING

.1 Bond walls of two or more wythes using metal connectors in accordance with CSA-S304, CSA-A371, and as indicated.

.2 Tie masonry veneer to backing in accordance with NBC, CSA-S304.1, CSA-A371, and as indicated.

3.4 REINFORCED LINTELS AND BOND BEAMS

.1 Reinforce masonry lintels and bond beams as indicated.

.2 Place and grout reinforcement in accordance with CSA-S304.1, CSA-A371 and CSA-A179.

.3 Support and position reinforcing bars in accordance with CAN/CSA A371.


Section 04 05 19 – Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing Page 4 of 4 3.5 GROUTING

.1 Grout masonry in accordance with CSA-S304.1, CSA-A371 and CSA-A179, and as indicated.

3.6 ANCHORS

.1 Supply and install metal anchors as indicated.

3.7 LATERAL SUPPORT AND ANCHORAGE

.1 Supply and install lateral support and anchorage in accordance with CSA-S304.1 and as indicated.

3.8 MOVEMENT JOINTS

.1 Reinforcement will not be continuous across movement joints unless otherwise indicated.

3.9 FIELD BENDING

.1 Do not field bend reinforcement and connectors except where indicated or authorized by Owner’s Representative.

.2 When field bending is authorized, bend without heat, applying a slow and steady pressure.

.3 Replace bars and connectors which develop cracks or splits.

3.10 FIELD TOUCH-UP

.1 Touch up damaged and cut ends of epoxy coated or galvanized reinforcement steel and connectors with compatible finish to provide continuous coating.

3.11 CLEANING


END OF SECTION


Section 04 05 23 – Masonry Accessories Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL




.3 Section 04 05 00- Common Work Results for Masonry.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM).

.1 ASTM D2240, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness.



1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data including product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations.

.2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data. Indicate VOC's for joint fillers and lap adhesives.




.1 Deliver, store and handle masonry accessories in accordance with, Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements supplemented as follows:

.1 Keep fillers and adhesives dry, protected against dampness, and freezing.

.2 Store packaged materials off ground and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Control joint filler: purpose-made elastomer 70 durometer hardness to ASTM D2240 of size and shape indicated.



.2 Lap adhesive: recommended by masonry flashing manufacturer.

.3 Weep hole vents: purpose-made PVC.

.4 Cavity Wall Flashing:

.1 Self adhering SBS rubberized asphalt compound integrally laminated to cross-laminated polyethylene film, minimum thickness 1.0 mm.

.2 Primer: as per manufacturer’s recommendation.

PART 3 EXECUTION



3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install continuous control joint fillers in control joints at locations indicated on drawings.

.2 Lap adhesive: apply adhesive to flashing lap joints.

.3 Reglets: install reglets at locations indicated on drawings.

.4 Install weep hole vents in vertical joints immediately over flashings, in exterior wythes of cavity wall and masonry veneer wall construction, at maximum horizontal spacing of 600 mm on centre.

.5 Trash mortar diverters: install purpose made diverters in cavities where indicated and as directed, size and shape to suit purpose and function.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION

.1 Build in flashings in masonry in accordance with CSA-A371 as follows:

.1 Install flashings under exterior masonry bearing on foundation walls, slabs, shelf angles, and steel angles over openings. Install flashings under weep hole courses and as indicated.

.2 In cavity walls and veneered walls, carry flashings from front edge of masonry, under outer wythe, then up backing not less than 300 mm, and as follows: .1 For masonry backing embed flashing 25 mm in joint. .2 For concrete backing, insert flashing into reglets. .3 For wood frame backing, staple flashing to walls behind sheathing

paper. .4 For gypsum board backing, bond to wall using manufacturer's

recommended adhesive.



.3 Lap joints 150 mm and seal with adhesive.

.2 Form flashing (end dams) at lintels, sills and wall ends to prevent water from travelling horizontally past flashing ends.

3.4 CLEANING


END OF SECTION


Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Unit Masonry Page 1 of 4

PART 1 GENERAL



.2 Section 04 05 00 - Common Work Results for Masonry

.3 Section 04 05 12 – Masonry Mortar and Grout

.4 Section 04 05 19 - Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing

.5 Section 04 05 23 - Masonry Accessories

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 CAN/CSA A165 SERIES, CSA Standards on Concrete Masonry Units, covers: A165.1, A165.2, A165.3.

.2 CAN/CSA A371, Masonry Construction for Buildings.

.3 CSA S304.1, Design of Masonry Structures.

.2 Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC).

.1 CAN/ULC-S101, Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Product Data

.1 Submit manufacturer’s printed product Literature, specifications and data sheet illustrating products to be incorporated into project for specified products.

.2 Samples

.1 Two of each type of concrete masonry unit specified.

.3 Manufacturer’s Instructions

.1 Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions.


.1 Mock-up

.1 Construct mock-up in accordance with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control.

.2 Construct mock-up 10 m 2 minimum of brick unit masonry in area designated by Owner’s Representative before proceeding with brick unit masonry work.



.3 Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by Owner’s Representative before proceeding with Concrete Unit Masonry Work.

.2 Test reports: certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.

.3 Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.

.4 Pre-installation meeting: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements manufacturer’s instructions and manufacturer’s warranty requirements.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

.1 Manufacturer: company specializing in manufacturing products of this section with minimum 10 years experience.

.2 Installer: company specializing in performing work of this section approved by manufacturer. Minimum 5 years experience.

.3 Design structural installations under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in structural design of concrete masonry installation and registered in the Province of Newfoundland and Labrador.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Standard concrete block units: to CAN3-A165, Series (CAN3-A165.1)

.1 Classification: H/10/A/M

.2 Size: modular.

.3 Special shapes: provide bull nosed units for exposed corners. Provide purpose-made shapes for lintels and bond beams. Provide additional special shapes as indicated.

.2 Split ashlar face concrete masonry units: split face concrete ashlar units, full split, 90 x 190 x 90 mm with purpose made “L” corner blocks. Colour to match adjacent materials. Provide smooth surface block where wall items are mounted.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

.1 Reinforcement: to Section 04 05 19 - Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing.

.2 Connectors: to Section 04 05 19 - Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing.

.3 Flashing: to Section 04 05 23 - Masonry Accessories.

.4 Mortar and mortar mixes: to Section 04 05 12 - Masonry Mortar and Grout.



.5 Grout and grout mixes: to Section 04 05 12 - Masonry Mortar and Grout.

2.3 CLEANING COMPOUNDS

.1 Compatible with substrate and acceptable to masonry manufacturer for use on products.

.2 Cleaning compounds compatible with concrete unit masonry and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions.

2.4 TOLERANCES

.1 Tolerances for standard concrete unit masonry tolerances in accordance with CAN/CSA A165.1, supplemented as follows:

.1 Maximum variation between units within specific job lot not to exceed 2.0 mm.

.2 No parallel edge length, width or height dimension for individual unit to differ by more than 2.0 mm.

.3 Out of square tolerance not to exceed 2.0 mm.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Concrete block units.

.1 Bond: running

.2 Coursing height: 200 mm for one block and one joint

.3 Jointing: concave where exposed or where paint or other finish coating is specified

.2 Special Shapes:

.1 Install special units to form corners, returns, offsets, reveals and indents without cut ends being exposed and without losing bond or module.

.2 Install reinforced concrete block lintels over openings in masonry where steel or reinforced concrete lintels are not indicated.

.3 End bearing: not less than 200 mm.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION

.1 Cull out masonry units, in accordance with CAN/CSA A165 and approved range of color samples, with chips, cracks, broken corners, excessive color and texture variation.

.2 Build in miscellaneous items such as bearing plates, steel angles, bolts, anchors, inserts, sleeves and conduits.

.3 Construct masonry walls using running bond unless otherwise noted.



.4 Fit masonry closely against electrical and plumbing outlets so collars, plates and covers overlap and conceal cuts.

.5 Install movement joints and keep free of mortar where indicated.

.6 Hollow Units: spread mortar setting bed from outside edge of face shells. Gauge amount of mortar on top and end of unit to create full joints, equivalent to shell thickness. Avoid excess mortar.

.7 Solid Units: apply mortar over entire vertical and horizontal surfaces. Avoid bridging of airspace between brick veneer and backup wall with mortar.

.8 Ensure compacted head joints. Use full or face-shell joint as indicated.

.9 Tamp units firmly into place.

.10 Do not adjust masonry units after mortar has set. Where resetting of masonry is required, remove, clean and reset units in new mortar.

.11 Tool exposed joints concave; strike concealed joints flush.

.12 After mortar has achieved initial set up, tool joints.

.13 Do not interrupt bond below or above openings.

3.3 CLEANING

.1 Standard block: Allow mortar droppings on masonry to partially dry then remove by means of trowel, followed by rubbing lightly with small piece of block and finally by brushing.

.2 Upon completion of installation remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.

3.4 PROTECTION

.1 Brace and protect concrete unit masonry in accordance with Section 04 05 00 - Common Work Results for Masonry.

END OF SECTION

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 05 12 23 – Structural Steel for Buildings Page 1 of 5

PART 1 GENERAL



.2 Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

.3 Section 05 21 00 - Steel Joist Framing.

.4 Section 05 31 00 - Steel Decking.


.6 Section 09 91 13 - Exterior Painting.

.7 Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting.

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 CAN/CSA G40.20/G40.21, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel.


.3 CAN/CSA-S16, Limit States Design of Steel Structures.

.4 CAN/CSA-S136, Cold Formed Steel Structural Members.

.5 CSA-S136.1, Commentary on CSA Standard S136.

.6 CSA W47.1, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures.

.7 CSA W48, Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding of Structural Steel.

.8 CSA W55.3, Resistance Welding Qualification Code for Fabricators of Structural Members Used in Buildings.

.9 CSA W59, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) Metric.


.1 CAN/CGSB-85.10, Protective Coatings for Metals.


.1 ASTM A36/A36M, Specification for Structural Steel.

.2 ASTM A325M, Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints Metric.

.4 Canadian Institute of Steel Construction (CISC)/Canadian Paint Manufacturer’s Association (CPMA).


.1 CISC/CPMA 1, Quick-Drying, One Coat Paint for Use on Structural Steel.

.2 CISC/CPMA 2, Quick-Drying, Primer for use on Structural Steel.

.5 The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC)

.1 SSPC SP 1, Solvent Cleaning.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings including fabrication and erection documents and materials list.

.2 On erection drawings: indicate details and information necessary for assembly and erection purposes such as, description of methods, sequence of erection, type of equipment used in erection and temporary bracings. Show detail of all non-standard connections such as bracing connections, truss connections, moment connections and hanger assemblies and other non-standard connections as requested by the Engineer.

.3 Erections drawings to be stamped by a qualified professional Engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Newfoundland and Labrador. The erection drawings are to contain a clause stating that the professional Engineer who stamped the erection drawings is responsible for all fabricator designed assemblies, components and connections required for this project.

.4 Drawings for all fabricator designed assemblies, components and connections are to be stamped and signed by the professional Engineer who stamped the erection drawings.

1.4 SAMPLES

.1 Prepare sample of typical exposed structural connections in accordance with approval of Engineer. Samples to be judged upon alignment of surfaces, uniform contact between surfaces, smoothness and uniformity of finished welds. When approved, sample units will serve as a standard for workmanship, appearance and material acceptable for entire project.

1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

.1 Design details and connections in accordance with requirements of CAN/CSA-S16 and CAN/CSA-S136 with CSA-S136.1 to resist forces, moments, shears and allow for movements indicated.

.2 Unless noted otherwise on the drawings or in the specifications connection design is the responsibility of the structural steel fabricator.

.3 If connection for shear only (standard connection is required):

.1 Select framed beam shear connections from an industry accepted publication such as "Handbook of the Canadian Institute of Steel Construction".

.2 If shears are not indicated, select or design connections to support reaction from maximum uniformly distributed load that can be safely supported by beam in bending, provided no point loads act on beam.


.4 For non-standard connections, submit sketches and design calculations stamped and signed by qualified professional Engineer licensed in the Province of Newfoundland and Labrador.


.1 If requested submit on certified copy of mill reports covering chemical and physical properties of steel used in this work.


.1 At least 2 weeks prior to fabrication of structural steel submit to Owner’s Representative a letter from the fabricators Welding engineer stating the Welding engineer is responsible for welding procedures and practices for this project as outlined in CSA S47.1

.2 Provide certificate of Quality Compliance from steel fabricator upon completion of structural steel fabrication stating that the work has been designed and fabricated in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents.

.3 If requested, submit to the Engineer one copy of all approved welding procedures for this project.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Structural steel: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21 Grade, 350W except HSS columns to A500.

.2 Cold formed structural members: to CAN/CSA S-136.

.3 Anchor bolts: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade 300W.

.4 Bolts, nuts and washers: to ASTM A325M

.5 Welding materials: to CSA W59 and certified by Canadian Welding Bureau.

.6 Shop paint primer:

.1 To CISC/CPMA 1 for interior steel.

.2 To CISC/CPMA 2 for exterior steel.

2.2 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate structural steel in accordance with CAN/CSA-S16 and in accordance with approved reviewed shop drawings.

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 05 12 23 – Structural Steel for Buildings Page 4 of 5 2.3 SHOP PAINTING

.1 Clean, prepare surfaces and shop prime structural steel in accordance with CAN/CSA-S16 except where members to be encased in concrete.

.2 Clean members, remove loose mill scale, rust, oil, dirt and other foreign matter. Prepare surface by solvent cleaning to SSPC SP 1.

.3 Apply one coat of primer in shop to steel surfaces except:

.1 Surfaces to be encased in concrete.

.2 Surfaces to receive field installed stud shear connections.

.3 Surfaces and edges to be field welded.

.4 Faying surfaces of friction-type connections.

.5 Below grade surfaces in contact with soil.

.4 Apply paint under cover, on dry surfaces when surface and air temperatures are above 5˚ C.

.5 Maintain dry condition and 5˚C minimum temperature until paint is thoroughly dry.

.6 Strip paint from bolts, nuts, sharp edges and corners before prime coat is dry.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

.1 Structural steel work: in accordance with CAN/CSA-S16.

.2 Welding: in accordance with CSA W59.

.3 Companies to be certified under Division 1 or 2.1 of CSA W47.1 for fusion welding of steel structures and/or CSA W55.3 for resistance welding of structural components.

3.2 CONNECTION TO EXISTING WORK

.1 Verify dimensions and condition of existing work, report discrepancies and potential problem areas to Owner’s Representative for direction before commencing fabrication.

3.3 MARKING

.1 Mark materials in accordance with CAN/CSA G40.20/G40.21. Do not use die stamping. If steel is to be left in unpainted condition, place marking at locations not visible from exterior after erection.

.2 Match marking: shop mark bearing assemblies and splices for fit and match.

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 05 12 23 – Structural Steel for Buildings Page 5 of 5 3.4 ERECTION

.1 Erect structural steel, as indicated and in accordance with CAN/CSA-S16 and in accordance with approved reviewed erection drawings.

.2 Field cutting or altering structural members: to approval of Engineer.

.3 Clean with mechanical brush and touch up shop primer to bolts, rivets, welds and burned or scratched surfaces at completion of erection.

.4 Continuously seal members by continuous welds where indicated. Grind smooth.

3.5 FIELD PAINTING

.1 Paint in accordance with Section 09 91 23 – Interior Painting.


.1 Inspection and testing of materials and workmanship will be carried out by an Inspection and Testing company designated by Owner’s Representative.

.2 The Inspection and Testing Company will carry out vertical and horizontal alignment checks, torque testing and inspection of representative connection welds.

.3 Provide safe access and working areas for testing on site, as required by testing agency and as authorized by Owner’s Representative.

.4 Submit test reports to Owner’s Representative within 2 weeks of completion of inspection.

.5 Owner will pay costs of inspection and testing. Costs for any reinspection and/or re-testing as a result of deficient work will be paid for by the contractor, by credit change order

.6 Prior to inspection & testing by the Inspection and Testing company the structural steel erection contractor will carry out an inspection of the work and make the inspection results available to the Owner’s Representative and the Inspection and Testing company. The inspection report will identify the areas of work inspected, deficiencies identified and measures taken to correct the deficiencies.

.7 Copies of test reports and inspections to be included in Commissioning Manual

END OF SECTION

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 05 31 00 - Steel Decking Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL




.3 Section 05 12 23 - Structural Steel for Buildings.

.4 Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications.

.5 Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants.


.7 Section 09 91 23 – Interior Painting.

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 CSA C22.2 No.79, Cellular Metal and Cellular Concrete Floor Raceways and Fittings.

.2 CAN/CSA-S16.1, Limit States Design of Steel Structures.

.3 CSA-S136, Cold Formed Steel Structural Members.

.4 CSA W47.1, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures.

.5 CSA W55.3, Resistance Welding Qualification Code for Fabricators of Structural Members Used in Buildings.

.6 CSA W59, Welded Steel Construction, (Metal Arc Welding) Metric.


.1 CAN/CGSB-1.181, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating.

.3 American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM)

.1 ASTM A653/A653M, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

.4 Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute (CSSBI)

.1 CSSBI 10M, Standard for Steel Roof Deck.

.2 CSSBI 12M, Standard for Composite Steel Deck.


.1 Design steel deck using limit states design in accordance with CSA S136 and CSSBI 10M and CSSBI 12M.


.2 Steel deck and connections to steel framing to carry dead, live and other loads including lateral loads, diaphragm action, composite deck action, and uplift as indicated.

.3 Deflection under specified live load not to exceed 1/240 of span, except that when gypsum board ceilings are hung directly from deck, live load deflection not to exceed 1/360 of span.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by qualified professional Engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Newfoundland and Labrador, Canada.

.2 Submit design calculations if requested by Owner’s Representative.

.3 Indicate deck plan, profile, dimensions, base steel thickness, metallic coating designation, connections to supports and spacings, projections, openings, reinforcement details and accessories.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Zinc-iron Alloy (ZF) coated steel sheet: to ASTM A653/A653M structural quality Grade 230, 255, with ZF75 coating, for interior surfaces not exposed to weather, minimum base steel thickness 1.2.1mm unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

.2 Closures: as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

.3 Cover plates, cell closures and flashings: steel sheet with minimum base steel thickness of 0.76 mm. Metallic coating same as deck material.

.4 Primer: zinc rich, ready mix to CAN/CGSB-1.181.

.5 Caulking: to Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants.

2.2 TYPES OF DECKING

.1 Steel roof deck: non-cellular, interlocking side laps. Base steel thickness, 1.21mm and depth 38mm unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

.2 Composite steel floor deck: non-cellular, upright embossed fluted profile, interlocking side lap, base steel thickness, 1.2.1mm depth & profile as shown on the drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

.1 Structural steel work: in accordance with CAN/CSA-S136 and CSSBI 10M and CSSBI 12M.


.2 Welding: in accordance with CSA W59, except where specified otherwise.

.3 Companies to be certified under Division 1 or 2.1 of CSA W47.1 for fusion welding of steel and/or CSA W55.3 for resistance welding.

3.2 ERECTION

.1 Erect steel deck as indicated and in accordance with CSA S136, CSSBI 10M and CSSBI 12M and in accordance with approved reviewed erection drawings.

.2 For non-cellular deck lap ends to 50 mm minimum.

.3 Immediately after deck is permanently secured in place, touch up metallic coated top surface with compatible primer where burned by welding.

.4 Prior to concrete placement, steel deck to be free of soil, debris, standing water, loose mil scale and other foreign matter.

.5 Temporary shoring, if required, to be designed to support construction loads, wet concrete and other construction equipment. Do not remove temporary shoring until concrete attains 75% of its specified 28 day compression strength.

.6 Place and support reinforcing steel as indicated.

3.3 CLOSURES

.1 Install closures in accordance with approved details.

3.4 OPENINGS AND AREAS OF CONCENTRATED LOADS

.1 No reinforcement required for openings cut in deck which are smaller than 150 mm square.

.2 Frame deck openings with any one dimension between 150 to 300 mm as recommended by manufacturer, except as otherwise indicated.

.3 For deck openings with any one dimension greater than 300 mm and for areas of concentrated load, reinforce in accordance with structural framing details, except as otherwise indicated.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

.1 Install connections in accordance with CSSBI recommendations as indicated on the drawings whichever is the most stringent.

END OF SECTION

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications Page 1 of 5

PART 1 GENERAL



.2 Section 01 61 00 – Common Product requirements.



.5 Section 04 05 00 – Common Work Results for Masonry

.6 Section 04 05 19 – Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing.

.7 Section 05 12 23 - Structural Steel for Buildings.

.8 Section 05 31 00 – Steel Decking.

.9 Section 05 51 29 - Metal Stairs and Ladders.



1.2 REFERENCES


.1 ASTM A53/A53M, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Steamless.

.2 ASTM A269, Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.

.3 ASTM A276, Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.

.4 ASTM A307, Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.


.1 CAN/CGSB-1.40, Anti-corrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer.

.2 CAN/CGSB-1.181, Ready-Mixed, Organic Zinc-Rich Coating.


.1 CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel.



.3 CAN/CSA-S16.1, Limit States Design of Steel Structures.

.4 CSA W48, Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding (Developed in co-operation with the Canadian Welding Bureau).

.5 CSA W59, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) (Imperial Version).

.4 The Environmental Choice Program

.1 CCD-047a, Paints, Surface Coatings.

.2 CCD-048, Surface Coatings - Recycled Water-borne.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet

.2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. Indicate VOC's:

.1 For finishes, coatings, primers and paints.

.2 Shop Drawings

.1 Indicate materials, core thicknesses, finishes, connections, joints, method of anchorage, number of anchors, supports, reinforcement, details, and accessories.


.1 Test Reports: Submit Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.

.2 Certificates: Submit Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.



.2 Cover exposed stainless steel surfaces with pressure sensitive heavy protection paper or apply strippable plastic coating, before shipping to job site.

.3 Leave protective covering in place until final cleaning of building. Provide instructions for removal of protective covering.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Steel sections and plates: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade 350W.


.2 Welding materials: to CSA W59.

.3 Welding electrodes: to CSA W48 Series.

.4 Bolts and anchor bolts: to ASTM A307.

.5 Grout: non-shrink, non-metallic, flowable, 15 MPa at 24 hours.

2.2 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate work square, true, straight and accurate to required size, with joints closely fitted and properly secured.

.2 Use self-tapping shake-proof flat round oval headed screws on items requiring assembly by screws or as indicated.

.3 Where possible, fit and shop assemble work, ready for erection.

.4 Ensure exposed welds are continuous for length of each joint. File or grind exposed welds smooth and flush.

2.3 FINISHES

.1 Galvanizing: hot dipped galvanizing with zinc coating 600 g/m2 to CAN/CSA-G164.

.1 Optional Finish for exterior steel angle lintels: stainless steel to ASTM A276, S304.

.2 Shop coat primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.40.

.3 Zinc primer: zinc rich, ready mix to CAN/CGSB-1.181.

2.4 ISOLATION COATING

.1 Isolate aluminum from following components, by means of bituminous paint:

.1 Dissimilar metals except stainless steel, zinc, or white bronze of small area.

.2 Concrete, mortar and masonry.

.3 Wood.

2.5 SHOP PAINTING

.1 Apply one shop coat of primer to metal items, with exception of galvanized or concrete encased items.

.2 Use primer unadulterated, as prepared by manufacturer. Paint on dry surfaces, free from rust, scale, grease. Do not paint when temperature is lower than 7 degrees C.

.3 Clean surfaces to be field welded; do not paint.

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications Page 4 of 5 2.6 ANGLE LINTELS

.1 Steel angles: galvanized sizes indicated. Provide 150 mm minimum bearing at ends.

.1 Optional stainless steel finish for exterior steel angle lintels.

.2 Weld or bolt back-to-back angles to profiles as indicated.

2.7 CHANNEL FRAMES

.1 Fabricate frames from steel, sizes of channel and opening as indicated.

.2 Weld channels together to form continuous frame for jambs and head of openings, sizes as indicated.

.3 Shop coat prime interior channel frames after fabrication. Shop coat prime exterior channel frames after fabrication and apply a high build epoxy coating finish Section 09 91 13 – Exterior Painting.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION

.1 Do welding work in accordance with CSA W59 unless specified otherwise.

.2 Erect metalwork square, plumb, straight, and true, accurately fitted, with tight joints and intersections.

.3 Provide suitable means of anchorage acceptable to Owner’s Representative such as dowels, anchor clips, bar anchors, expansion bolts and shields, and toggles.

.4 Exposed fastening devices to match finish and be compatible with material through which they pass.

.5 Provide components for building by other sections in accordance with shop drawings and schedule.

.6 Make field connections with bolts to CAN/CSA-S16.1, or weld.

.7 Hand items over for casting into concrete or building into masonry to appropriate trades together with setting templates.

.8 Touch-up rivets, field welds, bolts and burnt or scratched surfaces after completion of erection with primer.

.9 Touch-up galvanized surfaces with zinc rich primer where burned by field welding.

.10 Touch-up high build epoxy coated finishes.

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications Page 5 of 5 3.2 CHANNEL FRAMES

.1 Install steel channel frames to openings as indicated.

3.3 CLEANING



END OF SECTION

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 05 51 29 – Metal Stairs and Ladders Page 1 of 5

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Section 01 29 83 – Payment Procedures for Testing Laboratory Services.



.4 Section 05 12 23 – Structural Steel for Buildings.

.5 Section 05 31 00 – Steel Decking.




1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute/National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (ANSI/NAAMM)

.1 ANSI/NAAMM MBG531, Metal Bar Grating Manual.

.2 American Society for Testing and Materials,(ASTM)

.1 ASTM A53/A53M, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless.

.2 ASTM A307, Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.

.3 ASTM A325M, Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.


.1 CAN/CGSB-1.40, Anti-corrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer.



.1 CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, General Requirements for Rolled or welded Structural Quality Steel.


.3 CSA W59,Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding/Imperial Version).

.5 National Association of Architectural Metal Manufactures (NAAMM)


.1 AMP 510, Metal Stair Manual.

.6 Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC), Systems and Specifications Manual, Volume 2.

1.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

.1 Design metal stair, balustrade and landing construction and connections to NBC vertical and horizontal live load requirements.

.2 Detail and fabricate stairs to NAAMM Metal Stairs Manual.

1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

.1 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet.

.2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. Indicate VOC's: .1 For finishes, coatings, primers and paints.

.2 Shop Drawings

.1 Indicate construction details, sizes of steel sections and thickness of steel sheet.

.2 Submit shop drawing bearing stamp of a qualified professional Owner’s Representative registered or licensed in the Province of Newfoundland and Labrador.


.1 Test Reports: Submit Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.

.2 Certificates: Submit Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Steel sections: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21 Grade 350 W.

.2 Floor plate: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade 260 W.

.1 Thickness: 3 mm.

.3 Steel pipe: to ASTM A53/A53M, standard weight, schedule 40 seamless black.

.4 Steel bars to CAN/CSA-G40.21, 20 mm diameter.


.5 Welding materials: to CSA W59.

.6 Bolts: to ASTM A307.

.7 High strength bolts: to ASTM A325M.

2.2 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate to NAAMM, Metal Stair Manual.

.2 Weld connections where possible, otherwise bolt connections. Countersink exposed fastenings, cut off bolts flush with nuts. Make exposed connections of same material, colour and finish as base material on which they occur.

.3 Accurately form connections with exposed faces flush; mitres and joints tight. Make risers of equal height.

.4 Grind or file exposed welds and steel sections smooth.

.5 Shop fabricate stairs in sections as large and complete as practicable.

2.3 STEEL PAN STAIRS

.1 Fabricate stairs with closed riser steel pan construction.

.2 Form treads and risers from 3 mm thick steel plate. Secure treads and risers to L 35 x 35 x 5 horizontal and vertical welded to stringers.

.3 Form wall stringers from MC 310 x 15.8.

.4 Form outer stringers from MC 310 x 15.8 with 5 mm thick plate fascia welded on.

.5 Form landings from 3 mm thick steel plate, reinforced by L 55 x 55 x 6 mm spaced at 400 mm on centre.

.6 Provide clip angles for fastening of furring channels, where applied finish is indicated for underside of stairs and landings.

.7 Extend stringers around mid landings to form steel base.

.8 Close ends of stringers where exposed.

2.4 PIPE/TUBING BALUSTRADES

.1 Construct balusters and handrails from galvanized steel pipe steel tubing or steel tubing.

.2 Cap and weld exposed ends of balusters and handrails.

.3 Terminate at abutting wall with end flange.

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 05 51 29 – Metal Stairs and Ladders Page 4 of 5 2.5 BAR BALUSTRADES

.1 Construct bar balustrades as follows:

.1 Balusters: 20 mm diameter steel.

.2 Top rail: 38 mm diameter standard steel pipe.

.3 Bottom rail: 38 mm diameter standard steel pipe.

.4 Bottom rail supports: same as pipe rail.

.2 Weld balustrades to stringers as indicated.

2.6 EXTERIOR STAIR GRATING

.1 Heavy duty (38mm deep) purpose made galvanized steel channel and bar type safety tread on supporting steel angles @400 o.c.

2.7 FINISHES

.1 Shop coat primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.40.

2.8 SHOP PAINTING

.1 Clean surfaces in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council Manual Volume 2.

.2 Apply one coat of shop primer except interior surfaces of pans.

.3 Apply two coats of primer of different colours to parts inaccessible after final assembly.

.4 Use primer as prepared by manufacturer without thinning or adding admixtures. Paint on dry surfaces, free from rust, scale, grease, do not paint when temperature is below 7 degrees C.

.5 Do not paint surfaces to be field welded.

.6 Hot dip galvanized exterior assemblies.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF STAIRS

.1 Install in accordance with NAAMM, Metal Stair Manual.

.2 Install plumb and true in exact locations, using welded connections wherever possible to provide rigid structure. Provide anchor bolts, bolts and plates for connecting stairs to structure.

.3 Hand items over for casting into concrete or building into masonry to appropriate trades together with setting templates.


.4 Do welding work in accordance with CSA W59 unless specified otherwise.

.5 Touch up shop primer to bolts, welds, and burned or scratched surfaces at completion of erection.

3.2 CLEANING

.1 Perform cleaning as soon as possible after installation to remove construction and accumulated environmental dirt.


END OF SECTION


Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry Page 1 of 4

PART 1 GENERAL



.2 Section 06 05 73 - Wood Treatment.

.3 Section 07 52 00 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing


.5 Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 ASTM C36/C36M, Specification for Gypsum Wallboard.

.2 ASTM C578, Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.


.1 CSA A123.2, Asphalt Coated Roofing Sheets.

.2 CSA B111, Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples.


.4 CSA O112 Series, CSA Standards for Wood Adhesives.

.5 CSA O121, Douglas Fir Plywood.

.6 CAN/CSA-O141, Softwood Lumber.

.7 CSA O151, Canadian Softwood Plywood.

.8 CAN/CSA-O325.0, Construction Sheathing.

.3 National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA)

.1 Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber.


.1 Lumber identification: by grade stamp of an agency certified by Canadian Lumber Standards Accreditation Board.

.2 Plywood panels in accordance with CSA and ANSI standards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit proof of compatibility between Alkaline Copper Quaternary (ACQ) pressure treated lumber and fasteners to be utilized.


Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry Page 2 of 4 PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FRAMING AND LUMBER MATERIALS

.1 Lumber: unless specified otherwise, softwood, No. 1 or No. 2 grade, S4S, moisture content 19% (S-dry) or less in accordance with following standards:

.1 CAN/CSA-O141.

.2 NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber.

.2 Framing and board lumber: in accordance with NBC.

.3 Furring, blocking, nailing strips, grounds, rough bucks, fascia backing and sleepers:

.1 Board sizes: "Standard" or better grade.

.2 Dimension sizes: "Standard" light framing or better grade.

.3 Post and timbers sizes: "Standard" or better grade.

.4 Pressure treated material to be Alkaline Copper Quaternary (ACQ).

2.2 PANEL MATERIALS

.1 Plywood panels: to CAN/CSA-O325.0.

.2 Douglas fir plywood (DFP): to CSA O121, standard construction.

.3 Canadian softwood plywood (CSP): to CSA O151, standard construction.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

.1 Sealants: Section 07 91 00 – Joint Sealants.

.2 General purpose adhesive: to CSA O112 Series.

.3 Nails, spikes and staples: to CSA B111.

.4 Bolts: 12.5 mm diameter unless indicated otherwise, complete with nuts and washers.

.5 Proprietary fasteners: toggle bolts, expansion shields and lag bolts, screws and lead or inorganic fibre plugs, explosive actuated fastening devices, recommended for purpose by manufacturer.

2.4 FASTENER FINISHES

.1 Galvanizing: to CAN/CSA-G164, use galvanized fasteners for exterior work, interior highly humid areas and fire-retardant treated lumber.

2.5 WOOD PRESERVATIVE

.1 Surface-applied wood preservative: clear or copper napthenate or 5% pentachlorophenol solution, water repellent preservative.


Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry Page 3 of 4 PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Treat surfaces of material with wood preservative, before installation.

.2 Apply preservative by dipping, or by brush to completely saturate and maintain wet film on surface for minimum 3 minute soak on lumber and one minute soak on plywood.

.3 Re-treat surfaces exposed by cutting, trimming or boring with liberal brush application of preservative before installation.

.4 Treat all material as indicated as follows:

.1 Wood fascia, backing, curbs, nailers.

.2 Wood furring for sheeting/siding on outside surface of exterior masonry concrete walls.

.3 Wood sleepers supporting wood subflooring over concrete slabs in contact with ground or fill.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Comply with requirements of NBC latest edition, Part 9 supplemented by following paragraphs.

.2 Install members true to line, levels and elevations, square and plumb.

.3 Construct continuous members from pieces of longest practical length.

.4 Install spanning members with "crown-edge" up.

.5 Select exposed framing for appearance. Install lumber and panel materials so that grade-marks and other defacing marks are concealed or are removed by sanding where materials are left exposed.

.6 Install subflooring and combined subfloor and underlay with panel end-joints located on solid bearing, staggered at least 800 mm.

.1 In addition to mechanical fasteners, apply subflooring adhesive under panels installed on wood joints. Place continuous adhesive bead in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, single-bead on each joist and double-bead on joists where panel ends butt.

.2 Use decking screws for mechanical fasteners when weather conditions are unsuitable for subflooring adhesive.

.7 Install furring and blocking as required to space-out and support casework, cabinets, wall and ceiling finishes, facings, fascia, soffit, siding electrical equipment mounting boards, and other work as required.


Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry Page 4 of 4

.8 Install furring to support siding applied vertically where there is no blocking and where sheathing is not suitable for direct nailing.

.1 Align and plumb faces of furring and blocking to tolerance of 1:600.

.9 Install rough bucks, nailers and linings to rough openings as required to provide backing for frames and other work.

.10 Install wood cants, fascia backing, nailers, curbs and other wood supports as required and secure using galvanized steel fasteners. Coordinate height of roof curbs with Section 07 52 00 – Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing.

.11 Install sleepers as indicated.

.12 Use dust collectors and high quality respirator masks when cutting or sanding wood panels.

3.3 ERECTION

.1 Frame, anchor, fasten, tie and brace members to provide necessary strength and rigidity.

.2 Countersink bolts where necessary to provide clearance for other work.

.3 Use nailing disks for soft sheathing as recommended by sheathing manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


Section 07 21 13 – Board Insulation Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL




.3 Section 03 30 00 – Cast in Place Concrete.

.4 Division 4 – Masonry

.5 Section 07 52 00 – Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM).

.1 ASTM C1289, Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board.


.1 CGSB 71-GP-24M, Adhesive, Flexible, for Bonding Cellular polystyrene Insulation.

.3 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC).

.1 CAN/ULC-S701, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystrene, Boards and Pipe Coverings.

.2 CAN/ULC-S702, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, for Buildings.

.3 CAN/ULC-S704, Standard for Thermal Insulation Polyurethane and Polyisocyanurate, Boards, Faced.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data.

.2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. Indicate VOC's insulation products and adhesives.




.1 Provide certificate of quality compliance from insulation manufacturer.


Section 07 21 13 – Board Insulation Page 2 of 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION

.1 Urethane (Isocyanurate): Faced, to CAN/ULC-S704 foil facing, shiplapped edges, RSI 1.05 per 25 mm, total thickness as indicated on drawings.

2.2 ADHESIVE

.1 Adhesive suitable for bonding polyisocyanurate insulation to substrates as indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer’s written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions and data sheets.

3.2 WORKMANSHIP

.1 Install insulation after building substrate materials are dry.

.2 Install insulation to maintain continuity of thermal protection to building elements and spaces.

.3 Fit insulation tight around electrical boxes, plumbing and heating pipes and ducts, around exterior doors and windows and other protrusions.

.4 Keep insulation minimum 75 mm from heat emitting devices such as recessed light fixtures, and CAN/CGA-B149.1 and CAN/CGA-B149.2 type B and L vents.

.5 Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Butt joints tightly, offset vertical joints. Use only insulation boards free from chipped or broken edges. Use largest possible dimensions to reduce number of joints.

.6 Offset both vertical and horizontal joints in multiple layer applications.

.7 Do not enclose insulation until it has been inspected and approved by Owner’s Representative.

3.3 EXAMINATION

.1 Examine substrates and immediately inform Owner’s Representative in writing of defects.

.2 Prior to commencement of work ensure:


Section 07 21 13 – Board Insulation Page 3 of 3

.1 Substrates are firm, straight, smooth, dry, free of snow, ice or frost, and clean of dust and debris.

3.4 RIGID INSULATION INSTALLATION

.1 Apply adhesive to insulation board in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

.2 Imbed insulation boards into non-vapour barrier type adhesive, applied as specified, prior to skinning of adhesive.

.3 Leave insulation board joints unbonded over line of expansion and control joints. Bond a continuous 150 mm wide 0.15 mm modified bituminous membrane over expansion and control joints using compatible adhesive and primer before application of insulation.

.4 Carefully inspect for continuity of air barrier prior to placement of insulation.

3.5 PERIMETER FOUNDATION INSULATION

.1 Exterior application: extend boards vertically below bottom of finish floor slab to depth as indicated on drawings. Install on exterior face of perimeter foundation wall with adhesive. Cover with 9.0mm cement board mechanically fastened with seams caulked.

3.6 CLEANING


END OF SECTION


Section 07 21 16 –Blanket Insulation Page 1 of 2

PART 1 GENERAL





1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM).

.1 ASTM C553, Specification for Mineral Fibre Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications.

.2 ASTM C665, Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.

.3 ASTM C1320, Standard Practice for Installation of Mineral Fiber Batt and Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction.

.4 ASTM E84, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.



.3 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC).

.1 CAN/ULC-S702, Standard for Mineral Fibre Insulation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Product Data:




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION

.1 Thermal batt and blanket mineral fibre:

.1 Unfaced glass fiber thermal insulation to ASTM C665 Type:I, thickness and RSI value as indicated on drawings.

.2 Acoustic batt insulation:


Section 07 21 16 –Blanket Insulation Page 2 of 2

.1 Unfaced glass fiber acoustical insulation to ASTM C665, Type I, thickness as indicated. .1 Flame spread: 10 to ASTM E84. .2 Smoke development: 10 to ATSM E84. .3 Sound transmission Class: STC 49. .4 Dimensional stability: linear shrinkage less than 0.1%.

PART 3 EXECUTION


.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer’s written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, and data sheets.

3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION

.1 Install insulation to maintain continuity of thermal protection to building elements and spaces and for sound attenuation as noted on drawings.

.2 Fit insulation closely around electrical boxes, pipes, ducts, frames and other objects in or passing through insulation.

.3 Do not compress insulation to fit into spaces.

.4 Keep insulation minimum 75 mm from heat emitting devices such as recessed light fixtures, and minimum 50 mm from sidewalls and CAN/CGA-B149.1 and CAN/CGA-B149.2 Type B and L vents.

.5 Do not enclose insulation until it has been inspected and approved by Owner’s Representative.

3.3 CLEANING


END OF SECTION


Section 07 21 20 – Low Expanding Foam Sealant Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL






.5 Section 07 27 00.01 – Air Barriers - Descriptive or Proprietary.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Urethane Foam Contractors' Association Inc. (CUFCA)

.2 Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC)

.1 CAN/ULC-S101, Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

.2 CAN/ULC-S102, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.

.3 CAN/ULC-S705.1, Standard for Thermal Insulation Spray Applied Rigid Foam, Medium Density, Material Specification.

.4 CAN/ULC-S705.2, Standard for Thermal Insulation Spray Applied Rigid Foam, Medium Density, Installer's Responsibilities-Specification.

1.3 TEST REPORTS

.1 Submit test reports, verifying qualities of foam sealant meet or exceed requirements of this specification.

.2 Submit test reports in accordance with CAN/ULC-S101 for fire endurance and CAN/ULC-S102 for surface burning characteristics.


.1 Applicators to conform to CUFCA Quality Assurance Program.

1.5 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Protect workers as recommended by CAN/ULC-S705.2 and manufacturer's recommendations:

.1 Workers must wear gloves, respirators, dust masks, eye protection, protective clothing when applying foam sealant.

.2 Workers must not eat, drink or smoke while applying foam sealant.


Section 07 21 20 – Low Expanding Foam Sealant Page 2 of 3 1.6 PROTECTION

.1 Ventilate area in accordance with Section 01 51 00 - Temporary Utilities.

.2 Ventilate area to receive insulation by introducing fresh air and exhausting air continuously during and 24 hours after application to maintain non-toxic, unpolluted, safe working conditions.

.3 Provide temporary enclosures to prevent spray and noxious vapours from contaminating air beyond application area.

.4 Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by overspray, fall-out, and dusting of insulation materials.

.5 Dispose of waste foam sealant daily in location designated by Owner’s Representative and decontaminate empty drums in accordance with foam sealant manufacturer’s instructions.


.1 Apply foam sealant only when surfaces and ambient temperatures are within manufacturers' prescribed limits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Low expanding, one-component, polyurethane foam sealant, curing to a semi-rigid, closed cell urethane foam providing a RSI of 0.9 per 25.4 mm. To meet the following physical properties:

.1 Density: 25.7 kg/m3

.2 Compressive Strength Parallel @ 10%: 69-96 psi

.3 Tensile Strength: 103 psi

.4 Water Vapour Transmission: 5.97 perms

.5 Flame Spread: 20

.6 Smoke Development: 70


Section 07 21 20 – Low Expanding Foam Sealant Page 3 of 3 PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

.1 Apply foam sealant to clean surfaces in accordance manufacturer's printed instructions. Surfaces to be free of dust, dirt, oil and other foreign materials.

.2 Cover surfaces not intended to be foamed.

.3 Apply foam sealant to perimeter of openings indicated and to thickness as recommended by manufacturer. Trim excess cured foam from finished area.

.4 Cover exposed urethane foam sealants to protect from adverse affects from ultraviolet light (sunlight).

END OF SECTION


Section 07 26 00 –Vapour Retarders Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL






1.2 REFERENCES


.1 CAN/CGSB-51.34, Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet, for Use in Building Construction.

.2 Underwriters Laboratories Canada (ULC)

.1 CAN/ULC S102, Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include:

.1 Product characteristics.

.2 Performance criteria.

.3 Limitations.

.2 Submit two copies of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

.3 Quality assurance submittals:

.1 Certificates: submit certificates certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.

.2 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions and comply with written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheet.

1.4 MOCK-UPS

.1 Construct mock-up of sheet vapour barrier installation including one lap joint, one inside corner and at one electrical box. Mock-up may be part of finished work.


Section 07 26 00 –Vapour Retarders Page 2 of 3

.2 Mock-up will be used to judge workmanship, substrate preparation, and material application.

.3 Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by Owner’s Representative before proceeding with vapour barrier work.

.4 When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard of quality required for this work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET VAPOUR RETARDER

.1 Polyethylene film: to CAN/CGSB-51.34, 0.15mm thick with a water vapour permeance of not greater than 45 ng/(P·s·m2), flame spread rating of less than 150 to CAN/ULC S102.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

.1 Joint sealing tape: air resistant pressure sensitive adhesive tape, type recommended by vapour barrier manufacturer, 50 mm wide for lap joints and perimeter seals, 25 mm wide elsewhere.

.2 Sealant: compatible with vapour retarder, recommended by vapour retarder manufacturer, to Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.

.3 Staples: minimum 6 mm leg.

.4 Moulded box vapour barrier: factory-moulded polyethylene box for use with recessed electric switch and outlet device boxes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Ensure services are installed and inspected prior to installation of retarder.

.2 Install sheet vapour retarder on warm side of exterior wall and ceiling space assemblies prior to installation of gypsum board to form continuous retarder.

.3 Install Sheet Vapour retarder under concrete slab to form continuous retarder.

.4 Use sheets of largest practical size to minimize joints.

.5 Inspect for continuity. Repair punctures and tears with sealing tape before work is concealed.


Section 07 26 00 –Vapour Retarders Page 3 of 3 3.2 EXTERIOR SURFACE OPENINGS

.1 Cut sheet vapour retarder to form openings and ensure material is lapped and sealed to frame.

3.3 PERIMETER SEALS

.1 Seal perimeter of sheet vapour barrier as follows:

.1 Apply continuous bead of sealant to substrate at perimeter of sheets.

.2 Lap sheet over sealant and press into sealant bead.

.3 Install staples through lapped sheets at sealant bead into wood substrate.

.4 Ensure that no gaps exist in sealant bead. Smooth out folds and ripples occurring in sheet over sealant.

3.4 LAP JOINT SEALS

.1 Seal lap joints of sheet vapour barrier as follows:

.1 Attach first sheet to substrate.

.2 Apply continuous bead of sealant over solid backing at joint.

.3 Lap adjoining sheet minimum 150 mm and press into sealant bead.

.4 Install staples through lapped sheets at sealant bead into wood substrate.

.5 Ensure that no gaps exist in sealant bead. Smooth out folds and ripples occurring in sheet over sealant.

3.5 ELECTRICAL BOXES

.1 Seal electrical switch and outlet device boxes that penetrate vapour barrier as follows:

.1 Install moulded box vapour barrier or wrap boxes with film sheet providing minimum 300 mm perimeter lap flange.

.2 Apply sealant to seal edges of flange to main vapour barrier and seal wiring penetrations through box cover.

3.6 CLEANING

.1 Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.

END OF SECTION


Section 07 27 00.01 – Air Barriers – Descriptive or Proprietary Page 1 of 6

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Materials and installation methods providing primary air/vapour barrier materials and assemblies.

.2 Air/vapour barrier materials to provide continuous seal between components of building envelope and building penetrations.






1.3 REFERENCES


.1 CAN/CGSB-19.13M, Sealing Compound, One Component, Elastomeric Chemical Curing.

.2 CAN/CGSB-19.18M, Sealing Compound, One Component, Silicone Base Solvent Curing.

.3 CAN/CGSB-19.24M, Multi-Component, Chemical Curing Sealing Compound.

.4 CGSB 19-GP-14M, Sealing Compound, One Component, Butyl-Polyisobutylene Polymer Base, Solvent Curing.

.2 National Building Code of Canada (NBCC)

.1 NBCC, Part 5 - Environmental Separation

.3 Sealant and Waterproofer's Institute - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit manufacturer’s product data sheets.



.1 Perform Work in accordance with Sealant and Waterproofer's Institute - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification requirements for materials and installation.



.2 Perform Work in accordance with National Air Barrier Association - Professional Contractor Quality Assurance Program and requirements for materials and installation.

.3 Manufacturer’s Representative:

.1 Inspect substrate prior to commencement of work, twice during application of membrane and at commissioning to ascertain that air/vapour barrier system is installed according to membrane manufacturer’s most current published specifications and details.

.2 Provide technical assistance to applicator and assist where required in correct installation of membrane.

.3 Provide certificate of quality compliance upon satisfactory completion of installation.

.4 Maintain one copy of documents on site.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

.1 Applicator: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience with installation of air/vapour barrier systems. Complete installation must be approved by the material manufacturer.

.2 Applicator: Company who is currently licensed by certifying organization must maintain their license throughout the duration of the project.

1.7 MOCK-UP

.1 Construct mock-up in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.

.2 Construct typical panel, 10 m² minimum, incorporating wall openings, insulation, building corner condition, illustrating materials interface and seals.

.3 Locate where directed.

.4 Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

.5 Allow 48 h for inspection of mock-up by Owner’s Representative before proceeding with air/vapour barrier Work.

1.8 PRE- INSTALLATION MEETINGS

.1 Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section.


.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements.



.2 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Deliver membrane materials in factory wrapped packaging indicating name of manufacturer and product.

.3 Avoid spillage. Immediately notify Owner’s Representative if spillage occurs and start clean up procedures.

.4 Clean spills and leave area as it was prior to spill.

.5 Store roll materials on end in original packaging.

.6 Store primers at temperatures of 5˚C and above to facilitate handling. Keep solvent away from open flame and excessive heat.

1.10 PROJECT ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Do not install solvent curing sealants or vapour release adhesive materials in enclosed spaces without ventilation.

.2 Ventilate enclosed spaces in accordance with Section 01 51 00 - Temporary Utilities.

.3 Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by materials manufactures before, during and after installation.

1.11 WARRANTY

.1 Provide a written warranty for work of this section from Manufacturer for failure due to defective materials and from contractor for failure due to defective installation workmanship for ten (10) years respectively.

.2 Include coverage of installed sealant and sheet materials which fail to achieve air tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion or do not cure.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER (TYPE 1)

.1 Sheet Seal: Self-Adhesive bitumen laminated to high-density polyethylene film, nominal total thickness of 1.0 mm.

.1 Membrane Physical Properties .1 Application min 5˚C .2 Service Temperature -40˚C to 70˚ .3 Elongation min 200% .4 Tensile strength min 2.4 Mpa .5 Puncture Resistance min 178 N .6 Water vapour transmission 2.8mg/Pa.s.m² (0.05 perms)



.7 Moisture Absorption 0.1%

.8 Air Leakage at 75 Pa 0.02L/Sm²

.9 Air Leakage of the 3000 Pa test No change

2.2 SEALANTS

.1 Sealants in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.

.2 Primer: recommended by sealant manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the Work of this section.

.2 Ensure all surfaces are clean, dry, sound, smooth, continuous and comply with air barrier manufacturer’s requirements.

.3 Report any unsatisfactory conditions to the Owner’s Representative in writing.

.4 Do not start work until deficiencies have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Remove loose or foreign matter which might impair adhesion of materials.

.2 Ensure all substrates are clean of oil or excess dust; all masonry joints struck flush, and open joints filled; and all concrete surfaces free of large voids, spalled areas or sharp protrusions.

.3 Ensure all substrates are free of surface moisture prior to application of membrane and primer.

.4 Ensure metal closures are free of sharp edges and burrs.

.5 Prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesive and sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION (SHEET MEMBRANE)

.1 Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Over the properly prepared substrate surface apply primer with a roller and allow drying to a tacky surface. Prime only area to be covered in a working day. Reprime area not covered with membrane within 24 hours.



.3 After primer has dried, using a hand roller firmly press the entire membrane onto the primed surface, in strict accordance with membrane manufacturer’s written instructions.

.4 Ensure complete coverage of and adhesion of all substrates to receive membrane, including wall penetrations. Co-operate with other trades to ensure continuity of membrane.

.5 Overlap membrane 50mm and carefully smooth out with a roller to ensure full continuous bond throughout overlaps without fissures or fishmouthing.

.6 It is important that a complete air seal be achieved. Be responsible for the completeness of membrane wherever it is not specifically detailed. Consult with Owner’s Representative if there is any doubt as to the integrity of membrane, whether detailed or not.

.7 In order to ensure a complete seal, seal membrane to all penetrations in an approved manner.

.8 Apply a trowelled bead of mastic to all terminations of the membrane at the end of a day’s work.

.9 Do not enclose membrane until it has been inspected and approved by Owner’s Representative. Inform Owner’s Representative 48 hours prior to required inspection.

3.4 PROTECTION OF WORK

.1 Protect finished Work in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements.

.2 Do not permit adjacent work to damage work of this section.

.3 Ensure finished Work is protected from climatic conditions.

3.5 INSPECTION

.1 Carefully inspect for continuity of air barrier prior to placement of insulation.

.2 Repair all deficient membrane areas.

.3 Misaligned or inadequately lapped seams, punctures or other damage must be repaired with a patch of air barrier membrane extending 50mm in all directions from edge of damaged areas.

.4 Cover membrane immediately after Owner’s Representative’s inspection to protect from damage by other trades.


Section 07 27 00.01 – Air Barriers – Descriptive or Proprietary Page 6 of 6 3.6 TESTING

.1 Air leakage testing as directed by Owner’s Representative and paid for by contractor will be performed by professional testing agency for the locations selected at random for penetrations, laps, corners, etc.

.2 Testing will be witnessed by Owner’s Representative and test reports will be signed by tester, site representative and contractor.

.3 Inform Owner’s Representative 48 hours prior to required testing.

END OF SECTION

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 07 46 13 – Preformed Metal Siding Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL




.3 Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.

.4 Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.


1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

.1 ANSI B18.6.4, Thread Forming and Thread Cutting Tapping Screws and Metallic Drive Screws.


.1 CAN/CGSB-51.32, Sheathing, Membrane, Breather Type.

.2 CAN/CGSB-93.4, Galvanized and Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated Steel Siding Soffits and Fascia, Prefinished, Residential.

.3 CGSB 93.5, Installation of Metal Residential Siding, Soffits and Fascia.



1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Product data: submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet.

.1 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data. Indicate VOC's for caulking materials during application and curing.

.2 Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm samples of siding material, of colour and profile specified.

.3 Shop drawings to indicate dimensions, profiles, attachment methods, schedule of wall elevations, trim and closure pieces, soffits, fascia, metal furring, and related work.


Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 07 46 13 – Preformed Metal Siding Page 2 of 3 1.4 WARRANTY

.1 Provide a written guarantee, signed and issued in the name of the owner, covering the metal cladding/siding material for 10 (ten) years and workmanship for a period of 2 (years) years from the date of Substantial Completion.

.2 Areas which prove to be defective in any way shall be repaired or replaced and any damage to other work as a result of such defects shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL CLADDING AND COMPONENTS

.1 Strip siding: to CGSB 93.4, flat plank vertical, style with centre groove Class plain, 300 mm wide x 39 mm deep.

.1 Finish coating: 10000 Series, two coat, polyvinylidene fluoride resin based system.

.2 Colour: colour to match existing adjacent siding.

.3 Gloss: medium.

.4 Thickness: 0.76 mm base metal thickness.

.5 Profile: preformed interlocking joints, fastener holes prepunched, profile as indicated on drawings.

.2 Fascia facings and exposed trim: to CGSB 93.4, Class plain

.1 Finish coating: 10000 Series, two coat, polyvinylidene fluoride resin based system.

.2 Colour: to match adjacent siding.

.3 Gloss: medium.

.4 Thickness: 0.76 mm base metal thickness.

.5 Profile: flat sheet ”V” crimped for stiffness, preformed with elongated slits and small perforations.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

.1 Exposed trim: inside corners, outside corners, cap strip, drip cap, undersill trim, starter strip and window/door trim of same material, colour and gloss as cladding, with fastener holes pre-punched.

2.3 FASTENERS

.1 Nails: to CSA B111. Screws to ANSI B18.6.4. Purpose made aluminum alloy stainless steel.

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 07 46 13 – Preformed Metal Siding Page 3 of 3 2.4 CAULKING


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install cladding in accordance with CGSB 93.5, and manufacturer's written instructions

.2 Install continuous starter strips, inside and outside corners, edgings, soffit, drip, cap, sill and window/door opening flashings as indicated.

.3 Install outside corners, fillers and closure strips with carefully formed and profiled work.

.4 Install soffit and fascia cladding as indicated.

.5 Maintain joints in exterior cladding, true to line, tight fitting, hairline joints.

.6 Attach components in manner not restricting thermal movement.

.7 Caulk junctions with adjoining work with sealant. Do work in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.

3.2 CLEANING


END OF SECTION


College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 07 52 00 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing Page 1 of 11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK


.2 Section 01 35 43 - Environmental Procedures.







.9 Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.


1.2 REFERENCES


.1 ASTM C 1177/C1177M, Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing.


.1 CGSB 37-GP-19M, Cement, Plastic, Cutback Tar.

.2 CAN/CGSB-37.29, Rubber- Asphalt Sealing Compound.

.3 CAN/CGSB - 51.33 Vapour Barrier Sheet, Excluding Polyethylene, for Use in Building Construction.

.3 Canadian Roofing Contractor’s Association (CRCA)

.1 CRCA Specification Manual.

.4 Underwriters Laboratories’ of Canada (ULC)

.1 CAN/ULC-S701, Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering.

.2 CAN/ULC-S702.2, Standard for Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulation for Buildings.

.3 CAN/ULC-S704, Thermal Insulation, Polyurethane and Polyisocyanurate Boards, Faced.




.1 Provision of new deck sheathing, air/vapour barrier, insulation, membrane, membrane flashing and metal counter flashing.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Indicate in shop drawings flashings, control joints, and all required roofing materials.

1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Refer to Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements for storage and handling requirements.

.2 Store materials off-ground in weatherproof storage.

.3 Store materials in upright position. Store membrane rolls with selvage edge up, store as per manufacturer’s requirements to meet warranty.

.4 Remove only in quantities required for same day use.

.5 Place plywood runways over work to protect work and enable work flow.

.6 Store sealants at +5°C minimum.

.7 Store insulation protected from daylight, weather and deleterious materials.


.1 Do not install roofing when temperature remains below -18°C for torch application, or to manufacturers' recommendations for mop application.

.2 Minimum temperature for solvent-based adhesive is -5°C.

.3 Install roofing on dry deck, free of snow and ice, use only dry materials and apply only during weather that will not introduce moisture into roofing system.

1.7 PROTECTION

.1 Fire Extinguishers: maintain one stored pressure rechargeable type with hose and shut-off nozzle, ULC labeled for A, B and C class protection. Size 9 kg on roof per torch applicator, within 10 m of torch applicator.

.2 Contractor to provide safety person on site at all times during the roofing process and shall remain on site two (2) hours after work has ceased or after torching has stopped. Safety person shall scan the perimeter and roof penetration details with a hand held infrared gun.

.3 Remove only as much existing roofing as can be replaced by the end of each working day.



.4 Contractor to verify existing under deck mounted electrical conduits prior to installing mechanically fastened roof assembly.

1.8 WARRANTY

.1 Provide a written guarantee signed and issued in the name of The Owner by the Roofing System Manufacturer stating that roofing membrane is free from manufacturing defects and that the system will stay in place and remain leak proof for a period of ten (10) years from date of Substantial Certificate of Completion, subject to the standard limitations and conditions of the manufacturer.

.2 Provide a written guarantee, signed and issued in the name of the Owner by the Contractor, stating that the roofing application has been performed in compliance with the plans and specifications, and for two (2) years from the date of Substantial Certificate of Completion, the Contractor shall repair, at no expense to the Owner, any defects which result of a failure to comply with the plans and specifications.

.3 Defective work shall include, but not limited to: leaking, wind uplift, delamination of roofing materials, reduction of thermal value due to moisture in insulation, crazing and ridging.

.4 Warranty to be non-prorated.

1.9 COMPATIBILITY

.1 Compatibility between components of roofing system is essential. Provide written declaration to Owner’s Representative stating that materials and components, as assembled in system, meet this requirement.


.1 Membrane: applied by applicator acceptable to Owner’s Representative and approved by manufacturer for application of its products.

.2 Applicators: minimum 5 years proven experience.

.3 Manufacturer’s representative:

.1 Inspect roofing system at the start of construction, midway and as required for commissioning. Additional inspections may be carried out at the discretion of the Roofing System Manufacturer.

.2 Provide technical assistance where required to correct installation of roofing system.

.4 Refer to Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures and Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control for submission procedures.

.5 Submit laboratory test reports certifying compliance of bitumens and membranes with specification requirements.



1.11 MOCK-UP

.1 If requested construct mock-up in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.

.2 Mock up to be 10 m2 minimum size showing typical membrane lap joint, one inside and one outside corner parapet flashing. Insulation and fastening method, air/vapour barrier lap, gypsum board and fastening method and workmanship.

.3 Allow 48 hours for inspection of mock-up by Owner’s Representative before proceeding with roofing work.

.4 Accepted mock up may form part of completed work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 THERMAL BARRIER AND AIR/VAPOUR BARRIER Option 1

.1 Thermal Barrier: Pre-primed glass mat faced gypsum panel non-asphaltic, highly filled proprietary heat-cured coating on one side, to ASTM C1177, 12.7 mm thick.

.2 Air/Vapour Barrier: Self adhering peel and stick air/vapour barrier composed of Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) modified bitumen reinforced with high density polyethylene film, anti slip surface, minimum thickness 1.0 mm.

Option 2

.1 Thermal Barrier and air/vapour barrier: to CAN 2-51.31-M84, rigid mineral wool fiber board manufactured from basalt rock and steel slag, butt edge, CFC and HCFC free, 19 mm thick with a factory laminated 190 g/m2 non woven polyester reinforced SBS modified bituminous membrane with a sanded surface to CGSB 37-GP-56M.

2.2 INSULATION AND COVER BOARD COMPONENTS

.1 For sloped roof decks or roof structures, provide uniform thickness rigid insulation.

.2 Expanded Polystyrene Insulation (EPS), Cover Board and Asphalt Recover Board:

.1 Expanded Polystyrene Insulation (EPS): .1 To CAN/ULC-S701, Type 1, square edged. .2 Insulation value thickness per cm based on values listed in the latest

edition of NRC - Evaluation Listings. .3 Provide two layers of insulation installed with staggered joints.

.2 Cover Board: Nonstructural, glass mat faced gypsum panel with water-resistant core to ASTM C1177, 6.35 mm thick.

.3 Asphalt Recover Board: Semi-rigid asphalt roofing substrate composed of mineral core between glass fibre mats, 1200 x 1500mm sheets, minimum thickness 3.0 mm.



.3 Extruded Polystyrene Insulation (XPS) and two layers of Asphalt Recover Board:

.1 Extruded Polystyrene Insulation (XPS): .1 To CAN/ULC-S701, Type 2, square edged. .2 Insulation value thickness per cm based on values listed in the latest


.2 Two layers of Asphalt Recover Board: Semi-rigid asphalt roofing substrate composed of mineral core between glass fibre mats, 1200 x 1500mm sheets, minimum thickness 3.0 mm each.

.4 Polyisocyanurate Insulation and Asphalt Recover Board:

.1 Polyisocyanurate Insulation: .1 To CAN/ULC-S704, glass reinforced felt facers, square edged and

containing no CFC. .2 Insulation value thickness per cm based on values listed in the latest


.2 Asphalt Recover Board: Semi-rigid asphalt roofing substrate composed of mineral core between glass fibre mats, 1200 x 1500mm sheets, minimum thickness 3.0 mm.

.5 Total assembly RSI value:

.1 Minimum average RSI value of assembly insulation components to be 4.0. Insulation assembly components to consist of thermal barrier, insulation and cover board.

2.3 BASE SHEET

.1 Base Sheet: Base sheet: to CGSB 37-GP-56M, Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) elastomeric polymer, prefabricated sheet, non woven, polyester reinforcement, weighing 180 g/m 2.

.1 Type 2, fully adhered.

.2 Class C-plain surfaced.

.3 Grade heavy duty service.

.4 Top and bottom surfaces: .1 Polyethylene/polyethylene.

.5 Base sheet membrane properties: .1 Strain energy (longitudinal/transversal): 9.0/7.0 kN/m. .2 Breaking strength (longitudinal/transversal): 17.0/12.5 N/5 cm. .3 Ultimate elongation (longitudinal/transversal): 60/65 %. .4 Tear resistance: 60 N. .5 Cold bending at -30 degrees C : no cracking. .6 Static puncture resistance: > 400.



.7 Dimensional Stability: -0.3 / 0.3 %.

2.4 CAP SHEET

.1 Cap sheet: to CGSB 37-GP-56M, Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) elastomeric polymer, prefabricated sheet, glass, polyester reinforcement, weighing 250 g/m2.

.1 Type 1, fully adhered.

.2 Class A-granule surfaced.

.3 Grade heavy duty service.

.4 Bottom surface polyethylene.

.5 Colour to be light grey unless otherwise indicated.

.6 Cap sheet membrane properties: .1 Strain energy (longitudinal/transversal): 13.0/10.0 kN/m. .2 Breaking strength (longitudinal/transversal): 25.0/16.0 kN/m. .3 Ultimate elongation (longitudinal/transversal): 60/65 %. .4 Tear resistance: 80 N. .5 Cold bending at -30 degrees C: No cracking. .6 Static puncture resistance: > 470. .7 Dimensional Stability: -0.2 / 0.2 %.

.2 Minimum total thickness if base sheet and cap sheet combined to be 5.8 mm. Cap sheet and base sheet to be of same manufacturer.

.3 Install contrasting colour cap sheet, 2.0 m wide, along the entire perimeter of all roof sections. Contrasting colour cap sheet to be installed over cap sheet. Colour to be as per Owner’s Representative selection from manufacturer’s standard colour range.

2.5 BASE SHEET FLASHING

.1 To CGSB 37-GP-56M, Type 2, Class C, Grade 2, non-woven polyester reinforced 180g/m2, self-adhesive membrane with polyethylene top face and release film under face.

2.6 SEALERS

.1 Mastic made of synthetic rubbers, plasticized with bitumen and solvents with aluminum pigments to provide greater resistance to U.V.

2.7 PRIMERS

.1 For self-adhesive membranes: A blend of elastomeric bitumen, volatile solvents and adhesive enhancing resins used to prime porous and non-porous substrates such as gypsum board, wood, concrete or metal to enhance the adhesion of self-adhesive membranes at temperatures above -10°C.



.2 For heat welded membranes: A blend of elastomeric bitumen, volatile solvents and adhesive enhancing additives used to prime concrete or metal substrates to enhance the adhesion of torch-applied membranes.

2.8 FASTENERS

.1 Fasteners: minimum #14 mechanical fasteners made of case-hardened carbon steel with corrosion resistance coating, complying with FM standards. 75 mm diameter round or hexagon stress plates complying with CSA B35.3 and FM 4470 approval standards, diameter and lengths as required to suit total assembly thickness. Ensure fasteners have the following deck penetration:

.1 For metal decks: minimum 19 mm and maximum 25 mm longer than assembly being secured. Fasteners to engage metal deck top flange. At gymnasium locations, fastener points of all fasteners to be removed.

.2 Roofing adhesive: single-component, moisture cured, solvent free polyurethane adhesive, dispensed from a portable disposable pre-pressurized container.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP

.1 Do roofing work in accordance with applicable, standard in Canadian Roofing Contractors Association (CRCA) Roofing Specifications Manual, except where specified otherwise.

3.2 PROTECTION

.1 Cover walls and adjacent work where materials hoisted or used.

.2 Use warning signs and barriers. Maintain in good order until completion of work.

.3 Clean off drips and smears of bituminous material immediately.

.4 Dispose of rain water off roof and away from face of building until roof drains or hoppers installed and connected. Refer to Section 01 35 43 - Environmental Procedures for site drainage requirements.

.5 Protect roof from traffic and damage.

.6 At end of each day’s work or when stoppage occurs due to inclement weather, provide protection for completed work and materials out of storage.

.7 Install insulation promptly to avoid possibility of condensation beneath vapour retarder.

.8 Take necessary measures ensuring no penetration of the elements will occur to the building after commencement of work, including but not limited to water.



.9 Only remove quantities of existing roofing material and install quantities of new roofing materials per day that can be covered with waterproofing membranes.

3.3 EXAMINATION ROOF DECKS

.1 Examine roof decks and immediately inform of Owner’s Representative in writing of defects.

.2 Prior to commencement of work ensure:

.1 Decks are firm, straight, smooth, dry, and free of snow, ice or frost, and swept clean of dust and debris.

.2 Curbs have been built. Coordinate height of roof curbs with Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry.

.3 Plywood and lumber nailer plates have been installed to deck, walls and parapets as indicated.

.3 Do not install roofing materials during rain or snowfall.

3.4 EXPOSED MEMBRANE ROOFING APPLICATION (METAL ROOF DECK)

.1 Thermal Barrier and Air/Vapour Barrier:

Option 1

.1 Place thermal barrier with long axis of each sheet transverse to steel deck ribs, with end joints staggered and fully supported on ribs.

.2 Secure thermal barrier to metal deck using one (1) fastener per board, located at the centre of the board, fasteners to be FMRC approved. OR , apply beads of roofing adhesive to metal deck in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Adhere thermal barrier in adhesive and walk-in thermal barrier to insure maximum contact with adhesive.

.3 Fit butt edge joints in firm contact with one another.

.4 Prime all surfaces of thermal barrier to receive self-adhering modified bituminous sheet air/vapour barrier as per manufacturer’s instructions.

.5 Apply self-adhering modified bituminous sheet air/vapour barrier to thermal barrier in an overlapping shingle fashion. Stagger all vertical joints.

.6 Align modified bituminous sheet air/vapour barrier, remove protective film and press firmly into place. Ensure minimum 50 mm overlap at all ends and side laps. Roll membrane, including seams, with counter top roller to ensure full contact.

Option 2

.1 Fasten laminated thermal barrier and air/vapour barrier in accordance with manufacturers illustrated specifications manual. OR , apply beads of roofing adhesive to metal deck in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Adhere thermal barrier in adhesive and walk-in thermal barrier to insure maximum contact with adhesive.



.2 Install boards by butting edges snugly and without warping, as level to each other as possible, and perfectly adhered to the substrate.

.3 Because of the nature of the system, air/vapour barrier membrane joints can be aligned (no staggering) to facilitate the installation of the reinforcing band.

.4 To avoid infiltrations, adhere the first 75 mm of the self-adhesive side laps using a roller, then heat-weld the last 25 mm.

.5 Seal the end joints by welding a 300 mm wide protection band centered on the joint.

.2 Insulation

.1 Loosely lay layer of insulation over thermal barrier and air/vapour barrier. OR apply beads of roofing adhesive to air/vapour barrier in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Adhere insulation in adhesive and walk-in insulation boards to insure maximum contact with adhesive.

.2 Place boards in parallel rows with ends staggered, and in firm contact with one another.

.3 Cut end boards to suit.

.4 Install tapered insulation in accordance with shop drawings.

.3 Cover Board Components (Expanded Polystyrene (EPS)):

.1 Loosely lay cover board over EPS insulation. OR, apply beads of roofing adhesive to insulation in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Adhere cover board in adhesive and walk-in cover boards to insure maximum contact with adhesive.

.2 Place boards in parallel rows with ends staggered and in firm contact with one another.

.3 Cut end boards to suit.

.4 Mechanically fasten asphalt recover board over cover board with plates and fasteners. OR, apply beads of roofing adhesive to cover board in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Adhere asphalt recover board in adhesive and walk-in asphalt recover boards to insure maximum contact with adhesive.

.5 Fit boards tight together. Stagger joints between asphalt recover board and cover board. Install fasteners/adhesive based on design wind uplift securement requirements, for the building site location, for insulation and cover board, in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

OR Cover Board Components (Extruded Polystyrene (XPS)): .1 Cover XPS insulation with two layers of asphalt recover board. .2 Place boards in parallel rows with ends staggered and in firm contact with one

another. .3 Cut end boards to suit.



.4 Mechanically fasten asphalt recover board with plates and fasteners. OR, apply beads of roofing adhesive for each layer of asphalt recover board in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Adhere each layer of asphalt recover board in adhesive and walk-in asphalt recover boards to insure maximum contact with adhesive.

.5 Fit boards tight together. Stagger joints between layers of asphalt recover board. Install fasteners/adhesive based on design wind uplift securement requirements, for the building site location, for insulation and cover board, in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

OR Cover Board Components (Polyisocyanurate (Polyiso)): .1 Cover Polyiso insulation with one layer of asphalt recover board. .2 Place boards in parallel rows with ends staggered and in firm contact with one

another. .3 Cut end boards to suit. .4 Mechanically fasten asphalt recover board with plates and fasteners. OR, apply

beads of roofing adhesive to insulation in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Adhere asphalt recover board in adhesive and walk-in asphalt recover boards to insure maximum contact with adhesive.

.5 Fit boards tight together. Install fasteners/adhesive based on design wind uplift securement requirements, for the building site location, for insulation and cover board, in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

.4 Base Sheet Application:

.1 Starting at low point of roof, perpendicular to slope, unroll base sheet, align and reroll from both ends.

.2 Unroll and torch base sheet onto recover board taking care not to burn membrane or its reinforcement.

.3 Lap sheets 75 mm minimum for side and 150 mm minimum for end laps.

.4 Application to be free of blisters, wrinkles and fishmouths.

.5 Cap Sheet Application:

.1 Starting at low point on roof, perpendicular to slope, unroll cap sheet, align and reroll from both ends.

.2 Unroll and torch cap sheet onto base sheet taking care not to burn membrane or its reinforcement.

.3 Lap sheets 75 mm minimum for side laps and 150 mm minimum for end laps. Offset joints in cap sheet 300 mm minimum from those in base sheet.

.4 Application to be free of blisters, fishmouths and wrinkles.

.5 Do membrane application in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

.6 Flashings:



.1 Complete installation of flashing base sheet stripping prior to installing membrane cap sheet.

.2 Torch, base and cap sheet onto substrate in 1 metre wide strips.

.3 Lap flashing base sheet to membrane base sheet minimum 150 mm and seal by torch welding.

.4 Lap flashing cap sheet to membrane cap sheet 250 mm minimum and torch weld.

.5 Provide 75 mm minimum side lap and seal.

.6 Properly secure flashings to their support, without sags, blisters, fishmouths or wrinkles.

.7 Do work in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.5 ROOF PENETRATIONS

.1 Install roof drain pans, vent stack covers and other roof penetration Flashings and seal to membrane in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and details.

.2 All new roof drains and relocated roof drains to be installed by certified plumber. Coordinate installation and relocation of roof drains so that work can be inspected by Owner’s Representative prior to commencement of remaining roof work.

3.6 CLEANING

.1 Perform in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.

.2 Check drains to ensure cleanliness and proper function, and remove debris, equipment and excess material from site.

END OF SECTION


Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL





.4 Section 07 52 00 – Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing.

.5 Section 07 61 00 – Sheet Metal Roofing.


1.2 REFERENCES

.1 The Aluminum Association Inc. (AA)

.1 Aluminum Sheet Metal Work in Building Construction.

.2 AA DAF45, Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.

.2 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM International)

.1 ASTM A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

.2 ASTM A792/A792M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

.3 ASTM D523, Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.

.4 ASTM D822, Standard Practice for Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings.

.3 Canadian General Standards Board (CGBS)

.1 CAN/CGSB-37.5, Cutback Asphalt Plastic Cement.

.4 Canadian Roofing Contractors Association (CRCA)

.1 Roofing Specifications Manual.

.5 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)

.1 CSA A123.3, Asphalt Saturated Organic Roofing Felt.


1.3 SAMPLES

.1 Submit duplicate 50 x 50 mm samples of each type of sheet metal material, colour and finish.


Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Page 2 of 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PREFINISHED STEEL SHEET

.1 Prefinished sheet with factory applied polyvinylidene fluoride.

.1 Class F1S

.2 Colour as selected by Owner’s Representative from manufacturer's standard range.

.3 Specular gloss: 30 units +/- 5 in accordance with ASTM D523.

.4 Coating thickness: not less than 22 micrometres.

.5 Resistance to accelerated weathering for caulk rating of 8, colour fade 5 units or less and erosion rate less than 20 % to ASTM D822 as follows: .1 Outdoor exposure period 2500 hours. .2 Humidity resistance exposure period 5000 hours.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

.1 Isolation coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint.

.2 Plastic cement: to CAN/CGSB 37.5.

.3 Underlay for metal flashing: No. 15 perforated asphalt felt to CSA A123.3.


.5 Cleats: of same material, and temper as sheet metal, minimum 50 mm wide. Thickness same as sheet metal being secured.

.6 Fasteners: of same material as sheet metal, to CSA B111, ring thread flat head roofing nails of length and thickness suitable for metal flashing application.

.7 Washers: of same material as sheet metal, 1 mm thick with rubber packings.

.8 Touch-up paint: as recommended by prefinished material manufacturer.

2.3 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate metal flashings and other sheet metal work in accordance with applicable CRCA 'FL' series details as indicated.

.2 Form pieces in 2400 mm maximum lengths. Make allowance for expansion at joints.

.3 Hem exposed edges on underside 12 mm. Mitre and seal corners with sealant.

.4 Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

.5 Apply isolation coating to metal surfaces to be embedded in concrete or mortar.


Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Page 3 of 3 2.4 METAL FLASHINGS

.1 Form flashings, copings and fascias to profiles indicated of 0.60 mm thick prefinished steel.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install sheet metal work in accordance with CRCA FL series details and as detailed.

.2 Use concealed fastenings except where approved before installation.

.3 Provide underlay under sheet metal. Secure in place and lap joints 100 mm.

.4 Counterflash bituminous flashings at intersections of roof with vertical surfaces and curbs. Flash joints using S-lock forming tight fit over hook strips, as detailed.

.5 Lock end joints and caulk with sealant.

END OF SECTION


Section 07 62 10 – Eavestrough and Downspouts Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL





.4 Section 07 52 00 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing.

.5 Section 07 61 00 - Sheet Metal Roofing.

.6 Section 07 62 10 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.


1.2 REFERENCES


.1 ASTM A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

.2 ASTM A792/A792M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

.3 ASTM D523, Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.

.4 ASTM D822, Standard Practice for Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings.

.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGBS)

.1 CAN/CGSB-37.5, Cutback Asphalt Plastic Cement.



1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit duplicate 50 x 50 mm samples of each type of sheet metal material, colour and finish.

.2 Clearly indicate bending, folding, jointing, fastening installation details.

1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

.1 Store products off ground and under cover in a dry, well ventilated enclosure.

.2 Stack pre-formed material in manner to prevent twisting, bending and rubbing.



.3 Provide protection for galvanized and pre-coated surfaces.

.4 Prevent contact of dissimilar metals during storage. Protect from acids, flux, and other corrosive materials and elements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Sheet Steel Finish: factory painted, baked-on enamel of proven durability for exterior exposure, to CSSBI Technical Bulletin No. 7, 5000 series. Finish colour as selected by Owner’s Representative from paint manufacturer’s standard range.

.2 Eavestrough Brackets: 3 mm x 38 mm hot dip galvanized steel strap.

.3 Eavestrough Spacers: 2 mm x 38 mm hot dip galvanized steel strap.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

.1 Sheet Metal Screws: cadmium plated, self tapping, pan head.

.2 Eavestrough Fasteners: 10 mm diameter. x 150 mm long, hot dip galvanized lag screws and ferrules.

.3 Downspout Straps: 0.55 mm thick sheet steel.


.5 Plastic cement: to CAN/CGSB 37.5.


.7 Touch-up paint: as recommended by prefinished material manufacturer.

2.3 FABRICATION

.1

.2 Form eavesthrough and downspouts from sheet steel as specified, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance and performance.

.3 Form eavestrough of 100 mm widths using continuous rolling process. Downspouts shall be corrugated. Form eavestroughs from thickness in accordance with the following table:



Profile Nominal Width Girth Sheet Thickness

Ogee 100 mm

150 mm

255 mm

380 mm

0.48 mm

0.55 mm

Rectangular 510 mm

530 mm to 635 mm

0.55 mm

0.70 mm

.4 Apply isolation coating to metal surfaces to be embedded in concrete or mortar.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Join sheet steel components with silicon sealant and cadmium plated screws.

.2 Secure 100 mm wide eavestroughs to building with lag screws through ferrules spaced @ 800 mm o.c. maximum.

.3 Secure eavestroughs over 100 mm wide with staggered brackets and spacer bars spaced @ 800 mm o.c. maximum.

.4 Install eavestroughs in maximum 15 m lengths, sloped to downspouts. Close ends of each length and allow 15 mm between lengths. Provide at least one downspout per eavestrough length.

.5 Install elbows and tees as required, and secure downspouts with straps at 1.8 m centres, minimum 2 straps per downspout.

3.2 CLEANING

.1 On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.

.2 Leave works areas clean, free from grease, finger marks and stains.

END OF SECTION

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping Page 1 of 4

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

.1 Fire stopping and smoke seals within mechanical assemblies (i.e inside ducts, dampers) and electrical assemblies (i.e. inside cable trays) are specified in Division 23 and 26 respectively.

.2 Coordinate work of this section with other sections as required to properly execute the work and as necessary maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other sections.




1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Underwriter’s Laboratories of Canada (ULC)

.1 CAN-S115, Fire Tests of Firestop Systems.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm samples showing actual firestop material proposed for project.

.2 Submit shop drawings to show proposed material, reinforcement, anchorage, fastenings and method of installation. Construction details should accurately reflect actual job conditions.

.3 Submit manufacturer’s engineering judgement identification number and drawing details when no ULC or cUL system is available. Engineering judgement must include both project name and contractor’s name who will install firestop system as described in drawing.

.4 Submit manufacturer's product data for materials and prefabricated devices, providing descriptions are sufficient for identification at job site. Include manufacturer's printed instructions for installation. Include manufacturer’s specifications, training letter, and technical data for each material including the composition and limitations, documentation of ULC or CUL firestop systems to be used.

.5 Submit material safety data sheets provided with product delivered to job site.

1.5 MOCK-UP



.2 Construct mock-up showing service penetrations, fire separation and floor assemblies. Mock-up may be part of finished work.

.3 Allow 48h for inspection of mock-up by Architect/Engineer before proceeding with membrane work.

1.6 MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVE

.1 A manufacturer’s representative is to be on site during initial installation of firestop systems to train appropriate contractor personnel in proper selection and installation procedures and at commissioning stage to certify acceptance completed installation. Training will be done as per manufacturer’s written recommendations published in their literature and drawing details.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Use only firestop products that have been ULC or cUL tested for specific fire-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements and fire-rating involved for each separate instance.

.2 Fire stopping and smoke seal systems: in accordance with CAN-S115.

.1 Asbestos-free materials and systems capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with requirements of CAN-S115 and not to exceed opening sizes for which they are intended.

.2 Firestop system rating: as indicated on drawings.

.3 Service penetration assemblies: certified and tested by ULC or cUL in accordance with CAN-S115.

.4 Service penetration firestop components: certified and tested by ULC or cUL in accordance with CAN-S115.

.5 Fire-resistance rating of installed fire stopping assembly in accordance with NBC.

.6 Non-curing, re-penetrable intumescent sealants, caulking or putty material for use with flexible cables or cable bundles.

.7 Fire stopping and smoke seals at openings around penetrations for pipes, ductwork and other mechanical items requiring sound and vibration control: elastomeric seal. Consult with Owner’s Representative and damper manufacturer prior to installation ULC or cUL firestop systems that might hamper the performance of fire dampers as it pertains to duct work.

.8 Intumescent sealants or caulking materials for use with combustible items (penetrants consumed by high heat and flame) including insulated metal pipe, PVC jacketed,


flexible cable or cable bundles and plastic pipe. No silicone based firestop are allowed to be applied on plastic pipes.

.9 Primers: to manufacturer's recommendation for specific material, substrate, and end use.

.10 Water (if applicable): potable, clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious substances.

.11 Damming and backup materials, supports and anchoring devices: to manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance with tested assembly being installed as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

.12 Sealants for vertical joints: non-sagging.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Examine sizes and conditions of voids to be filled to establish correct thicknesses and installation of materials. Ensure that substrates and surfaces are clean, dry and frost free.

.2 Prepare surfaces in contact with fire stopping materials and smoke seals to manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Maintain insulation around pipes and ducts penetrating fire separation without interruption to vapour barrier.

.4 Mask where necessary to avoid spillage and over coating onto adjoining surfaces; remove stains on adjacent surfaces.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install fire stopping and smoke seal material and components in accordance with ULC certification or UL Products Certified for Canada (CUL) and manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Seal holes or voids made by through penetrations, poke-through termination devices, and unpenetrated openings or joints to ensure continuity and integrity of fire separation are maintained.

.3 Provide temporary forming as required and remove forming only after materials have gained sufficient strength and after initial curing.

.4 Tool or trowel exposed surfaces to a neat finish.

.5 Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping Page 4 of 4 3.3 INSPECTION

.1 Notify Architect/Engineer when ready for inspection and prior to concealing or enclosing firestopping materials and service penetration assemblies.

3.4 SCHEDULE

.1 Firestop and smoke seal at:

.1 Penetrations through fire-resistance rated masonry, concrete, and gypsum board partitions and walls.

.2 Edge of floor slabs.

.3 Top of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions.

.4 Intersection of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions.

.5 Control and sway joints in fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions and walls.

.6 Penetrations through fire-resistance rated floor slabs, ceilings and roofs.

.7 Openings and sleeves installed for future use through fire separations.

.8 Around mechanical and electrical assemblies penetrating fire separations.

.9 Rigid ducts: greater than 129 cm2: fire stopping to consist of bead of fire stopping material between retaining angle and fire separation and between retaining angle and duct, on each side of fire separation.

3.5 CLEAN UP

.1 Remove excess materials and debris and clean adjacent surfaces immediately after application.

.2 Remove temporary dams after initial set of fire stopping and smoke seal materials.

END OF SECTION


Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants Page 1 of 6

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Materials, preparation and application for caulking and sealants.

.2 Text to complete other various Sections containing sealant or caulking specifications, including Section 07 52 00 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing.






1.3 REFERENCES

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM)

.1 ASTM C919, Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications.


.1 CAN/CGSB-19.13, Sealing Compound, One-component, Elastomeric, Chemical Curing.

.3 Department of Justice Canada (Jus)

.1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA).

.4 Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)

.1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

.5 Transport Canada (TC)

.1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDGA).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Manufacturer's product to describe.

.1 Caulking compound.

.2 Primers.

.3 Sealing compound, each type, including compatibility when different sealants are in contact with each other.

.4 Installation instructions, surface preparation and product limitations.



.2 Submit duplicate samples of each type of material and colour.

.3 Cured samples of exposed sealants for each color where required to match adjacent material.

.4 Manufacturers’ instructions to include installation instructions for each product used.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE/MOCK-UP

.1 Construct mock-up in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.

.2 Construct mock-up to show location, size, shape and depth of joints complete with back-up material, primer, caulking and sealant. Mock-up may be part of finished work.

.3 Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by Owner’s Representative before proceeding with sealant work.

.4 Mock-up will be used:

.1 To judge workmanship, substrate preparation, operation of equipment and material application.

.5 When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard of quality required for this Work.


.1 Deliver, handle, store and protect materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements.

.2 Deliver and store materials in original wrappings and containers with manufacturer's seals and labels, intact. Protect from freezing, moisture, water and contact with ground or floor.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

.1 Environmental Limitations:

.1 Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under following conditions: .1 When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits

permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 4.4˚C. .2 When joint substrates are wet.

.2 Joint-Width Conditions:

.1 Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.

.3 Joint-Substrate Conditions:



.1 Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SEALANT MATERIALS

.1 Sealants and Caulking compounds must:

.1 Meet or exceed all applicable governmental and industrial safety and performance standards; and

.2 Be manufactured and transported in such a manner that all steps fo the process, including the disposal of waste products arising therefrom, will meet the requirements of all applicable governmental acts, by laws and regulations including, for facilities located in Canada, the Fisheries Act and the Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA).

.2 Sealant and caulking compounds must not be formulated or manufactured with: aromatic solvents, fibrous talc or asbestos, formaldehyde, halogenated solvents, mecury, lead, cadium, hexavalent chromium, barium or their compounds, except barium sulphate.

.3 Sealant and caulking compounds must no contain a total of volatile organic compound (VOC’s) in excess of 5% by height as calculated from records of the amounts of constituents used to make the product.

.4 Sealant and caulking compounds must be accompanied by detailed instructions for proper application so as to minimize health concerns and maximize performance, and information describing proper disposal methods.

.5 Do not use caulking that emits strong odours, contains toxic chemicals or is not certified as mould resistant in air handling units.

.6 When low toxicity caulks are not possible, confine usage to areas which off-gas to exterior, are contained behind air barriers, or are applied several months before occupancy to maximize off-gas time.

.7 Where sealants are qualified with primers use only these primers.

.8 Sealants acceptable for use on this project must be listed on CGSB Qualified Products List issued by CGSB Qualification Board for Joint Sealants. Where sealants are qualified with primers use only these primers.

2.2 SEALANT MATERIAL DESIGNATIONS

.1 Urethanes One Part.

.1 Non-Sag to CAN/CGSB-19.13, Type 2.

.2 Silicones One Part.



.1 To CAN/CGSB-19.13, mildew resistant.

.3 Acoustical Sealant.

.1 To ASTM C919.

.4 Preformed Compressible and Non-Compressible back-up materials.

.1 Polyethylene, Urethane, Neoprene or Vinyl Foam. .1 Extruded closed cell foam backer rod. .2 Size: oversize 30 to 50 %.

.2 Neoprene or Butyl Rubber. .1 Round solid rod, Shore A hardness 70.

.3 High Density Foam. .1 Extruded closed cell polyvinyl chloride (PVC), extruded polyethylene,

closed cell, Shore A hardness 20, tensile strength 140 to 200 kPa, extruded polyolefin foam, 32 kg/m3 density, or neoprene foam backer, size as recommended by manufacturer.

.4 Bond Breaker Tape. .1 Polyethylene bond breaker tape which will not bond to sealant.

2.3 SEALANT SELECTION

.1 Perimeters of exterior openings where frames meet exterior facade of building, Sealant type CAN/CGSB- 19.13.

.2 Expansion and control joints in exterior surfaces of poured-in-place concrete walls: Sealant type CAN/CGSB – 19.13.

.3 Control and expansion joints in exterior surfaces of unit masonry walls: Sealant type: CAN/CGSB – 19.13.

.4 Seal interior perimeters of exterior openings as detailed on drawings: Sealant type: CAN/CGSB – 19.13.

.5 Control and expansion joints on the interior of exterior surfaces of unit masonry walls. Sealant Type CAN/CGSB -19.13.

.6 Interior control and expansion joints in floor surfaces: Sealant type CAN/CGSB -19.13.

.7 Perimeters of interior frames, as detailed and itemized: Sealant type CAN/CGSB -19.13.

.8 Interior masonry vertical control joints (block-to-block, block-to-concrete, and intersecting masonry walls): Sealant type CAN/CGSB -19.13.



.9 Perimeter of bath fixtures (e.g. sinks, tubs, urinals, stools, waterclosets, basins, vanities, counters, plastic laminate and adjacent wall finish, etc.): Sealant type CAN/CGSB – 19.13, mildew resistant.

.10 Exposed interior control joints in drywall: Sealant type: CAN/CGSB -19.13.

.11 Acoustical Sealant ASTM C919.

2.4 JOINT CLEANER

.1 Non-corrosive and non-staining type, compatible with joint forming materials and sealant recommended by sealant manufacturer.

.2 Primer: as recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION

.1 Protect installed Work of other trades from staining or contamination.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

.1 Examine joint sizes and conditions to establish correct depth to width relationship for installation of backup materials and sealants.

.2 Clean bonding joint surfaces of harmful matter substances including dust, rust, oil grease, and other matter which may impair work.

.3 Do not apply sealants to joint surfaces treated with sealer, curing compound, water repellent, or other coatings unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility of materials. Remove coatings as required.

.4 Ensure joint surfaces are dry and frost free.

.5 Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

3.3 PRIMING

.1 Where necessary to prevent staining, mask adjacent surfaces prior to priming and caulking.

.2 Prime sides of joints in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions immediately prior to caulking.

3.4 BACKUP MATERIAL

.1 Apply bond breaker tape where required to manufacturer's instructions.



.2 Install joint filler to achieve correct joint depth and shape, with approximately 30% compression.

3.5 MIXING

.1 Mix materials in strict accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions.

3.6 APPLICATION

.1 Sealant.

.1 Apply sealant in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

.2 Mask edges of joint where irregular surface or sensitive joint border exists to provide neat joint.

.3 Apply sealant in continuous beads.

.4 Apply sealant using gun with proper size nozzle.

.5 Use sufficient pressure to fill voids and joints solid.

.6 Form surface of sealant with full bead, smooth, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets, embedded impurities.

.7 Tool exposed surfaces before skinning begins to give slightly concave shape.

.8 Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.

.2 Curing.

.1 Cure sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Do not cover up sealants until proper curing has taken place.

.3 Cleanup.

.1 Clean adjacent surfaces immediately and leave Work neat and clean.

.2 Remove excess and droppings, using recommended cleaners as work progresses.

.3 Remove masking tape after initial set of sealant.

END OF SECTION


Section 08 11 00 - Metal Doors and Frames Page 1 of 8

PART 1 GENERAL




.3 Section 07 21 20 – Low Expanding Foam Sealant.


.5 Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.

.6 Section 08 80 50 – Glazing.



.9 Section 23 37 13 - Diffusers, Registers and Grilles.

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 ASTM A653/A653M, Specification for Steel Sheet Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process.



.2 CGSB 41-GP-19Ma, Rigid Vinyl Extrusions for Windows and Doors.


.1 G40.20/G40.21, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel.

.2 CSA W59, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).

.4 Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers' Association, (CSDMA).

.1 CSDMA, Specifications for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames.

.2 CSDMA, Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Commercial Steel Doors.

.5 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

.1 NFPA 80, Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows.

.2 NFPA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.




.1 CAN4-S104M, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

.2 CAN4-S105M, Fire Door Frames Meeting the Performance Required by CAN4-S104.

.3 CAN/ULC-S701, Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering.

.4 CAN/ULC-S702, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, for Buildings.

.5 CAN/ULC-S704, Thermal Insulation, Polyurethane and Polyisocyanurate Boards, Faced.


.1 Design door assembly to withstand minimum 1,000,000 swing cycles in accordance with ANSI A151.1, with no failure of any design features of the door.

.2 Design exterior frame assembly to accommodate to expansion and contraction when subjected to minimum and maximum surface temperature of -35˚C to 35˚C.

.3 Maximum deflection for exterior steel entrance screens under wind load of 1.2 kPa not to exceed 1/175th of span.

.4 Steel fire rated doors and frames: labelled and listed by an organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada in conformance with CAN4-S104 and NFPA 252 for ratings specified or indicated.

.5 Provide fire labelled frames for openings requiring fire protection ratings. Test products in conformance with CAN4-S104 and NFPA 252 and listed by nationally recognized agency having factory inspection services and construct as detailed in Follow-Up Service Procedures/Factory Inspection Manuals issued by listing agency to individual manufacturers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Indicate each type of door, material, steel core thicknesses, mortises, reinforcements, location of exposed fasteners, openings, glazed, louvred, arrangement of hardware and fire rating and finishes.

.2 Indicate each type frame material, core thickness, reinforcements, glazing stops, location of anchors and exposed fastenings and reinforcing firerating and finishes.

.3 Include schedule identifying each unit, with door marks and numbers relating to numbering on drawings and door schedule.

.4 Submit one 300 x 300 mm top corner sample of each type door.

.5 Submit one 300 x 300 mm corner sample of each type of frame.

.1 Show butt cutout, glazing stops.


Section 08 11 00 - Metal Doors and Frames Page 3 of 8 1.5 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Deliver, store, handle and protect doors and frames in accordance with Section 01 61 00- Common Product Requirements.

.2 Deliver, handle and store doors and frames at the job site in such a manner as to prevent damage.

.3 Store doors and frames under cover with doors stored in a vertical position on blocking, clear of floor and with blocking between doors to permit air circulation.


.1 Conform to requirements to ANSI A117.1

.2 Company specializing in manufacturing products specified with a minimum of five (5) years documented experience.

1.7 WARRANTY

.1 Provide a written warranty for work of this section from manufacturer for failure due to defective materials and from contractor for failure due to defective installation workmanship, for one (1) year respectively.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Hot dipped galvanized steel sheet: to ASTM A653/A653M, ZF75, minimum base steel thickness in accordance with CSDMA Table 1 - Thickness for Component Parts.

.2 Reinforcement channel: to CSA G40.20/G40.21, Type 44W, coating designation to ASTM A653/A653M, ZF75.

2.2 DOOR CORE MATERIALS

.1 Stiffened: face sheets welded insulated core.

.1 Expanded polystyrene: CAN/ULC-S701, density 16 to 32 kg/m³.

.2 Thermal Insulation material must:

.1 Not require being labelled as poisonous, corrosive, flammable or explosive under the Consumer Chemical and Container Regulations of the Hazardous Products Act.

.2 Be manufactured using a process that uses chemical compounds with the minimum zone depletion potential (ODP) available.


Section 08 11 00 - Metal Doors and Frames Page 4 of 8 2.3 ADHESIVES

.1 Polyurethane cores: heat resistant, epoxy resin based, low viscosity, contact cement.

2.4 PRIMER

.1 Touch-up prime CAN/CGSB-1.181.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

.1 Door silencers: single stud rubber/neoprene type.

.2 Exterior top and bottom caps steel.

.3 Fabricate glazing stops as formed channel, minimum 16 mm height, accurately fitted, butted at corners and fastened to frame sections with counter-sunk oval head sheet metal screws.

.4 Door bottom seal: Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware.

.5 Metallic paste filler: to manufacturer's standard.

.6 Fire labels: metal riveted.

.7 Sealant: Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants.

.8 Provide low expanding, single component polyurethane foam sealant installed at head and jamb perimeter of door frame for sealing to building air barrier, vapour retarder and door frame. Foam sealant width to be adequate to provide required air tightness and vapour diffusion control to building air barrier and vapour retarder foam interior. Refer to Section 07 21 20 – Low Expanding Foam Sealant.

.9 Glazing: Section 08 80 50 – Glazing.

.10 Make provisions for glazing as indicated and provide necessary glazing stops.

.1 Provide removable stainless steel glazing beads for dry glazing of snap-on type.

.2 Design exterior glazing stops to be tamperproof.

.11 Finish Painting: to Section 09 91 13 – Exterior Painting and Section 09 91 23 – Interior Painting.

2.6 FRAMES FABRICATION GENERAL

.1 Fabricate frames in accordance with CSDMA specifications.

.2 Fabricate frames to profiles and maximum face sizes as indicated.

.3 Exterior frames: 1.2 mm welded, thermally broken type construction.

.4 Interior frames: 1.2 mm welded type construction.



.5 Blank, reinforce, drill and tap frames for mortised, template hardware, and electronic hardware using templates provided by finish hardware supplier. Reinforce frames for surface mounted hardware.

.6 Protect mortised cutouts with steel guard boxes.

.7 Prepare frame for door silencers, 3 for single door, 2 at head for double door.

.8 Manufacturer's nameplates on frames and screens are not permitted.

.9 Conceal fastenings except where exposed fastenings are indicated.

.10 Provide factory-applied touch up primer at areas where zinc coating has been removed during fabrication.

.11 Insulate exterior frame components with polyurethane insulation.

2.7 FRAME ANCHORAGE

.1 Shim and anchor new doors in accordance with CAN/CSA A440.4.

.2 Provide appropriate anchorage to floor and wall construction.

.3 Locate each wall anchor immediately above or below each hinge reinforcement on hinge jamb and directly opposite on strike jamb.

.4 Provide 2 anchors for rebate opening heights up to 1520 mm and 1 additional anchor for each additional 760 mm of height or fraction thereof.

.5 Locate anchors for frames in existing openings not more than 150 mm from top and bottom of each jambs and intermediate at 660 mm o.c. maximum.

2.8 FRAMES: WELDED TYPE

.1 Welding in accordance with CSA W59.

.2 Accurately mitre or mechanically joint frame product and securely weld on inside of profile.

.3 Cope accurately and securely weld butt joints of mullions, transom bars, centre rails and sills.

.4 Grind welded joints and corners to a flat plane, fill with metallic paste and sand to uniform smooth finish.

.5 Securely attach floor anchors to inside of each jamb profile.

.6 Weld in 2 temporary jamb spreaders per frame to maintain proper alignment during shipment.


Section 08 11 00 - Metal Doors and Frames Page 6 of 8 2.9 DOOR FABRICATION GENERAL

.1 Doors: swing type, flush, with provision for glass and/or louvre openings as indicated.

.2 Exterior doors: insulated, hollow steel construction. Interior doors: honeycomb hollow steel construction.

.3 Fabricate doors with longitudinal edges locked seam. Seams: grind welded joints to a flat plane, fill with metallic paste filler and sand to a uniform smooth finish.

.4 Doors: manufacturers' proprietary construction, tested and/or engineered as part of a fully operable assembly, including door, frame, gasketing and hardware in accordance with ASTM E330.

.5 Blank, reinforce, drill doors and tap for mortised, templated hardware and electronic hardware.

.6 Factory prepare holes 12.7 mm diameter and larger except mounting and through-bolt holes, on site, at time of hardware installation.

.7 Reinforce doors where required, for surface mounted hardware. Provide flush steel top caps to exterior doors. Provide inverted, recessed, spot welded channels to top and bottom of interior doors.

.8 Provide factory-applied touch-up primer at areas where zinc coating has been removed during fabrication.

.9 Provide fire labelled doors for those openings requiring fire protection ratings, as scheduled. Test such products in strict conformance with CAN4-S104 ASTM E152 NFPA 252 and list by nationally recognized agency having factory inspection service and construct as detailed in Follow-Up Service Procedures/Factory Inspection Manuals issued by listing agency to individual manufacturers.

.10 Manufacturer's nameplates on doors are not permitted.

2.10 HOLLOW STEEL CONSTRUCTION

.1 Form each face sheet for exterior doors from 1.2 mm sheet steel.

.2 Form each face sheet for interior doors from 1.2 sheet steel.

.3 Reinforce doors with vertical stiffeners, securely welded to each face sheet at 150 mm on centre maximum.

.4 Fill voids between stiffeners of exterior doors with polystyrene core.

.5 Fill voids between stiffeners of interior doors with honeycomb core.


Section 08 11 00 - Metal Doors and Frames Page 7 of 8 2.11 THERMALLY BROKEN DOORS AND FRAMES

.1 Fabricate thermally broken doors by using insulated core and separating exterior parts from interior parts with continuous interlocking thermal break.

.2 Thermal break: rigid polyvinyl chloride extrusion conforming to CGSB 41-GP-19Ma.

.3 Fabricate thermally broken frames separating exterior parts form interior parts with continuous interlocking thermal break.

.4 Apply insulation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION GENERAL

.1 Install labelled steel fire rated doors and frames to NFPA 80 except where specified otherwise.

.2 Install doors and frames to CSDMA Installation Guide.

3.2 FRAME INSTALLATION

.1 Set frames plumb, square, level and at correct elevation.

.2 Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction.

.3 Brace frames rigidly in position while building-in. Install temporary horizontal wood spreader at third points of door opening to maintain frame width. Provide vertical support at centre of head for openings over 1200 mm wide. Remove temporary spreaders after frames are built-in.

.4 Make allowances for deflection of structure to ensure structural loads are not transmitted to frames.

.5 Caulk perimeter of frames between frame and adjacent material.

.6 Maintain continuity of air barrier and vapour retarder.

3.3 DOOR INSTALLATION

.1 Install doors and hardware in accordance with hardware templates and manufacturer's instructions and Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.

.2 Provide even margins between doors and jambs and doors and finished floor as follows.

.1 Hinge side: 1.0 mm.

.2 Latch side and head: 1.5 mm.

.3 Finished floor: 13 mm.



.3 Adjust operable parts for correct function.

.4 Install louvres.

3.4 FINISH REPAIRS

.1 Touch up with primer finishes damaged during installation.

.2 Fill exposed frame anchors and surfaces with imperfections with metallic paste filler and sand to a uniform smooth finish.

3.5 GLAZING

.1 Install glazing for doors and frames in accordance with Section 08 80 50 - Glazing.

3.6 COMMISSIONING

.1 Contractor to instruct maintenance personnel in operation and maintenance of doors and hardware.

.2 Confirm operation and function for all doors and hardware.

.3 Commissioning will be witnessed by Owner’s Representative and Certificate will be signed by Contractor and Owner’s Representative.

END OF SECTION


Section 08 51 13 – Aluminum Windows Page 1 of 5

PART 1 GENERAL





.4 Section 07 21 20 – Low Expanding Foam Sealant.

.5 Section 07 26 00 - Vapour Retarders.


.7 Section 08 80 50 - Glazing.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Aluminum Association (AA),

.1 Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.


.1 CAN/CGSB-79.1, Insect Screens.


.1 CSA-A440-00/A440.1, A440, Windows / Special Publication A440.1, User Selection Guide to CSA Standard A440, Windows.


1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Indicate materials and details in full size scale for head, jamb and sill, profiles of components, interior and exterior trim junction between combination units, elevations of unit, anchorage details, location of isolation coating, description of related components and exposed finishes fasteners, and caulking. Indicate location of manufacturer's nameplates.

.2 Shop drawings to indicate continuation of air barrier and vapour barrier between wall assembly and aluminum window.

.3 Submit one complete full size window sample of each type window.

.4 Include frame, sash, sill, glazing and weatherproofing method, insect screens, surface finish and hardware. Show location of manufacturer's nameplates.



.5 Include 150 mm long samples of head, jamb, sill, meeting rail mullions to indicate profile.

1.4 TEST REPORTS

.1 Submit test reports from approved independent testing laboratories, certifying compliance with specifications, for:

.1 Windows classifications

.2 Air tightness

.3 Water tightness

.4 Wind load resistance

.5 Condensation resistance

.6 Forced entry resistance

.7 Glazing

.8 Sash strength and stiffness

.9 Anodized finish

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for windows for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

1.6 WARRANTY

.1 Provide a written warranty for work under this section from manufacturer for failure due to defective materials and from contractor for failure due to defective installation and workmanship, for five (5) years respectively.

1.7 MOCK-UP


.2 Construct mock-up showing typical window and spandrel section installed in wall opening. Accepted mock-up may form part of complete work.

.3 Allow 48 hours for inspection of mock-up by Owner’s Representative before proceeding with window work.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Materials: to CSA-A440/A440.1 supplemented as follows:



.2 All aluminum windows by same manufacturer.

.3 Sash: aluminum thermally broken.

.4 Main frame: aluminum thermally broken.

.5 Glass: in accordance with Section 08 80 50 – Glazing.

.6 Exterior metal sills: extruded aluminum of type and size to suit job conditions; minimum 3 mm thick, complete with joint covers, jamb drip deflectors, chairs, anchors, anchoring devices.


.8 Insulated aluminum panels shall be composed of 0.20 inch thick exterior aluminum panel finished to match window framing, adhered to 19 mm plywood with glass fibre batt insulation and painted gypsum board. Interior finish set in aluminum window framing.

2.2 WINDOW TYPE AND CLASSIFICATION

.1 Type:

.1 Fixed: with insulating glass.

.2 Classification rating: to CSA-A440/A440.1 for various regions of Newfoundland and Labrador as follows:

.1 Argentia A3, B5, C4, I40, F1, S1

.2 Bonavista A3, B6, C3, I40, F1, S1

.3 Cape Harrison A3, B5, C3, I40, F1, S1

.4 Cape Race A3, B6, C3, I40, F1, S1

.5 Churchill Falls A3, B2, C2, I43, F1, S1

.6 Buchans A3, B3, C3, I40, F1, S1

.7 Corner Brook A3, B5, C4, I40, F1, S1

.8 Gander A3, B4, C3, I40, F1, S1

.9 Goose Bay A3, B3, C3, I40, F1, S1

.10 Grand Bank A3, B6, C4, I40, F1, S1

.11 Grand Falls A3, B4, C3, I40, F1, S1

.12 Labrador City A3, B2, C2, I43, F1, S1

.13 Port aux Basques A3, B6, C4, I40, F1, S1

.14 St. Anthony A3, B6, C4, I40, F1, S1

.15 St. John’s A3, B6, C4, I40, F1, S1

.16 Stephenville A3, B5, C4, I40, F1, S1

.17 Wabana A3, B6, C4, I40, F1, S1

.18 Wabush A3, B2, C2, I43, F1, S1



.3 Energy ratings: windows to be Energy Star certified to Canadian Standards Association for various regions of Newfoundland and Labrador as follows:

.1 Island Region (excluding Northern Peninsula). .1 Zone B.

.2 Northern Peninsula of Island Region and Labrador Region (excluding Northern Labrador – Natuashish and North). .1 Zone C.

.3 Northern Labrador – Natuashish and North. .1 Zone D.

2.3 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate in accordance with CSA-A440/A440.1 supplemented as follows:

.2 Fabricate units square and true with maximum tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 mm for units with a diagonal measurement of 1800 mm or less and plus or minus 3.0 mm for units with a diagonal measurement over 1800 mm.

.3 Face dimensions detailed are maximum permissible sizes.

.4 Brace frames to maintain squareness and rigidity during shipment and installation.

.5 Finish steel clips and reinforcement with 380 g/m² zinc coating to CAN/CSA-G164.

2.4 ALUMINUM FINISHES

.1 Finish exposed surfaces of aluminum components in accordance with Aluminum Association Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.

.1 Clear anodized.

2.5 ISOLATION COATING

.1 Isolate aluminum from following components, by means of isolation coating:

.1 Dissimilar metals except stainless steel, zinc, or white bronze of small area.

.2 Concrete, mortar and masonry.

.3 Wood.

2.6 GLAZING

.1 Glaze windows in accordance with CSA-A440/A440.1 and Section 08 80 50 - Glazing.

2.7 AIR BARRIER AND VAPOUR RETARDER

.1 Provide low expanding, single component polyurethane foam sealant installed at head, jamb and sill perimeter of window for sealing to building air barrier, vapour retarder and window frame. Foam sealant width to be adequate to provide required air tightness and



vapour diffusion control to building air barrier and vapour retarder foam interior. Refer to Section 07 21 20 – Low Expanding Foam Sealant.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 WINDOW INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with CSA-A440.

.2 Arrange components to prevent abrupt variation in colour.

.3 Install shims between windows and building frame at each installation screw location. Shim and fasten windows in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and CAN/CSA A440.4.

3.2 SILL INSTALLATION

.1 Install metal sills with uniform wash to exterior, level in length, straight in alignment with plumb upstands and faces. Use one piece lengths at each location.

.2 Cut sills to fit window opening.

.3 Secure sills in place with anchoring devices located at ends joints of continuous sills and evenly spaced 600 mm oc in between.

.4 Fabricate and install sills to provide minimum 2% slope away from window.

.5 Fasten drip deflectors with self tapping stainless steel screws.

.6 Maintain 6.0 to 9.0 mm space between butt ends of continuous sills. For sills over 1200 mm in length, maintain 3.0 to 6.0 mm space at each end.

3.3 CAULKING

.1 Seal joints between windows and window sills with sealant. Bed sill expansion joint cover plates and drip deflectors in bedding compound. Caulk between sill upstand and window-frame. Caulk butt joints in continuous sills.

.2 Apply sealant in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. Conceal sealant within window units except where exposed use is permitted by Owner’s Representative.

END OF SECTION


Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware Page 1 of 11

PART 1 GENERAL






.5 Section 08 11 14- Metal Doors & Frames.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers' Association (CSDFMA).

.1 CSDFMA Canadian Metric Guide for Steel Doors and Frames (Modular Construction).


.1 CAN/CGSB-69.17, Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches.

.2 CAN/CGSB-69.18 /ANSI/BHMA A156.1, Butts and Hinges.

.3 CAN/CGSB-69.19/ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Exit Devices.

.4 CAN/CGSB-69.20/ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Door Controls (Closers).

.5 CAN/CGSB-69.21/ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products.

.6 CAN/CGSB-69.22/ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Architectural Door Trim.

.7 CAN/CGSB-69.24/ANSI/BHMA A156.8, Door Controls - Overhead Holders.

.8 CAN/CGSB-69.30/ANSI/BHMA A156.14, Sliding and Folding Door Hardware.

.9 CAN/CGSB-69.32-M90/ANSI/BHMA A156.16-1981, Auxiliary Hardware.

.10 CAN/CGSB-69.34/ANSI/BHMA A156.18, Materials and Finishes.

.11 ANSI/BHMA A156.21. Thresholds

.12 ANSI/BHMA A156.22 Door Gasketing Systems

.13 ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Continuous Hinges

.14 ANSI/BHMA A156.28 Keying Systems

.15 DHI/BHMA A156. A115 Hardware Preparations in Steel Doors

.16 DHI/BHMA A156. A115w Hardware Preparations in Wood Doors

.17 ANSI/DHI A115.IG Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware.

.3 Canada Green Building Council (CaGBC)

.1 LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0-[2004], LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design): Green Building Rating System Reference Package For New Construction and Major Renovations (including Addendum [2007]).



.2 LEED Canada-CI Version 1.0-[2007], LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design): Green Building Rating System Reference Guide For Commercial Interiors.

.4 National Building Code Canada

.1 National Building Code Canada Latest Edition

.2 National Fire Code Canada Latest Edition

.5 National Fire Protection Association

.1 NFPA 80 Fire Drs. & Windows Latest Edition

.2 NFPA 105 Smoke & Draft B Control Door Assemblies Latest Edition

.3 NFPA 252 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies Latest Edition

.4 NFPA 101 Life Safety Code

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Product Data:


.2 Samples:

.1 Identify each sample by label indicating applicable specification paragraph number, brand name and number, finish and hardware package number.

.2 After approval samples will be returned for incorporation in the Work.

.3 Hardware List:

.1 Submit contract hardware list.

.2 Indicate specified hardware, including make, model, material, function, size, finish and other pertinent information.

.3 Include copy of hardware list on CD using standard word format. Formats not compatible with word or word perfect will be returned, this includes PDF or special hardware programs that cannot be converted to acceptable formats.



.5 Closeout Submittals

.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for door closers, locksets, door holders electrified hardware and fire exit hardware for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

.1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.2 Supply two sets of wrenches for door closers, locksets and fire exit hardware.


Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware Page 3 of 11 1.5 WARRANTY

.1 Provide a written manufacturer’s warranty for work of this Section for failure due to defective materials for ten (10) years, dated from substantial completion certificate.

.2 Provide a written Contractor’s warranty for work of this Section for failure due to defective installation workmanship for one (1) year, dated from submittal completion certificate.


.1 Regulatory Requirements:

.1 Hardware for doors in fire separations and exit doors certified by a Canadian Certification Organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada.

.2 Only products meeting ANSI/BHMA standards are acceptable. Items that are equal in design, function and quality will be accepted upon approval of the Owner’s Representative.

.3 Only recognized contract hardware distributors will be considered for the work of this section. The distributor shall have on staff a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant recognized by the Door and Hardware Institute or a person with equivalent qualifications to assist installers and direct detailing, processing and delivery of material, and certify installation acceptance.

.4 Acceptable Alternates

.1 Alternates as listed in Part 2 must match the specified product in design, quality, price group, function and size.



.2 Store finishing hardware in locked, clean and dry area.

.3 Package each item of hardware including fastenings, separately or in like groups of hardware, label each package as to item definition and location.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 HARDWARE ITEMS

.1 Only door locksets and latches listed on ANSI/BHMA Standards list are acceptable for use on this project.

.2 Use one manufacturer's products only for similar items.

2.2 DOOR HARDWARE

.1 Locks and latches:



.1 Bored and preassembled locks and latches: to CAN/CGSB-69.17, 4000 bored lock, grade 1, designed for function and keyed as stated in Hardware Schedule.

.2 Mortise locks and latches: to CAN/CGSB-69.29, series 1000 mortise lock, designed for function and keyed as stated in Hardware Schedule.

.3 Knobs Lever handles : plain design.

.4 Roses: round.

.5 Normal strikes: box type, lip projection not beyond jamb.

.6 Cylinders: key into keying system as directed.

.7 All corresponding cylinders to be removable.

.8 Finished to as noted in hardware groups.

.9 Specified Acceptable Alternates Corbin Nil to match Owners inventory and Key System

.2 Butts and hinges:

.1 Butts and hinges: to CAN/CGSB-69.18, designated by letter A and numeral identifiers, followed by size and finish, listed in Hardware Schedule.

.2 Quantity size and width of hinges in accordance with manufactures recommendations and ANSI Standard 156.1.

.3 Hinges shall be of the size, type, material and finish as indicated in hardware groups.

.4 Interior hinges of steel, unless otherwise noted.

.5 Interior hinges which swing out off areas shall have NRP security feature.

.6 Specified Acceptable Alternative Dorma Stanley McKinney Lawrence CB81 CB1900 TA714 CB1379

.3 Continuous hinges

.1 Continuous hinges to ANSI/BHMA A156.26.

.2 Hinges shall be standard or heavy duty as indicated.

.3 Hinges shall be full height complete with installation aids and fasteners to suit door and frame conditions.

.4 Hinges shall be complete with sufficient number and gauge of wires to operate or monitor as per hardware group notes.

.5 Hinges shall be complete with factory prepared access panel to all concealed wiring.

.6 Hinges shall be complete with necessary options to meet fire ratings as indicated in door schedule.

.7 Quantity size and width of hinges in accordance with manufactures recommendations and ANSI/BHMA A156.26.

.8 Specified Acceptable Alternates Pemko ABH Stanley Gallery /Lawrence

CFM83SLFHD A110 661HD CH941/CH951



.4 Exit devices:

.1 To CAN/CGSB-69.19, function, grade and finish as per schedule.

.2 Exit devices of Rim type with push pad design, non-handed, field sizable with approved labeling as required or as indicated in the door schedule.

.3 Exit devices shall be complete with all devices to operate as per the functions indicated in the Hardware Group.

.4 Exit devices shall be complete with glass bead conversion kits to suit door lite cutouts.

.5 Lever trim shall be complete with thru-bolted mechanism.

.6 Electric Exit devices shall be of matching design with functions as noted in Hardware Groups.

.7 Electric Exit devices shall be complete with all necessary relays power supplies and devices to operate as per the notes with the Hardware Group.

.8 Specified Acceptable Alternates Dorma Von Duprin Sargent Lawrence

9300 99L 19-8888 8810S/F Barrier Free Trim [Refer to Hdw Group for trim and function]

.5 Door Closers and Accessories:

.1 Door controls (closers): to CAN/CGSB-69.20, designated by letter C and numeral identifiers listed in Hardware Schedule.

.2 Closers of narrow slim line design complete rack and pinion hydraulic action.

.3 Closers complete with adjustable backcheck [unless noted otherwise].

.4 Closers equipped with full cover, as noted by model number in Hardware Groups, complete with secure and concealed mounting screws.

.5 All manual closers with manufacturer’s twenty-five [25] year warranty.

.6 Barrier free openings shall be equipped with closers that meet all requirements of the National and Provincial Codes.

.7 Adapter plates as noted in Hardware Groups are used for added reinforcing as well as door and frame conditions. Adapter plates shall be added to any opening if required to suit field conditions or door design.

.8 Closers shall include all necessary Arm Brackets, Cush arm supports and blade stop spacers to suit door swing, frame reveals or stop conditions.

.9 Size and hand closers prior to site delivery in accordance with the Manufactures recommendations.

.10 Closers capable of field adjustment of at least fifteen [15] percent.

.11 Degree of opening to be as shown on the plans and indicated on the reviewed Hardware Groups.

.12 Finished as stated in Hardware Groups.

.13 Specified Acceptable Alternates Dorma LCN Sargent Stanley Lawrence 8600 1460 1430 D-3550 825BC 8900 4000 281 D-4550 8016BC



.6 Auxiliary locks and associated products: to CAN/CGSB-69.21, designated by letter E and numeral identifiers listed in Hardware Schedule.

.1 Key into keying system as noted.

.7 Architectural door trim: to CAN/CGSB-69.22, designated by letter J and numeral identifiers listed in Hardware Schedule.

.1 Door protection plates: 1.27 mm thick stainless steel, finished to BMHA 630.

.8 Thresholds: to ANSI/BHMA A156.21 extruded aluminum mill finish, serrated surface, with lip and vinyl door seal insert.

.9 Weatherstripping:

.1 Head and jamb seal: .1 Extruded aluminum frame and solid closed cell neoprene insert, clear

anodized finish.

.10 Astragal: overlapping, extruded aluminum frame with vinyl insert, finished to match doors.

2.3 FASTENINGS

.1 Use only fasteners provided by manufacturer. Failure to comply may void warranties and applicable licensed labels.

.2 Supply screws, bolts, expansion shields and other fastening devices required for satisfactory installation and operation of hardware.

.3 Exposed fastening devices to match finish of hardware.

.4 Where pull is scheduled on one side of door and push plate on other side, supply fastening devices, and install so pull can be secured through door from reverse side. Install push plate to cover fasteners.

.5 Use fasteners compatible with material through which they pass.

2.4 KEYING

.1 Doors, padlocks and cabinet locks to be master keyed as directed. Prepare detailed keying schedule in conjunction with Owner’s Representative and owner.

.2 Final keying requirements will be determined after award of contract. This supplier is to arrange a meeting with Contractor and Owner to confirm keying, operational details and any special requirements.

.3 All locks and cylinders keyed to existing BEST system.

.4 Provide four [4] cut keys for every lock in this Contract.



.5 Provide six master keys for each MK or GMK group. Allow for six (6) levels of sub master keying.

.6 Stamp keying code numbers on keys and cylinders.

2.5 FINISHES

.1 Following finishes are indicated in hardware groups.

BHMA CAN MATERIAL FINISH

626 C26D Brass/Bronze Satin Chrome 628 C28 Aluminum Satin Alum, Anodized 630 C32D Stainless Steel Satin Stainless Steel 652 C26D Steel Plated Satin Chrome 689 Al All Painted Aluminum Alum Aluminum Mill Finish TMDFF (to match door and frame finish).

2.6 ABBREVIATIONS ALD Aluminum Door and Frame ATMS STMS Arm/strike To Template with Machine Screws ASB Arm Complete with Sex Bolts BC Back Check C to C, C/L Centerline to Centerline Cyl Cylinder (of a lock) CMK Construction Master Key Deg. Degree (of opening) DEL Delayed Action FBB or BB Ball bearing hinge

PART 3 EXECUTION



.2 Furnish metal door and frame manufacturers with complete instructions and templates for preparation of their work to receive hardware.

.3 Furnish manufacturers' instructions for proper installation of each hardware component.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 No operating hardware shall be installed at a height of more than 1200 mm above the finished floor [NBCC 3.4.6.15.5]

.2 Install hardware to standard hardware location dimensions in accordance with Canadian Metric Guide for Steel Doors and Frames (Modular Construction) prepared by Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers' Association.



.3 Closers shall be installed according to Manufactures templates and installation instructions. Unless required otherwise installation shall be on pull side of door. Outswing doors shall be on push side using top jamb or parallel arm installation.

.4 Where closer or arm is installed on door sex bolts, finished to match other hardware, will be used.

.5 Degree of opening to be as shown on the plans and indicated on the reviewed hardware schedule

.6 Use of "quick" type fasteners, unless specifically supplied by manufacturer, is unacceptable.

3.3 EXAMINATION

.1 Visit site prior to start of installation of hardware.

.2 Visit will include examination of openings, site conditions and materials for conditions that prevent proper application of finish hardware.

.3 Installation will imply conditions for installation acceptable hardware contractor to accept responsibility.


.1 Hardware contractor to have a qualified AHC representative from the manufacturer/supplier on site at Substantial Completion Inspection and at commissioning of the finished hardware. Cost of the visits to be included in contract.

3.5 ADJUSTING

.1 Adjust door hardware, operators, closures and controls for optimum, smooth operating condition, safety and for weather tight closure.

.2 Lubricate hardware, operating equipment and other moving parts.

.3 Adjust door hardware to provide tight fit at contact points with frames.

.4 Where hardware is found defective, repair or replace or correct as desired by inspection reports.

3.6 CLEANING


.2 Clean hardware with damp rag and approved non-abrasive cleaner, and polish hardware in accordance with manufacture's instructions.

.3 Remove protective material from hardware items where present.




3.7 PROTECTION

.1 All hardware shall be protected against damage from paint, plaster or other defacing materials. Whenever possible manufacturers protective covering when applied, shall not be removed until final project cleaning takes place. Material not protected by manufacture shall be covered or removed from door during painting or any other adjustments that can cause damage to hardware.

3.8 HARDWARE GROUPS

.1 Provide hardware as specified in the previous articles in sets according to the following groups:

.2 Group HG - 01

.1 1 Continuous Hinge CFM83SLFHD 628

.2 1 Exit Device 9308 YR08 TB/SB 630

.3 1 Cylinder 1000 626

.4 1 Closer 8916-DS SB/MS 689

.5 1 Adapter Plate DP86 TB/SB 689

.6 1 Kick plate 903 355 x width CKS 630

.7 1 Overhead Stops HD8000 630

.8 1 Set Weather-strip 319CS 628

.9 1 Bottom Sweep 3452CP 628

.10 1 Threshold 179AP x width 719

.3 Group HG - 02

.1 3 Hinges CB81 114 x 101 652

.2 1 Exit Device F9308 YR08 TB/SB 630

.3 1 Cylinder 1000 626

.4 1 Closer 8614 SB/MS 689



.7 1 Overhead Stops HD8000 630

.8 1 Set Door Seal 319CS 628

.9 2 Stop CBH157 626

.4 Group HG – 03 [Slider]

.1 1 Set Track Hardware 280A x width [1-Dr. ] Std.

.2 1 Fascia F134 x Width 628

.3 5 Mounting Brackets 281 628



.4 2 Stops 287HD Std.

.5 1 Channel 94A x Full Width of slide. 627

.6 2 Roller Guides 106R/94 Std

.7 1 Deadlock MS1850S x 4001 626

.8 1 Cylinder 1000 626

.9 1 Cylinder Turn 4066-ARC 626

.10 2 Flush Pull 16N 626

.11 Note: .1 Provide block in track to prevent panels from lifting. .2 Provide Suitable lock jamb to allow locking.

.5 Group HG - 04

.1 6 Hinges CB81 114 x 114 652

.2 1 Exit Device F-9408-LBR YR08 TB/SB 630

.3 1 Exit Device F-9400-LBR TB/SB 630

.4 1 Cylinder 1000 626

.5 2 Closer 8916 SB/MS 689



.8 1 Set Smoke-strip 312CS 628

.9 1 Set Astragal 18041CP 628

.10 2 Stop CBH157 626

.6 Group HG - 05

.1 3 Hinges CB81 114 x 101 652

.2 1 Lock CL3351-NZD 626

.3 1 Closer 8616 SB/MS 689


.5 1 Set Door Seal 5050T Tan

.6 1 Stop 103/113 626

.7 Group HG - 06

.1 3 Hinges CB81 114 x 101 652

.2 1 Lock CL3357-NZD 626

.3 1 Closer 8616 SB/MS 689


.5 1 Set Door Seal 5050T Tan

.6 1 Stop 103/113 626

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

.1 Keying System Setup and Cabinet:



.1 Set up existing key control system with file key tags, duplicate key tags, numerical index, alphabetical index and key change index, label shields, control book and key receipt cards.

.2 Place file keys and duplicate keys in existing key cabinet on their respective hooks.

.3 Lock existing key cabinet and turn over key to Owner’s Representative.

.2 Designated Staff Briefing:

.1 Brief designated staff regarding: .1 Proper care, cleaning, and general maintenance of projects complete

hardware. .2 Description, use, handling, and storage of keys. .3 Use, application and storage of wrenches for door closers, locksets, and

fire exit hardware.

.3 Demonstrate operation, operating components, adjustment features, and lubrication requirements.

3.10 COMMISSIONING

.1 Site inspection or visit at Substantial Completion and training follow up and inspection at commissioning as directed by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Provide 10 month warranty service.

END OF SECTION


Section 08 80 50 – Glazing Page 1 of 6

PART 1 GENERAL







.6 Section 08 11 14 – Metal Doors & Frames.

.7 Section 08 51 13 – Aluminum Windows.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

.1 ANSI/ASTM E330, Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.


.1 ASTM C542, Specification for Lock-Strip Gaskets.

.2 ASTM D2240, Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness.


.1 CAN/CGSB-12.1, Tempered or Laminated Safety Glass.

.2 CAN/CGSB-12.3, Clear Float Glass

.3 CAN/CGSB-12.5, Mirrors, Silvered.

.4 CAN/CGSB-12.8, Insulating Glass Units.

.5 CAN/CGSB-12.11, Wired Safety Glass.


.1 CSA A440.2, Energy Performance Evaluation of Windows and Sliding Glass Doors.

.2 CSA Certification Program for Windows and Doors.

.5 Flat Glass Manufacturers Association (FGMA).

.1 FGMA Glazing Manual.

.6 Laminators Safety Glass Association (LSGA).



.1 LSGA Laminated Glass Design Guide.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

.1 Performance Requirements:

.1 Provide continuity of building enclosure vapour and air barrier using glass and glazing materials as follow: .1 Utilize inner light of multiple light sealed units for continuity of air and

vapour seal. .2 Size glass to withstand wind loads, dead loads and positive and negative live

loads as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E330n and NBC latest edition.

.3 Limit glass deflection to 1/200 with full recovery of glazing materials.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Product Data:




.3 Closeout Submittals:

.1 Provide maintenance data including cleaning instructions for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals


.1 Perform work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual IGMAC and Laminators Safety Glass Association – Standards Manual for glazing installation methods. Provide shop inspection and testing for glass.

.3 Provide certificate of quality compliance from manufacturer.

1.6 MOCK-UPS

.1 Construct mock-ups in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.

.2 Construct mock-up to including glass glazing, and perimeter air barrier and vapour retarder seal.

.3 Mock-up will be used to judge workmanship, substrate preparation, operation of equipment and material application.

.4 Construct mock-up where directed.




.6 Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by Owner’s Representative before proceeding with work.

1.7 WARRANTY

.1 Provide ten (10) year warranty for glazing units.


.1 Install glazing when ambient temperature is 10˚C minimum. Maintain ventilated environment for 24 hours after application.

.2 Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS: FLAT GLASS

.1 Float glass: to CAN/CGSB-12.3 and NBCC 2010, Glazing quality, thickness to NBCC.

.2 Safety glass: to CAN/CGSB-12.5, transparent, minimum 6 mm thick.

.1 Type 2 - tempered

.2 Class B - float

.3 Category 11

.3 Wired glass: to CAN/CGSB-12.11 and NBCC 2010, minimum 6 mm thick.

.1 Type 1- Polished both sides (transparent)

.2 Wire mesh style 3 – square.

2.2 MATERIALS: SEALED INSULATING GLASS

.1 Insulating glass units: to CAN/CGSB-12.8 and NBCC 2010, double unit, minimum 25 mm overall thickness (as per NBCC for window area and climatic conditions.)

.1 Glass: to CAN/CGSB-12.3

.2 Glass thickness: as per NBCC calculations for window area and climatic conditions.

.3 Inter-cavity space thickness: 13 mm.

.4 Glass coating: surface number 2 (inside surface of outer light), low “E”.

.5 Inert gas: argon.

.6 Light transmittance: minimum 0.70.

2.3 MATERIALS

.1 Sealant: 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants.


Section 08 80 50 – Glazing Page 4 of 6 2.4 ACCESSORIES

.1 Setting blocks: Neoprene, 80-90 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM D2240, minimum 100 mm x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1.5 mm x height.

.2 Spacer shims: Neoprene, 50-60 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM D2240, 75 mm long x one half height of glazing stop x thickness to suit application. Self adhesive on one face.

.3 Glazing tape:

.1 Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device, 10-15 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM D2240; coiled on release paper; black colour.

.4 Glazing splines: resilient polyvinyl chloride, extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot, colour as selected.

.5 Glazing clips: manufacturer's standard type.

.6 Lock-strip gaskets: to ASTM C542.

PART 3 EXECUTION


.1 Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, and data sheets.

3.2 EXAMINATION

.1 Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.

.2 Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive glazing.

3.3 PREPARATION

.1 Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.

.2 Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.

.3 Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.

3.4 INSTALLATION: EXTERIOR – WET/DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND SEALANT)

.1 Perform work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual and Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods.



.2 Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 6 mm below sight line. Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with sealant.

.3 Apply heel bead of sealant along intersection of permanent stop with frame ensuring full perimeter seal between glass and frame to complete continuity of air and vapour seal.

.4 Place setting blocks at 1/4 points, with edge block maximum 150 mm from corners.

.5 Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel of sealant with sufficient pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of light or glass unit.

.6 Install removable stops with spacer strips inserted between glazing and applied stops 6 mm below sight line.

.7 Fill gap between glazing and stop with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glazing, maximum 9 mm below sight line.

.8 Apply cap head of sealant along void between stop and glazing, to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.

3.5 INSTALLATION: INTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE)

.1 Perform work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual and Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods.

.2 Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1.6 mm above sight line.

.3 Place setting blocks at 1/4 with edge block maximum 150 mm from corners.

.4 Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape with sufficient pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of light or glass unit.

.5 Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described in 3.4.3. Apply heel bead of sealant along intersection of permanent stop with frame ensuring full perimeter seal between glass and frame to complete continuity of air and vapour seal.

.6 Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact.

.7 Knife trim protruding tape.

3.6 CLEANING


.2 Remove traces of primer, caulking.



.3 Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.

.4 Remove labels after work is complete.

.5 Clean glass and mirrors using approved non-abrasive cleaner in accordance with manufacture's instructions.


3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

.1 After installation, mark light with an "X" by using removable plastic tape or paste. Do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units.

END OF SECTION


Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies Page 1 of 6

PART 1 GENERAL




.3 Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry

.4 Section 07 21 16 - Blanket Insulation

.5 Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping.

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 ASTM C36/C36M, Specification for Gypsum Wallboard.

.2 ASTM C475, Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.

.3 ASTM C514, Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board.

.4 ASTM C840, Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.

.5 ASTM C954, Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness.

.6 ASTM C1002, Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.

.2 Association of the Wall and Ceilings Industries International (AWEI)


.1 CAN/CGSB-51.34, Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building Construction.


.1 CAN/ULC-S102, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit 300 mm size samples of corner and casing beads insulating strip.


.1 Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing manufacturers brand name and identification.


Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies Page 2 of 6 .2 Store materials inside, level, under cover. Keep dry. Protect from weather, other

elements and damage from construction operations and other causes.

.3 Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends or surfaces. Protect metal accessories and trim from being bent or damaged.

1.5 SITE ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Maintain temperature minimum 10° C, maximum 21° C for 48 hours prior to and during application of gypsum boards and joint treatment, and for at least 48 hours after completion of joint treatment.

.2 Apply board and joint treatment to dry, frost free surfaces.

.3 Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to remove excess moisture that would prevent drying of joint treatment material immediately after its application.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

.1 Dry wall installers: minimum 5 years proven experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Standard board: to ASTM C36/C36M Type X, thicknesses as indicated on drawings, 1200 mm wide x maximum practical length, ends square cut, edges bevelled.

.2 Metal furring runners, hangers, tie wires, inserts, anchors: to CSA A82.30 galvanized.

.3 Drywall furring channels: 0.5 mm core thickness galvanized steel channels for screw attachment of gypsum board.

.4 Resilient drywall furring: 0.5 mm base steel thickness galvanized steel for resilient attachment of gypsum board.

.5 Nails: to ASTM C514.

.6 Steel drill screws: to ASTM C1002.

.7 Stud adhesive: to CAN/CGSB-71.25.

.8 Laminating compound: as recommended by manufacturer, asbestos-free.

.9 Casing beads, corner beads, control joints and edge trim: to ASTM C1047, metal, zinc-coated by hot-dip process 0.5 mm base thickness, perforated flanges, one piece length per location.

.10 Sealants: in accordance with Section 07 92 10 - Joint Sealing.


Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies Page 3 of 6 .11 Acoustic sealant: to CGSB 19-GP-21M.

.12 Polyethylene: to CAN/CGSB-51.34, Type 1.

.13 Insulating strip: rubberized, moisture resistant, 3 mm thick cork strip, 12 mm wide, with self sticking permanent adhesive on one face, lengths as required.

.14 Joint compound: to ASTM C475, asbestos-free.

2.2 FINISHES

.1 Texture finish: asbestos-free standard white texture coating and primer-sealer, recommended by gypsum board manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION

.1 Do application and finishing of gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840 except where specified otherwise.

.2 Erect hangers and runner channels for suspended gypsum board ceilings in accordance with ASTM C840 except where specified otherwise.

.3 Support light fixtures by providing additional ceiling suspension hangers within 150 mm of each corner and at maximum 600 mm around perimeter of fixture.

.4 Install work level to tolerance of 1:1200.

.5 Frame with furring channels, perimeter of openings for access panels, light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, and other protrusions.

.6 Install 19 x 64 mm furring channels parallel to, and at exact locations of steel stud partition header track.

.7 Furr for gypsum board faced vertical bulkheads within and at termination of ceilings.

.8 Furr above suspended ceilings for gypsum board fire and sound stops and to form plenum areas as indicated.

.9 Install wall furring for gypsum board wall finishes in accordance with ASTM C840, except where specified otherwise.

.10 Furr openings and around built-in equipment, cabinets, access panels, on four sides. Extend furring into reveals. Check clearances with equipment suppliers.

.11 Furr duct shafts, beams, columns, pipes and exposed services where indicated.


Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies Page 4 of 6 3.2 APPLICATION

.1 Do not apply gypsum board until bucks, anchors, blocking, sound attenuation, electrical and mechanical work are approved.

.2 Apply single, double layer gypsum board to wood or metal furring or framing using screw fasteners. Maximum spacing of screws 300 mm oc.

.1 Single-Layer Application: .1 Apply gypsum board on ceilings prior to application of walls in

accordance with ASTM C840. .2 Apply gypsum board vertically or horizontally, providing sheet lengths

that will minimize end joints. .2 Double-Layer Application:

.1 Install gypsum board for base layer and exposed gypsum board for face layer.

.2 Apply base layer to ceilings prior to base layer application on walls; apply face layers in same sequence. Offset joints between layers at least 250 mm.

.3 Apply base layers at right angles to supports unless otherwise indicated.

.4 Apply base layer on walls and face layers vertically with joints of base layer over supports and face layer joints offset at least 250 mm with base layer joints.

.3 Apply single layer gypsum board to concrete or concrete block surfaces, where indicated, using laminating adhesive.

.1 Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations.

.2 Brace or fasten gypsum board until fastening adhesive has set.

.3 Mechanically fasten gypsum board at top and bottom of each sheet.

.4 Apply 12 mm diameter bead of acoustic sealant continuously around periphery of each face of partitioning to seal gypsum board/structure junction where partitions abut fixed building components. Seal full perimeter of cut-outs around electrical boxes, ducts, in partitions where perimeter sealed with acoustic sealant.

.5 Install ceiling boards in direction that will minimize number of end-butt joints. Stagger end joints at least 250 mm.

.6 Install gypsum board on walls vertically to avoid end-butt joints. At stairwells and similar high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs, except where local codes or fire-rated assemblies require vertical application.

.7 Install gypsum board with face side out.

.8 Do not install damaged or damp boards.

.9 Locate edge or end joints over supports. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of wall.


Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies Page 5 of 6 3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Erect accessories straight, plumb or level, rigid and at proper plane. Use full length pieces where practical. Make joints tight, accurately aligned and rigidly secured. Mitre and fit corners accurately, free from rough edges. Secure at 150 mm oc using contact adhesive for full length.

.2 Install casing beads around perimeter of suspended ceilings.

.3 Install casing beads where gypsum board butts against surfaces having no trim concealing junction and where indicated. Seal joints with sealant.

.4 Install insulating strips continuously at edges of gypsum board and casing beads abutting metal window and exterior door frames, to provide thermal break.

.5 Construct control joints of two back-to-back casing beads set in gypsum board facing and supported independently on both sides of joint.

.6 Provide continuous polyethylene dust barrier behind and across control joints.

.7 Locate control joints at changes in substrate construction.

.8 Install control joints straight and true.

.9 Construct expansion joints as detailed, at building expansion and construction joints. Provide continuous dust barrier.

.10 Install expansion joint straight and true.

.11 Install access doors to electrical and mechanical fixtures specified in respective sections.

.1 Rigidly secure frames to furring or framing systems.

.12 Finish face panel joints and internal angles with joint system consisting of joint compound, joint tape and taping compound installed according to manufacturer's directions and feathered out onto panel faces.

.13 Gypsum Board Finish: finish gypsum board walls and ceilings to following levels in accordance with Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries (AWCI) International Recommended Specification on Levels of Gypsum Board Finish:

.1 Levels of finish: .1 Level 2: Embed tape for joints and interior angles in joint compound and

apply one separate coat of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories; surfaces free of excess joint compound; tool marks and ridges are acceptable.(For use where water resistant gypsum backing board is used as a substrate for tile.)

.2 Level 4: Embed tape for joints and interior angles in joint compound and apply three separate coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories; surfaces smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.


Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies Page 6 of 6 .14 Finish corner beads, control joints and trim as required with two coats of joint compound

and one coat of taping compound, feathered out onto panel faces.

.15 Fill screw head depressions with joint and taping compounds to bring flush with adjacent surface of gypsum board so as to be invisible after surface finish is completed.

.16 Sand lightly to remove burred edges and other imperfections. Avoid sanding adjacent surface of board.

.17 Completed installation to be smooth, level or plumb, free from waves and other defects and ready for surface finish.

.18 Apply one coat of white primer sealer over surface to be textured. When dry apply textured finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.19 Mix joint compound slightly thinner than for joint taping.

.20 Apply thin coat to entire surface using trowel or drywall broadknife to fill surface texture differences, variations or tool marks.

.21 Allow skim coat to dry completely.

.22 Remove ridges by light sanding or wiping with damp cloth.

.23 Provide protection that ensures gypsum drywall work will remain without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.

END OF SECTION


Section 09 22 16 – Non-Structural Metal Framing Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL





1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM).

.1 ASTM C645, Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members.

.2 ASTM C754, Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products.


.1 CAN/CGSB-1.40, Primer, Structural Steel, 0il Alkyd Type.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Non-load bearing channel stud framing: to ASTM C645, roll formed hot dipped galvanized steel sheet, 0.55 mm thickness for stud lengths up to 3500 mm, 0.91 mm thickness for stud lengths greater than 3500 mm, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, for screw attachment of gypsum board. Knock-out service holes at 460 mm centres.

.1 Stud sizes shall be as indicated on the drawings

.2 Bottom track: single piece.

.3 Top track: single piece track or double track or slotted single top track. (double track or slotted single top track to accommodate deflection).

.2 Acoustical sealant: to Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants.

.3 Insulating strip: rubberized, moisture resistant 3 mm thick cork foam strip, 12 mm wide, with self sticking adhesive on one face, lengths as required.

.4 Dampproof course: closed cell, polyethylene foam, 6.3 mm thick, 89 mm wide.


Section 09 22 16 – Non-Structural Metal Framing Page 2 of 3 PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION

.1 Align partition tracks at floor and ceiling and secure at 600 mm o.c maximum.

.2 Allow minimum deflection gap of 16.5 mm for double track or slotted single top track.

.3 Install damp proof course under stud shoe tracks of partitions on slabs on grade.

.4 Place studs vertically at 400 mm o.c and not more than 50 mm from abutting walls, and at each side of openings and corners. Position studs in tracks at floor and ceiling. Cross brace steel studs as required to provide rigid installation to manufacturer's instructions.

.5 Erect metal studding to tolerance of 1:1000.

.6 Attach studs to bottom and ceiling track using screws.

.7 Co-ordinate erection of studs with installation of service lines. When erecting studs ensure web openings are aligned.

.8 Co-ordinate erection of studs with installation of door/window frames and special supports or anchorage for work specified in other Sections.

.9 Provide two studs extending from floor to ceiling at each side of openings wider than stud centres specified. Secure studs together, 50 mm apart using column clips or other approved means of fastening placed alongside frame anchor clips.

.10 Erect track at head of door/window openings and sills of sidelight/window openings to accommodate intermediate studs. Secure track to studs at each end, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install intermediate studs above and below openings in same manner and spacing as wall studs.

.11 Frame openings and around built-in equipment, cabinets, access panels, on four sides. Extend framing into reveals. Check clearances with equipment suppliers.

.12 Provide 40 mm stud or furring channel secured between studs for attachment of fixtures behind lavatory basins, toilet and bathroom accessories, and other fixtures including grab bars and towel rails, attached to steel stud partitions.

.13 Install steel studs or furring channel between studs for attaching electrical and other boxes.

.14 Extend partitions to ceiling height except where noted otherwise on drawings.

.15 Maintain clearance under beams and structural slabs to avoid transmission of structural loads to studs.

.16 Install continuous insulating strips to isolate studs from uninsulated surfaces, where applicable.


Section 09 22 16 – Non-Structural Metal Framing Page 3 of 3

.17 Install two continuous beads of acoustical sealant under studs and tracks around perimeter of sound control partitions.

3.2 CLEANING


END OF SECTION


Section 09 51 13 – Acoustical Panel Ceilings Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL








.7 Section 09 53 00.01 - Acoustical Suspension.

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 ASTM E1264, Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.


.1 CAN/CGSB-92.1, Sound Absorptive Prefabricated Acoustical Units.



1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit duplicate full size samples of each type acoustical units.


.1 Permit wet work to dry before commencement of installation.

.2 Maintain uniform minimum temperature of 15˚C and humidity of 20 - 40% before and during installation.

.3 Store materials in work area 48 hours prior to installation.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

.1 Provide extra materials of acoustic units in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.



.2 Provide acoustical units amounting to 2% of gross ceiling area for each pattern and type required for project.

.3 Extra materials to be from same production run as installed materials.

.4 Clearly identify each type of acoustic unit, including colour and texture.

.5 Deliver to Owner’s Representative, upon completion of the work of this section.

.6 Store where directed by Owner’s Representative.


.1 Provide maintenance data for acoustical ceilings for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Acoustic units for suspended ceiling system: to CAN/CGSB-92.1.

.1 Type 3.

.2 Pattern as selected by Owner’s Representative.

.3 Flame spread rating of 25 or less in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102.

.4 Smoke developed 50 or less in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102.

.5 Noise reduction coefficient (NRC) designation of 0.55 to 0.65.

.6 Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC), in accordance with ASTM E1264.

.7 Light reflectance range of 25.

.8 Edge type square.

.9 Colour white.

.10 Size 610 x 1220 x 19 mm thick.

.11 Shape flat.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Do not install acoustical panels and tiles until work above ceiling has been inspected by Owner’s Representative.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install acoustical panels and tiles in ceiling suspension system.



3.3 APPLICATION

.1 Install acoustical units parallel to building lines with edge unit not less than 50% of unit width. Refer to reflected ceiling plan.

.2 Scribe acoustic units to fit adjacent work butt joints tight, terminate edges with moulding.

3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK

.1 Coordinate with Section 09 53 00.01 – Acoustical Suspension.

.2 Co-ordinate ceiling work to accommodate components of other sections, such as light fixtures, diffusers, speakers, sprinkler heads, to be built into acoustical ceiling components.

3.5 COMMISSIONING

.1 Train user staff in the care, cleaning and replacement of acoustical ceiling tile.

.2 Acceptance of maintenance material turned over to owner.

END OF SECTION


Section 09 53 00.01 – Acoustical Suspension Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL





.4 Section 09 51 13 - Acoustical Panel Ceilings.

.5 Division 22: Trim for recessed mechanical fixtures.

.6 Division 26: Trim for recessed light fixtures.

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 ASTM C635, Specifications for the Manufacture, Performance and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings.

.2 ASTM C636, Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels.


.1 Maximum deflection: 1/360th of span to ASTM C635 deflection test.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit reflected ceiling plans for special grid patterns as indicated.

.2 Indicate lay-out, insert and hanger spacing and fastening details, splicing method for main and cross runners, location of access splines change in level details, access door dimensions, and locations and acoustical unit support at ceiling fixture lateral bracing and accessories.

.3 Submit one representative model of each type ceiling suspension system.

.4 Ceiling system to show basic construction and assembly, treatment at walls, recessed fixtures, splicing, interlocking, finishes, acoustical unit installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Intermediate duty system to ASTM C635.


Section 09 53 00.01 – Acoustical Suspension Page 2 of 3 .2 Basic materials for suspension system: commercial quality cold rolled steel, zinc coated.

.3 Suspension system: non fire rated, made up as follows:

.1 two directional exposed tee bar grid.

.4 Exposed tee bar grid components: shop painted satin sheen white colour. Components die cut. Main tee with double web, rectangular bulb and 25 mm rolled cap on exposed face. Cross tee with rectangular bulb; web extended to form positive interlock with main tee webs; lower flange extended and offset to provide flush intersection.

.5 Hanger wire: galvanized soft annealed steel wire.

.1 3.6 mm diameter for access tile ceilings.

.6 Hanger inserts: purpose made.

.7 Accessories: splices, clips, wire ties, retainers and wall moulding to be shadow mould, to complement suspension system components, as recommended by system manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Installation: in accordance with ASTM C636 except where specified otherwise.

.2 Install suspension system to manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Do not erect ceiling suspension system until work above ceiling has been inspected by Owner’s Representative.

.4 Secure hangers to overhead structure using attachment methods acceptable to Owner’s Representative.

.5 Install hangers spaced at maximum 1200 mm centres and within 150 mm from ends of main tees.

.6 Lay out system according to reflected ceiling plan.

.7 Ensure suspension system is co-ordinated with location of related components.

.8 Install wall moulding to provide correct ceiling height.

.9 Completed suspension system to support super-imposed loads, such as lighting fixtures diffusers grilles and speakers.

.10 Support at light fixtures and diffusers with additional ceiling suspension hangers within 150 mm of each corner and at maximum 600 mm around perimeter of fixture.

.11 Interlock cross member to main runner to provide rigid assembly.


Section 09 53 00.01 – Acoustical Suspension Page 3 of 3 .12 Frame at openings for light fixtures, air diffusers, speakers and at changes in ceiling

heights.

.13 Install access splines to provide 10% ceiling access.

.14 Finished ceiling system to be square with adjoining walls and level within 1:1000.

3.2 CLEANING

.1 Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids and other defects in painted surfaces.

END OF SECTION


Section 09 65 16 – Resilient Sheet Flooring Page 1 of 5

PART 1 GENERAL





.4 Section 09 96 56 – Epoxy Coatings.

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 ASTM F1303, Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm sample pieces of sheet material, 300 mm long base, feature strips, edge strips.


.1 Provide maintenance data for resilient flooring for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

.1 Provide extra materials of resilient sheet flooring and adhesives in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.2 Provide 5m² of each colour, pattern and type flooring material required for project for maintenance use.

.3 Extra materials to be in one piece and from same production run as installed materials.

.4 Clearly identify each roll of sheet flooring and each container of adhesive.

.5 Deliver to Owner’s Representative upon completion of the work of this section.

.6 Store where directed by Owner’s Representative.


.1 Maintain air temperature and structural base temperature at flooring installation area at 18º C to 30º C for 48 hours before, during and 48 hours after installation, and at a relative humidity not greater than 60%.


Section 09 65 16 – Resilient Sheet Flooring Page 2 of 5 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

.1 Resilient Sheet flooring installers: minimum 5 years proven experience.

1.8 MOCK-UP

.1 Construct mock-ups in accordance with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control.

.2 Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by Owner’s Representative before proceeding with work.



.1 Provide Certificate of Quality Compliance from sheet flooring manufacturer.

.2 Provide Certificate of Quality Compliance from flooring installer upon satisfactory completion of installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

.1 Flooring materials shall be warranted by the manufacturer against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of five (5) years from the date of Substantial Completion.

.2 Contractor shall provide a two (2) year warranty from the date of substantial completion against defects in workmanship.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Resilient flooring must:

.1 Meet or exceed all applicable governmental and industrial safety and performance standards; and

.2 Be manufactured and transported in such a manner that all steps of the process, including the disposal of waste products arising therefrom, will meet the requirements of all applicable governmental acts, by laws and refulatons including, for facilities located in Canada, the Fisheries Act and the Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA).

.2 Linoleum Sheet Flooring: to ASTM F2034.

.1 Type I.

.2 Nominal thickness: 2.5 mm.

.3 Backing: jute fabric backing.



.4 Wear surface: homogeneous mixture of linoleum cement (linseed oil, natural tree resins, drying oil catalysts), wood flour, cork flour, color pigments and filler.

.5 Colors and pattern: shall be dispersed throughout the thickness of the wear layer.

.6 Colour: selected by Owner’s Representative.

.7 Provide solid color linoleum weld rod intended for heat welding of linoleum seams. Color shall be compatible with field color of flooring or as selected by Owner’s Representative to contrast with field color of flooring.

.8 Flooring shall be supplied in rolls of uniform thickness, 2.0 m wide.

.3 Resilient base: continuous, top set, complete with premoulded end stops and external corners:

.1 Type: rubber

.2 Style: cove

.3 Thickness: 2.03mm.

.4 Height: 101.6mm.

.5 Lengths: cut lengths minimum 1200mm.

.6 Colour: selected by Owner’s Representative

.4 Resilient stair tread: rubber, 30 mm vertical face, round nose, full tread deep, 5 mm thick, ribbed surface with contrasting colour strip for the visually impaired. Colour selected by Architect/Engineer.

.5 Resilient stair riser: rubber 2.0 mm thick, by full riser height. Colour selected by Architect/Engineer.

.6 Primers and adhesives: waterproof, solvent-free, recommended by flooring manufacturer for specific material on applicable substrate, above, at or below grade.

.7 Sub-floor filler and leveller: white premix latex requiring water only to produce cementitious paste as recommended by flooring manufacturer for use with their product.

.8 Metal edge strips:

.1 Aluminum extruded, smooth, with lip to extend under floor finish, shoulder flush with top of adjacent floor finish.

.9 Sealer and wax: type recommended by resilient flooring material manufacturer for material type and location.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Concrete floor slab must be smooth and level and be within tolerance of + 3.0 mm in 3.0 m radius. Remove ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and other defects with an approved filler. Remove any other contaminants such as grease, paint, dust, solvents or rust.



.2 Moisture vapour emission content of the concrete floor slab shall not exceed 3 lbs/100ft2

(1.46 KG/100M2) per 24 hours when using the calcium chloride test method moisture vapour emission content prior to resilient sheet flooring installation in new construction, any corrective measures are the responsibility of the contractor. In the case of existing facilities where the resilient sheet flooring is being replaced, the flooring supplier is to; provide a flooring system suitable for the existing moisture vapour emission content as determined by the flooring supplier during the tender period.

.3 Remove or treat old adhesives to prevent residual, old flooring adhesives from bleeding through to new flooring and/or interfering with the bonding of new adhesives.

.4 Seal concrete slab or plywood sub-floor to resilient flooring manufacturer's printed instructions.

3.2 APPLICATION: FLOORING

.1 Provide a high ventilation rate, with maximum outside air, during installation, and for 48 to 72 hours after installation. If possible, vent directly to the outside. Do not let contaminated air recirculate through a district or whole building air distribution system. Upon completion of work, maintain ventilation at maximum capacity until building occupation.

.2 To minimize emissions from adhesives, use water-based, solvent-free styrene-butadiene-rubber adhesive for linoleum. Butadiene exposure may cause eye and nose irritation, headaches, dizziness, and vomiting.

.3 Apply water based adhesive uniformly using recommended trowel. Do not spread more adhesive than can be covered by flooring before initial set takes place.

.4 Lay flooring with seams parallel to building lines to produce a minimum number of seams. Border widths minimum 1/3 width of full material.

.5 Run sheets in direction of traffic. Double cut sheet joints and continuously heat weld according to manufacturer's printed instructions.

.6 Heat weld seams of resilient sheet flooring in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

.7 As installation progresses, and after installation roll flooring with 45 kg minimum roller to ensure full adhesion.

.8 Cut flooring neatly around fixed objects.

.9 Install flooring in pan type floor access covers. Maintain floor pattern.

.10 Continue flooring over areas which will be under built-in furniture.

.11 Terminate flooring at centreline of door in openings where adjacent floor finish or colour is dissimilar.



.12 Install metal edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates.

3.3 APPLICATION: STAIRS

.1 Install stair treads and risers one piece for full width of stair. Adhere over entire surface and fit accurately.

3.4 APPLICATION: BASE

.1 Lay out base to keep number of joints at minimum.

.2 Clean substrate and prime with one coat of adhesive.

.3 Apply adhesive to back of base.

.4 Set base against wall and floor surfaces tightly by using 3 kg hand roller.

.5 Install straight and level to variation of 1:1000.

.6 Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions. Use premoulded end pieces at flush door frames.

.7 Cope internal corners. Use premoulded corner units for right angle external corners. Use formed straight base material for external corners of other angles.

.8 Heat weld base in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

3.5 CLEANING

.1 Remove excess adhesive from floor, base and wall surfaces without damage.

.2 Clean floor and apply 2 coats of an approved floor finish plus one wear layer of floor finish to flooring and base surface in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.6 PROTECTION

.1 Protect new floors from time of final set of adhesive until final inspection.

.2 Prohibit traffic on floor for 48 hours after installation.

3.7 COMMISSIONING

.1 Train area staff in the care, cleaning and sealing of resilient sheet flooring.

.2 Acceptance of maintenance turned over to owner.

END OF SECTION


Section 09 91 13 – Exterior Painting Page 1 of 12

PART 1 GENERAL







1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)

.1 EPA Test Method for Measuring Total Volatile Organic Compound Content of Consumer Products, Method 24 (for Surface Coatings).

.2 Master Painters Institute (MPI)

.1 MPI Architectural Painting Specifications Manual

.3 Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC).

.1 SSPC Painting Manual, Systems and Specifications Manual.

.4 National Fire Code of Canada.


.1 Contractor shall have a minimum of five years proven satisfactory experience. When requested, provide a list of last three comparable jobs including, job name and location, specifying authority, and project manager.

.2 Qualified journeyperson shall be engaged in painting work. Apprentices may be employed provided they work under the direct supervision of a qualified journeyperson in accordance with trade regulations.

.3 Conform to latest MPI requirements for exterior painting work including preparation and priming.

.4 Materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers, thinners, solvents, etc.) shall be in accordance with MPI Painting Specification Manual "Approved Products" listing and shall be from a single manufacturer for each system used.



.5 Other paint materials such as linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, etc. shall be the highest quality product of an approved manufacturer listed in MPI Painting Specification Manual and shall be compatible with other coating materials as required.

.6 Retain purchase orders, invoices and other documents to prove conformance with noted MPI requirements when requested by Owner’s Representative.

.7 Standard of Acceptance:

.1 Walls: No defects visible from a distance of 1000 mm at 90° to surface.

.2 Ceilings: No defects visible from floor at 45° to surface when viewed using final lighting source.

.3 Final coat to exhibit uniformity of colour and uniformity of sheen across full surface area.

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Provide paint products meeting MPI "Environmentally Friendly" E2 or E3 ratings based on VOC (EPA Method 24) content levels.

1.5 SCHEDULING OF WORK

.1 Submit work schedule for various stages of painting to Owner’s Representative for approval. Submit schedule minimum of 48 hours in advance of proposed operations.

.2 Obtain written authorization from Owner’s Representative for changes in work schedule.

.3 Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of occupants in and about the building.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit product data and manufacturer's installation/application instructions for paints and coating products to be used.

.2 Submit WHMIS - MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets.

.3 Upon completion, submit records of products used, records to be included in Operation and Maintenance Manuals. List products in relation to finish system and include the following:

.1 Product name, type and use.

.2 Manufacturer's product number.

.3 Colour numbers.

.4 Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

.5 MPI Environmentally Friendly classification system rating.

.4 Submit manufacturer’s application instructions for each product specified.



.5 Submit duplicate 200 x 300 mm sample panels of each paint, stain, clear coating, with specified paint or coating in colours, gloss/sheen and textures required to MPI Painting Specification Manual standards submitted on the following substrate materials:

.1 3 mm plate steel for finishes over metal surfaces.

.2 50 mm concrete block for finishes over concrete or concrete masonry surfaces.

.3 13 mm gypsum board for finishes over gypsum board and other smooth surfaces.

.6 When approved, samples shall become acceptable standard of quality for appropriate on-site surface with one of each sample retained on-site.

.7 Submit full range of available colours where colour availability is restricted.

1.7 QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Provide mock-up in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.

.2 When requested by the Owner’s Representative or Paint Inspection Agency, prepare and paint designated surface, area, room or item (in each colour scheme) to requirements specified herein, with specified paint or coating showing selected colours, gloss/sheen, textures and workmanship to MPI Painting Specification Manual standards for review and approval. When approved, surface, area, room and/or items shall become acceptable standard of finish quality and workmanship for similar on-site work.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

.1 Submit maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.2 Submit 1 - 4 litre can of each type and colour of finish coating. Identify colour and paint type in relation to established colour schedule and finish formula.

.3 Deliver to Owner’s Representative and store where directed.

1.9 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE


.2 Deliver and store materials in original containers, sealed, with labels intact.

.3 Labels shall clearly indicate:

.1 Manufacturer's name and address.

.2 Type of paint or coating.

.3 Compliance with applicable standard.

.4 Colour number in accordance with established colour schedule.

.4 Remove damaged, opened and rejected materials from site.



.5 Provide and maintain dry, temperature controlled, secure storage.

.6 Observe manufacturer's recommendations for storage and handling.

.7 Store materials and supplies away from heat generating devices.

.8 Store materials and equipment in a well ventilated area with temperature range 7ºC to 30ºC.

.9 Store temperature sensitive products above minimum temperature as recommended by manufacturer.

.10 Keep areas used for storage, cleaning and preparation, clean and orderly to approval of Consultant. After completion of operations, return areas to clean condition to approval of Consultant.

.11 Remove paint materials from storage only in quantities required for same day use.

.12 Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling storage, and disposal of hazardous materials.

.13 Fire Safety Requirements:

.1 Provide one 9 kg Type ABC dry chemical fire extinguisher adjacent to storage area.

.2 Store oily rags, waste products, empty containers and materials subject to spontaneous combustion in ULC approved, sealed containers and remove from site on a daily basis.

.3 Handle, store, use and dispose of flammable and combustible materials in accordance with the National Fire Code of Canada.


1.10 SITE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Heating, Ventilation and Lighting:

.1 Ventilate enclosed spaces.

.2 Perform no painting work unless adequate and continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities are in place to maintain ambient air and substrate temperatures above 10ºC for 24 hours before, during and after paint application until paint has cured sufficiently.

.3 Where required, provide continuous ventilation for seven days after completion of application of paint.

.4 Provide temporary ventilating and heating equipment where permanent facilities are not available.



.5 Perform no painting work unless a minimum lighting level of 323 Lux is provided on surfaces to be painted. Adequate lighting facilities shall be provided by General Contractor.

.2 Temperature, Humidity and Substrate Moisture Content Levels:

.1 Unless specifically pre-approved by Owner’s Representative and, applied product manufacturer, perform no painting work when: .1 ambient air and substrate temperatures are below 10ºC. .2 substrate temperature is over 32ºC unless paint is specifically formulated

for application at high temperatures. .3 substrate and ambient air temperatures are expected to fall outside MPI

or paint manufacturer's prescribed limits. .4 the relative humidity is above 85% or when dew point is less than 3ºC

variance between air/surface temperature. .5 rain or snow are forecast to occur before paint has thoroughly cured or

when it is foggy, misty, raining or snowing at site. .2 Perform no painting work when maximum moisture content of substrate exceeds:

.1 12% for concrete and masonry (clay and concrete brick/block). .3 Conduct moisture tests using a properly calibrated electronic Moisture Meter,

except test concrete floors for moisture using a simple "cover patch test". .4 Test concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces for alkalinity as required.

.3 Surface and Environmental Conditions:

.1 Apply paint finish only in areas where dust is no longer being generated by related construction operations or when wind or ventilation conditions are such that airborne particles will not affect quality of finished surface.

.2 Apply paint only to adequately prepared surfaces and to surfaces within moisture limits noted herein.

.3 Apply paint only when previous coat of paint is dry or adequately cured.

.4 Apply paint finishes only when conditions forecast for entire period of application fall within manufacturer's recommendations.

.5 Do not apply paint when: .1 Temperature is expected to drop below 10ºC before paint has thoroughly

cured. .2 Substrate and ambient air temperatures are expected to fall outside MPI

or paint manufacturer's limits. .3 Surface to be painted is wet, damp or frosted.

.6 Provide and maintain cover when paint must be applied in damp or cold weather. Heat substrates and surrounding air to comply with temperature and humidity conditions specified by manufacturer. Protect until paint is dry or until weather conditions are suitable.

.7 Schedule painting operations such that surfaces exposed to direct, intense sunlight are scheduled for completion during early morning.



.8 Remove paint from areas which have been exposed to freezing, excess humidity, rain, snow or condensation. Prepare surface again and repaint.

.9 Paint occupied facilities in accordance with approved schedule only. Schedule operations to approval of the Owner’s Representative such that painted surfaces will have dried and cured sufficiently before occupants are affected.


.1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

.2 Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.

.3 Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers.

.4 Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely.

.5 Unused paint, coating materials must be disposed of at official hazardous material collections site as approved by Owner’s Representative.

.6 Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinners, and solvents) are regarded as hazardous products and are subject to regulations for disposal.

.7 Material which cannot be reused must be treated as hazardous waste and disposed of in an appropriate manner.

.8 Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers, in containers or areas designated for hazardous waste.

.9 To reduce the amount of contaminants entering waterways, sanitary/storm drain systems or into ground follow these procedures:

.1 Retain cleaning water for water-based materials to allow sediments to be filtered out.

.2 Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in designated containers and ensure proper disposal.

.3 Return solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations for contaminant recovery, proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and laundering.

.4 Dispose of contaminants in approved legal manner in accordance with hazardous waste regulations.

.10 Empty paint cans are to be dry prior to disposal or recycling (where available).

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Paint materials listed in the latest edition of the MPI Approved Products List (APL) are acceptable for use on this project.



.2 Paint materials for each coating formula to be products of a single manufacturer.

.3 Low odour products: whenever possible, select products exhibiting low odour characteristics. If two products are otherwise equivalent, select the product with the lowest odour. Only qualified products with E2 or E3 "Environmentally Friendly" rating are acceptable for use on this project.

.4 Paints, coatings, adhesives, solvents, cleaners, lubricants, and other fluids, shall:

.1 be water-based, water soluble, water clean-up.

.2 be non-flammable

.3 be manufactured without compounds which contribute to ozone depletion in the upper atmosphere.

.4 be manufactured without compounds which contribute to smog in the lower atmosphere.

.5 do not contain methylene chloride, chlorinated hydrocarbons, toxic metal pigments.

.5 Water-borne surface coatings must be manufactured and transported in a manner that steps of processes, including disposal of waste products arising therefrom, will meet requirements of applicable governmental acts, by-laws and regulations including, for facilities located in Canada, Fisheries Act and Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA).

.6 Water-borne surface coatings must not be formulated or manufactured with aromatic solvents, formaldehyde, halogenated solvents, mercury, lead, cadmium, hexavelant chromium or their compounds.

.7 Water-borne surface coatings must have a flash point of 61.0ºC or greater.

.8 Both water-borne surface coatings and recycled water-borne surface coatings must be made by a process that does not release:

.1 Matter in undiluted production plant effluent generating a 'Biochemical Oxygen Demand' (BOD) in excess of 15 mg/L to a natural watercourse or a sewage treatment facility lacking secondary treatment.

.2 Total Suspended Solids (TSS) in undiluted production plant effluent in excess of 15 mg/L to a natural watercourse or a sewage treatment facility lacking secondary treatment.

.9 Water-borne paints and stains, and water borne varnishes must meet a minimum "Environmentally Friendly" E2 rating.

2.2 COLOURS

.1 Owner’s Representative will provide Colour Schedule after Contract award.

.2 Selection of colours will be from manufacturer’s full range of colours.



.3 Where specific products are available in a restricted range of colours, selection will be based on the limited range.

.4 Second coat in a three coat system to be tinted slightly lighter colour than top coat to show visible difference between coats.

2.3 MIXING AND TINTING

.1 Perform colour tinting operations prior to delivery of paint to site. On-site tinting of painting materials is allowed only with Owner’s Representative written permission.

.2 Paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes shall be mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

.3 Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer's recommendations. Do not use kerosene or any such organic solvents to thin water-based paints.

.4 Thin paint for spraying according in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions. If directions are not on container, obtain instructions in writing from manufacturer and provide copy of instructions to Owner’s Representative.

.5 Re-mix paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure break-up of lumps, complete dispersion of settled pigment, and colour and gloss uniformity.

2.4 GLOSS/SHEEN RATINGS

.1 Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with the following values:

Gloss Level /Category Units @ 60Ε/ Units @ 85º G1 - matte finish 0 to 5 max. 10 G2 - velvet finish 0 to 10 10 to 35 G3 - eggshell finish 10 to 25 10 to 35 G4 - satin finish 20 to 35 min. 35 G5 - semi-gloss finish 35 to 70 G6 – gloss finish 70 to 85 G7 - high gloss finish > 85

.2 Gloss level ratings of painted surfaces shall be as specified herein.

2.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SYSTEMS

.1 The following paint formulas requires a three coat finish as indicated in the MPI Architectural Painting Specifications Manual.

.2 Concrete Vertical Surfaces: (including horizontal soffits)

.1 EXT 3.1A – Latex G4 finish

.3 Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications:



.1 EXT 5.1J - Pigmented polyurethane finish (over high build epoxy).

.4 Galvanized Metal: not chromate passivated

.1 EXT 5.3D - Pigmented polyurethane finish for use in high contact/high traffic areas.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

.1 Perform preparation and operations for exterior painting in accordance with MPI Painting Specifications Manual except where specified otherwise.

.2 Apply all paint materials in accordance with paint manufacturer's written application instructions.


.1 Investigate existing substrates for problems related to proper and complete preparation of surfaces to be painted. Report to Owner’s Representative damages, defects, unsatisfactory or unfavourable conditions before proceeding with work.

.2 Conduct moisture testing of surfaces to be painted using a properly calibrated electronic moisture meter, except test concrete floors for moisture using a simple "cover patch test" and report findings to Owner’s Representative. Do not proceed with work until conditions fall within acceptable range as recommended by manufacturer.

.3 Maximum moisture content as follows:

.1 Concrete: 12%.

.2 Clay and Concrete Block/Brick: 12%.

3.3 PROTECTION

.1 Protect existing building surfaces and adjacent structures from paint spatters, markings and other damage by suitable non-staining covers or masking. If damaged, clean and restore such surfaces as directed by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Cover or mask windows and other ornamental hardware adjacent to areas being painted to prevent damage and to protect from paint drops and splatters. Use non-staining coverings.

.3 Protect items that are permanently attached such as Fire Labels on doors and frames.

.4 Protect factory finished products and equipment.

.5 Protect passing pedestrians, building occupants and general public in and about the building.



.6 Remove electrical cover plates, light fixtures, surface hardware on doors, and all other surface mounted fittings, equipment and fastenings prior to undertaking any painting operations. Store for re-installation after painting is completed.

.7 Cover or move exterior furniture and portable equipment around building as necessary to carry out painting operations. Replace as painting operations progress.

.8 As painting operations progress, place "WET PAINT" signs in areas of work to approval of Owner’s Representative.

3.4 CLEANING AND PREPARATION

.1 Clean and prepare exterior surfaces in accordance with MPI Painting Specification Manual requirements. Refer to the MPI Manual in regard to specific requirements and as follows:

.1 Remove dust, dirt, and other surface debris by wiping with dry, clean cloths or compressed air.

.2 Wash surfaces with a biodegradable detergent and bleach where applicable and clean warm water using a stiff bristle brush to remove dirt, oil and other surface contaminants.

.3 Rinse scrubbed surfaces with clean water until foreign matter is flushed from surface.

.4 Allow surfaces to drain completely and allow to dry thoroughly.

.5 Prepare surfaces for water-based painting, water-based cleaners should be used in place of organic solvents.

.6 Use trigger operated spray nozzles for water hoses.

.7 Many water-based paints cannot be removed with water once dried. However, minimize the use of kerosene or any such organic solvents to clean up water-based paints.

.2 Prevent contamination of cleaned surfaces before prime coat is applied and between applications of remaining coats. Apply primer, paint, or pretreatment as soon as possible after cleaning and before deterioration occurs.

.3 Where possible, prime surfaces of new wood surfaces before installation. Use same primers as specified for exposed surfaces.

.1 Apply vinyl sealer to MPI #36 over knots, pitch, sap and resinous areas.

.2 Apply wood filler to nail holes and cracks.

.3 Tint filler to match stains for stained woodwork.

.4 Sand and dust between coats as required to provide adequate adhesion for next coat and to remove defects visible from a distance up to 1000 mm.

.5 Clean metal surfaces to be painted by removing rust, loose mill scale, welding slag, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign substances in accordance with MPI requirements. Remove



traces of blast products from surfaces, pockets and corners to be painted by brushing with clean brushes or blowing with clean dry compressed air.

.6 Touch up of shop primers with primer as specified in applicable section. Major touch-up including cleaning and painting of field connections, welds, rivets, nuts, washers, bolts, and damaged or defective paint and rusted areas, shall be by supplier of fabricated material.

.7 Do not apply paint until prepared surfaces have been accepted by Owner’s Representative.

3.5 APPLICATION

.1 Method of application to be as approved by Owner’s Representative. Apply paint by brush roller, air sprayer, airless sprayer. Conform to manufacturer's application instructions unless specified otherwise.

.2 Brush and Roller Application:

.1 Apply paint in a uniform layer using brush and/or roller of types suitable for application.

.2 Work paint into cracks, crevices and corners.

.3 Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to brush using spray, daubers and/or sheepskins. Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to roller using brush, daubers or sheepskins.

.4 Brush and/or roll out runs and sags, and over-lap marks. Rolled surfaces shall be free of roller tracking and heavy stipple.

.5 Remove runs, sags and brush marks from finished work and repaint.

.3 Spray Application:

.1 Provide and maintain equipment that is suitable for intended purpose, capable of properly atomizing paint to be applied, and equipped with suitable pressure regulators and gauges.

.2 Keep paint ingredients properly mixed in containers during paint application either by continuous mechanical agitation or by intermittent agitation as frequently as necessary.

.3 Apply paint in a uniform layer, with overlapping at edges of spray pattern.

.4 Brush out immediately runs and sags.

.5 Use brushes to work paint into cracks, crevices and places which are not adequately painted by spray.

.4 Use dipping, sheepskins or daubers only when no other method is practical in places of difficult access and only when specifically authorized by Owner’s Representative.

.5 Apply coats of paint as a continuous film of uniform thickness. Repaint thin spots or bare areas before next coat of paint is applied.



.6 Allow surfaces to dry and properly cure after cleaning and between subsequent coats for minimum time period as recommended by manufacturer.

.7 Sand and dust between coats to remove visible defects.

.8 Finish surfaces both above and below sight lines as specified for surrounding surfaces, including such surfaces as projecting ledges.

.9 Finish top, bottom, edges and cutouts of doors after fitting as specified for door surfaces.

3.6 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

.1 Unless otherwise specified, paint exterior exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment with colour and finish to match adjacent surfaces, except as noted otherwise.

.2 Touch up scratches and marks on factory painted finishes and equipment with paint as supplied by manufacturer of equipment.

.3 Do not paint over nameplates.


.1 Field inspection of exterior painting operations to be carried out by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Advise Owner’s Representative when each applied coating is ready for inspection. Do not proceed with subsequent coats until previous coat has been approved.

.3 Co-operate with Owner’s Representative and provide access to areas of work.

3.8 RESTORATION

.1 Clean and re-install all hardware items removed before undertaken painting operations.

.2 Remove protective coverings and warning signs as soon as practical after operations cease.

.3 Remove paint splashings on exposed surfaces that were not painted. Remove smears and spatter immediately as operations progress, using compatible solvent.

.4 Protect surfaces from paint droppings and dust to approval of Owner’s Representative. Avoid scuffing newly applied paint.

.5 Restore areas used for storage, cleaning, mixing and handling of paint to clean condition as approved by Owner’s Representative.

END OF SECTION


Section 09 91 23 – Interior Painting Page 1 of 13

PART 1 GENERAL







.6 Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry.

.7 Section 06 40 00 - Architectural Woodwork.

.8 Section 08 11 00 – Metal Doors & Frames.

.9 Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)

.1 EPA Test Method for Measuring Total Volatile Organic Compound Content of Consumer Products, Method 24 (for Surface Coatings).

.2 Master Painters Institute (MPI)

.1 MPI Architectural Painting Specifications Manual.

.3 Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC)

.1 SSPC Painting Manual, Volume Two, Systems and Specifications Manual.

.4 National Fire Code of Canada.


.1 Contractor shall have a minimum of five years proven satisfactory experience. When requested, provide a list of last three comparable jobs including, job name and location, specifying authority, and project manager.

.2 Qualified journeymen shall be engaged in painting work. Apprentices may be employed provided they work under the direct supervision of a qualified journeyman in accordance with trade regulations.



.3 Conform to latest MPI requirements for interior painting work including preparation and priming.

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Provide paint products meeting MPI "Environmentally Friendly" E2 or E3 ratings based on VOC (EPA Method 24) content levels.

.2 Where indoor air quality (odour) is a problem, use only MPI listed materials having a minimum E2 or E3 rating.

1.5 SCHEDULING

.1 Submit work schedule for various stages of painting to Owner’s Representative for approval. Submit schedule minimum of 48 hours in advance of proposed operations.

.2 Obtain written authorization from Owner’s Representative for any changes in work schedule.

.3 Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of occupants in and about the building.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit product data and manufacturer's installation/application instructions for each paint and coating product to be

.2 Submit product data for the use and application of paint thinner.

.3 Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. Indicate VOCs during application and curing.

.4 Upon completion, submit records of products used, records to be included in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. List products in relation to finish system and include the following:

.1 Product name, type and use

.2 Manufacturer's product number

.3 Colour numbers

.4 MPI Environmentally Friendly Classification System Rating

.5 Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)

.5 Submit full range colour sample chips to indicate where colour availability is restricted.

.6 Submit duplicate 200 x 300 mm sample panels of each paint with specified paint or coating in colours, gloss/sheen and textures required to MPI Painting Specification Manual standards submitted on the following substrate materials:

.1 3 mm steel plate for finishes over metal surfaces.



.2 13 mm birch plywood for finishes over wood surfaces.

.3 50 mm concrete block for finishes over concrete or concrete masonry surfaces.

.4 13 mm gypsum board for finishes over gypsum board and other smooth surfaces.

.7 When approved, sample panels shall become acceptable standard of quality for appropriate on-site surface with one of each sample retained on-site.

1.7 QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Provide mock-up in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.

.2 When requested by Owner’s Representative, prepare and paint designated surface, area, room or item (in each colour scheme) to requirements specified herein, with specified paint or coating showing selected colours, gloss/sheen, textures and workmanship to MPI Painting Specification Manual standards for review and approval. When approved, surface, area, room and/or items shall become acceptable standard of finish quality and workmanship for similar on-site work.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

.1 Submit maintenance materials from same product run as products installed in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals. Package products with protective covering and identify with descriptive labels.

.2 Submit one - four litre can of each type and colour of finish coating. Identify colour and paint type in relation to established colour schedule and finish formula.

.3 Deliver to Owner’s Representative and store where directed.

.4 Provide certificate signed by staff that extra materials have been received in order.

1.9 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE


.2 Deliver and store materials in original containers, sealed, with labels intact.

.3 Labels shall clearly indicate:

.1 Manufacturer's name and address.

.2 Type of paint or coating.

.3 Compliance with applicable standard.

.4 Colour number in accordance with established colour schedule.

.4 Remove damaged, opened and rejected materials from site.

.5 Provide and maintain dry, temperature controlled, secure storage.



.6 Observe manufacturer's recommendations for storage and handling.

.7 Store materials and supplies away from heat generating devices.

.8 Store materials and equipment in a well ventilated area with temperature range 7º C to 30º C.

.9 Store temperature sensitive products above minimum temperature as recommended by manufacturer.

.10 Keep areas used for storage, cleaning and preparation, clean and orderly to approval of Owner’s Representative. After completion of operations, return areas to clean condition to approval of Consultant.

.11 Remove paint materials from storage only in quantities required for same day use.

.12 Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling storage, and disposal of hazardous materials.

.13 Fire Safety Requirements:

.1 Provide minimum one 9 kg Type ABC dry chemical fire extinguisher adjacent to storage area.

.2 Store oily rags, waste products, empty containers and materials subject to spontaneous combustion in ULC approved, sealed containers and remove from site on a daily basis.

.3 Handle, store, use and dispose of flammable and combustible materials in accordance with the National Fire Code of Canada.


.1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

.2 Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.

.3 Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers.

.4 Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely.

.5 Unused paint, coating materials must be disposed of at official hazardous material collections site as approved by Owner’s Representative.

.6 Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinners, and solvents) are regarded as hazardous products and are subject to regulations for disposal.

.7 Material which cannot be reused must be treated as hazardous waste and disposed of in an appropriate manner.



.8 Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers, in containers or areas designated for hazardous waste.

.9 To reduce the amount of contaminants entering waterways, sanitary/storm drain systems or into ground follow these procedures:

.1 Retain cleaning water for water-based materials to allow sediments to be filtered out.

.2 Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in designated containers and ensure proper disposal.

.3 Return solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations for contaminant recovery, proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and laundering.

.4 Dispose of contaminants in approved legal manner in accordance with hazardous waste regulations.

.5 Empty paint cans are to be dry prior to disposal or recycling (where available).

1.11 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Heating, Ventilation and Lighting:

.1 Ventilate enclosed spaces.

.2 Perform no painting work unless adequate and continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities are in place to maintain ambient air and substrate temperatures above 10°C for 24 hours before, during and after paint application until paint has cured sufficiently.

.3 Where required, provide continuous ventilation for seven days after completion of application of paint.

.4 Perform no painting work unless a minimum lighting level of 323 Lux is provided on surfaces to be painted. Adequate lighting facilities shall be provided by General Contractor.

.2 Temperature, Humidity and Substrate Moisture Content Levels:

.1 Unless specifically pre-approved by the specifying body, Paint Inspection Agency and the applied product manufacturer, perform no painting work when: .1 Ambient air and substrate temperatures are below 10°C. .2 Substrate temperature is over 32°C unless paint is specifically

formulated for application at high temperatures. .3 Substrate and ambient air temperatures are expected to fall outside MPI

or paint manufacturer’s prescribed limits. .4 The relative humidity is above 60% or when the dew point is less than

3°C variance between the air/surface temperature. .2 Perform no painting work when the maximum moisture content of the substrate

exceeds: .1 12% for concrete and masonry (clay and concrete brick/block). .2 15% for wood. .3 12% for plaster and gypsum board.



.3 Conduct moisture tests using a properly calibrated electronic Moisture Meter, except test concrete floors for moisture using a simple "cover patch test".

.4 Test concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces for alkalinity as required.

.3 Surface and Environmental Conditions:

.1 Apply paint finish only in areas where dust is no longer being generated by related construction operations or when wind or ventilation conditions are such that airborne particles will not affect quality of finished surface.

.2 Apply paint only to adequately prepared surfaces and to surfaces within moisture limits noted herein.

.3 Apply paint only when previous coat of paint is dry or adequately cured.

.4 Additional Interior Application Requirements:

.1 Apply paint finishes only when temperature at location of installation can be satisfactorily maintained within manufacturer's recommendations.

.2 Apply paint in occupied facilities during silent hours only. Schedule operations to approval of Owner’s Representative such that painted surfaces will have dried and cured sufficiently before occupants are affected.

.3 Prime existing oil painted surfaces prior to application of latex finishes.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Paint materials listed in the MPI Approved Products List (APL) are acceptable for use on this project.

.2 Paint materials for paint systems shall be products of a single manufacturer.

.3 Low odor products. Whenever possible, select products exhibiting low odor characteristics. If two products are otherwise equivalent, select the product with the lowest odor. Only qualified products with E2 or E3 ”Environmentally Friendly”rating are acceptable for use on this project.

.4 Paints, coatings, adhesives, solvents, cleaners, lubricants, and other fluids, shall:

.1 be water-based, water soluble, water clean-up.

.2 be non-flammable.

.3 be manufactured without compounds which contribute to ozone depletion in the upper atmosphere.

.4 be manufactured without compounds which contribute to smog in the lower atmosphere.

.5 do not contain methylene chloride, chlorinated hydrocarbons, toxic metal pigments.



.5 Water-borne surface coatings must be manufactured and transported in a manner that steps of process, including disposal of waste products arising therefrom, will meet requirements of applicable governmental acts, by-laws and regulations including, for facilities located in Canada, Fisheries Act and Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA).

.6 Water-borne surface coatings must not be formulated or manufactured with aromatic solvents, formaldehyde, halogenated solvents, mercury, lead, cadmium, hexavelant chromium or their compounds.

.7 Water-borne surface coatings must have a flash point of 61.0°C or greater.

.8 Both water-borne surface coatings and recycled water-borne surface coatings must be made by a process that does not release:

.1 Matter in undiluted production plant effluent generating a 'Biochemical Oxygen Demand' (BOD) in excess of 15 mg/L to a natural watercourse or a sewage treatment facility lacking secondary treatment.

.2 Total Suspended Solids (TSS) in undiluted production plant effluent in excess of 15 mg/L to a natural watercourse or a sewage treatment facility lacking secondary treatment.

.9 Water-borne paints and stains, and water borne varnishes must meet a minimum "Environmentally Friendly" E2 rating.

2.2 COLOURS

.1 Owner’s Representative will provide Colour Schedule after contract award.

.2 Selection of colours will be from manufacturers full range of colours.

.3 Where specific products are available in a restricted range of colours, selection will be based on the limited range.

.4 Second coat in a three coat system to be tinted slightly lighter colour than top coat to show visible difference between coats.

2.3 MIXING AND TINTING

.1 Perform colour tinting operations prior to delivery of paint to site. On-site tinting of painting materials is allowed only with Owner’s Representative written permission.

.2 Paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes shall be mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

.3 Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer's recommendations. Do not use kerosene or any such organic solvents to thin water-based paints.



.4 Thin paint for spraying according in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions. If directions are not on container, obtain instructions in writing from manufacturer and provide copy of instructions to Owner’s Representative.

.5 Re-mix paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure break-up of lumps, complete dispersion of settled pigment, and colour and gloss uniformity.

2.4 GLOSS/SHEEN RATINGS

.1 Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with the following values:

Gloss Level Category Units @ 60Ε Units @ 85Ε G1 - matte finish max. 5 max. 10 G2 - velvet finish max. 10 10 to 35 G3 - eggshell finish 10 to 25 10 to 35 G4 - satin finish 20 to 35 min. 35 G5 - semi-gloss finish 35 to 70 G6 - gloss finish 70 to 85 G7 - high gloss finish > 85

.2 Gloss level ratings of painted surfaces shall be as specified herein.

2.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SYSTEMS

.1 The following paint formulas requires a three coat finish as indicated in the MPI Architectural Painting Specifications Manual.

.2 Concrete Vertical Surfaces: including horizontal soffits

.1 INT 3.1A Latex G5 finish (over sealer).

.3 Concrete Horizontal Surfaces: floors and stairs

.1 INT 3.2B Alkyd floor enamel low gloss finish.

.4 Concrete Masonry Units: smooth and split face block and brick.

.1 INT 4.2A Latex G5 finish.

.5 Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: columns, beams, joists, etc.

.1 INT 5.1E Alkyd G5 finish.

.6 Galvanized Metal: doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, overhead decking, ducts, etc.

.1 INT 5.3A Latex G5 finish.

.7 Dimension Lumber: columns, beams, exposed joists, underside of decking, etc.

.1 INT 6.2D Latex G5 finish (over latex primer).

.8 Dressed Lumber: including doors, door and window frames casings, mouldings, etc.



.1 INT 6.3T Latex G5 finish (over latex primer).

.9 Plaster and Gypsum Board: gypsum wallboard, drywall, “sheet rock type material”, etc and textured finishes:

.1 INT 9.2A Latex G5 finish (over latex sealer) for walls.

.2 INT 9.2A Latex G1 finish (over latex sealer) for ceilings.

.10 Canvas and Cotton coverings:

.1 INT 10.1B Alkyd G5 finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION


.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and data sheet.

3.2 GENERAL

.1 Perform preparation and operations for interior painting in accordance with MPI Painting Specifications Manual except where specified otherwise.

.2 Apply all paint materials in accordance with paint manufacturer's written application instructions.

3.3 PROTECTION

.1 Protect existing building surfaces and adjacent structures from paint spatters, markings and other damage. If damaged, clean and restore such surfaces as directed by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Cover or mask floors, windows and other ornamental hardware adjacent to areas being painted to prevent damage and to protect from paint drops and splatters. Use non-staining coverings.

.3 Protect items that are permanently attached such as Fire Labels on doors and frames.

.4 Protect factory finished products and equipment.

.5 Protect passing pedestrians, building occupants and general public in and about the building.

.6 Remove electrical cover plates, light fixtures, surface hardware on doors, door stops, bath accessories and other surface mounted fittings and fastenings prior to undertaking any painting operations. Store for re-installation after painting is completed.



.7 As painting operations progress place “WET PAINT” signs in occupied areas to approval of Owner’s Representative.

3.4 EXAMINATION

.1 Investigate existing substrates for problems related to proper and complete preparation of surfaces to be painted. Report to Owner’s Representative all damage, defects, unsatisfactory or unfavourable conditions before proceeding with work.

.2 Conduct moisture testing of surfaces to be painted using a properly calibrated electronic moisture meter, except test concrete floors for moisture using a simple “cover patch test” and report findings to Owner’s Representative. Do not proceed with work until conditions fall within acceptable range as recommended by manufacturer.

.3 Maximum moisture content as follows:

.1 Plaster and wallboard: 12%

.2 Masonry/Concrete: 12%

.3 Concrete Block/Brick: 12%

.4 Wood: 15%

3.5 CLEANING AND PREPARATION

.1 Clean and prepare surfaces in accordance with MPI Painting Specification Manual requirements. Refer to MPI Manual in regard to specific requirements and as follows:

.1 Remove dust, dirt, and other surface debris by vacuuming, wiping with dry, clean cloths or compressed air.

.2 Wash surfaces with a biodegradable detergent and bleach where applicable and clean warm water using a stiff bristle brush to remove dirt, oil and other surface contaminants.

.3 Rinse scrubbed surfaces with clean water until foreign matter is flushed from surface.

.4 Allow surfaces to drain completely and allow to dry thoroughly.

.5 Prepare surfaces for water-based painting, water-based cleaners should be used in place of organic solvents.

.6 Use trigger operated spray nozzles for water hoses.

.7 Many water-based paints cannot be removed with water once dried. However, minimize the use of kerosene or any such organic solvents to clean up water-based paints.

.8 Prime existing oil painted surfaces prior to application of new latex paint.

.2 Prevent contamination of cleaned surfaces by salts, acids, alkalis, other corrosive chemicals, grease, oil and solvents before prime coat is applied and between applications of remaining coats. Apply primer, paint, or pretreatment as soon as possible after cleaning and before deterioration occurs.



.3 Sand existing surfaces with intact, smooth, high gloss coatings to provide adequate adhesion for new finishes.

.4 Where possible, prime surfaces of new wood surfaces before installation. Use same primers as specified for exposed surfaces.

.1 Apply vinyl sealer to MPI #36 over knots, pitch, sap and resinous areas.

.2 Apply wood filler to nail holes and cracks.

.3 Tint filler to match stains for stained woodwork.

.5 Sand and dust between coats as required to provide adequate adhesion for next coat and to remove defects visible from a distance up to 1000 mm.

.6 Clean metal surfaces to be painted by removing rust, loose mill scale, welding slag, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign substances in accordance with MPI requirements. Remove traces of blast products from surfaces, pockets and corners to be painted by brushing with clean brushes blowing with clean dry compressed air, or vacuum cleaning.

.7 Touch up of shop primers with primer as specified in applicable section. Major touch-up including cleaning and painting of field connections, welds, rivets, nuts, washers, bolts, and damaged or defective paint and rusted areas, shall be by supplier of fabricated material.

.8 Do not apply paint until prepared surfaces have been accepted by Owner’s Representative.

3.6 APPLICATION

.1 Method of application to be as approved by Owner’s Representative. Apply paint by brush, roller, air sprayer, airless sprayer. Conform to manufacturer's application instructions unless specified otherwise.

.2 Brush and Roller Application:

.1 Apply paint in a uniform layer using brush and/or roller of types suitable for application.

.2 Work paint into cracks, crevices and corners.

.3 Brush and/or roll out runs and sags, and over-lap marks. Rolled surfaces shall be free of roller tracking and heavy stipple.

.4 Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to brush using spray, daubers and/or sheepskins. Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to roller using brush, daubers or sheepskins.

.5 Remove runs, sags and brush marks from finished work and repaint.

.3 Spray application:

.1 Provide and maintain equipment that is suitable for intended purpose, capable of properly atomizing paint to be applied, and equipped with suitable pressure regulators and gauges.



.2 Keep paint ingredients properly mixed in containers during paint application either by continuous mechanical agitation or by intermittent agitation as frequently as necessary.

.3 Apply paint in a uniform layer, with overlapping at edges of spray pattern.

.4 Brush out immediately all runs and sags.

.5 Use brushes to work paint into cracks, crevices and places which are not adequately painted by spray.

.4 Use dipping, sheepskins or daubers only when no other method is practical in places of difficult access and only when specifically authorized by Owner’s Representative.

.5 Apply coats of paint as a continuous film of uniform thickness. Repaint thin spots or bare areas before next coat of paint is applied.

.6 Allow surfaces to dry and properly cure after cleaning and between subsequent coats for minimum time period as recommended by manufacturer.

.7 Sand and dust between coats to remove visible defects.

.8 Finish tops of cupboards, cabinets and projecting ledges, both above and below sight lines as specified for surrounding surfaces.

.9 Finish closets and alcoves as specified for adjoining rooms.

.10 Finish top, bottom, edges and cutouts of doors after fitting as specified for door surfaces.

3.7 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

.1 In finished areas: paint exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment with colour and finish to match adjacent surfaces, except as noted otherwise.

.2 In boiler room, mechanical and electrical rooms: paint exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment.

.3 In other unfinished areas: leave exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment in original finish and touch up scratches and marks.

.4 Touch up scratches and marks on factory painted finishes and equipment with paint as supplied by manufacturer of equipment.

.5 Do not paint over nameplates.

.6 Keep sprinkler heads free of paint.

.7 Paint inside of ductwork where visible behind grilles, registers and diffusers with primer and one coat of matt black paint.

.8 Paint disconnect switches for fire alarm system and exit light systems in red enamel.



.9 Paint all fire protection piping red.

.10 Paint both sides and edges of backboards for telephone and electrical equipment before installation. Leave equipment in original finish except for touch-up as required, and paint conduits, mounting accessories and other unfinished items.

.11 Do not paint interior transformers and substation equipment.


.1 Field inspection of interior painting operations to be carried out by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Advise Owner’s Representative when each applied coating is ready for inspection. Do not proceed with subsequent coats until previous coat has been approved.

.3 Co-operate with Owner’s Representative and provide access to all areas of the work.

.4 Standard of Acceptance:

.1 Walls: no defects visible from a distance of 1000 mm at 90 degrees to surface.

.2 Ceilings: no defects visible from floor at 45 degrees to surface when viewed using final lighting source.

.3 Final coat to exhibit uniformity of colour and uniformity of sheen across full surface area.

3.9 RESTORATION

.1 Clean and re-install all hardware items removed before undertaken painting operations.

.2 Remove protective coverings and warning signs as soon as practical after operations cease.

.3 Remove paint splashings on exposed surfaces that were not painted. Remove smears and spatter immediately as operations progress, using compatible solvent.

.4 Protect freshly completed surfaces from paint droppings and dust to approval of Owner’s Representative. Avoid scuffing newly applied paint.

.5 Restore areas used for storage, cleaning, mixing and handling of paint to clean condition as approved by Owner’s Representative.

END OF SECTION


Section 09 96 56 – Epoxy Coatings Page 1 of 6

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Epoxy seamless non-slip floor coating system the price of which is to be included in the separate price table. The owner may or may not proceed.

1.2 REFERENCES

For Seamless Epoxy Flooring and Integral Coved Base – Stonshield HRI or Approved Equal

Reference is made to spec standards produced by various organizations to conform to edition of standards specified or, if not specified, to last edition as amended and revised to date of contract. .1 ACI Committee #503/pp1139-41

- Bond Strength: >2.8 MPa (400 psi) (100% concrete failure) .2 ASTM C-307

- Tensile Strength: 11 MPa (1600 psi) - Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical- Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings

.3 ASTM C-413 - Water Absorption: 0.1% - Test Method for Absorption of Chemical- Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings

.4 ASTM C-579 - Compressive Strength: 62 MPa ( 9,000 psi) - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings

.5 ASTM C-580 - Flexural Strength: 27.6 MPa ( 4000 psi) - Test Method for Flexural Strength and Modulus of Elasticity of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings

.6 ASTM D-635 - Flammability: Self Extinguishing. Extent of burning 6.4 mm (0.25 inches) max. - Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position

.7 ASTM D-790 - Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 13.8 x 103 MPa (2.0 x 106 psi) - Test Method for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials



.8 ASTM D-2047

- Coefficient of Friction: 0.8 - 1.0 - Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine

.9 ASTM D-2240/Shore D. Durometer - Hardness: 85 - 90 - Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness

.10 ASTM D-4060, Taber Abrader CS-17 wheel, 1,000 gm (2.2 lbs) load, 1,000 cycles - Abrasion Resistance: 0.1 gm (0.0035 oz) max. weight loss - Test method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abrader

.11 ASTM E-831 - Thermal Coefficient of Linear Expansion: 3.5 x 10-5 m/m°C - Test Method for Linear Thermal Expansion of Solid Materials by Thermochemical Analysis

.12 Cure Rate (at 77°F/25°C) allow: 12 hours for foot traffic 18 hours for light traffic 24 hours for normal operations

.13 Heat Resistance Limitation: 140°F/60°C (for continuous exposure), 200°F/93°C (for intermittent spills)

.14 MIL - D -3134F - Indentation: No indentation

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data, installation instructions, and general recommendations for each epoxy material required.

.2 Samples: Submit, for verification purposes, 300 mm x 300 mm (12"x12") square sample of each type of epoxy required, applied to a rigid backing, in colours as selected by Owner’s Representative and finish indicated.


.1 Single Source Responsibility: Obtain primary epoxy materials including primers, resins, hardening agents, finish or sealing coats from a single manufacturer with not less than ten years of successful experience in manufacturing and installing principal materials described in this section. Contractor must have completed at least five projects of similar size and complexity. Provide secondary materials only of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.



.2 Arrange a meeting not less than thirty days prior to starting work.


.1 Deliver material to job site. Epoxy contractor will check material for completeness and shipping damage prior to job start.

.2 All materials must be factory pre-weighed and pre-packaged in single, easy to manage batches to eliminate on site mixing errors. No on site weighing or volumetric measurements allowed.

.3 Store material in a dry, enclosed area protected from exposure to moisture. Temperature of storage area shall be maintained between 16° and 32°C.

1.6 MOCK-UP

.1 At site, under manufacturer's supervision, apply for approval 9 m2 (100 sq ft) of complete finish in area designated, to match submitted samples. When approved, site applied sample to be standard for appearance, colour, texture, workmanship, etc., and all work to conform to this sample.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

.1 Environmental Requirements

.1 Concrete substrate must be properly cured for a minimum of 30 days. Remove existing finishes, bases, setting beds adhesive, clean grind and properly prepare slabs to accommodate new finish. A vapor barrier must be present for concrete subfloors on or below grade. Otherwise, an osmotic pressure resistant grout must be installed prior to the epoxy flooring.

.2 Drywall, including joint work must be completely finished at least 3 days prior to wall system installation.

.3 Temperature: Utilities, including electric, water, heat (air temperature between 16° and 32°C) and finished lighting to be supplied by General Contractor. Maintain ambient temperature of not less than 18°C and a floor temperature of not less than 16°C from [7] days before installation to at least 48 hours after completion of work and maintain relative humidity not higher than 40% during same period.

.4 Moisture: Ensure substrate is within moisture limits prescribed by epoxy manufacturer.

.5 Safety: Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding the use, handling, storage and disposal of hazardous materials.

.6 Ventilation: Ventilate area of work by use of approved portable supply and exhaust fans.

.7 Ventilate enclosed spaces in accordance with MSDS requirements.

.8 Provide continuous ventilation during and after material application.



.9 Job area to be free of other trades during, and for a period of 24 hours, after floor installation.

.10 Protection of finished floor from damage by subsequent trades is the responsibility of the General Contractor.

.11 Manufacturer's representative must be on job site at start of installation.

1.8 WARRANTY

.1 Furnish a single, written warranty covering both material and workmanship for a period of one (1) full year from date of installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 COLOURS

.1 As selected by Owner’s Representative from manufacturer’s standard colours.

2.2 SEAMLESS QUARTX EPOXY FLOORING AND INTEGRAL COVED BASE

.1 100% solids, 0 VOC, 3.0 mm thick system comprised of a penetrating, two-component epoxy primer, , two-component, epoxy undercoat, brightly coloured, quartz silica aggregate broadcast and a high performance, two-component, clear epoxy sealer. Acceptable manufacturer: Stonhard STONSHIELD HRI. Owner’s representative to select a degree of smoothness/slip resistance for epoxy flooring. Rooms may be wet, but require ability to sanitize so pathogen growth is prevented.

2.3 JOINT SEALANT

.1 Type produced by manufacturer of epoxy wall system for type of service and joint condition indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Substrate: Removal existing finishes. Prepare concrete by mechanical means by using a shot blast machine for removal of bond inhibiting materials such as curing compounds or laitance.

3.2 APPLICATION

For Seamless Epoxy Flooring and Integral Cove Base

.1 General: Apply each component of epoxy flooring system in compliance with manufacturer's directions to produce a uniform monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated, uninterrupted except at divider strips, sawed joints or other types of joints (if any), indicated or required.



.2 Primer: Mix and apply primer over properly prepared substrate with strict adherence to manufacturer's installation procedures and coverage rates. Coordinate timing of primer application with application of troweled mortar to ensure optimum adhesion between epoxy flooring materials and substrate. Manufacturer: Stonhard, STANDARD PRIMER

.3 Mixed material over freshly primed substrate using stainless steel finishing trowels. Manufacturer: Stonhard, STONSHIELD HRI BASE

.4 Undercoat: Remove any surface irregularities by lightly abrading and vacuuming the floor surface. Mix and apply undercoat with strict adherence to manufacturer's installation procedures and coverage rates. Manufacturer: Stonhard, STONSHIELD UNDERCOAT

.5 Broadcast: Immediately broadcast quartz silica aggregate into the undercoat using manufacturer's specially designed spraycaster. Strict adherence to manufacturer's installation procedures and coverage rates is imperative. Manufacturer: Stonhard, STONSHIELD AGGREGATE

.6 Sealer: Remove any surface imperfections by lightly abrading and vacuuming the floor surface. Mix and squeegee apply sealer with strict adherence to manufacturer's installation procedures and coverage rates. Manufacturer: Stonhard, STONSHIELD SEALER

.7 Terminate floors that do not abut against a vertical surface with a 13 - 19mm wide x 6 mm deep chase.

.8 Cove Base: Install cove integral with the floor 100 mm in height. All coves capped with manufacturer's specialty designed cove strip, as per drawings.

.9 Joint Sealant: Install manufacturer's epoxy or urethane sealant compatible with floor finish.


.1 The right is reserved to invoke the following material testing procedure at any time, and any number of times during period of application.

.2 The Owner may engage service of an independent testing laboratory to sample materials being used on the jobsite. Samples of material will be taken, identified and sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

.3 Testing laboratory will perform tests for any of characteristics specified, using applicable testing procedures referenced herein, or if none referenced, in manufacturer's product data.

.4 If test results show materials being used do not comply with specified requirements, Contractor may be directed by Owner to stop work; remove non-complying materials; pay for testing; reapply flooring materials to properly prepared surfaces which had previously been coated with unacceptable materials.


Section 09 96 56 – Epoxy Coatings Page 6 of 6 3.4 CURING, PROTECTION AND CLEANING

.1 Cure epoxy materials in compliance with manufacturer's directions, taking care to prevent contamination during stages of application and prior to completion of curing process. Close area of application for a minimum of 24 hours.

.2 Protect epoxy materials from damage and wear during construction operation. Where temporary covering is required for this purpose, comply with manufacturer's recommendations for protective materials and method of application. General Contractor is responsible for protection and cleaning of surfaces after final coats.

.3 Cleaning: Remove temporary covering and clean epoxy just prior to final inspection. Use cleaning materials and procedures recommended by epoxy manufacturer.

3.5 SCHEDULE

.1 Apply epoxy seamless non-slip floor coating system to entire Level I shop floor, entire floor plate bounded by exterior walls and demising partition with adjacent welding shops.

END OF SECTION

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 31 00 00.01 – Earthwork and Related Work Page 1 of 4

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


.1 ASTM D 698, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400ft-lbf/ft³) (600kN-m/m³).




.3 CSA-A3001, Cementitious Materials for Use in Concrete.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE/REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Shore and brace excavations, protect slopes and banks and perform all work in accordance with Provincial and Municipal regulations whichever is more stringent.

1.3 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

.1 Testing of materials and compaction of backfill and fill will be carried out by testing laboratory designated by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Not later than one week before backfilling or filling, provide to designated testing agency, 23 kg sample of backfill for fill material proposed for use.

.3 Do not begin backfilling or filling operations until material has been approved for use by Owner’s Representative.

.4 Not later than 48 hours before backfilling or filling with approved material, notify Owner’s Representative so that compaction tests can be carried out by designated testing agency.


.1 Before commencing work verify the location of all buried services on and adjacent to the site.

.2 Arrange with appropriate authority for relocation of buried services that interfere with execution of work. Pay costs of relocating services.

.3 Remove obsolete buried services within 2 m of foundations. Cap cut-offs.

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 31 00 00.01 – Earthwork and Related Work Page 2 of 4 PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Granular B-Type I, B-Type II, Select Subgrade to OPSS1010.

.2 Crushed Granular to CCDG14.02.

.3 Unshrinkable fill: proportioned and mixed to provide:

.1 Maximum compressive strength of 0.4 MPa at 28 days.

.2 Maximum Portland cement content of 25 kg/m 3.

.3 Minimum strength of 0.07 MPa at 24 h.

.4 Concrete aggregates: to CSA-A23.1/A23.2,

.5 Cement: to CAN/CSA-A3001, Type GU.

.6 Slump: 160 to 200 mm.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION/PROTECTION

.1 Protect excavations from freezing.

.2 Keep excavations clean, free of standing water, and loose soil.

.3 Where soil is subject to significant volume change due to change in moisture content, cover and protect to Owner’s Representative’s Consultants approval.

.4 Protect natural and man-made features required to remain undisturbed. Unless otherwise indicated or located in an area to be occupied by new construction, protect existing trees from damage.

.5 Protect buried services that are required to remain undisturbed.

3.2 EXCAVATION

.1 Excavate as required to carry out work, in all materials met.

.1 Do not disturb soil or rock below bearing surfaces.

.2 Notify Owner’s Representative when excavations are complete.

.3 If bearings are unsatisfactory, additional excavation will be authorized in writing and paid for as additional work. Excavation taken below depths shown without Owner’s Representative written authorization to be filled with concrete of same strength as for footings at Contractor's expense.

.2 Excavate for slabs and paving to subgrade levels.

.1 In addition, remove all topsoil, organic matter, debris and other loose and harmful matter encountered at subgrade level.

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 31 00 00.01 – Earthwork and Related Work Page 3 of 4 3.3 BACKFILLING

.1 Inspection: do not commence backfilling until fill material and spaces to be filled have been inspected and approved by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Remove snow, ice, construction debris, organic soil and standing water from spaces to be filled.

.3 Lateral support: maintain even levels of backfill around structures as work progresses, to equalize earth pressures.

.4 Compaction of subgrade: compact existing subgrade under walks, paving, and slabs on grade, to same compaction as specified for fill.

.1 Fill excavated areas with selected subgrade material or gravel and sand compacted as specified for fill.

.5 Placing:

.1 Place backfill, fill and basecourse material in 150 mm lifts. Add water as required to achieve specified density.

.6 Compaction: compact each layer of material to following densities for material to ASTM D698,

.1 To underside of basecourses: 95%.

.2 Basecourses: 100%.

.3 Elsewhere: 90%.

.7 Under seeded and sodded areas: use site excavated material to bottom of topsoil except in trenches and within 600 mm of foundations.

.8 Blown rock material, not capable of fine grading, is not acceptable, imported material must be placed on this type of material.

.9 Against foundations (except as applicable to trenches and under slabs and paving): excavated material or imported material with no stones larger than 200 mm diameter within 600 mm of structures.

3.4 GRADING

.1 Grade so that water will drain away from buildings, walls and paved areas, to catch basins and other disposal areas approved by the Owner’s Representative.

.1 Grade to be gradual.

3.5 SHORTAGE AND SURPLUS

.1 Supply all necessary fill to meet backfilling and grading requirements and with minimum and maximum rough grade variance.

.2 Dispose of surplus material off site.

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 31 00 00.01 – Earthwork and Related Work Page 4 of 4 3.6 CLEANING

.1 On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.

END OF SECTION


Section 31 23 33.01 – Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling Page 1 of 7

PART 1 GENERAL



.2 Section 01 35 43 - Environmental Procedures.


.4 Section 02 41 16 – Structure Demolition

.5 Section 31 05 16 – Aggregate Materials.

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 ASTM C117, Standard Test Method for Material Finer Than 0.075 mm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing.

.2 ASTM C136, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.

.3 ASTM D422, Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils.

.4 ASTM D698, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3) (600 kN-m/m3).

.5 ASTM D1557, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3) (2,700 kN-m/m3).

.6 ASTM D4318, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils.


.1 CAN/CGSB-8.1, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Inch Series.

.2 CA/CGSB-8.2, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Metric



.1 CSA-A3001, Cementitious Materials for Use in Concrete. .2 CSA-A23.1/A23.2, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/

Methods of Test and Standard Practices for Concrete.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

.1 Excavation classes: two classes of excavation will be recognized; common excavation and rock excavation.



.1 Rock excavation: excavation of material from solid masses of igneous, sedimentary or metamorphic rock which, prior to its removal, was integral with its parent mass, and boulders or rock fragments having individual volume in excess of 1 m3. Frozen material not classified as rock.

.2 Common excavation: excavation of materials of whatever nature, which are not included under definitions of rock excavation.

.2 Unclassified excavation: excavation of deposits of whatever character encountered in work.

.3 Waste material: excavated material unsuitable for use in work or surplus to requirements.

.4 Borrow material: material obtained from locations outside area to be graded, and required for construction of fill areas or for other portions of work.

.5 Unsuitable materials:

.1 Weak and compressible materials under excavated areas.

.2 Frost susceptible materials under excavated areas.

.3 Frost susceptible materials: .1 Fine grained soils with plasticity index less than 10 when tested to ASTM

D4318, and gradation within limits specified when tested to ASTM D422 and ASTM C136: Sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB-8.1.

Sieve Designation %Passing 2.00 mm 100 0.10 mm 45-100 0.02 mm 10-80 0.005 mm 0-45

.2 Coarse grained soils containing more than 20% by mass passing 0.075

mm sieve.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Inform Owner’s Representative at least 4 weeks prior to commencing work, of proposed source of fill materials and provide access for sampling.

.2 Submit 70 kg samples of type of fill specified including representative samples of excavated material.

.3 Ship samples as directed by Owner’s Representative in tightly closed containers to prevent contamination.


.1 Submit design and supporting data at least 2 weeks prior to commencing work.



.2 Design and supporting data submitted to bear stamp and signature of qualified professional engineer registered or licensed in the province of Newfoundland and Labrador.

.3 Keep design and supporting data on site.

.4 Engage services of qualified professional engineer who is registered or licensed in Province of Newfoundland and Labrador to design and inspect cofferdams, shoring, bracing and underpinning required for work.

.5 Do not use soil material until written report of soil test results are reviewed and approved by Owner’s Representative.


.1 Buried services:

.1 Before commencing work verify location of buried services on and adjacent to site.

.2 Arrange with appropriate authority for relocation of buried services that interfere with execution of work: pay costs of relocating services.

.3 Remove obsolete buried services within 2 m of foundations: cap cut-offs.

.4 Size, depth and location of existing utilities and structures as indicated are for guidance only. Completeness and accuracy are not guaranteed.

.5 Prior to commencing excavation work, notify applicable Owner or authorities having jurisdiction, establish location and state of use of buried utilities and structures. Owners or authorities having jurisdiction to clearly mark such locations to prevent disturbance during work.

.6 Confirm locations of buried utilities by careful test excavations.

.7 Maintain and protect from damage, water, sewer, gas, electric, telephone and other utilities and structures encountered as indicated.

.8 Where utility lines or structures exist in area of excavation, obtain direction of Owner’s Representative before removing or re-routing.

.9 Record location of maintained, re-routed and abandoned underground lines.

.10 Confirm locations of recent excavations adjacent to area of excavation.

.2 Existing buildings and surface features:

.1 Conduct, with Owner’s Representative condition survey of existing buildings, trees and other plants, lawns, fencing, service poles, wires, rail tracks, pavement, survey bench marks and monuments which may be affected by work.

.2 Protect existing buildings and surface features from damage while work is in progress. In event of damage, immediately make repair to approval of Owner’s Representative.

.3 Where required for excavation, cut roots or branches as approved by Owner’s Representative.


Section 31 23 33.01 – Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling Page 4 of 7 PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 .1 Backfill Type 1 and Type 2 fill: properties to Section 31 05 16 - Aggregate Materials and the following requirements:

.1 Crushed, pit run or screened stone, gravel or sand.

.2 Gradations to be within limits specified when tested to ASTM C136 and ASTM C117. Sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB-8.1.

Sieve Designation %Passing Type1 Type2 75 mm - 100 50 mm - - 37.5 mm - - 25 mm 100 - 19 mm 75-100 - 12.5 mm - - 9.5 mm 50-100 - 4.75 mm 30-70 22-85 2.00 mm 20-45 - 0.425 mm 10-25 5-30 0.180 mm - - 0.075 mm 3-8 0-10

.2 Type 3 fill: selected material from excavation or other sources, approved by Owner’s Representative for use intended, unfrozen and free from rocks larger than 75 mm, cinders, ashes, sods, refuse or other deleterious materials.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SITE PREPARATION

.1 Remove obstructions, ice and snow, from surfaces to be excavated within limits indicated.

3.2 PREPARATION/PROTECTION

.1 Protect existing features in accordance with Section 01 56 00 - Temporary Barriers and Enclosures and applicable local regulations.

.2 Keep excavations clean, free of standing water, and loose soil.

.3 Where soil is subject to significant volume change due to change in moisture content, cover and protect to Owner’s Representative’s approval.

.4 Protect natural and man-made features required to remain undisturbed. Unless otherwise indicated or located in an area to be occupied by new construction, protect existing trees from damage. Protect buried services that are required to remain undisturbed.


Section 31 23 33.01 – Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling Page 5 of 7 3.3 STOCKPILING

.1 Stockpile fill materials in areas designated by Owner’s Representative. Stockpile granular materials in manner to prevent segregation.

.2 Protect fill materials from contamination.

3.4 COFFERDAMS, SHORING, BRACING AND UNDERPINNING

.1 Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition by appropriate methods.

.2 Construct temporary works to depths, heights and locations as indicated or approved by Owner’s Representative.

.3 During backfill operation:

.1 Unless otherwise as indicated or as directed by Owner’s Representative remove sheeting and shoring from excavations.

.2 Do not remove bracing until backfilling has reached respective levels of such bracing.

.4 Upon completion of substructure construction:

.1 Remove shoring and bracing.

.2 Remove excess materials from site.

3.5 DEWATERING AND HEAVE PREVENTION

.1 Keep excavations free of water while work is in progress.

.2 Submit for Owner’s Representative's review details of proposed dewatering or heave prevention methods, such as dikes, well points, and sheet pile cut-offs.

.3 Avoid excavation below groundwater table if quick condition or heave is likely to occur. Prevent piping or bottom heave of excavations by groundwater lowering, sheet pile cut-offs, or other means.

.4 Protect open excavations against flooding and damage due to surface run-off.

.5 Dispose of water in accordance with Section 01 35 43 - Environmental Procedures and in manner not detrimental to public and private property, or any portion of work completed or under construction.

.6 Provide settling basins, or other treatment facilities to remove suspended solids or other materials before discharging to storm sewers, water courses or drainage areas.

3.6 EXCAVATION

.1 Excavate to lines, grades, elevations and dimensions as indicated by Owner’s Representative.



.2 Remove concrete, masonry, paving, walks, demolished foundations and rubble and other obstructions encountered during excavation in accordance with Section 02 41 13 - Selective Site Demolition.

.3 Excavation must not interfere with bearing capacity of adjacent foundations.

.4 Do not disturb soil within branch spread of trees or shrubs that are to remain. If excavating through roots, excavate by hand and cut roots with sharp axe or saw.

.5 Keep excavated and stockpiled materials a safe distance away from edge of trench as directed by Owner’s Representative.

.6 Restrict vehicle operations directly adjacent to open trenches.

.7 Dispose of surplus and unsuitable excavated material off site.

.8 Do not obstruct flow of surface drainage or natural watercourses.

.9 Earth bottoms of excavations to be undisturbed soil, level, free from loose, soft or organic matter.

.10 Notify Owner’s Representative when bottom of excavation is reached.

.11 Obtain Owner’s Representative approval of completed excavation.

.12 Remove unsuitable material from trench bottom to extent and depth as directed by Owner’s Representative.

.13 Correct unauthorized over-excavation as follows:

.1 Fill under bearing surfaces and footings with concrete specified for footings.

.2 Fill under other areas with Type 2 fill compacted to not less than 95% of corrected maximum dry density.

.14 Hand trim, make firm and remove loose material and debris from excavations. Where material at bottom of excavation is disturbed, compact foundation soil to density at least equal to undisturbed soil. Clean out rock seams and fill with concrete mortar or grout to approval of Owner’s Representative.

3.7 FILL TYPES AND COMPACTION

.1 Use fill of types as indicated or specified below. Compaction densities are percentages of maximum densities obtained from ASTM D698 corrected maximum dry density.

.1 Exterior side of perimeter walls: use Type 3 fill to subgrade level. Compact to 95%.

.2 Within building area: use Type 2 to underside of base course for floor slabs. Compact to 98%.

.3 Under concrete slabs: provide 150 mm compacted thickness base course of Type 1 fill to underside of slab. Compact base course to 100%.


Section 31 23 33.01 – Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling Page 7 of 7 3.8 BACKFILLING

.1 Vibratory compaction equipment: approved by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Do not proceed with backfilling operations until Owner’s Representative has inspected and approved installations.

.3 Areas to be backfilled to be free from debris, snow, ice, water and frozen ground.

.4 Do not use backfill material which is frozen or contains ice, snow or debris.

.5 Place backfill material in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness up to grades indicated. Compact each layer before placing succeeding layer.

.6 Backfill around installations.

.1 Place bedding and surround material as specified elsewhere.

.2 Do not backfill around or over cast-in-place concrete within 24 hours after placing of concrete.

.3 Place layers simultaneously on both sides of installed work to equalize loading. Difference not to exceed 600 mm.

.4 Where temporary unbalanced earth pressures are liable to develop on walls or other structures.

.1 Permit concrete to cure for minimum 14 days or until it has sufficient strength to withstand earth and compaction pressure, and approval obtained from Owner’s Representative, or

.2 If approved by Owner’s Representative, erect bracing or shoring to counteract unbalance, and leave in place until removal is approved by Owner’s Representative.

3.9 RESTORATION

.1 Upon completion of work, remove waste materials and debris, trim slopes, and correct defects as directed by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Replace topsoil as indicated by Owner’s Representative.

.3 Reinstate pavement and sidewalks distributed by excavation to thickness, structure, and elevation which existed before excavation.

.4 Clean and reinstate areas affected by work as directed by Owner’s Representative.

END OF SECTION


Section 32 11 16.01 – Granular Sub-Base Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Section 31 05 16 - Aggregate Materials.

.2 Section 31 23 33.01 - Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.

.3 Section 32 11 23 - Aggregate Base Courses.

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 ASTM C117, Standard Test Method for Material Finer Than 0.075 mm Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing.

.2 ASTM C136, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.



.5 ASTM D4318, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Unit, Plastic Unit and Plasticity Index of Soils.


.1 CAN/CGSB-8.1, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Inch series.

.2 CAN/CGSB-8.2, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Metric.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Granular sub-base material to Section 31 05 16 - Aggregate Materials and following requirements:

.1 Crushed pit run or screened stone, gravel or sand.

.2 Granulations to be within limits specified when tested to ASTM C136 and ASTM C117 - sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB-8.1. .1 Granulation to:

Sieve Designation % Passing (Base Type 2 ) 100 mm -

75 mm - 50 mm 100 37.5 mm - 25 mm 60-100



19 mm - 12.5 mm 38-70 9.5 mm - 4.75 mm 25-55 2.00 mm 13-42 0.425 mm 5-28 0.180 mm - 0.075 mm 2-10

.3 Other properties as follows:

.1 Liquid limit: to ASTM D4318, maximum 25

.2 Plasticity index: to ASTM D4318, maximum 6

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PLACING

.1 Place granular sub-base after subgrade is inspected and approved by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Construct granular sub-base to depth and grade in areas indicated.

.3 Ensure no frozen material is placed.

.4 Place material only on clean unfrozen surface, free from snow or ice.

.5 Place granular sub-base materials using methods which do not lead to segregation or degradation.

.6 Place material to full width in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness. Owner’s Representative may authorize thicker lifts (layers) if specified compaction can be achieved.

.7 Shape each layer to smooth contour and compact to specified density before succeeding layer is placed.

.8 Remove and replace portion of layer in which material has become segregated during spreading.

3.2 COMPACTION

.1 Compaction equipment to be capable of obtaining required material densities.

.2 Compact to density of not less than 98% corrected maximum dry density ASTM D698.

.3 Shape and roll alternately to obtain smooth, even and uniformly compacted sub-base.

.4 Apply water as necessary during compaction to obtain specified density.



.5 In areas not accessible to rolling equipment, compact to specified density with mechanical tampers approved by Owner’s Representative.

.6 Correct surface irregularities by loosening and adding or removing material until surface is within specified tolerance.

3.3 SITE TOLERANCES

.1 Finished sub-base surface to be within 10 mm of elevation as indicated but not uniformly high or low.

3.4 PROTECTION

.1 Maintain finished sub-base in condition conforming to this section until succeeding base is constructed, or until granular sub-base is accepted by Owner’s Representative.

END OF SECTION

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section – 32 11 23 Aggregate Base Courses Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Section 31 05 16 - Aggregate Materials.

.2 Section 32 11 16.01 - Granular Sub Base.

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 ASTM C117, Standard Test Method for Material Finer Than 0.075 mm Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing.

.2 ASTM C136, Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.

.3 ASTM D136, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregated.

.4 ASTM D698, Stand Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3)(600 N m/m3).


.6 ASTTM D 1883, Standard Test Method of CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of Laboratory Compacted Soil.

.7 ASTM D4318, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Unit, Plastic Unit and Plasticity Index of Soils.


.1 CAN/CGSB-8.1, Sieves, Testing, Woven-Wire, Inch Series.

.2 CAN/CGSB-8.2-, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Metric.


.1 Deliver and stockpile aggregates in accordance with Section 31 05 16 – Aggregate Materials. Stockpile minimum 50% of total aggregate required prior to commencing operation.

.2 Store cement in weathertight bins or silos that provide protection from dampness and easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Granular base: material to Section 31 05 16- Aggregate Materials and the following requirements:


.1 Crushed stone or gravel.

.2 Granulations to be within limits specified when tested to ASTM C136 and ASTM C117. Sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB - 8.1.

.1 Granulation to: Sieve Designation % Passing (Base Type 1) 100 mm -

75 mm - 50 mm - 37.5 mm - 25 mm - 19 mm 100 12.5 mm 70-100 9.5 mm - 4.75 mm 40-70 2.00 mm 23-50 0.425 7-25 0.180 mm - 0.075 mm 3-8

.3 Liquid limit: to ASTM D4318, maximum 25

.4 Plasticity index: to ASTM D4318 maximum 6

.5 Los Angeles degranulation: to ASTM C131. Maximum % loss by weight 45.

.6 Crushed particles: at least 60% of particles by mass within each of following sieve designation ranges to have at least 1 (one) freshly fractured face. Materials to be divided into ranges using methods of ASTM C136.

Passing Retained on 50 mm to 25 mm 25 mm to 19 mm 19 mm to 4.75 mm

.7 Soaked CBR to ASTMD1833, min 100 when compacted to 100% of ASTM D1557.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

.1 Place granular base after granular sub base surface is inspected and approved by Owner’s Representative.

.1 Construct granular base to depth and grade in areas indicated.

.2 Ensure no frozen material is placed.

.3 Place material only on clean unfrozen surface, free from snow and ice.

.4 Place material using methods which do not lead to segregation or degradation of aggregate.


.5 Place material to full width in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness. Owner’s Representative may authorize thicker lifts (layers) if specified compaction can be achieved.

.6 Shape each layer to smooth contour and compact to specified density before succeeding layer is placed.

.7 Remove and replace that portion of layer in which material becomes segregated during spreading.

.2 Compaction Equipment

.1 Compaction equipment to be capable of obtaining required material densities.

.3 Compacting

.1 Compact to density not less than 100% corrected maximum dry density ASTM D698

.2 Shape and roll alternately to obtain smooth, even and uniformly compacted base.

.3 Apply water as necessary during compacting to obtain specified density.

.4 In areas not accessible to rolling equipment, compact to specified density with mechanical tampers approved by Owner’s Representative.

.5 Correct surface irregularities by loosening and adding or removing material until surface is within specified tolerance.

3.2 SITE TOLERANCES

.1 Finished base surface to be within plus or minus 10 mm of established grade and cross section but not uniformly high or low.

3.3 PROTECTION

.1 Maintain finished base in condition conforming to this section until succeeding material is applied or until acceptance by Owner’s Representative.

END OF SECTION

Phase I - Shop Modernization, Manufacturing Technology Centre College of the North Atlantic, Prince Philip Drive Section 32 12 16.02 – Asphalt Paving for Building Sites Page 1 of 7

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Materials and installation for asphalt concrete pavement for car park areas, driveways to buildings, and walks or play areas.




.3 Section 31 05 16 – Aggregate Materials.

.4 Section 31 23 33.01 – Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.

.5 Section 32 16 15 – Concrete Walks, Curbs and Gutters.

.6 Section 32 17 23 – Pavement Marking.

1.3 REFERENCES


.1 CAN/CGSB-8.1, Sieves Testing, Woven Wire, Inch Series.

.2 CAN/CGSB-8.2, Sieves Testing, Woven Wire, Metric.

.3 CAN/CGSB-16.1, Cutback Asphalts for Road Purposes.

.4 CAN/CGSB-16.2, Emulsified Asphalts, Anionic Type, for Road Purposes.

.5 CAN/CGSB-16.3, Asphalt Cements for Road Purposes.

.2 American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM)

.1 ASTM C88, Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulphate or Magnesium Sulphate.

.2 ASTM C117, Standard Test Method for Material Finer Than 0.075 mm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing.

.3 ASTM C123, Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate.

.4 ASTM C127, Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate.

.5 ASTM C128, Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Fine Aggregate.

.6 ASTM C131, Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.

.7 ASTM C136, Standard Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.



.9 ASTM D995, Standard Specification for Requirements Mixing Plants for Hot-Mixed, Hot-Laid Bituminous Paving Mixtures.

.10 ASTM D2419, Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate.

.11 ASTM D3203, Standard Test Method for Percent Air Voids in Compacted Dense and Open Bituminous Paving Mixtures.

.12 ASTM D4318, Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils.

.13 ASTM D4791, Standard Test Method for Flat Particles or Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate.

.3 Asphalt Institute (AI)

.1 Asphalt Institute MS-2-1993 Sixth Edition, Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit asphalt concrete mix design to Owner’s Representative for approval.

.2 Materials to be tested by testing laboratory approved by Owner’s Representative.

.3 Submit test certificates showing suitability of materials at least 4 weeks prior to commencing work.

.4 Inform Owner’s Representative of proposed source of aggregates and provide access for sampling at least 4 weeks prior to commencing work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Granular base and sub-base material: to Sections 32 11 16.01 – Granular Sub-base and 32 11 23 – Aggregate Base Course and following requirements:

.1 Crushed or screened stone, gravel or sand.

.2 Gradations: within limits specified when tested to ASTM C136 and ASTM C117. Sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB-8.1.

.3 Granular base aggregates: .1 Crushed particles: at least 50 % of particles by mass retained on 4.75

mm sieve to have at least 1 freshly fractured face.

.2 Asphalt concrete aggregates:

.1 Coarse aggregate is aggregate retained on 4.75 mm sieve and fine aggregate is aggregate passing 4.75 mm sieve when tested to ASTM C117.


.2 When dryer drum plant or plant without hot screening is used, process fine aggregate through 4.75 mm sieve and stockpile separately from coarse aggregate.

.3 Separate stock piles for coarse and fine aggregate are not required for sheet asphalt.

.4 Do not use aggregates having known polishing characteristics in mixes for surface courses.

.5 Aggregate: material to Section 31 05 16 – Aggregate Materials and following requirements:

.1 Crushed stone or gravel.

.2 Gradations to be within limits specified when tested to ASTM C136 and ASTM C117, Latest Edition. Sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB-8.1, Latest Edition.

Sieve Designation % Passing – Sheet Asphalt

200 mm -

75 mm -

50 mm -

38.1 mm -

25 mm -

19.0 mm -

12.5 100

9.5 mm 100

4.75 mm 85-100

2.00 mm 80-95

0.425 mm 40-70

0.180 mm 10-35

0.075 mm 4-14

.3 Sand equivalent: to ASTM D2419, Minimum 50.

.4 Magnesium Sulphate soundness: to ASTM C88. Max % loss by weight: coarse aggregate 12, fine aggregate 16.

.5 Los Angeles Degradation: to ASTM C131, Max % loss by weight: coarse aggregate, 35.

.6 Absorption: to ASTM C127, Max % by weight: coarse aggregate, 1.75.

.7 Lightweight particles: to ASTM C123, Max % by mass, with less than 1.95. Relative density (formally Specific Gravity): 1.5.

.8 Flat and elongated particles: to ASTM D4791, (with length to thickness ratio greater than 5): Max % by weight: coarse aggregate, 15.

.9 Crushed particles: at least 60 % of particles by mass within each of following sieve designation ranges to have at least 1 freshly fractured face. Material to be divided into ranges using methods of ASTM C136,


Passing Retained on 19 mm to 9.5 mm 9.5 mm to 4.75 mm

.10 Regardless of compliance with specified physical requirements, fine aggregates may be accepted or rejected on basis of past field performance.

.3 Mineral filler for asphalt concrete:

.1 Finely ground particles of limestone, hydrated lime, Portland cement or other approved non-plastic mineral matter, thoroughly dry and free from lumps.

.2 Add mineral filler when necessary to meet job mix aggregate gradation or as directed by Owner’s Representative to improve mix properties.

.4 Asphalt cement: to CAN/CGSB-16.3, grade 120-150.

.5 Asphalt prime: to CAN/CGSB-16.2, SS-1.

.6 Sand blotter: clean granular material passing 4.75 mm sieve and free from organic matter or other deleterious materials.

.7 Asphalt tack coat: to CAN/CGSB-16.2, grade SS-1.

2.2 MIX DESIGN

.1 Job mix formula to be approved by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Design of mix: by Marshall method to requirements below:

.1 Compaction blows on each face of test specimens: 50.

.2 Mix physical requirements:

Property Asphalt / Concrete Marshall Stability at 60˚kN minimum 5.5 Flow Value, mm. 2 - 4 Air Voids in Mixture, % 3 - 5 Voids in Mineral Aggregate, % minimum 15 Index of Retained Stability, % minimum 75 .3 Measure physical requirements as follows:

.1 Marshall load and flow value.

.2 Compute void properties on basis of bulk specific gravity of aggregate to ASTM C127, and ASTM C128. Make allowance for volume of asphalt absorbed into pores of aggregate.

.3 Air voids: to ASTM D3203.

.4 Voids in mineral aggregate: to Asphalt Institute, MS-2 chapter 4.


.5 Index of Retained Stability. .4 Do not change job-mix without prior approval of Owner’s Representative.

When change in material source proposed, new job-mix formula to be approved by Owner’s Representative.

.5 Return plant dust collected during processing to mix in quantities acceptable to Owner’s Representative.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

.1 Pavers: mechanical grade controlled self-powered pavers capable of spreading mix within specified tolerances, true to line, grade and crown indicated.

.2 Rollers: sufficient number of rollers of type and weight to obtain specified density of compacted mix.

.3 Vibratory rollers for parking lots and driveway:

.1 Minimum drum diameter: 750mm.

.2 Maximum amplitude of vibration (machine setting): 0.5mm for lifts less than 40mm thick.

.4 Haul trucks: of sufficient number and of adequate size, speed and condition to ensure orderly and continuous operation and as follows:

.1 Boxes with tight metal bottoms.

.2 Covers of sufficient size and weight to completely cover and protect asphalt mix when truck fully loaded.

.3 In cool weather or for long hauls, insulate entire contact area of each truck box.

.5 Suitable hand tools.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SUBGRADE SURFACE PREPARATION AND INSPECTION

.1 Verify grades of subgrade drains and other items set in paving area for conformity with elevations and sections before placing granular base material.

.2 Obtain approval of subgrade by Owner’s Representative before placing granular base.

3.2 GRANULAR BASE AND GRANULAR SUBBASE

.1 Place granular base and sub-base material on clean unfrozen surface, free from snow and ice.

.2 Place granular base and sub-base to compacted thicknesses as indicated. Do not place frozen material.


.3 Place in layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness. Compact to density not less than 100% and 98 % maximum dry density respectively in accordance with ASTM D698.

.4 Finished base surface to be within 10 mm of specified grade, but not uniformly high or low.

3.3 ASPHALT PRIME

.1 Emulsified asphalt:

.1 Dilute asphalt emulsion with clean water at 1:1 ratio for application. Mix thoroughly by pumping or other method approved by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Apply diluted asphalt emulsion at rate directed by Owner’s Representative but do not exceed 5 L/m2.

.3 Apply on damp surface unless otherwise directed by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Do not apply prime when air temperature is less than 5˚C or when rain is forecast within 2 hours.

.3 If asphalt prime fails to set within 24 hours, spread sand blotter material in amounts required to absorb excess material. Sweep and remove excess blotter material.

3.4 PLANT AND MIXING REQUIREMENTS

.1 To ASTM D995.

3.5 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING

.1 Obtain approval of primer from Owner’s Representative before placing asphalt mix.

.2 Place asphalt mix only when base or previous course is dry and air temperature is above 5˚C.

.3 Place asphalt concrete in compacted layers not exceeding 50 mm.

.4 Minimum 135˚C mix temperature required when spreading.

.5 Maximum 160˚C mix temperature permitted at any time.

.6 Compact each course with roller as soon as it can support roller weight without undue cracking or displacement.

.7 Compact parking lot and driveway asphalt concrete to density not less than 95 % of density obtained with Marshall specimens prepared in accordance with ASTM D1559, ion from samples of mix being used. Roll until roller marks are eliminated.

.8 Keep roller speed slow enough to avoid mix displacement and do not stop roller on fresh pavement.


.9 Moisten roller wheels with water to prevent pick up of material.

.10 Compact mix with hot tampers or other equipment approved by Owner’s Representative in areas inaccessible to roller.

.11 Finish surface to be within 10 mm of design elevation and with no irregularities greater than 10 mm in 4.5 m.

.12 Repair areas showing checking, rippling or segregation as directed by Owner’s Representative.

3.6 JOINTS

.1 Remove surplus material from surface of previously laid strip. Do not deposit on surface of freshly laid strip.

.2 Paint contact surfaces of existing structures such as manholes, curbs or gutters with bituminous material prior to placing adjacent pavement.

.3 For cold joints, cut back to full depth vertical face and tack face with hot asphalt.

.4 For longitudinal joints, overlap previously laid strip with spreader by 25 to 50 mm.

3.7 TESTING

.1 Inspection and testing of asphalt pavement will be carried out by designated testing laboratory. Refer to Sections 01 29 83 – Payment Procedures for Testing Laboratory Services and Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.

.2 Costs of tests will be paid under Section 01 21 00 – Allowances.

3.8 PROTECTION

.1 Keep vehicular traffic off newly paved areas until paving surface temperature has cooled below 38˚C. Do not permit stationary loads on pavement until 24 hours after placement.

.2 Provide access to buildings as required. Arrange paving schedule so as not to interfere with normal use of premises.

END OF SECTION

APPENDIX “A”